Manual Us

P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE Healthcare
(OCTOBER 3, 2012) PROV730_COVER.FM
Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08)

Service Manual
Voluson 730Pro/ProV systems with Serial number A34001 - A34500, A35001 Voluson 730Pro/ProV systems with Software version SW 5.0.x or higher (BT05) Voluson 730Pro/ProV systems with Software version SW 5.4.x onwards (BT08)
Part Number: KTI105991
Revision: 5
0123
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5
VOLUSON 730PRO/PROV (BT05, BT08) SERVICE MANUAL
Important Precautions
TRANSLATION POLICY
THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY. IF A CUSTOMERS SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMERS RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TRANSLATION SERVICES. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD. FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL OR OTHER HAZARDS. CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE NEST DISPONIBLE QUEN ANGLAIS. SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE LANGUE QUE LANGLAIS, CEST AU CLIENT QUIL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE TRADUIRE. NE PAS TENTER DINTERVENTION SUR LES QUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE MANUEL SERVICE NA PAS T CONSULT ET COMPRIS. LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRANER CHEZ LE TECHNICIEN, LOPRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES DES DANGERS LECTRIQUES, MCANIQUES OU AUTRES. DIESES KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER SPRACHE. FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENTIGT, IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE BERSETZUNG ZU SORGEN. VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESES KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDEN WURDE. WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE GEFAHREN KOMMEN.
WARNING
(EN)
AVERTISSEMENT
(FR)
WARNUNG (DE)
AVISO
(ES)
ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SLO EXISTE EN INGLS. SI ALGN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEHC SOLICITA UN IDIOMA QUE NO SEA EL INGLS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN SERVICIO DE TRADUCCIN. NO SE DEBER DAR SERVICIO TCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO. LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELCTRICAS, MECNICAS O DE OTRA NATURALEZA. ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA S SE ENCONTRA DISPONVEL EM INGLS. SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIO DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA, QUE NO A GEHC, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, DA RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIOS DE TRADUO. NO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA. O NO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANA DO TCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A CHOQUES ELTRICOS, MECNICOS OU OUTROS. ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTNCIA EST DISPONVEL APENAS EM INGLS. SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIO DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA, QUE NO A GEHC, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, DA RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIOS DE TRADUO. NO TENTE EFECTUAR REPARAES NO EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E COMPREENDIDO PREVIAMENTE ESTE MANUAL. A INOBSERVNCIA DESTE AVISO PODE RESULTAR EM FERIMENTOS NO TCNICO DE ASSISTNCIA, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE EM CONSEQUNCIA DE CHOQUE ELCTRICO, PERIGOS DE ORIGEM MECNICA, BEM COMO DE OUTROS TIPOS. IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN INGLESE. SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEHC RICHIEDE IL MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE TENUTO A PROVVEDERE DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE. SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELLAPPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL CONTENUTO. NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALLADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE, ALLUTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER FOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.
-
ATENO
(PT-Br)
AVISO
(PT-pt)
AVVERTENZA
(IT)
ii
HOIATUS
(ET)
KESOLEV TEENINDUSJUHEND ON SAADAVAL AINULT INGLISE KEELES. KUI KLIENDITEENINDUSE OSUTAJA NUAB JUHENDIT INGLISE KEELEST ERINEVAS KEELES, VASTUTAB KLIENT TLKETEENUSE OSUTAMISE EEST. RGE RITAGE SEADMEID TEENINDADA ENNE EELNEVALT KESOLEVA TEENINDUSJUHENDIGA TUTVUMIST JA SELLEST ARU SAAMIST. KESOLEVA HOIATUSE EIRAMINE VIB PHJUSTADA TEENUSEOSUTAJA, OPERAATORI VI PATSIENDI VIGASTAMIST ELEKTRILGI, MEHAANILISE VI MUU OHU TAGAJRJEL. TM HUOLTO-OHJE ON SAATAVILLA VAIN ENGLANNIKSI. JOS ASIAKKAAN PALVELUNTARJOAJA VAATII MUUTA KUIN ENGLANNINKIELIST MATERIAALIA, TARVITTAVAN KNNKSEN HANKKIMINEN ON ASIAKKAAN VASTUULLA. L YRIT KORJATA LAITTEISTOA ENNEN KUIN OLET VARMASTI LUKENUT JA YMMRTNYT TMN HUOLTO-OHJEEN. MIKLI TT VAROITUSTA EI NOUDATETA, SEURAUKSENA VOI OLLA PALVELUNTARJOAJAN, LAITTEISTON KYTTJN TAI POTILAAN VAHINGOITTUMINEN SHKISKUN, MEKAANISEN VIAN TAI MUUN VAARATILANTEEN VUOKSI. . , . . , , , . EZEN KARBANTARTSI KZIKNYV KIZRLAG ANGOL NYELVEN RHET EL. HA A VEV SZOLGLTATJA ANGOLTL ELTR NYELVRE TART IGNYT, AKKOR A VEV FELELSSGE A FORDTS ELKSZTTETSE. NE PRBLJA ELKEZDENI HASZNLNI A BERENDEZST, AMG A KARBANTARTSI KZIKNYVBEN LERTAKAT NEM RTELMEZTK. EZEN FIGYELMEZTETS FIGYELMEN KVL HAGYSA A SZOLGLTAT, MKDTET VAGY A BETEG RAMTS, MECHANIKAI VAGY EGYB VESZLYHELYZET MIATTI SRLST EREDMNYEZHETI.
VAROITUS
(FI)
(EL)
FIGYELMEZTETS (HU)
iii
VIVRUN (IS)
ESSI JNUSTUHANDBK ER EINGNGU FANLEG ENSKU. EF JNUSTUAILI VISKIPTAMANNS ARFNAST ANNARS TUNGUMLS EN ENSKU, ER A BYRG VISKIPTAMANNS A TVEGA INGU. REYNI EKKI A JNUSTA TKI NEMA EFTIR A HAFA SKOA OG SKILI ESSA JNUSTUHANDBK. EF EKKI ER FARI A ESSARI VIVRUN GETUR A VALDI MEISLUM JNUSTUVEITANDA, STJRNANDA EA SJKLINGS VEGNA RAFLOSTS, VLRNNAR EA ANNARRAR HTTU. TENTO SERVISN NVOD EXISTUJE POUZE V ANGLICKM JAZYCE. V PPAD, E POSKYTOVATEL SLUEB ZKAZNKM POTEBUJE NVOD V JINM JAZYCE, JE ZAJITN PEKLADU DO ODPOVDAJCHO JAZYKA KOLEM ZKAZNKA. NEPROVDJTE DRBU TOHOTO ZAZEN, ANI BYSTE SI PEETLI TENTO SERVISN NVOD A POCHOPILI JEHO OBSAH. V PPAD NEDODROVN TTO VSTRAHY ME DOJT RAZU ELEKTRICKM PROUDEM PRACOVNKA POSKYTOVATELE SLUEB, OBSLUNHO PERSONLU NEBO PACIENT VLIVEM ELEKTRICKHOP PROUDU, RESPEKTIVE VLIVEM K RIZIKU MECHANICKHO POKOZEN NEBO JINMU RIZIKU. DENNE SERVICEMANUAL FINDES KUN P ENGELSK. HVIS EN KUNDES TEKNIKER HAR BRUG FOR ET ANDET SPROG END ENGELSK, ER DET KUNDENS ANSVAR AT SRGE FOR OVERSTTELSE. FORSG IKKE AT SERVICERE UDSTYRET MEDMINDRE DENNE SERVICEMANUAL ER BLEVET LST OG FORSTET. MANGLENDE OVERHOLDELSE AF DENNE ADVARSEL KAN MEDFRE SKADE P GRUND AF ELEKTRISK, MEKANISK ELLER ANDEN FARE FOR TEKNIKEREN, OPERATREN ELLER PATIENTEN. DEZE ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING IS ENKEL IN HET ENGELS VERKRIJGBAAR. ALS HET ONDERHOUDSPERSONEEL EEN ANDERE TAAL VEREIST, DAN IS DE KLANT VERANTWOORDELIJK VOOR DE VERTALING ERVAN. PROBEER DE APPARATUUR NIET TE ONDERHOUDEN VOORDAT DEZE ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING WERD GERAADPLEEGD EN BEGREPEN IS. INDIEN DEZE WAARSCHUWING NIET WORDT OPGEVOLGD, ZOU HET ONDERHOUDSPERSONEEL, DE OPERATOR OF EEN PATINT GEWOND KUNNEN RAKEN ALS GEVOLG VAN EEN ELEKTRISCHE SCHOK, MECHANISCHE OF ANDERE GEVAREN.
VSTRAHA (CS)
ADVARSEL
(DA)
WAARSCHUWING (NL)
iv
BRDINJUMS (LV)
APKALPES ROKASGRMATA IR PIEEJAMA TIKAI ANGU VALOD. JA KLIENTA APKALPES SNIEDZJAM NEPIECIEAMA INFORMCIJA CIT VALOD, NEVIS ANGU, KLIENTA PIENKUMS IR NODROINT TULKOANU. NEVEICIET APRKOJUMA APKALPI BEZ APKALPES ROKASGRMATAS IZLASANAS UN SAPRAANAS. BRDINJUMA NEIEVROANA VAR RADT ELEKTRISKS STRVAS TRIECIENA, MEHNISKU VAI CITU RISKU IZRAISTU TRAUMU APKALPES SNIEDZJAM, OPERATORAM VAI PACIENTAM. IS EKSPLOATAVIMO VADOVAS YRA ILEISTAS TIK ANGL KALBA. JEI KLIENTO PASLAUG TEIKJUI REIKIA VADOVO KITA KALBA NE ANGL, VERTIMU PASIRPINTI TURI KLIENTAS. NEMGINKITE ATLIKTI RANGOS TECHNINS PRIEIROS DARB, NEBENT VADOVAUTUMTS IUO EKSPLOATAVIMO VADOVU IR J SUPRASTUMTE NEPAISANT IO PERSPJIMO, PASLAUG TEIKJAS, OPERATORIUS AR PACIENTAS GALI BTI SUEISTAS DL ELEKTROS SMGIO, MECHANINI AR KIT PAVOJ. DENNE SERVICEHNDBOKEN FINNES BARE P ENGELSK. HVIS KUNDENS SERVICELEVERANDR TRENGER ET ANNET SPRK, ER DET KUNDENS ANSVAR SRGE FOR OVERSETTELSE. IKKE FORSK REPARERE UTSTYRET UTEN AT DENNE SERVICEHNDBOKEN ER LEST OG FORSTTT. MANGLENDE HENSYN TIL DENNE ADVARSELEN KAN FRE TIL AT SERVICELEVERANDREN, OPERATREN ELLER PASIENTEN SKADES P GRUNN AV ELEKTRISK STT, MEKANISKE ELLER ANDRE FARER. NINIEJSZY PODRCZNIK SERWISOWY DOSTPNY JEST JEDYNIE W JZYKU ANGIELSKIM. JELI FIRMA WIADCZCA KLIENTOWI USUGI SERWISOWE WYMAGA UDOSTPNIENIA PODRCZNIKA W JZYKU INNYM NI ANGIELSKI, OBOWIZEK ZAPEWNIENIA STOSOWNEGO TUMACZENIA SPOCZYWA NA KLIENCIE. NIE PRBOWA SERWISOWA NINIEJSZEGO SPRZTU BEZ UPRZEDNIEGO ZAPOZNANIA SI Z PODRCZNIKIEM SERWISOWYM. NIEZASTOSOWANIE SI DO TEGO OSTRZEENIA MOE GROZI OBRAENIAMI CIAA SERWISANTA, OPERATORA LUB PACJENTA W WYNIKU PORAENIA PRDEM, URAZU MECHANICZNEGO LUB INNEGO RODZAJU ZAGROE.
SPJIMAS (LT)
ADVARSEL (NO)
OSTRZEENIE (PL)
ATENIE (RO)
ACEST MANUAL DE SERVICE ESTE DISPONIBIL NUMAI N LIMBA ENGLEZ. DAC UN FURNIZOR DE SERVICII PENTRU CLIENI NECESIT O ALT LIMB DECT CEA ENGLEZ, ESTE DE DATORIA CLIENTULUI S FURNIZEZE O TRADUCERE. NU NCERCAI S REPARAI ECHIPAMENTUL DECT ULTERIOR CONSULTRII I NELEGERII ACESTUI MANUAL DE SERVICE. IGNORAREA ACESTUI AVERTISMENT AR PUTEA DUCE LA RNIREA DEPANATORULUI, OPERATORULUI SAU PACIENTULUI N URMA PERICOLELOR DE ELECTROCUTARE, MECANICE SAU DE ALT NATUR. . , . . , , , . . , , . , , . , , . OVAJ PRIRUNIK ZA SERVISIRANJE DOSTUPAN JE SAMO NA ENGLESKOM JEZIKU. AKO KLIJENTOV SERVISER ZAHTEVA JEZIK KOJI NIJE ENGLESKI, ODGOVORNOST JE NA KLIJENTU DA PRUI USLUGE PREVOENJA. NEMOJTE POKUAVATI DA SERVISIRATE OPREMU AKO NISTE PROITALI I RAZUMELI PRIRUNIK ZA SERVISIRANJE. AKO NE POTUJETE OVO UPOZORENJE, MOE DOI DO POVREIVANJA SERVISERA, OPERATERA ILI PACIJENTA UZROKOVANOG ELEKTRINIM UDAROM, MEHANIKIM I DRUGIM OPASNOSTIMA.
! (RU)
(BG)
UPOZORENJE (SR)
vi
OPOZORILO (SL)
TA SERVISNI PRIRONIK JE NA VOLJO SAMO V ANGLEINI. E PONUDNIK SERVISNIH STORITEV ZA STRANKO POTREBUJE NAVODILA V DRUGEM JEZIKU, JE ZA PREVOD ODGOVORNA STRANKA SAMA. NE POSKUAJTE SERVISIRATI OPREME, NE DA BI PREJ PREBRALI IN RAZUMELI SERVISNI PRIRONIK. E TEGA OPOZORILA NE UPOTEVATE, OBSTAJA NEVARNOST ELEKTRINEGA UDARA, MEHANSKIH ALI DRUGIH NEVARNOSTI IN POSLEDINIH POKODB PONUDNIKA SERVISNIH STORITEV, UPORABNIKA OPREME ALI PACIENTA. OVAJ SERVISNI PRIRUNIK DOSTUPAN JE SAMO NA ENGLESKOM JEZIKU. AKO KLIJENTOV SERVISER ZAHTIJEVA JEZIK KOJI NIJE ENGLESKI, ODGOVORNOST KLIJENTA JE PRUITI USLUGE PREVOENJA. NEMOJTE POKUAVATI SERVISIRATI OPREMU AKO NISTE PROITALI I RAZUMJELI SERVISNI PRIRUNIK. AKO NE POTUJETE OVO UPOZORENJE, MOE DOI DO OZLJEDE SERVISERA, OPERATERA ILI PACIJENTA PROUZROENE STRUJNIM UDAROM, MEHANIKIM I DRUGIM OPASNOSTIMA. TTO SERVISN PRRUKA JE K DISPOZCII LEN V ANGLITINE. AK ZKAZNKOV POSKYTOVATE SLUIEB VYADUJE IN JAZYK AKO ANGLITINU, POSKYTNUTIE PREKLADATESKCH SLUIEB JE ZODPOVEDNOSOU ZKAZNKA. NEPOKAJTE SA VYKONVA SERVIS ZARIADENIA SKR, AKO SI NEPRETATE SERVISN PRRUKU A NEPOROZUMIETE JEJ. ZANEDBANIE TOHTO UPOZORNENIA ME VYSTI DO ZRANENIA POSKYTOVATEA SLUIEB, OBSLUHUJCEJ OSOBY ALEBO PACIENTA ELEKTRICKM PRDOM, PRPADNE DO MECHANICKHO ALEBO INHO NEBEZPEENSTVA. DEN HR SERVICEHANDBOKEN FINNS BARA TILLGNGLIG P ENGELSKA. OM EN KUNDS SERVICETEKNIKER HAR BEHOV AV ETT ANNAT SPRK N ENGELSKA ANSVARAR KUNDEN FR ATT TILLHANDAHLLA VERSTTNINGSTJNSTER. FRSK INTE UTFRA SERVICE P UTRUSTNINGEN OM DU INTE HAR LST OCH FRSTR DEN HR SERVICEHANDBOKEN. OM DU INTE TAR HNSYN TILL DEN HR VARNINGEN KAN DET RESULTERA I SKADOR P SERVICETEKNIKERN, OPERATREN ELLER PATIENTEN TILL FLJD AV ELEKTRISKA STTAR, MEKANISKA FAROR ELLER ANDRA FAROR.
UPOZORENJE (HR)
UPOZORNENIE (SK)
VARNING (SV)
vii
DKKAT (TR)
BU SERVS KILAVUZU YALNIZCA NGLZCE OLARAK SALANMITIR. EER MTER TEKNSYEN KILAVUZUN NGLZCE DIINDAK BR DLDE OLMASINI STERSE, KILAVUZU TERCME ETTRMEK MTERNN SORUMLULUUNDADIR. SERVS KILAVUZUNU OKUYUP ANLAMADAN EKPMANLARA MDAHALE ETMEYNZ. BU UYARININ GZ ARDI EDLMES, ELEKTRK ARPMASI YA DA MEKANK VEYA DER TRDEN KAZALAR SONUCUNDA TEKNSYENN, OPERATRN YA DA HASTANIN YARALANMASINA YOL AABLR.
(JA)
Traditional Chinese
viii
(ZH-CN)
(KO)
ix
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION - FOR USA ONLY

All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent write Damage In Shipment on ALL copies of the freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is accepted or signed for by a GE representative or hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period.
CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT - FOR USA ONLY

All electrical Installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations and testing shall be performed by qualified GE Healthcare personnel. In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GEs electrical work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes. The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GEs field engineers, personnel of third-party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.
OMISSIONS & ERRORS

If there are any omissions, errors or suggestions for improving this documentation, please contact the GE Healthcare Global Documentation Group with specific information listing the system type, manual title, part number, revision number, page number and suggestion details. Mail the information to: GE Healthcare Austria GmbH & Co. OG Tiefenbach 15 A-4871 Zipf Austria - Europe Attn.: Service Documentation GE Healthcare employees should contact the product's Lead Service Integrator (LSI) to report service documentation issues. DO NOT use TrackWise for this purpose. The LSI will then use the internal problem reporting tool to communicate these issues to the writer. SERVICE SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
DANGER
!! DANGER:
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING.
Use all Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, safety shoes, safety glasses, and kneeling pad, to reduce the risk of injury.
For a complete review of all safety requirements, see the Chapter 1, Safety Considerations section in the Service Manual.
WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
LEGAL NOTES
The contents of this publication may not be copied or duplicated in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written permission of GE Medical Systems. GE Healthcare may revise this publication from time to time without written notice.
TRADEMARKS
All products and their name brands are trademarks of their respective holders.
COPYRIGHTS
All Material Copyright 2004 and 2012 by General Electric Inc. All Rights Reserved.
xi
Revision History
Revision
1 2 3 4 5
Date
July 01, 2005 Jannuary 31, 2007 November, 2007 June, 2009 September, 2012
Reason for change

Initial Release (from Software Version 5.0.x onwards) Special regulation for Korea Implementation of new parts, release of BT08 software version (SW 5.4.x) Implementation of new parts, release of BT08 software version (SW5.4.1 or higher), Implementation of Appendix A (Acoustic Output & Index Determination Tables) General Update
List of Effected Pages
Pages
Title Page Important Precautions (incl. Legal Notes) pages i to xi Rev History/LOEP page xii Table of Contents pages xiii to xxxii Chapter 1 - Introduction pages 1-1 to 1-16 Chapter 2 - Site Preparation pages 2-1 to 2-8
Revision
5
Pages
Chapter 3 - Setup Instructions pages 3-1 to 3-74
Revision
Pages
Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts pages 9-1 to 9-40 Chapter 10 - Care & Maintenance pages 10-1 to 10-24 Chapter A - Acoustic Output & Index Determination Tables pages A-1 to A-106 Index pages I to VIII Back Cover
Revision
Chapter 4 - Functional Checks pages 4-1 to 4-46 Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory) pages 5-1 to 5-62 Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments pages 6-1 to 6-10 Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/ Troubleshooting pages 7-1 to 7-30 Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures pages 8-1 to 8-28
xii
VOLUSON I / VOLUSON E (BT05, BT08) SERVICE MANUAL
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1 Introduction
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of Chapter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical Users of the Basic Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voluson 730Pro/ProV Models Covered by this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System History - Hardware and Software Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of Operator Manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Important Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conventions Used in Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Hazard Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Labels and Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Human Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical Safety ......................................... Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safe Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary Devices Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Labels Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dangerous Procedure Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What is EMC? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 1-1 1-1 1-2 1-2 1-3 1-3 1-4 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-9 1-9 1-9 1-9 1 - 10 1 - 10 1 - 10 1 - 11 1 - 12 1 - 13 1 - 13 1 - 13 1 - 14 1 - 14 1 - 14 1 - 14
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 15 Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 15 System Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 15
xiii
Table of Contents
VOLUSON 730PRO/PROV SERVICE MANUAL
CHAPTER 2 Site Preparation

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1 General Console Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1 Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1 Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2 Voluson 730Pro/ProV Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2 Inrush Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2 Site Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2 Site Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2 Main Power Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2 EMI Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3 Probe Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 4 Time and Manpower Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 4 System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 4 Physical Dimensions of Voluson 730Pro/ProV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 4 Weight without Monitor and Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 4 Acoustic Noise Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 4 Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 4 Facility Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5 Purchaser Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5 Mandatory Site Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6 Site Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6 Recommended Ultrasound Room Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7 Networking Pre-installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 8 Purpose of the DICOM Network Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 8 DICOM Option Pre-installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 8
xiv
CHAPTER 3 Setup Instructions

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1 The Purpose of Chapter 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1 Set Up Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Average Installation Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Acclimation Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Panel Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake Pedal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Reminders ....................................... 3-2 3-2 3-2 3-3 3-3 3-3 3-4
Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 5 Preparing for Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify Customer Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Voltage Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMI Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection of Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foot Switch Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ECG-preamplifier Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Global Modem Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-VHS Video Recorder Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mitsubishi HS-MD3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sony SVO-9500MD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD Recorder (DVR) Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjustment of the DVD Recorder Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing TV System (Video Format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Region Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B/W Video Printer Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sony UP-D897 (digital) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Printer Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Color Printer Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bluetooth Printer Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 5600/5900 Series ................................. Canon Pixma MP600/MP610 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Worldwide 19 secondary Patient Monitor kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-
3-7 3-7 3-8 3-8 3-9 3-9 3 - 11 3 - 11 3 - 11 3 - 12 3 - 13 3 - 13 3 - 14 3 - 15 3 - 16 3 - 16 3 - 18 3 - 19 3 - 20 3 - 21 3 - 22 3 - 23 3 - 23 3 - 24 3 - 25 3 - 25 3 - 26

xv
Monitor bracket mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 26 Sandwichplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 26 Wall Bracket Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 27 Mounting and Locking Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 28 Mounting the Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 29 Rewiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 30 Final check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 31 External USB-Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 32 External USB Devices - Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 32 External USB Devices - Disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 32 Completing the Set Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 34 Connecting the Unit to a Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 34 Power On / Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 34 Scanner Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 34 Back-end Processor Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 35 Power Off/ Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 36 Back-end Processor Power Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 36 Scanner Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 36 Transducer Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 37 Printer Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 38 Installing Line Printer HP 990cxi or HP 995c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 39 Install the HP 990cxi or HP 995c printer software/driver . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 39 Installing Digital Color Printer Sony UP-D23MD or UP-D25MD . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 41 Install the UP-D23MD / UP-D25MD printer software/driver . . . . . . . 3 - 41 Installing Digital Black & White Printer Sony UP-D897 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 43 Install the UP-D897 printer software/driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 43 Installing Mitsubishi B&W P95 and Color Printer CP30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 45 Printer Installation manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 47 Adjustment of Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 52 HP 990cxi / HP 995c- Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 53 UP-D23MD / UP-D25MD - Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 54 Mitsubishi Printer - Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 56 Color Printer CP30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 56 B&W Printer P95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 56 UP-D897 - Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 57 Bluetooth Deskjet - Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 58 Remote Control Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 59 System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 60 System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 60 To invoke the Setup procedure: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 60 How to enter Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 61 How to enter Hospital Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 61 How to change Language and the EUM Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 61
xvi -
How to activate Screen Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to change Video Norm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to change the Keyboard Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Board Optional Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External I/O Connection Panel (GES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External I/O Pin Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 - 62 3 - 63 3 - 63 3 - 64 3 - 65 3 - 66 3 - 67
Available Probes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 68 Software/Option Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 68 Network IP Address Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 69 Map Network Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 70 Connectivity Setup Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 71 Paperwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 73 Product Locator Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 73 User Manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 73
xvii
CHAPTER 4 Functional Checks

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1 Required Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1 General Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2 Power On / Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2 Scanner Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2 Power Off / Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3 Scanner Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3 System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4 Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4 Menu Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5 Monitor Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6 Functional Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 7 2D Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8 M Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11 MCFM Mode Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12 MTD Mode Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12 Spectral Doppler Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 13 Color Doppler Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 15 Volume Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 17 Pre-Volume Mode Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 17 Functions after the 3D Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 19 Sub Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21 Using Cine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 22 Activating Cine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 22 Cine-Split Function (Multiple Format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 22 Activating 2D Auto Cine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 22 Spectral Doppler- or M Cine Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 22 Activating 3D Rotation Cine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 22 Activating Volume Cine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 22 Activating 4D Cine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 22 Generic Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 23 Distance and Tissue Depth Measurements (2D and M Mode) . . . . . 4 - 23 Circumference/Area Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 24 Volume Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 24 Multiplane Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 24 Measurements in Spectral Doppler Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 25 Auto Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 25 Manual Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 25
xviii -
Heart Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Worksheet (Report) Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probe/Connectors Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activating the probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deactivating the probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnecting the probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image Management (Sonoview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the MOD (Magneto-Optical Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Formatting Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting the Write Speed of the DVD/CD Recorder . . . . . . Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images . . . . . . . . . . . Save User Settings Only (Application Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load User Settings Only (Application Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings) . . . . . . Load Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings) . . . . . Delete Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings) . . . . . Archiving Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 - 25 4 - 26 4 - 26 4 - 27 4 - 27 4 - 27 4 - 27 4 - 27 4 - 28 4 - 29 4 - 30 4 - 31 4 - 32 4 - 33 4 - 34 4 - 36 4 - 38 4 - 40 4 - 41
Software Configuration Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 42 Peripheral Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 43 ECG Check Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 43 Power Supply Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 43 Mechanical Function Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 44 Rotation of the Control Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 44 Brakes and Direction Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 44 Site Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 45 Site Log - System (Service Database) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 45 Site Log - Paper Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 46
xix
CHAPTER 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2 Description of Voluson 730Pro/ProV Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6 B-Mode or 2D-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6 Coded Harmonic Imaging (HI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6 M-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6 MCFM Mode (M Mode + Color Flow Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6 Color Doppler Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7 Color Flow Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7 Power Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7 Tissue Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7 Pulsed (PW) Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7 3D Imaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 8 3D Data Collection and Reconstruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 8 3D Image Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 8 3D Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 8 Block diagram Voluson 730Pro/ProV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9 Data Flow Control Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 11 B-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 11 Special B-Mode Techniques 12 M-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 12 D-Mode (Pulsed Wave- and Continuous Wave Doppler) . . . . . . . . . 5 - 13 D-Mode Autotrace (draws PC-calculated envelope to D-Spectrum) . 5 - 13 CFM-Mode (Color Flow Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14 3D-Mode (Freezes after 1 volume sweep) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14 Real Time 4D-Mode (nonstop volume rendering) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14 XBeam CRI-Mode (CrossBeam Compound Resolution Imaging) . . . 5 - 14 Extern-Video-Mode (display Video from Video-Recorder) . . . . . . . . 5 - 14 Sonoview write mode (store Image to Sonoview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 15 Description of Software Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 15 Real Time 4D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16 DICOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16 Real Time 4D-Biopsy * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16 VOCAL II* - Virtual Organ Computer-aided Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16 XTD-View (Extended View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16 STIC* (Spatio-Temporal Image Correlation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 17 VCI* - Volume Contrast Imaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 17 SRI* - Speckle Reduction Imaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 17 SRI II*- Speckle Reduction Imaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 17 T.U.I* - Tomographic Ultrasound Imaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18 Description of Hardware Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19
xx -
CW - Continuous Wave Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ECG Preamplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOD (Magneto-Optical Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scan/Freeze Footswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Global Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location in the Unit 20 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 - 19 5 - 19 5 - 19 5 - 19 5 - 19 5 - 20
Main board Chassis - GEZ Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21 FrontEnd Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FrontEnd - Board Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPV - Probe Connector Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPR - Beamformer-Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPD - Beamformer Sub-board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CRW - CW-Doppler Board (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPZ - Cover Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPK - Motherboard of GEZ-Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CRS - Signal Processor Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board + Motor Power stage . . . . . BackEnd Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block diagram CKV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BackEnd - Board Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SBC - Single Board Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADD2-DVI (Add-On) Graphic Adapter Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CKV - DMA-Controller / Video-Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hard Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPE - Back Panel I/O-Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board + Motor Power stage . . . . . Internal I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal I/O - if Kontron ATX SBC-board is installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal I/O - if Tyan SBC-board is installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal I/O - if Kontron Flex SBC-board is installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal I/O - if DFI ATX SBC-board is installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 22 5 - 23 5 - 23 5 - 23 5 - 24 5 - 25 5 - 25 5 - 25 5 - 26 5 - 27 5 - 28 5 - 29 5 - 30 5 - 30 5 - 30 5 - 30 5 - 30 5 - 30 5 - 31 5 - 32 5 - 33 5 - 35 5 - 37 5 - 39
Top Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 41 Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 46 External I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 47 Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 48 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 48 ECG-preamplifier (MAN6 - optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 48
xxi
DVD/CD+(R)W Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 48 Magneto-Optical Drive (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 48 Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 49 CPN - Primary Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 49 Mechanical Concept and Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 49 Major Functions of CPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 49 Fuses on Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 50 Fuses inside CPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 50 Disk Drive Module (GEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 50 Fuses on CPE-Board for Disk Drive Module (GEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 50 Mechanical Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 51 Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 51 Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 52 Top Console Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 52 Rotation of the Control Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 52 Assembly Drawing GW & GEU & Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 53 Air Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 54 Air Flow Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 54 Air Flow Distribution Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 54 Service Platform. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 55 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 55 Access / Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 55 iLinq Interactive Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 56 Service Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 57 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 57 Access / Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 57 Service Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 57 Auto Tester File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 58 Video Norm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 58 Video out VHS2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 58 Process Logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 58 Keyboard Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 58 TCP/IP Buffersize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59 Service Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59 Delete all Patients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59 Export System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59 Maintenance Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 60 Monitor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 60 Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61 Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61
xxii -
CHAPTER 6 Service Adjustments

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1 Regulatory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1 Monitor Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Degauss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color Temp - Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contrast and Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convergence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 6-2 6-3 6-3 6-4 6-4 6-4 6-4 6-4 6-4
Control Console, Transport Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 5 Control Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 5 Transport Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 5 Trackball Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 6 Modification of Keyboard Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 7 Setup the Voluson 730Pro/ProV Keyboard Language Layout . . . . . . . . . 6 - 7 Daylight Saving Time (DST) - New Dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 9
xxiii
CHAPTER 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1 Collect Vital System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2 Check Points Voltages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 3 How to check power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 3 Screen Captures and Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 4 Capturing a screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 4 Export Logs and System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 4 Export System Data (by pressing the ALT + D key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 5 Export Logs and System Data (via Service Page) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 6 Dump-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 6 How to use the Auto Tester program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 7 Limitation of the Auto Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 9 Minimum Configuration to Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 10 Troubleshooting Trees, Instructions and Tech Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 12 System Does Not Power On / Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 12 Noise disturbs the Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 13 Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 14 System Does Not Power Off / Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 15 Monitor Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 16 Unable to Record to VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17 Printer Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 18 DVD/CD-(R)W Troubleshooting (DVD/CD Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 20 MOD Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 20 Network Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 20 No Connection to the Network at All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 20 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 21
xxiv
CHAPTER 8 Replacement Procedures

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1 Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 3 Ultrasound Application Software (UIS) Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software - Installation Procedure (via Service Page) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 8-3 8-3 8-3 8-4 8-7
User Settings Only (Application Settings) Loading Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10 Loading Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10 Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Appl. Settings) Loading Procedure . . . . . 8 - 10 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10 Loading Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10 Service Platform (SSW) Upgrade Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrade Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic User Manual (EUM) Upgrade Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EUM - Upgrade Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 11 8 - 11 8 - 11 8 - 11 8 - 13 8 - 13 8 - 13 8 - 13 8 - 14
Software and Functional Checks after the Upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 16 Replacement or Activation of Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17 Operation for activating Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17 Operation for installing a Demo Key or a Permanent Key: . . . . . 8 - 18 Transfer of Patient Database and Images from System-to-System . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer of Patient Database and Images via Sonoview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-
8 - 19 8 - 19 8 - 20 8 - 20 8 - 20
xxv
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 20 Backup all Exams of the old system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 20 Restore all Exams (of the old system) to the new system . . . . . . 8 - 21 Replacement of the Monitor Task Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 24 Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 24 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 24 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 24 Task Lamp - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 24 Task Lamp - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 24 Replacement of the Trackball top fixation ring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 25 Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 25 Trackball top fixation ring - Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 25 Replacement of Digipots and TGC Slider controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 25 Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 25 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 25 Cap and/or Spring - Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 25 Replacement of the Probe Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 25 Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 25 Probe Holder - Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 25 Replacement of Key Caps (by special native language keys) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26 Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26 Key Caps - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26 Key Caps - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26 Replacing optional Peripherals / How to mount Peripherals at a later date. . . . . . . 8 - 27 Mounting/Replacing the 19 LCD secondary Patient Monitor . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 28
xxvi
CHAPTER 9 Renewal Parts

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1 List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 2 Parts List Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 3 Housing (GW) and additional Console Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 4 User Interface (GEU Top Console) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 6 Monitor + Monitor replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 8 Disk Drives (GEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 9 Main Power Module (CPN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 10 Main Board Module (GEZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 11 FrontEnd (US-Part) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 12 BackEnd Processor (PC-Part) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 14 Options and Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 16 Miscellaneous Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 19 Optional Peripherals and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recording Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 26 9 - 26 9 - 27 9 - 29
System Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 31 Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Real-Time 4D Volume Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CW-Pencil Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 33 9 - 33 9 - 35 9 - 37
Biopsy Needle Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 38
xxvii
CHAPTER 10 Care & Maintenance

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1 Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1 Why do Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2 Keeping Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2 Quality Assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2 Maintenance Task Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2 How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed? . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2 Tools Required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 5 Special Tools, Supplies and Equipment used for Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 10 - 5 System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 6 Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 6 Functional Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7 System Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7 Peripheral/Option Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8 Mains Cable Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8 Optional Diagnostic Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8 Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9 General Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9 Probe Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10 Probe Related Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10 Basic Probe Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10 Basic Probe Cleaning and/or Disinfection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10 Disinfection by means of the RIC-Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11 Using a Phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12 Electrical Safety Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12 Safety Test Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12 Leakage Current Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13 Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 14 Grounding Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 15 Meter Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 15 Chassis Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 16 Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 16 Generic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 16 Data Sheet for Enclosure/Chassis Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 17
xxviii -
Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage-Lead to Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolated Patient Lead (Source) LeakageLead to Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lead to Lead Leakage Test Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolated Patient Lead (Sink) Leakage-Isolation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolated Lead (sink) Leakage Test Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probe Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generic Procedure on Probe Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When There's Too Much Leakage Current... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chassis Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probe Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Peripheral Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Still Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ECG Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In case of using an UPS (Uninterruptable Power Supply) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 - 18 10 - 18 10 - 18 10 - 19 10 - 19 10 - 20 10 - 20 10 - 21 10 - 21 10 - 21 10 - 21 10 - 22 10 - 22 10 - 22 10 - 22 10 - 22 10 - 22 10 - 22 10 - 22
Ultrasound Equipment Quality Check (EQC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 23 Electrical Safety Test Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 24
xxix
APPENDIX A Acoustic Output & Index Determination Tables

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 2 Table for AB 2-7 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 6 Table for AB 2-7 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 7 Table for AB 2-7 at Motion Mode (M-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 8 Table for AB 2-7 at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 9 Table for AB 2-7 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 10 Table for AC2-5 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 11 Table for AC2-5 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 12 Table for AC2-5 at Motion Mode (M-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 13 Table for AC2-5 at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 14 Table for AC2-5 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 15 Table for 4C-A at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 16 Table for 4C-A at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 17 Table for 4C-A at Continuous Wave Doppler (CW-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 18 Table for 4C-A at Motion Mode (M-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 19 Table for 4C-A at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 20 Table for 4C-A at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 21 Table for IC5-9 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 22 Table for IC5-9 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 23 Table for IC5-9 at Motion Mode (M-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 24 Table for IC5-9 at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 25 Table for IC5-9 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 26 Table for IC5-9H at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 27 Table for IC5-9H at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 28 Table for IC5-9H at Motion Mode (M-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 29 Table for IC5-9H at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 30 Table for IC5-9H at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 31 Table for SP4-10 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 32 Table for SP4-10 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 33 Table for SP4-10 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 34 Table for SP4-10 at Motion Mode (M-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 35 Tables for SP6-12 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 36 Tables for SP6-12 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 37 Tables for SP6-12 at Motion Mode (M-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 38 Tables for SP6-12 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 39 Tables for SP10-16 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 40 Tables for SP10-16 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 41 Tables for SP10-16 at Motion Mode (M-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 42
xxx -
Tables for SP10-16 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for PA2-5P at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for PA2-5P at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for PA2-5P at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for PA2-5P at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for PA2-5P at Motion Mode (M-Mode)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for PA6-8 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for PA6-8 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for PA6-8 at Continuous Wave Doppler (CW-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for PA6-8 at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for PA6-8 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for PA6-8 at Motion Mode (M-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for PCW4.0 at Continuous Wave Doppler (CW-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . Table for SCW2.0 at Continuous Wave Doppler (CW-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . Table for RAB2-5L at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for RAB2-5L at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for RAB2-5L at Motion Mode (M-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for RAB2-5L at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for RAB2-5L at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for RAB4-8L at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for RAB4-8L at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for RAB4-8L at Motion Mode (M-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for RAB4-8L at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for RAB4-8L at Power Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for RAB2-5 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for RAB2-5 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for RAB2-5 at Motion Mode (M-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for RAB2-5 at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for RAB2-5 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for RAB4-8P at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for RAB4-8P at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for RAB4-8P at Motion Mode (M-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for RAB4-8P at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for RAB4-8P at Pulsed Wave Mode (PW-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for RIC5-9 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for RIC5-9 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for RIC5-9 at Motion Mode (M-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for RIC5-9 at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for RIC5-9 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for RIC5-9H at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for RIC5-9H at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for RIC5-9H at Motion Mode (M-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-
A - 43 A - 44 A - 45 A - 46 A - 47 A - 48 A - 49 A - 50 A - 51 A - 52 A - 53 A - 54 A - 55 A - 56 A - 57 A - 58 A - 59 A - 60 A - 61 A - 62 A - 63 A - 64 A - 65 A - 66 A - 67 A - 68 A - 69 A - 70 A - 71 A - 72 A - 73 A - 74 A - 75 A - 76 A - 77 A - 78 A - 79 A - 80 A - 81 A - 82 A - 83 A - 84
xxxi
Table for RIC5-9H at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 85 Table for RIC5-9H at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 86 Tables for RIC5-9W at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 87 Tables for RIC5-9W at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 88 Tables for RIC5-9W at Motion Mode (M-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 89 Tables for RIC5-9W at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 90 Tables for RIC5-9W at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 91 Table for RSP5-12 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 92 Table for RSP5-12 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 93 Table for RSP5-12 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 94 Table for RSP5-12 at Motion Mode (M-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 95 Table for RSP6-16 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 96 Table for RSP6-16 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 97 Table for RSP6-16 at Motion Mode (M-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 98 Table for RSP6-16 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 99 Table for RNA5-9 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 100 Table for RNA5-9 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 101 Table for RNA5-9 at Continuous Wave Doppler (CW-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 102 Table for RNA5-9 at Motion Mode (M-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 103 Table for RNA5-9 at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 104 Table for RNA5-9 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 105
xxxii
Chapter 1 Introduction
Section 1-1 Overview
1-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 1
This chapter describes important issues related to safely servicing the Voluson 730Pro/ProV scanner. The service provider must read and understand all the information presented in this manual before installing or servicing a unit. Always observe the instructions given in the manual of the peripheral/auxiliary device. Under consideration of general maintenance requirements a minimum lifetime of 7 years for the equipment and 5 years for the probes may be expected. Have the system checked and serviced in regular intervals (once per year) by authorized service personnel. Table 1-1
Section
1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 Overview Important Conventions Safety Considerations Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Customer Assistance
Contents in Chapter 1
Description Page Number
1-1 1-4 1-9 1-14 1-15
1-1-2
Purpose of Service Manual

This Service Manual provides installation and service information for the Voluson 730Pro/ProV Ultrasound Scanning System and contains the following chapters:
Chapter 1 - Introduction: Contains a content summary and warnings. Chapter 2 - Site Preparation: Contains pre-installation requirements for the Voluson 730Pro/ProV. Chapter 3 - Setup Instructions: Contains installation procedures. Chapter 4 - Functional Checks: Contains functional checks that are recommended as part of the installation, or as required during servicing and periodic maintenance. 5.) Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory): Contains block diagrams and functional explanations of the electronics. 6.) Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments: Contains instructions on how to make available adjustments to the Voluson 730Pro/ProV. 7.) Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting: Provides procedures for running diagnostic or related routines for the Voluson 730Pro/ProV. 8.) Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures: Provides disassembly procedures and reassembly procedures for all changeable Field Replaceable Units (FRU). 9.) Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts: Contains a complete list of field replaceable parts for the Voluson 730Pro/ProV. 10.) Chapter 10 - Care & Maintenance: Provides periodic maintenance procedures for the Voluson 730Pro/ProV. 1.) 2.) 3.) 4.)
Chapter 1 - Introduction
1-1
1-1-3
Typical Users of the Basic Service Manual

Service Personnel (installation, maintenance, etc.). Hospitals Service Personnel Contractors (Some parts of Chapter 2 - Pre-Installation)
1-1-4
Voluson 730Pro/ProV Models Covered by this Manual

Table 1-2 Voluson 730Pro Model Designations
Description
Voluson 730Pro Console 230V/50Hz Voluson 730Pro Console 115V USA Voluson 730Pro Console 115V Voluson 730Pro Console 100V JAPAN Voluson 730Pro Console 230V KOREA Voluson 730Pro Console 230V CHINA Voluson 730Pro Console 230V AUSTRALIA Voluson 730Pro Console 230V INDIA Voluson 730Pro Console 230V/50Hz Voluson 730Pro Console 115V USA Voluson 730Pro Console 100V JAPAN Voluson 730Pro Console 230V KOREA Voluson 730Pro Console 230V CHINA Voluson 730Pro Console 230V AUSTRALIA Voluson 730Pro Console 230V INDIA
Part Number
H48651FF H48651FG H48651FH H48651FJ H48651FK H48651FL H48651FM H48651FN H48671DH H48671DJ H48671DL H48671DM H48671DN H48671DP H48671DR
BT version
BT05 BT05 BT05 BT05 BT05 BT05 BT05 BT05 BT08 BT08 BT08 BT08 BT08 BT08 BT08
NOTICE The Voluson 730Pro/ProV V is a downgraded version of the Voluson 730Pro/ProV.

!! NOTICE:
That means not all options are available on the Voluson 730Pro/ProV (marked with * in the sections of the Manuals). The Voluson 730Pro/ProV V is only distinguished by the System type, see: Figure 7-1: System Setup - System Info page (e.g. V730 Pro) on page 7-2; it has NO own serial number! Table 1-3 Voluson 730ProV Model Designations
Description
Voluson 730ProV Console 230V/50Hz Voluson 730ProV Console 115V USA Voluson 730ProV Console 115V Voluson 730ProV Console 100V JAPAN Voluson 730ProV Console 230V KOREA Voluson 730ProV Console 230V CHINA Voluson 730ProV Console 230V AUSTRALIA Voluson 730ProV Console 230V INDIA
Part Number
H48651GL H48651GM H48651GN H48651GP H48651GR H48651GS H48651GT H48651GW
BT version
BT05 BT05 BT05 BT05 BT05 BT05 BT05 BT05
1-2
Section 1-1 - Overview
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 Table 1-3 Voluson 730ProV Model Designations
Description
Part Number
H48671B H48671BA H48671BD H48671BE H48671BF H48671BG H48671BJ
BT version
BT08 BT08 BT08 BT08 BT08 BT08 BT08
Voluson 730ProV Console 230V/50Hz Voluson 730ProV Console 115V USA Voluson 730ProV Console 100V JAPAN Voluson 730ProV Console 230V KOREA Voluson 730ProV Console 230V CHINA Voluson 730ProV Console 230V AUSTRALIA Voluson 730ProV Console 230V INDIA
1-1-5
System History - Hardware and Software Versions

This manual applies to Voluson 730Pro/ProV systems with Serial number A34001 - A34500 and/or A35001 - (onwards), with: Software version 5.0.x (BT05) installed Software version 5.1.x (BT05) installed Software version 5.2.x (BT05) installed Software version 5.3.x (BT05) installed Software version 5.4.x (BT08) installed
NOTICE Voluson 730Pro/ProV systems that were upgraded to BT05 (serial number less than < A34000) have
!! NOTICE:
different hardware installed. For upgraded systems, please refer to BT04 manual (KTI105947).
1-1-6
Purpose of Operator Manual(s)

The Operator Manual(s) should be fully read and understood before operating the Voluson 730Pro/ProV and also kept near the unit for quick reference.
1-3
Section 1-2 Important Conventions

1-2-1 Conventions Used in Book
Model Designations This manual covers the Voluson 730Pro/ProV ultrasound units listed in Table 1-2 on page 1-2 respectively Table 1-3 on page 1-2. Icons Pictures, or icons, are used wherever they reinforce the printed message. The icons, labels and conventions used on the product and in the service information are described in this chapter. Safety Precaution Messages Various levels of safety precaution messages may be found on the equipment and in the service information. The different levels of concern are identified by a flag word that precedes the precautionary message. Known or potential hazards are labeled in one of following ways:
DANGER
!! DANGER:
INDICATES THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT WILL CAUSE SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH IF THE INSTRUCTIONS ARE IGNORED.
INDICATES THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT CAN CAUSE SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE IF INSTRUCTIONS ARE IGNORED.
damage if instructions are ignored.
WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
CAUTION Indicates the presence of a hazard that will or can cause minor personal injury and property
!! CAUTION:
NOTICE Equipment Damage Possible

!! NOTICE:
Notice is used when a hazard is present that can cause property damage but has absolutely no personal injury risk. Example: Disk drive will crash. BT Version: Is used when options or features are specific for BT-Software versions.
BT-Version:
NOTE:
Notes provide important information about an item or a procedure. Information contained in a NOTE can often save you time or effort.
1-4
Section 1-2 - Important Conventions
1-2-2
Standard Hazard Icons

Important information will always be preceded by the exclamation point contained within a triangle, as seen throughout this chapter. In addition to text, several different graphical icons (symbols) may be used to make you aware of specific types of hazards that could cause harm.
Table 1-4
Standard Hazard Icons

ELECTRICAL MECHANICAL RADIATION
LASER
HEAT
PINCH
LASER LIGHT
Other hazard icons make you aware of specific procedures that should be followed.
Table 1-5
Standard Icons Indicating a Special Procedure be Used

TAG AND LOCK OUT WEAR EYE PROTECTION
AVOID STATIC ELECTRICITY
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
EYE PROTECTION
WEAR HAND PROTECTION
WEAR FOOT PROTECTION
or
1-5
1-2-3
Product Labels and Icons

The following table describes the purpose and location of safety labels and other important information provided on the equipment.
BT-Version:
BT Version: Product labels and its location depend on BT-version and/or date of manufacture. For description of all symbols and labels used on the system, refer to Chapter 2 in the Basic User Manual of your system. Table 1-6
LABEL/SYMBOL
Product Icons
PURPOSE/MEANING
Manufacturer's name and address
LOCATION
Rear side of the unit Monitor rear side on each probe
Identification and Rating Plate
Model and serial numbers Electrical ratings
Manufacturers name and address
Identification and Rating Plate(rear side of the unit / on plug of each probe)
Date of manufacture
Serial number
Catalog or model number
Device Listing/Certification Labels
Laboratory logo or labels denoting conformance with industry safety standards such as UL or IEC. Council Directive 93/42/EEC concerning medical devices: The CE mark affixed to the equipment testifies compliance to the directive. Tested and production monitored by TV Product Service NRTL with respect to ELECTRICAL SHOCK, FIRE and MECHANICAL HAZARDS only in accordance with UL2601-1 and CAN/CSA C22.2 NO.601.1.
Rear side of the unit Rear side of the monitor Rear side of the unit on the plug of each probe
0123
Identification and Rating Plate (rear side of the unit)
Type/Class Label IP Code (IPX 0) IP Code (IPX 1) IP Code (IPX 7)
Used to indicate the degree of safety or protection. degree of protection provided by the enclosure per IEC 60529: IPX 0 - no protection against ingress of water IPX 1 - protected against dripping water IPX 7 - protected against the effects of immersion Equipment Type BF (man in the box symbol) IEC 878-02-03 indicates B Type equipment having even more electrical isolation than standard Type B equipment because it is intended for intimate patient contact.
various
Probe connectors Front side of the ECG-preamplifier (MAN) Rear of Power Supply
1-6
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 Table 1-6

LABEL/SYMBOL
Product Icons (Continued)

PURPOSE/MEANING
To identify a defibrillation-proof type CF (heart in box with electrodes, symbol IEC 60878-5336) applied part complying with IEC 60601-1.
LOCATION
Front side of the ECG-preamplifier
CAUTION This unit weighs... Special care must be used to avoid..." This precaution is intended to prevent injury that may result if one person attempt to move the unit considerable distances or on an incline due to the weight of the unit. Used in the Service and User Manual which should be adjacent to equipment at all times for quick reference.
Pushing prohibited. Do not lean on the system. Tipping danger. Take special care when moving the system Loading prohibited. Do not put any items on this shelf. Danger of breaking. Also items might be crushed when lowering the user interface.
various
at top cover of the system
ATTENTION - Read and understand all instructions for use This symbol advises the reader to consult the accompanying documents (operator manual or other instructions). "DANGER Risk of explosion used in..." The system is not designed for use with flammable anesthetic gases.
rear side of the unit
Indicated in the Service Manual.
"CAUTION" The equilateral triangle is usually used in combination with other symbols to advise or warn the user.
various
ATTENTION - Consult accompanying documents " is intended to alert the user to refer to the operator manual or other instructions when complete information cannot be provided on the label.
Rear side of Power Supply
"CAUTION - Dangerous voltage" (the lightning flash with arrowhead in equilateral triangle) is used to indicate electric shock hazards.
Rear side of Monitor
"Mains OFF" Indicates the power off position of the mains power switch.
rear of system at mains switch (on primary power supply - RTN)
"OFF/Standby" Indicates the power off/standby position of the power switch. CAUTION This Power Switch DOES NOT ISOLATE Mains Supply
Adjacent to On-Off/Standby switch left below the Control panel.
1-7

LABEL/SYMBOL
Product Icons (Continued)

PURPOSE/MEANING
"Mains ON" Indicates the power on position of the mains power switch.
LOCATION
ON switch of the isolation transformer for auxiliary devices.
Rear of system at the switch for auxiliary devices (F2)
OFF switch of the isolation transformer for auxiliary devices.
Rear of system at the switch for auxiliary devices (F2)
"Protective Earth" Indicates the protective earth (grounding) terminal.
"Equipotentiality" Indicates the terminal to be used for connecting equipotential conductors when interconnecting (grounding) with other equipment.
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Disposal. This symbol indicates that waste electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed as unsorted municipal waste and must be collected separately. Please contact an authorized representative of the manufacturer for information concerning the decommissioning of your equipment. This symbol indicates that in the United States of America, federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician.
Rear side of the unit on the plug of each probe
GOST-R label (Russia Regulatory Country Clearance)
These symbols indicate that at least one of the six hazardous substances of the China RoHS Labelling Standard is above the RoHS limitation. The number inside the circle is referred to as the Environmental Friendly Use Period (EFUP). It indicates the number of years that the product, under normal use, will remain harmless to health of humans or the environment. EFUP = 10 for Short Use Products EFUP = 20 for Medium Use Products This product consists of devices that may contain mercury, which must be recycled or disposed of in accordance with local, state, or country laws.
Rear side of the unit on the plug of each probe
Rear side of the unit
1-8
Section 1-3 Safety Considerations

1-3-1 Introduction
The following safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service and repair of this equipment. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual, violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment.
1-3-2
Human Safety
Operating personnel must not remove the system covers. Servicing should be performed by authorized personnel only. Only personnel who have participated in a Voluson 730Pro/ProV Training are authorized to service the equipment.
1-3-3
WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
Mechanical Safety
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN ELEVATING THE UNIT, OR IF IT IS RAISED FOR A REPAIR OR MOVED ALONG ANY INCLINE. IT MAY BECOME UNSTABLE WHICH COULD CAUSE THE UNIT TO TIP OVER. ULTRASOUND PROBES ARE HIGHLY SENSITIVE MEDICAL INSTRUMENTS THAT CAN EASILY BE DAMAGED BY IMPROPER HANDLING. USE CARE WHEN HANDLING AND PROTECT FROM DAMAGE WHEN NOT IN USE. DO NOT USE A DAMAGED OR DEFECTIVE PROBE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE PRECAUTIONS CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY AND EQUIPMENT DAMAGE. NEVER USE A PROBE THAT HAS FALLEN TO THE FLOOR. EVEN IF IT LOOKS OK, IT MAY BE DAMAGED.
Always lower and center the Operator I/O Panel before moving the scanner.
WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
CAUTION
!! CAUTION:
CAUTION
!! CAUTION:
The Voluson 730Pro/ProV weighs 136 kg or more, depending on installed peripherals, (300 lbs., or more) when ready for use. Care must be used when moving it or replacing its parts. Failure to follow the precautions listed could result in injury, uncontrolled motion and costly damage. ALWAYS: Use the handle to move the system. Be sure the pathway is clear. Use slow, careful motions. Do not let the system strike walls or door frames. Two people are required when moving on inclines or lifting more than 16 kg (35 lbs).
CAUTION
!! CAUTION:
Keep the heat venting holes on the monitor unobstructed to avoid overheating of the monitor.
NOTE:
Special care should be taken when transporting the unit in a vehicle: Secure the systems with straps in an upright position and lock the caster wheels (brake). DO NOT use the Control Panel as an anchor point. Place the probes in their carrying case. Eject any DVD, CD or Magneto Optical disk (MOD) from their drive. Ensure that the Voluson 730Pro/ProV system is firmly secured while inside the vehicle. Prevent vibration damage by driving cautiously. Avoid unpaved roads, excessive speeds, and erratic stops or starts. Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-9
1-3-4
1-3-4-1
Electrical Safety
Safe Practices To minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis must be connected to an electrical ground. The system is equipped with a three-conductor AC power cable. This must be plugged into an approved electrical outlet with safety ground. If an extension cord is used with the system, make sure that the total current rating of the system does not exceed the extension cord rating. The power outlet used for this equipment should not be shared with other types of equipment. Both the system power cable and the power connector meet international electrical standards.
WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
CONNECTING A VOLUSON 730PRO/PROV SCANNER TO THE WRONG VOLTAGE LEVEL WILL MOST LIKELY DESTROY THE SCANNER.
1-3-4-2
Probes All the probes for the Voluson 730Pro/ProV are designed and manufactured to provide trouble-free, reliable service. To ensure this, correct handling of probes is important and the following points should be noted: Do not drop a probe or strike it against a hard surface, as this may damage the transducer elements, acoustic lens, or housing. Inspect the probe prior to each use for damage or degradation to the Housing, Cable strain relief, Lens and Seal. Do not use a cracked or damaged probe. In this event, call your field service representative immediately to obtain a replacement. Avoid pulling, pinching or kinking the probe cable, since a damaged cable may compromise the electrical safety of the probe. To avoid the risk of a probe accidentally falling, do not allow the probe cables to become entangled, or to be caught in the machines wheels. Never immerse the probe connector or adapter into any liquid.
NOTE:
For detailed information on handling probes, refer to the Voluson 730Pro/ProV Basic User Manual and the care card supplied with the probe.
1-10
Section 1-3 - Safety Considerations
1-3-5
WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
Auxiliary Devices Safety

Power Supplies for additional equipment MUST comply with IEC 60601-1. DO NOT attempt to use different peripherals and accessories (brand and model; connected via the PCMCIA or USB ports) other than approved and provided by GE Healthcare! The ultrasound system is an extremely sensitive and complex medical system. Any unauthorized peripherals may cause system failure or damage!
The Voluson 730Pro/ProV is equipped with an isolation transformer to provide the required separation from mains for both, the system and the auxiliary devices. One AUX main outlet is located at the primary power supply. It is used for connecting the threefold splitter whose outlets are led to the shelves intend for auxiliary devices (e.g., printers) and the AUX main outlet that is accessible on the back of the control console. The IEC 60601-1-1 standard provides a guideline for safely interconnecting medical devices in systems. Equipment connected to the analog or digital interface must comply with the respective IEC/UL standards (e.g. IEC 60950 / UL 60950 for data processing equipment and IEC 60601-1 / UL 60601-1 for medical equipment). Everybody who connects additional equipment to the signal input portion or signal output portion configures a medical system, and is therefore responsible that the system complies with the requirements of the system standard IEC 60601-1-1. Special care has to be taken, if the device is connected to computer network (e.g., Ethernet), because other devices could be connected without any control. There could be a potential difference between the protective earth and any line of the computer network including the shield. In this case the only way to operate the system safely is to use an isolated signal link with minimum 4mm creepage distance, 2.5mm air clearance of the isolation device. For computer networks there are media converters available which convert the electrical to optical signals. Please consider that this converter has to comply with IEC xxx standards* and is battery operated. * IEC xxx stands for standards such as: IEC 60601 for medical devices IEC 60950 for information technology equipment etc.
WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
NOTICE The system integrator (any person connecting the medical device to other devices) is responsible
!! NOTICE:
that the connections are safe. If in doubt, consult the technical service department or your local representative.
CAUTION The leakage current of the entire system including any / all auxiliary equipment must not exceed
!! CAUTION:
the limit values as per EN 60601-1-1:1990 (IEC 60601-1-1) respectively other valid national or international standards. All equipment must comply with UL, CSA and IEC requirements.
CAUTION Please observe that some printers may not be medical devices! If the Bluetooth Printer and/or
!! CAUTION:
Line Printers are no medical devices, they have to be located outside of the patient environment (according to IEC 60601-1 / UL 60601-1).
1-11
1-3-5
Auxiliary Devices Safety (contd)

provided for the electrical safety of the system.
CAUTION Auxiliary equipment must only be connected to the main console with the special main outlet
!! CAUTION:
For hardware installation procedures see: Section 3-5 "Connection of Auxiliary Devices" on page 3-9.
WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
After each installation, the leakage currents have to be measured according to IEC 60601-1 respectively UL 60601-1 (see: Section 10-7-2 on page 10-16).
in position.
NOTICE All peripherals mounted on the Voluson 730Pro/ProV system chassis must be firmly secured
1-3-6
Labels Locations
The Voluson 730Pro/ProV system comes equipped with product labels and icons. These labels and icons represent pertinent information regarding the operation of the unit.
BT Version: Product labels and its location depend on BT-version and/or date of manufacture. Refer to Section 1-2-3 on page 1-6 and Chapter 2 in the Basic User Manual of your system. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 9
Figure 1-1 Labeling 1.)Caution 2.)WEEE Disposal Icon 3.)CE Label 4.)UL Label (not on all systems, depend on date and location of manufacturing) 5.)Identification Main Label 6.)CW-Doppler (only if the CW-Doppler option is installed) 7.)Rating Label (only at systems made in Korea) 8.)Quality Control Label 9.)place for addtional label (e.g., Homologation label for Japan or China only)
1-12
Section 1-3 - Safety Considerations
1-3-7
Dangerous Procedure Warnings

Warnings, such as the examples below, precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this manual. Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed.
DANGER
!! DANGER:
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING.
WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
EXPLOSION WARNING DO NOT OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE. OPERATION OF ANY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN SUCH AN ENVIRONMENT CONSTITUTES A DEFINITE SAFETY HAZARD. DO NOT SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR MODIFY EQUIPMENT BECAUSE OF THE DANGER OF INTRODUCING ADDITIONAL HAZARDS, DO NOT INSTALL SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR PERFORM ANY UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION OF THE EQUIPMENT.
WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
1-3-8
Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA Only)

Follow OSHA Lockout/Tagout requirements to protect service personnel from injuries caused by unexpected energizing or start-up of equipment during service, repair, or maintenance.
NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for Voluson 730Pro/ProV.

!! NOTICE:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
When servicing parts of the system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 Volts: Unplug the system Maintain control of the system power plug There are no test points to verify isolation, you must wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge. Beware that the Power Supply (CPN), Front End Processor and Back End Processor may be energized even if the power is turned off when the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.
UT
1-3-9
Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts

Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances. GEMS policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to shipment. GEMS employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/equipment have been properly decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part or equipment with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils or and ultrasound probe). The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry, as well as the people who will receive or open this package.
NOTE:
The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that items what were saturated and/or dripping with human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended for use in patient care are regulated medical waste for transportation purpose and must be transported as a hazardous material. Chapter 1 - Introduction 1-13
Section 1-4 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

1-4-1 What is EMC?
Electromagnetic compatibility describes a level of performance of a device within its electromagnetic environment. This environment consists of the device itself and its surroundings including other equipment, power sources and persons with which the device must interface. Inadequate compatibility results when a susceptible device fails to perform as intended due interference from its environment or when the device produces unacceptable levels of emission to its environment. This interference is often referred to as radiofrequency or electromagnetic interference (RFI/EMI) and can be radiated through space or conducted over interconnecting power of signal cables. In addition to electromagnetic energy, EMC also includes possible effects from electrical fields, magnetic fields, electrostatic discharge and disturbances in the electrical power supply. For applicable standards refer to Chapter 2 in the Basic User Manual of the Voluson 730Pro/ProV.
1-4-2
Compliance
The Voluson 730Pro/ProV unit conforms to all applicable conducted and radiated emission limits and to immunity from electrostatic discharge, radiated and conducted RF fields, magnetic fields and power line transient requirements.
NOTE:
For CE Compliance, it is critical that all covers, screws, shielding, gaskets, mesh, clamps, are in good condition, installed tightly without skew or stress. Proper installation following all comments noted in this service manual is required in order to achieve full EMC performance.
1-4-3
WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Prevention

DO NOT touch any boards with integrated circuits prior to taking the necessary ESD precautions: 1.) When installing boards, ESD may cause damage to a board. ALWAYS connect yourself, via an arm-wrist strap, to the advised ESD connection point located on the rear of the system (to the right of the power connector). 2.) Follow general guidelines for handling of electrostatic sensitive equipment. Risk of electrical shock, system must be turned off. Avoid all contact with electrical contacts, conductors and components. Always use non-conductive handles designed for the removal and replacement of ESD sensitive parts. All parts that have the potential for storing energy must be discharged or isolated before making contact.
WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
1-14
Section 1-4 - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
Section 1-5 Customer Assistance

1-5-1 Contact Information
If this equipment does not work as indicated in this service manual or in the Basic User Manual, or if you require additional assistance, please contact the local distributor or appropriate support resource, as listed below. NOTE: Prepare vital system information (see: Section 7-2 on page 7-2) before you call: System Type System Serial number (also visible on label on back of the system) Application Software version Backup version additional information about installed software Phone Numbers for Customer Assistance
Location
USA GE Medical Systems Ultrasound Service Engineering 9900 Innovation Drive (RP-2123) Wauwatosa, WI 53226, USA Canada Latin America Europe GE Ultraschall Deutschland GmbH Beethovenstrae 239 Postfach 11 05 60, D-42655 Solingen Germany Online Services Ultrasound Asia Australia China India Japan Korea Singapore Phone: +(61) 1-800-647-855 +(86) 800-810-8188 +(91) 1800-425-8025 +(81) 42-648-2940 +(82) 2620 13585 +(95) 6277-3444 ing) Service Applications support Applications Support 1-800-682-5327 or 1-262-524-5698 1-800-668-0732 1-800-321-7937 1-262-524-5698 Service Parts 1-800-558-2040 Service: On-site
Table 1-7
Phone Number
1-800-437-1171
OLC - EMEA (Europe, Middle East & Africa) Phone: +49 (0)212 2802 - 652 (OLC) +33 1 3083 1300 (English/German all segments incl. train-
1-5-2
System Manufacturer
Table 1-8 System Manufacturer
Manufacturer
GE Healthcare Austria GmbH & Co OG Tiefenbach 15 A-4871 Zipf Austria +43 (0) 7682-3800-0 +43 (0) 7682-3800-47
Telephone
FAX
1-15
This page was intentionally left blank.
1-16
Section 1-5 - Customer Assistance
Chapter 2 Site Preparation

This chapter provides the information required to plan and prepare the installation of a Voluson 730Pro/ProV ultrasound unit. Included are descriptions of the facility and electrical needs to be met by the purchaser of the unit. Table 2-1
Section
2-1 2-2 2-3 Overview General Console Requirements Facility Needs
2-1 2-1 2-5
Section 2-2 General Console Requirements

2-2-1 Environmental Requirements
Table 2-2 Environmental Requirements
Operating Humidity
30 to 80% rH non-condensing
Operating Temperature
10 to 30oC (50 to 104oF)
Heat Dissipation
3446 BTU pr hour
Storage Temperature
-10 to 40
oC
Storage Humidity
< 90% rH noncondensing
(14 to 104oF)
CAUTION If the system has been in storage or has been transported, please see the acclimation requirements before powering ON and/or using the system (see: Section 3-2-2 "Installation Warnings" on page 3-2).
!! CAUTION:
2-2-1-1
Cooling The cooling requirement for the Voluson 730Pro/ProV is 3446 BTU/hr. This figure does not include cooling needed for lights, people, or other equipment in the room.
NOTE: 2-2-1-2
Each person in the room places an additional 300 BTU/hr. demand on the cooling system. Lighting Bright light is needed for system installation, updates and repairs. However, operator and patient comfort may be optimized if the room light is subdued and indirect. Therefore a combination lighting system (dim/bright) is recommended. Keep in mind that lighting controls and dimmers can be a source of EMI which could degrade image quality. These controls should be selected to minimize possible interference.
Chapter 2 - Site Preparation
2-1
2-2-2
NOTE:
Electrical Requirements
GE Medical Systems requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its Ultrasound equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the system. The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full size Ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.
NOTE:
Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the Ground from the main facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit. Voluson 730Pro/ProV Power Requirements Table 2-3 Electrical Specifications for Voluson 730Pro/ProV
Tolerances
10% 10% 10% 10% 10%
2-2-2-1
Voltage
100 VAC 115 VAC 130 VAC 230 VAC 240 VAC
Current
9,2 A 8.00 A 7.10 A 4.00 A 3,85 A
Frequency
50, 60 Hz (2%) 50, 60 Hz (2%) 50, 60 Hz (2%) 50, 60 Hz (2%) 50, 60 Hz (2%)
Power Consumption nominal 920 VA including all options. Mains outlets: Mains socket ST1, ST2, ST3, ST4, ST5 for accessories. All mains outlets are co-switched by the units mains switch via built-in isolation transformer. Output voltage for: ST1 - ST5: 115V or 230V.
CAUTION Modification of voltage setting only by an authorized service person!
!! CAUTION:
The maximum power consumption of equipment (inclusive color video monitor) connected to these outlets must not exceed 350VA! 2-2-2-2 Inrush Current Inrush current isnt a factor to consider due to the inrush current limiting properties of the power supplies 2-2-2-3 Site Circuit Breaker It is recommended that the branch circuit breaker for the machine be readily accessible.
CAUTION POWER OUTAGE MAY OCCUR.
!! CAUTION:
The Voluson 730Pro/ProV requires a dedicated single branch circuit. To avoid circuit overload and possible loss of critical care equipment, make sure you DO NOT have any other equipment operating on the same circuit. 2-2-2-4 Site Power Outlets A dedicated AC power outlet must be within reach of the unit without extension cords. Other adequate outlets for the external peripherals, medical and test equipment needed to support this unit must also be present within 1 m (3.2 ft.) of the unit. Electrical installation must meet all current local, state, and national electrical codes. 2-2-2-5 Main Power Plug The Voluson 730Pro/ProV is supplied with a main power plug, as standard. In the event that the unit arrives without a power plug, or with the wrong plug, contact your GE dealer. When necessary, the installation engineer will supply the appropriate power plug to meet the applicable local regulations.
2-2
Section 2-2 - General Console Requirements
2-2-3
EMI Limitations
Ultrasound machines are susceptible to Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from radio frequencies, magnetic fields, and transients in the air or wiring. Ultrasound machines also generate EMI. The Voluson 730Pro/ProV complies with limits as stated on the EMC label. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
NOTICE Possible EMI sources should be identified before the unit is installed.
!! NOTICE:
Electrical and electronic equipment may produce EMI unintentionally as the result of a defect. These sources include: medical lasers scanners cauterizing guns computers monitors fans gel warmers microwave oven light dimmers portable phones broadcast stations and mobile broadcasting machines EMI Prevention/Abatement
Details
Keep the unit at least 5 meters (16.4 feet) away from other EMI sources. Special shielding may be required to eliminate interference problems caused by high frequency, high powered radio or video broadcast signals. Poor grounding is the most likely reason a unit will have noisy images. Check grounding of the power cord and power outlet.
Table 2-4
EMI Rule
Be aware of RF sources.
Ground the unit.
After you finish repairing or updating the system, replace all covers and tighten all screws. Replace and/or reassemble Any cable with an external connection requires a magnet wrap at each end. all screws, RF gaskets, Install the shield over the front of card cage. Loose or missing covers or RF gaskets allow radio covers and cores. frequencies to interfere with the ultrasound signals. Replace broken RF gaskets. If more than 20% or a pair of the fingers on an RF gasket are broken, replace the gasket. Do not turn ON the unit until any loose metallic part is removed and replaced, if required. Never place a label where RF gaskets meet the unit. Otherwise, the gap created will permit RF leakage. In case a label has been found in such a location, move the label to a different, appropriate location. The interconnect cables are grounded and require ferrite beads and other shielding. Cable length, material, and routing are all important; do not make any changes that do not meet all specifications. Cellular phones may transmit a 5 V/m signal that causes image artifacts. Do not allow cables to lie across the top of the card cage or hang out of the peripheral bays. Loop the excess length for peripheral cables inside the peripheral bays. Attach the monitor cables to the frame.
Do not place labels where RF gaskets touch metal.
Use GE- specified harnesses and peripherals. Take care with cellular phones. Properly dress peripheral cables.
2-3
2-2-4
Probe Environmental Requirements

Operation: Ambient temperature 18 to 30 C Storage: -10 to 50 C
NOTE:
Temperature in degrees C. Conversion to degrees F = C (9/5) + 32). -10 TO + 50 degrees C. WHEN EXPOSED TO LARGE TEMPERATURE VARIATIONS, THE PRODUCT SHOULD BE KEPT IN ROOM TEMPERATURE FOR 10 HOURS BEFORE USE.
NOTICE SYSTEMS AND ELECTRONIC PROBES ARE DESIGNED FOR STORAGE TEMPERATURES OF
!! NOTICE:
2-2-5
Time and Manpower Requirements

Site preparation takes time. Begin Pre-installation checks as soon as possible. If possible, allow six weeks before delivery, for enough time to make necessary changes.
CAUTION Have two people available to deliver and unpack the Voluson 730Pro/ProV.
!! CAUTION:
Attempts to move the unit considerable distances or on an incline by one person alone, could result in injury or damage or both.
2-2-6
2-2-6-1
System Specifications
Physical Dimensions of Voluson 730Pro/ProV The physical dimensions of the Voluson 730Pro/ProV unit are summarized in Table 2-5. Table 2-6 lists the size of Voluson 730Pro/ProV, with monitor and without on-board peripherals. Table 2-5 Physical Dimensions of Voluson 730Pro/ProV
Height
142 cm / 55.9 inches
Width
68 cm / 26.8 inches
Depth
100 cm / 39.4 inches
2-2-6-2
Weight without Monitor and Peripherals Table 2-6 Weight of Voluson 730Pro/ProV with Monitor and without other Peripherals
Model
Voluson 730Pro/ProV
Weight [kg]
136
Weight [lbs.]
300
2-2-6-3
Acoustic Noise Output max. 57dB(A)
2-2-6-4
Electrical Specifications Please refer to Section 2-2-2-1 "Voluson 730Pro/ProV Power Requirements" on page 2-2.
2-4
Section 2-2 - General Console Requirements
Section 2-3 Facility Needs

2-3-1 Purchaser Responsibilities
The work and materials needed to prepare the site is the responsibility of the purchaser. Delay, confusion, and waste of manpower can be avoided by completing pre installation work before delivery. Use the Pre-installation checklist (provided in Table 2-7) to verify that all needed steps have been taken. Table 2-7 Voluson 730Pro/ProV Pre-Installation Check List
Action
Schedule at least 3 hours for installation of the system. Notify installation team of the existence of any variances from the basic installation. Make sure system and probes have been subject to acclimation period. Environmental cooling is sufficient. Lighting is adjustable to adapt to varying operational conditions of the scanner. Electrical facilities meet system requirements. EMI precautions have been taken and all possible sources of interference have been removed. Mandatory site requirements have been met. If a network is used, IP address has been set for the system and a dedicated network outlet is available.
Yes
No
Purchaser responsibility includes: NOTE: Procuring the materials required. Completing the preparations before delivery of the ultrasound system. Paying the costs for any alterations and modifications not specifically provided in the sales contract.
All electrical installations that are preliminary to the positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment must be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing must also be performed by qualified personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are highly sophisticated and special engineering competence is required. All electrical work on these products must comply with the requirements of applicable electrical codes. The purchaser of GE equipment must only utilize qualified personnel to perform electrical servicing on the equipment. The desire to use a nonlisted or customer provided product or to place an approved product further from the system than the interface kit allows presents challenges to the installation team. To avoid delays during installation, such variances should be made known to the individuals or group performing the installation at the earliest possible date (preferably prior to the purchase). The ultrasound suite must be clean prior to delivery of the machine. Carpet is not recommended because it collects dust and creates static. Potential sources of EMI (electromagnetic interference) should also be investigated before delivery. Dirt, static, and EMI can negatively impact system reliability.
2-5
2-3-2
NOTE:
Mandatory Site Requirements

GE Medical Systems requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its Ultrasound equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the system. The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet. Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the main facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit. The following are mandatory site requirements. Additional (optional) recommendations, as well as a recommended ultrasound room layout, are provided in Section 2-3-3 "Site Recommendations" . Door opening is at least 76 cm (30 in) wide. Proposed location for unit is at least 0.3 m (1 ft.) from the wall for cooling Clean and protected space for storage of probes (either in their case or on a rack). Material to safely clean probes (performed using a plastic container, never metal). Power outlet and place for any external peripheral are within 2 m (6.5 ft) of each other with peripheral within 1 m of the unit to connect cables.
NOTE:
The Voluson 730Pro/ProV has four outlets inside the unit. One is for the monitor and three for on board peripherals. In case of network option: An active network outlet in the vicinity of the ultrasound unit. A network cable of appropriate length (regular Pin-to-Pin network cable). An IT administrator who will assist in configuring the unit to work with your local network. A fixed IP address is required. Refer to the form provided in Figure 3-89 on page 3-72 for network details that are required.
NOTE:
All relevant preliminary network port installations at the prepared site must be performed by authorized contractors. The purchaser of GE equipment must utilize only qualified personnel to perform servicing of the equipment.
2-3-3
Site Recommendations
The following are (optional) site recommendations. Mandatory site requirements are provided in the Mandatory Site Requirements section, above. Door is at least 90 cm (3 ft.) wide Circuit breaker for dedicated power outlet is easily accessible Sink with hot and cold water Receptacle for biohazardous waste, like used probe sheaths Emergency oxygen supply Storage for linens and equipment Nearby waiting room, lavatory, and dressing room Dual level lighting (bright and dim) Lockable cabinet ordered by GE for its software and proprietary manuals
2-6
Section 2-3 - Facility Needs
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 2-3-3-1 Recommended Ultrasound Room Layout
Figure 2-1 below shows a floor plan illustrating the recommended layout of the Ultrasound Room and depicting the minimal room layout requirements.
Dedicated Power Outlets
VOLUSON
Hospital Network
Cabinet for Software and Manuals (optional)
35.5 IN. (92 CM)
Figure 2-1 Recommended Floor Plan 4.3m x 5.2m (14ft x 17ft)
2-7
2-3-4
2-3-4-1
Networking Pre-installation Requirements

Purpose of the DICOM Network Function DICOM (Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine) services provide the operator with clinically useful features for moving images and patient information over a hospital network. Examples of DICOM services include the transfer of images to workstations for viewing or transferring images to remote printers. As an added benefit, transferring images in this manner frees up the onboard monitor and peripherals, enabling viewing to be done while scanning continues. With DICOM, images can be archived, stored, and retrieved faster, easier, and at a lower cost.
2-3-4-2
DICOM Option Pre-installation Requirements To configure the Voluson 730Pro/ProV to work with other network connections, the sites network administrator must provide some necessary information. To configure the Voluson 730Pro/ProV ultrasound unit to work with other network connections, the network administrator must provide some necessary information. Use the Connectivity Setup Worksheet on page 3-71 to record required information that must include: Voluson 730Pro/ProV Details: DICOM network details for the Voluson 730Pro/ProV unit, incl. the host name, local port, IP address, AE title and net mask. IP addresses for the default gateway and other routers in use at the site. Details of DICOM devices in use at the site, including DICOM host name, AE title, DICOM port number and IP addresses.
Routing Information: DICOM Application Information:
Installation see: Section 3-11 "Network IP Address Configuration" on page 3-69.
2-8
Section 2-3 - Facility Needs
Chapter 3 Setup Instructions

3-1-1 The Purpose of Chapter 3
This chapter contains information needed to setup the Voluson 730Pro/ProV unit. Included are procedures to receive, unpack and configure the equipment. A worksheet is provided (see: page 3-71 to page 3-72) to help ensure that all the required information is available, prior to setup the system. Table 3-1
Section
3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 Overview Set Up Reminders Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment Preparing for Installation Connection of Auxiliary Devices Completing the Set Up Printer Installation System Configuration Available Probes Software/Option Configuration Network IP Address Configuration Connectivity Setup Worksheet Paperwork
3-1 3-2 3-5 3-7 3-9 3-34 3-38 3-60 3-68 3-68 3-69 3-71 3-73
Chapter 3 - Setup Instructions
3-1
Section 3-2 Set Up Reminders

3-2-1 Average Installation Time
The Voluson 730Pro/ProV installation and functional checkout will take approximately one hour; Voluson 730Pro/ProV consoles with optional equipment may take slightly longer. Once the site has been prepared, the average installation time require is shown in Table 3-2 below. Table 3-2 Average Installation Time
Average Installation Time
0.5 hours 0.5 to 1.5 hours 0.5 - 1.5 hours Dependant on the required configuration Dependant on the configuration amount
Description
Unpacking the scanner Scanner /options / printers DICOM Option
Comments
3-2-2
Installation Warnings
1.) Since the Voluson 730Pro/ProV weighs approximately 136 kg (300 lb.) without options, two people are required to unpack it. Two people are required for installing any additional items in excess of 16kg / 35 pounds (e.g., Monitor). 2.) There are no operator serviceable components. To prevent shock, do not remove any covers or panels. Should problems or malfunctions occur, unplug the power cord. Only qualified service personnel should carry out servicing and troubleshooting. Moving/Lifting the System
When pulling, moving or lifting the system, grasp it only at the rear handle of the trolley and the handle underneath the foot rest. Move the system forward or backward when going up or down incline. Do not move the system sideways or diagonally.
WARNING WARNING
Do NOT pull or lift the system with the front handle of the user interface (operator panel). Figure 3-1 moving or lifting the system
3-2
Section 3-2 - Set Up Reminders
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 3-2-2-1 System Acclimation Time
After being transported, the Voluson 730Pro/ProV system may be very cold or hot. It requires one hour for each 2.5C increment it's temperature is below 10C or above 40C.
CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Turning the system on without acclimation after arriving at site
may cause the system to be damaged.

!! CAUTION:
Table 3-3
Acclimation Time
40 104 0 35 96 0 30 86 0 25 77 0 20 68 0 15 59 0 10 50 0 5 41 2 0 32 4 -5 23 6 -10 14 8 -15 5 10 -20 -4 12 -25 -13 14 -30 -22 16 -35 -31 18 -40 -40 20
C F
hrs
60 140 8
55 131 6
50 122 4
45 113 2
3-2-2-2
Control Panel Position If weight is placed on the Operator I/O Panel in its extended position the console could tip over.
WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
The system should NOT be moved with the Control Panel (UI) extended. Move the Control Panel to its centered and locked position. Refer to Section 6-4 on page 5. Monitor mounting mechanism may break if not properly supported (e.g., with packing foam) during transportation.
Brake Pedal Operation
WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
3-2-2-3
WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
REMEMBER: If the front wheels are engaged for transportation, pressing the release brake pedals (brakes on front wheels under the foot rest) once disengages the lock.
3-3
3-2-3
DANGER
!! DANGER:
Safety Reminders WHEN USING ANY TEST INSTRUMENT THAT IS CAPABLE OF OPENING THE AC GROUND LINE (I.E., METERS GROUND SWITCH IS OPEN), DONT TOUCH THE UNIT!
Two people should unpack the unit because of its weight. Two people are required whenever a part weighing 16kg (35 lb.) or more must be lifted. If the unit is very cold or hot, do NOT turn on its power until it has had sufficient time to acclimate to its operating environment. To prevent electrical shock, connect the unit to a properly grounded power outlet. Do not use a three to two prong adapter. This defeats safety grounding. Do NOT wear the ESD wrist strap when you work on live circuits and more than 30 V peak is present. Do not use a 20 Amp to 15 Amp adapter on the 120 Vac units power cord. This unit requires a dedicated 16 A circuit. DO NOT operate this unit unless all board covers and frame panels are securely in place, to ensure optimal system performance and cooling. (When covers are removed, EMI may be present). OPERATOR MANUAL(S) The User Manual(s) should be fully read and understood before operating the Voluson 730Pro/ProV and kept near the unit for quick reference. ACOUSTIC OUTPUT HAZARD Although the ultrasound energy transmitted from the Voluson 730Pro/ProV probe is within FDA limits, avoid unnecessary exposure. Ultrasound energy can produce heat and mechanical damage.
CAUTION
!! CAUTION:
CAUTION
!! CAUTION:
CAUTION
!! CAUTION:
CAUTION
!! CAUTION:
CAUTION
!! CAUTION:
CAUTION
!! CAUTION:
CAUTION
!! CAUTION:
CAUTION
!! CAUTION:
Figure 3-2 Environmental Labels
3-4
Section 3-2 - Set Up Reminders
Section 3-3 Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment
CAUTION
!! CAUTION:
Transport only with forklift or stracker truck. During transport pay attention to the point of gravity (tilt and drop indicator)! Have two people available to unpack the Voluson 730Pro/ProV. Attempts to move the unit considerable distances or on an incline by one person could result in injury or damage or both.
The envelope with delivery address, packing list and invoice is located on the front panel of the crate.
Check whether delivery is complete (according to packing list) and check visual damage!
Figure 3-3 envelope at front panel of the crate
NOTICE The device must only be transported in the original packaging!

!! NOTICE:
Unpack the devices such a way that packaging can be reused. A drill with size 20 torx bit and/or a Phillips 2 screwdriver is needed to open the crate.
Table 3-4
Step
1.
Unpacking Procedure
Task
Loosen the screws and remove top panel from crate; top panel is used for the ramp.
tilt and drop indicator
center of gravity
3-5

Step
2.
Unpacking Procedure
Task
Open front panel by removing the screws from the side panels. Remove probes and accessories from the wooden box. probes and accessories
WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
screws
screws
Do not open side panels prior to removing the front panel! Accessories could drop down and DAMAGE the user interface!
packing 3. Loosen all screws to remove the wooden rack for accessories as well as the left, right and back panel.
wooden rack for accessories
4.
Carefully remove foam packing material and plastic bag from the ultrasound unit and monitor.
Caution: Two people are needed in the next step due to the weight of the equipment. 5. Disengage the brakes and slowly move unit down the ramp (top panel).
brakes
Brakes
top panel is used for ramp
Note: Packing crate and material should be stored for future use.
3-6
Section 3-3 - Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment
Section 3-4 Preparing for Installation

3-4-1 Verify Customer Order
1.) After unpacking the equipment, it is important to verify that all items ordered by the customer have been received. Compare all items listed on the packing slip (delivery note) with those received.
NOTICE It is recommended to keep and store the shipping carton and all other packing materials (including the
!! NOTICE:
support foams, anti-static plastic cover, etc.), in case the unit has to be moved to a different location. Unpack the devices such a way that packaging can be reused. For warranty purposes, storage of the above is required for one year from date of purchase. 2.) Visually inspect the system components using the following checklist. Table 3-5 Damage Inspection Checklist - Voluson 730Pro/ProV System
Recommended Procedure
Enter Serial Number: __________________________ (printed on main label on back of the system) Verify that the system is switched OFF and unplugged. Clean the console and control panel. Physically inspect the control console for missing or damaged items. After switching on the system, verify the proper illumination of all the control panel buttons. Check all probes for wear and tear on the lens, cable, and connector. Look for bent or damaged pins on the connector and in the connector socket on the unit. Verify that the EMI fingers around the probe connector socket housing are intact. Check the probe locking mechanism and probe switch. Clean the LCD display by gently wiping with a dry, soft, lint-free non-abrasive folded cloth. Inspect the monitor for scratches and raster burn. Verify that the systems cooling fans and peripheral fans are operating. Check the rear panel connectors for bent pins, loose connections and loose or missing hardware. Screw all the cable connectors tightly to the connector sockets on the panel. Verify that the labeling is in good condition. Check that all screws are tightly secured in place, that there are no dents or scratches and that no internal parts are exposed. Check and clean the peripherals in accordance with the manufacturers directions. To prevent EMI or system overheating, dress the peripheral cables inside the peripheral cover. Check the power cord for cuts, loose hardware, tire marks, exposed insulation, or any deterioration. Verify continuity. Replace the power cord, as required. Verify that the Voluson 730Pro/ProV is set to the correct voltage. see: Section 3-4-2 "System Voltage Settings" on page 3-8
Step
1 2 3
Item
Main label Console Control Console
Probes
5 6 7
LCD Display Fans Rear Panel
Covers
Peripherals
10
Power Cord System Voltage setting
11
NOTE:
Report any items that are missing, back-ordered, or damaged, to your GE Healthcare sales representative. The contact address is shown in Contact Information on page 1-15.
3-7
3-4-2
System Voltage Settings

Verify that the scanner is set to the correct voltage. The Voltage settings for the Voluson 730Pro/ProV Scanner is found on the identification plate, on the rear of the system.
Figure 3-4 Identification Plate

WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
CONNECTING A Voluson 730Pro/ProV SCANNER TO THE WRONG VOLTAGE LEVEL WILL MOST LIKELY DESTROY THE SCANNER.
3-4-3
EMI Protection
This unit has been designed to minimize the effects of Electo-Magnetic Interference (EMI). Many of the covers, shields, and screws are provided primarily to protect the system from image artifacts caused by this interference. For this reason, it is imperative that all covers and hardware are installed and secured before the unit is put into operation. Ensure that the system is protected from electromagnetic interference (EMI), as follows: Operate the system at least 15 feet away from equipment that emits strong electromagnetic radiation. Operate the system in an area enclosed by walls, floors and ceilings comprised of wood, plaster or concrete, which help prevent EMI. Shield the system when operating it in the vicinity of radio broadcast equipment, if necessary. Do not operate mobile phones or other EMI emitting devices in the ultrasound room. Verify that all EMI rules listed in the following table are followed:
The Voluson 730Pro/ProV ultrasound unit is approved for use in hospitals, clinics and other environmentally qualified facilities, in terms of the prevention of radio wave interference. Operation of the ultrasound unit in an inappropriate environment can cause electronic interference to radios and television sets situated near the medical equipment. For further details and EMI Prevention/Abatement refer to Section 2-2-3 "EMI Limitations" on page 2-3.
3-8
Section 3-4 - Preparing for Installation
Section 3-5 Connection of Auxiliary Devices

3-5-1
NOTE:
Preparations
Normally the auxiliary devices and peripherals come already installed with the system. 1.) Carefully remove plastic caps using a knife and loosen screws and washers. (see: Figure 3-5) 2.) When the cover is loose on top, pull the rear cover out and move it upwards.
plastic caps; screw and washers Figure 3-5 Remove rear cover plate 3.) Disconnect the GND ground cable from the back of rear cover plate.
Figure 3-6 GND ground cable 4.) Connect Peripherals according to correct connection scheme described in the following subsections (refer to Table 3-6 on page 3-10). 5.) Connect the ground cable at the rear cover plate. 6.) Mount rear cover plate, reattach screw and washers and plug-in the caps.
3-9
3-5-1
Preparations (contd)
Table 3-6 below outlines Voluson 730Pro/ProV hardware installation procedures described in the sub-sections. Table 3-6 Connection Procedures
Description
Monitor Connection Foot Switch Connection ECG-preamplifier Connection Global Modem Connection S-VHS Video Recorder Connection DVD Recorder (DVR) Connection B/W Video Printer Connection Line Printer Connection Digital Color Printer Connection Bluetooth Printer Connection Worldwide 19 secondary Patient Monitor kit External USB-Devices
Sub-section
3-5-2 3-5-3 3-5-4 3-5-5 3-5-6 3-5-7 3-5-8 3-5-9 3-5-10 3-5-11 3-5-12 3-5-13
Page Number
3-11 3-11 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-15 3-19 3-21 3-22 3-23 3-25 3-32
WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
DO NOT attempt to use different peripherals and accessories other than approved and provided by GE Healthcare! Any unauthorized peripherals may cause system failure or damage! After each installation, the leakage currents have to be measured according to IEC 60601-1 respectively UL 60601-1.
Line Printers are not medical devices, they have to be located outside of the patient environment (according to IEC 60601-1 / UL 60601-1).
WARNING WARNING
CAUTION Please observe that some printers may not be medical devices! If the Bluetooth Printer and/or
!! CAUTION:
2,5 m
1,5 m
1,5 m
1,5 m
NOTE:
For more detailed Safety Considerations when connecting auxiliary devices to the Voluson 730Pro/ProV system, please review: Chapter 1 - Auxiliary Devices Safety.
3-10
Section 3-5 - Connection of Auxiliary Devices
3-5-2
NOTE:
Monitor Connection
The monitor comes already installed with the system.
3-5-3
Foot Switch Connection
Figure 3-7 Foot Switch Connection Scheme NOTE: After physical connection, adjust the Footswitch (Left/Right) as described in Section 3-7-7 "Remote Control Selection" on page 3-59.
3-5-4
ECG-preamplifier Connection
Figure 3-8 ECG Connection Scheme
3-11
3-5-5
Global Modem Connection
Figure 3-9 Global Modem Connection Scheme
WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
Never install the telephone wiring, or use the modem during an electric storm; there may be a remote risk of electrical shock from lightning.
Use of any other power adapter will void the warranty and could damage the modem.
CAUTION Use only the power adapter supplied with the modem and connect it as shown.
!! CAUTION:
3-12
3-5-6
NOTE:
S-VHS Video Recorder Connection

Please refer to connection scheme belonging to the used VCR type: Section 3-5-6-1 "Mitsubishi HS-MD3000" on page 3-13 Section 3-5-6-2 "Sony SVO-9500MD" on page 3-14 Mitsubishi HS-MD3000 There are two types of Mitsubishi HS-MD3000 VCR (PAL and NTSC) approved by GE Healthcare. Use the standard VCR type (PAL or NTSC) that is suited to your region. connection with the system!
3-5-6-1 NOTE:
CAUTION ONLY the specific GE - Kretztechnik Version of this video recorder type may be used in
!! CAUTION:
Figure 3-10 Mitsubishi - Video Recorder Connection Scheme

NOTICE Please use the proper connection set and remote cable.
!! NOTICE:
see: Section 9-12 "Optional Peripherals and Accessories" on page 9-26.
3-13
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 3-5-6-2 Sony SVO-9500MD
Figure 3-11 Video Recorder Connection Scheme
Set DIP Switches on back of the VCR as shown: Switch 1: Switch 2: Switch 3: Switch 4: Switch 5 + 6: OFF-Audio is muted during fast playback OFF-FF/REW mode is used during searches. ON-VCR counter is reset upon cassette ejection. OFF-The VCR can be controlled by the system. ON-The Baud rate is set to 19200 bit/sec (must be the same as Voluson 730Pro/ProV)
Figure 3-12 DIP Switches

NOTICE Please use the proper connection set and remote cable.
!! NOTICE:
3-14
3-5-7
DVD Recorder (DVR) Connection

for easy access to the DVD tray.
NOTICE Regardless of what other peripherals are installed, the DVD Recorder needs to be put on the lower shelf
!! NOTICE:
NOTICE The Sony DVO-1000MD DVD recorder is only able to read and write on DVD+RW (ReWriteable)
!! NOTICE:
media! Please check on your DVD case before using.
Figure 3-13 DVD Recorder - Connection Scheme When all power and signal cables are connected to the system and DVD recorder, proceed as follows: Adjust the DVD Recorder settings as described in Section 3-5-7-1 on page 3-16. Check and if necessary change the Video Norm, see: Section 3-8-1-6 on page 3-63. Check and if necessary change the Record Type + VCR Source, see: Section 3-7-7 on page 3-59.
3-15
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 3-5-7-1 3-5-7-1-1 NOTE: Adjustment of the DVD Recorder Settings Changing TV System (Video Format)
To check Video format needed, see: Table 3-7, TV-System and Region Code, on page 3-18. 1.) If not already done, switch ON the Sony DVO-1000MD DVD recorder. 2.) Turn ON the power of the Voluson 730Pro/ProV system. 3.) Press the MENU button (A) located on the front of the DVD recorder see Figure 3-14 below.
Up
Left
Right Down
Figure 3-14 Keys on the front of the recorder 4.) The Main Menu appears on the LCD screen of the DVD recorder, see: Figure 3-15 below.
select [SETUP MENU]
Figure 3-15 Main Menu - [SETUP MENU] highlighted 5.) Press the (down) button on the front of the recorder repeatedly until the [SETUP MENU] item is highlighted. NOTE: Each time you press the (up) or (down) button, the highlight cursor moves up/down item by item. 6.) Press the (right) button. The Setup Menu appears, see Figure 3-16 on page 3-17.
3-16
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 3-5-7-1-1 Changing TV System (Video Format) (contd)
7.) Press the (down) button repeatedly, until [MENU GRADE] is highlighted.
change MENU GRADE to ENHANCED
Figure 3-16 Setup Menu - [MENU GRADE] highlighted 8.) Press the (right) button and select [ENHANCED]. 9.) Press the (left) button, to exit the Menu Grade menu. NOTE: Now additional items (see: Figure 3-17 on page 3-17) are displayed in the Setup Menu. 10.)Select [TV SYSTEM] by pressing the (down) button.
Menu Grade: ENHANCED REGION CODE
TV SYSTEM
Figure 3-17 Setup Menu - [TV SYSTEM] highlighted 11.)Press the (right) button. The TV System Sub menu appears. 12.)Select the appropriate video signal by pressing the (up) or (down) button respectively. To check the video signal, see: Table 3-7, TV-System and Region Code, on page 3-18. 13.)Press the SET button (C). The message Now loading... appears and the unit starts to save the settings. 14.)When Power off appears on the display, press the POWER switch on the front of the DVD recorder to turn power off. 15.)Press the POWER switch again to turn power on.
3-17
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 3-5-7-1-2 NOTE: Change the Region Code
To specify the correct region code, see: Table 3-7, TV-System and Region Code, on page 3-18. 1.) If not already done, switch on the Sony DVO-1000MD DVD recorder. 2.) Press the MENU button (A) located on the front of the DVR, see: Figure 3-14 on page 3-16. 3.) The Main Menu appears on the LCD screen of the DVD recorder, see: Figure 3-18 below.
select [SETUP MENU]
Figure 3-18 Main Menu - [SETUP MENU] highlighted 4.) Press the (down) button on the front of the recorder repeatedly until the [SETUP MENU] item is highlighted. 5.) Press the (right) button. The Setup Menu appears, see Figure 3-17 on page 3-17. 6.) Press the (down) button repeatedly, until [REGION CODE] is highlighted. 7.) Press the (right) button. The Region Code Menu appears. 8.) Select the appropriate region code by pressing the (up) or (down) button respectively. To check the region code, see: Table 3-7, TV-System and Region Code, on page 3-18. 9.) Press the SET button (C). The message Now loading... appears and the unit starts to save the settings. 10.)When Power off appears on the display, press the POWER switch on the front of the DVD recorder to turn power off. 11.)Press the POWER switch again to turn power on. Table 3-7 TV-System and Region Code
Country
USA and Canada Western Europe, Middle East, South Africa Japan Southeast Asia, incl. Hong Kong Central and South America, Australia Africa Eastern Europe, Russia, Central Asia incl. India China
Region Code
1 2 2 3 4 5 5 6
TV-System
NTSC PAL NTSC PAL/NTSC PAL NTSC PAL PAL
3-18
3-5-8
B/W Video Printer Connection
Figure 3-19 B/W Video Printer (Sony UP-895MD) - Connection Scheme
Set DIP Switches on back of the Black/White printer as shown in the image (all DOWN).
NOTICE Please use the proper connection set.

!! NOTICE:
3-19
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 3-5-8-1 Sony UP-D897 (digital)
Figure 3-20 B/W Video Printer (Sony UP-D897) - Connection Scheme
NOTICE The switch of the printer has to be in ON position before starting the system.
!! NOTICE:
Leave printer switch always in the ON position.
NOTE:
For further installation instructions see: Section 3-7-3 "Installing Digital Black & White Printer Sony UP-D897" on page 3-43.
3-20
3-5-9
Line Printer Connection
Figure 3-21 Line Printer Connection Scheme
CAUTION Please observe that the Line Printer (HP 990cxi or HP 995c) has to be located outside of the
patient environment (acc. IEC 60601-1 / UL 2601-1).

!! CAUTION:
!! NOTICE:

!! NOTICE:
NOTE:
For further installation instructions see: Section 3-7-1 "Installing Line Printer HP 990cxi or HP 995c" on page 3-39.
3-21
3-5-10
Digital Color Printer Connection
Figure 3-22 Digital Color Printer Connection Scheme
CAUTION Pay attention to lateral distances. See Instruction Manual of the printer!
!! CAUTION:
CAUTION The Printer Supply Voltage must be the same as the Output Voltage of the
Voluson 730Pro/ProV Power Out Connectors (Power Supply)!

!! CAUTION:
!! NOTICE:

!! NOTICE:

CAUTION The Sony UP-D23MD printer must never be connected to USB-ports on the SBC backplane.
Please use one of the two outlets on the back of the GEM (Disk Drive Module) only.
!! CAUTION:
NOTE:
For further installation instructions see: Section 3-7-2 "Installing Digital Color Printer Sony UP-D23MD or UP-D25MD" on page 3-41.
3-22
3-5-11
NOTE:
Bluetooth Printer Connection

Please refer to connection scheme belonging to the used B/W Printer type: Section 3-5-11-1 "HP 5600/5900 Series" on page 3-23 Section 3-5-11-2 "Canon Pixma MP600/MP610" on page 3-24 HP 5600/5900 Series
3-5-11-1
Figure 3-23 HP Bluetooth Printer - Connection Scheme

CAUTION Please observe that the complete Bluetooth Printer Assembly has to be located outside of the

!! CAUTION:
CAUTION The printer being used may not be a medical device. The Bluetooth Printer Set and the Power
!! CAUTION:
Supply of the Bluetooth Printer Adapter is also not a medical device. The equipment meets the requirements of the EN60950 Standard.
!! NOTICE:

NOTICE Please use the proper Bluetooth Printer Connection set.
!! NOTICE:
3-23
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 3-5-11-2 Canon Pixma MP600/MP610
Figure 3-24 Canon Bluetooth Printer - Connection Scheme

CAUTION Please observe that the complete Bluetooth Printer Assembly has to be located outside of the

!! CAUTION:
CAUTION The Printer and the Bluetooth Printer Adapter used may not be a medical device.
The equipment meets the requirements of the EN60950 Standard.

!! CAUTION:
!! NOTICE:
3-24
3-5-12
Worldwide 19 secondary Patient Monitor kit

This chapter gives you information, how to mount the additional Patient monitor to the wall and connect it to the Voluson 730Pro/ProV. Average Installation Time One person, 45 minutes Required parts (for Wall mount kit H48671EM Item No.: 820) Monitor: Dell, 1907 FP (KTI220525, KTZ220525) Wall Mount Kit: Ergotron FX30 (KTI220526, KTZ220526) Transformer: IMED300WR, 300VA (KTI300707, KTZ220714) VGA Cable (KTI220527, KTZ220527) Installation Manual (KTD102148, Revision 1)
Tools NOTE: Philips screwdriver 2 Allen key electrical drill slotted screwdriver or blade of a knife
It is also possible to order only the Isolation Transformer Kit (H48671WN) and use a different monitor. In this case observe the following: 1.) The monitor must not be rated for more than 330W. 2.) The optimal screen resolution is: Voluson 730: 1024 x 768 The following connector plug is required on your Monitor to be able to connect it to the Transformer
Figure 3-25 IEC C14 plug If you only use the Isolation Transformer, please proceed with 3-5-12-7 on page 3-29 3-5-12-1 Mounting the Monitor
NOTICE The monitor included in this package is not intended for diagnostic use. It is an additional device used
to allow the patient to watch the proceedings.

NOTICE The monitor must NOT be connected to the main supply directly. Always connect the monitor to the
transformer!
NOTICE DO NOT use original DELL accessories, like stand, powercable, VGA cable, USB cable, Dell CD ROM. NOTICE All necessary modifications to wall and buildings must be performed by a professional to avoid
structural damage and electrical hazard.
3-25
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 3-5-12-2 Preparation
1.) Unpack the monitor and dismount the monitor from its foot. 2.) Place it flat and screen down on a table. 3.) Unscrew the the 4 philips screws.
Figure 3-26 Unscrewing monitor screws (4th screw hidden behind hand) 3-5-12-3 Monitor bracket mount 1.) Place the monitor bracket mount in the indention in the middle of the rear of the monitor 2.) Fix the monitor bracket mount in place by screwing in the 4 philips screws.
Figure 3-27 Fixing monitor bracket mount 3-5-12-4 Sandwichplate 1.) Place the sandwich plate on top of the monitor bracket mount. 2.) Fix the sandwich plate in place by screwing in the 4 Allen screws.
Figure 3-28 Fixing sandwich plate (left), position of Allen screws (right) 3-26 Section 3-5 - Connection of Auxiliary Devices
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 3-5-12-5 Wall Bracket Mount
Find out the exact position required, so patients can observe the monitor easily.
Monitor Bracket Mount Wall bracket mount
Figure 3-29 Wall Mount kit for 19 LCD Secondary Monitor

NOTICE Take your time to think about the best position of the monitor in your facilities. Patients should be able
to view the monitor easily and without having to bend or turn around.
NOTICE All necessary modifications to wall and buildings must be performed by a professional to avoid
structural damage and electrical hazard.

NOTICE Use adequate screws and wall plugs.
a.) Mark all the holes of the bracket mount on the wall. Make sure it is level. b.) Drill the holes, using an electric drill. c.) Fix the wall bracket mount by means of appropriate screws and wall dowels as shown in Table 3-30 below.
Figure 3-30 Wall Bracket Mount
3-27
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 3-5-12-6 Mounting and Locking Procedure
1.) Place the hook of the monitor bracket mount in the indention of the wallbracket mount to suspend the monitor. 2.) Rotate the locking lever until it is vertical. Now the monitor is mounted and secure.
NOTICE To rotate the lever to its locking position you need to press the unlock button of the monitor, as seen in
Figure 3-31 below.
Unlock button
Lever Hook of Monitor Bracket mount
Figure 3-31 Mounting and Locking Procedure
Figure 3-32 Removal Procedure
3-28
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 3-5-12-7 Mounting the Transformer
NOTICE The transformer is IPX 0. There is no protection against ingress of liquids!
isolation Transformer
Monitor Power cable
Power Cord set
Fuses 2AT, 4AT
Figure 3-33 Isolation Transformer kit for 19 LCD Secondary Monitor 1.) Place the isolation transformer on the floor. The transformer must be out of the reach of the patient, however, it needs to be within cablelength from the monitor and a socket. 2.) Before using the Isolation Transformer you must check the input Voltage settings to meet the ratings of the line power available in your location or country. 3.) For changing the input voltage, open the power inlet block with a small screwdriver and remove the red fuse holder.
Figure 3-34 changing input voltage 4.) By turning the fuse holder you can switch between 115V and 230V. Consider that changing the input voltage also requires to change the fuses! 5.) The adjusted voltage can be seen in the viewing window after closing the fuse box.
115V (100-130V) -> 4AT 230V (220-240V) -> 2AT
Figure 3-35 input voltage setting
3-29
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 3-5-12-7 Mounting the Transformer (contd)
6.) The output voltage must also be changed by the turn-switch, which is located on the right side. 7.) For that purpose use an appropriate screwdriver and make sure the the transformer is switched off.
For an Input-Voltage Range of 100-130V set to position A. For an Input-Voltage Range of 220-240V set to position B.
Figure 3-36 output voltage setting 8.) Assure that the connected loads can be operated with the chosen voltage. 3-5-12-8 Rewiring The VGA cable needs to be connected
Rear Side of V730
Figure 3-37 VGA Cable Connection Voluson 730
NOTICE Do NOT try to connect the monitor to the systems via USB cable. Use the VGA cable. NOTICE The monitor must NOT be connected to the main supply directly. Always connect the monitor to the
transformer!
NOTICE The monitor is the only item to be connected to the transformer.
3-30
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 3-5-12-8 Rewiring (contd)
1.) Take the Isolation Transformer and connect the Transformer power cable and the Monitor cable, which is part of the kit (KTI220527).
Transformer power cable
Monitor power cable
Figure 3-38 Connection of Transformer power cable and Monitor power cable 2.) Use this power switch to power on the Transformer. Wait ~1 minute before turning on your monitor.
Figure 3-39 power switch 3-5-12-9 Final check
NOTICE No message will verify that a new monitor is connected on the system screen.
1.) Switch on the monitor at the main switch of the monitor. Switch on the system.
main switch
Figure 3-40 Front side and main switch of Dell monitor 2.) Compare the picture on the newly installed monitor with the picture on the system monitor. 3.) If you need to change the configuration of the newly installed monitor, please, refer to the manual of the monitor, which is enclosed in the Wall mount kit. 4.) To ensure compliance with the system standard IEC 601-1.1 measure leakage current of the new system. For details: see 10-7 and see 10-8. 5.) Switch off the monitor at the main switch of the monitor. And switch off the system. Chapter 3 - Setup Instructions 3-31
3-5-13
WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
External USB-Devices
Do not connect or disconnect any external USB-devices to or from the system while scanning a patient! The appearing dialogs could distract you from the scan!
External USB Devices - Connection When an external USB-storage device (such as a USB-memory stick or external hard disk) is connected to the Voluson 730Pro/ProV system, Windows detects the device and automatically installs a driver. During this process, several dialogs may pop up, starting with the Found New Hardware dialog.
3-5-13-1
Figure 3-41 Found New Hardware - USB Device The device is then accessible using the drive letter the system assigned to it.
NOTICE When connecting external USB devices, be sure to execute Safety Directions found in Chapter 2 of the
!! NOTICE:
Voluson 730Pro/ProV Basic User Manual. 3-5-13-2 External USB Devices - Disconnection Before an external USB-device (e.g., USB-memory stick) can be disconnected, the system has to be informed about the removal of the device! For this purpose the System Setup - BACKUP page (see: Figure 4-22 on page 4-32) has a STOP USB DEVICES button.
CAUTION Unplugging or ejecting USB devices without first stopping them can often cause the system to
crash and possibly result in loss of valuable data.

!! CAUTION:
By clicking the STOP USB DEVICES button, the Unplug or Eject Hardware dialog is started. Using this dialog, the USB-devices can be stopped before they are physically disconnected.
Figure 3-42 Unplug or Eject Hardware
3-32
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 3-5-13-2 External USB Devices - Disconnection (contd)
The Unplug or Eject Hardware dialog shows all USB-devices that are connected to the system. On every system is an USB mass storage device, the DVD/CD writer, which has the drive letter (F:). If the system has an optional MO-drive installed as well, it is listed too, and has the drive letter (E:). To stop the external device, select it and click the STOP button. A dialog shows which components will be stopped. To finish the process, click [OK].
Figure 3-43 Stop a Hardware device Finally, a dialog shows that the device was stopped successfully. The device can now be safely disconnected from the system.
Figure 3-44 Safe to Remove Hardware By clicking OK, the Unplug or Eject Hardware dialog is active again. Close this dialog by clicking CLOSE. Afterwards select OK to reboot the system.
CAUTION If the systems DVD/CD writer or (optional) MO-drive was stopped by accident, simply stop the
!! CAUTION:
external device as well and reboot the system. During reboot, the DVD/CD writer and the MO-drive will be installed again.
3-33
Section 3-6 Completing the Set Up

3-6-1 Connecting the Unit to a Power Source
The connection of the Voluson 730Pro/ProV ultrasound unit to a power source should be performed by a qualified person who has completed basic Voluson 730Pro/ProV System User Training. Use only the power cords, cables and plugs provided by or designated by GE Healthcare to connect the unit to the power source.
CAUTION Prior to connect the Voluson 730Pro/ProV unit to a power source, verify compliance with all
!! CAUTION:Prior to
electrical and safety requirements. Check the power cord to verify that it is intact and of hospital-grade. Products equipped with a power source (wall outlet) plug should be connected to the fixed power socket that has a protective grounding conductor. Never use an adapter or converter to connect with a power source plug (for example, a three-prong to two-prong converter).
WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
The units power must be supplied from a separate, properly rated outlet to avoid risk of fire. Refer to Section 2-2-2-1 "Voluson 730Pro/ProV Power Requirements" on page 2-2 for rating information. The power cord should not, under any circumstances, be altered to a configuration rated less than that specified for the current.
observe the safety precautions. First unplug the main power cable from the wall outlet socket, then from the unit itself. Remove by pulling on the cable connector - DO NOT pull on the cable.
CAUTION Whenever disconnecting the Voluson 730Pro/ProV unit from the electrical outlet, always
!! CAUTION:
CAUTION The Voluson 730Pro/ProV requires all covers!

!! CAUTION:
Operate this system only when all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. The covers are required for safe operation, good system performance and cooling purposes.
3-6-2
3-6-2-1
Power On / Boot Up
Scanner Power On 1.) Connect the Power Cable to the back of the system. 2.) Connect the Main Power Cable to a hospital grade power receptacle with the proper rated voltage. Never use an adapter that would defeat the safety ground. 3.) Switch ON the Circuit Breaker at the rear of the system.
Circuit Breaker Connector for Mains Power Cable
Figure 3-45 Circuit Breaker at rear of system

NOTICE When AC power is applied to the scanner, the ON/OFF switch on the control panel is illuminated,
!! NOTICE:
indicating that the System (including the Back-end Processor) is in standby mode. Section 3-6 - Completing the Set Up
3-34
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 3-6-2-2 Back-end Processor Boot Up
Press the ON/OFF Standby switch left below the Control Panel.
ON/OFF Standby Switch
Figure 3-46 ON/OFF Standby Switch NOTE: The mains outlet of the system for peripheral auxiliary equipment are commonly switched with the Standby switch. The switch of printers has to be in ON position before starting the system. However, be aware some auxiliary equipment may switch itself to standby mode when Standby power is on (e.g., Color video printer) and must therefore be switched on separately. When the ON/OFF Standby switch left below the Control Panel is pressed, the System (including the Back-end Processor) starts and the operating system is loaded which then leads the application software to activate the scanner. The system automatically performs an initialization sequence which includes the following: Loading the operating system. Running a quick diagnostic check of the system. Detecting connected probes
As soon as the software has been loaded, the system enters 2D-Mode with the probe and application that were used before the system was shut down. NOTE: Total time used for start-up is about 2 minutes.
3-35
3-6-3
Power Off/ Shutdown

The system may not be able to boot if power is recycled too quickly.
NOTICE After turning off a system, wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again.
!! NOTICE:
3-6-3-1
Back-end Processor Power Down 1.) Press the ON/OFF Standby switch left below the Control Panel; see: Figure 3-46.
3-6-3-2
Scanner Shutdown 1.) Press the ON/OFF Standby switch left below the Control Panel. 2.) Switch OFF the Circuit Breaker at the rear of the system.
NOTE:
The mains outlet of the system for peripheral auxiliary equipment are commonly switched with the Standby switch. So the auxiliary equipment need not to be switched ON/OFF separately.
WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
Disconnection of the Main Power Cable is necessary! For Example: When repairing the system.
3.) After complete power down, unscrew the 2 screws and remove the pull-out protection to disconnect the main power cable from the system or unplug it from the AC wall outlet socket.
Circuit Breaker 2 screws
pull-out Protection Mains Power Cable
Figure 3-47 Circuit Breaker, Protection and Power Cable on back of Voluson 730Pro/ProV 4.) Press once on the brakes to block the front wheels (brakes on front wheels under the foot rest). 5.) Disconnect probes. (Turn the probe locking handle counterclockwise and then pull the connector straight out of the probe port.)
CAUTION DO NOT disconnect a probe while running (Live Scan Write mode)!
A software error may occur. In this case switch the unit OFF (perform a reset).
!! CAUTION:
3-36
Section 3-6 - Completing the Set Up
3-6-4
Transducer Connection
Connect a transducer to one of the three rightmost transducer receptacle as follows: 1.) Inspect the probe and probe socket to verify that it is free of debris. 2.) Ensure that the probe locking lever is at horizontal position. 3.) Insert the transducer connector on the receptacle guide pin until it touches the receptacle mating surface. 4.) Twist the transducer twist lock lever to vertical position to lock it in place. Twist the lever to the horizontal position to disconnect the transducer.
Figure 3-48 Transducer Connection
CAUTION Do not bend the probe cable acutely. Fault conditions can result in electric shock hazard.
!! CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of probe connectors which are exposed when the probe is removed. Do not touch the patient when connecting or disconnecting a probe. NOTE: Prior to connecting or disconnecting a probe, freeze the image. It is not necessary to turn OFF power to connect or disconnect a transducer.
3-37
Section 3-7 Printer Installation

NOTE: For Connection schemes refer to Section 3-5 "Connection of Auxiliary Devices" on page 3-9. For further installation instructions see: Section 3-7-1 "Installing Line Printer HP 990cxi or HP 995c" on page 3-39. Section 3-7-2 "Installing Digital Color Printer Sony UP-D23MD or UP-D25MD" on page 3-41. Section 3-7-3 "Installing Digital Black & White Printer Sony UP-D897" on page 3-43 Section 3-7-4 "Installing Mitsubishi B&W P95 and Color Printer CP30" on page 3-45 Section 3-7-5 "Printer Installation manually" on page 3-47. Section 3-7-6 "Adjustment of Printer Settings" on page 3-52.
CAUTION The Bluetooth Printer Connection set as well as the Color Deskjet printer MUST NOT be installed
by the user!
!! CAUTION:
For installation please contact your local distributor or GE service representative.
3-38
Section 3-7 - Printer Installation
3-7-1
Installing Line Printer HP 990cxi or HP 995c

1.) Power off/Shutdown the system as described in: Section 3-6-3 on page 3-36. 2.) Connect the printer as described on page 3-9 and reinstall the rear cover plate.
NOTE:
For connection schemes refer to Section 3-5-9 on page 3-21.
NOTICE Do not connect the USB-cable to the printer!

!! NOTICE:
NOTE:
Mouse functions can be performed by using the trackball for moving the cursor. Normal select (Click) = left/right trackball key ; Opening a context menu = upper trackball key 3.) Turn ON the printer, then switch ON the power of the system and wait till the system has booted.
NOTE: 3-7-1-1
The power switch of the printer has to be in ON position before starting the system! Install the HP 990cxi or HP 995c printer software/driver Perform the following steps if this printer was never installed on the Voluson 730Pro/ProV! 4.) Connect the USB cable to the printer and the system. The windows Searching for Drivers , Found new Hardware and finally the following windows appear.
select Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended)
Click on Specify a location
Figure 3-49 Found New Hardware Wizard
3-39
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 3-7-1-1
Install the HP 990cxi or HP 995c printer software/driver (contd) 5.) Click the NEXT buttons to start the Hardware Wizard and to locate the driver files. 6.) Use the BROWSE button to search the following path on the hard disk (see: Figure 3-50) C:\Utilities\PrinterDriver\HPDeskjet990c for HP 990cxi C:\Utilities\PrinterDriver\HPDeskjet995c for HP 995c, and then click OK.
Figure 3-50 Search for Network path on hard disk 7.) Confirm the correct path and click NEXT to install the driver. All necessary files are copied. 8.) Confirm the installation by clicking FINISH to close the Hardware Wizard.
Figure 3-51 Confirm correct path and finish the Installation 9.) Close all open windows and restart the system (turn off and on the system).
NOTICE After boot up of the system, verify the correct settings in the printer Properties, see: Section 3-7-6
!! NOTICE:Ver
"Adjustment of Printer Settings" on page 3-52.
3-40
3-7-2
Installing Digital Color Printer Sony UP-D23MD or UP-D25MD

1.) Power off/Shutdown the system as described in: Section 3-6-3 on page 3-36. 2.) Connect the printer as described on page 3-9 and reinstall the rear cover plate.
NOTE:
For connection schemes refer to Section 3-5-10 on page 3-22 .

!! NOTICE:
NOTE:
NOTE: 3-7-2-1
The power switch of the printer has to be in ON position before starting the system! Install the UP-D23MD / UP-D25MD printer software/driver Perform the following steps if this printer was never installed on the Voluson 730Pro/ProV! 1.) Connect the USB cable to the printer and the system. The windows Searching for Drivers , Found new Hardware and finally the following windows appear.
Figure 3-52 Found New Hardware Wizard 2.) Select No, not this time and verify with NEXT. 3.) In the next window, select Install from a list or specific location!" and then click on NEXT. 4.) Select Search for the best driver in these locations and check mark Include this location in the search (see: Figure 3-52 on page 3-41).
3-41
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 3-7-2-1 NOTE:
Install the UP-D23MD / UP-D25MD printer software/driver (contd) If path (R:\system\....) is different from what is shown in Figure 3-56, click on the BROWSE button to search correct driver.
R:\system\periph\SonyUP-D23MD
verify correct path, otherwise [Browse] for R:\system\periph\SonyUP-D23MD Figure 3-53 Search for Network path 5.) Confirm the correct path and click NEXT to install the driver. All necessary files are copied. 6.) If the following Warning message appears, click CONTINUE ANYWAY.
Figure 3-54 Finish installation 7.) Confirm the installation by clicking FINISH to close the Hardware Wizard. 8.) Close all open windows and restart the system (turn off and on the system).
NOTICE After boot up of the system, verify the correct settings in the printer Properties,
!! NOTICE:Ver
see: Section 3-7-6 "Adjustment of Printer Settings" on page 3-52.
3-42
3-7-3
Installing Digital Black & White Printer Sony UP-D897

1.) Power Off/Shutdown the system as described in: Section 3-6-3 on page 3-36. 2.) Connect the printer as described on page 3-20.

!! NOTICE:
NOTE:
NOTE: 3-7-3-1
The power switch of the printer has to be in ON position before starting the system! Install the UP-D897 printer software/driver Perform the following steps if this printer was never installed on the Voluson 730Pro/ProV! 1.) Connect the USB cable to the printer and the system. The windows Searching for Drivers , Found new Hardware and finally the following windows appear.
Figure 3-55 Found New Hardware Wizard 2.) Select No, not this time and verify with NEXT. 3.) In the next window, select Install from a list or specific location!" and then click on NEXT. 4.) Select Search for the best driver in these locations and check mark Include this location in the search (see: Figure 3-56 on page 3-44).
3-43
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 3-7-3-1 NOTE: Install the UP-D897 printer software/driver (contd)
If path (R:\system\....) is different from what is shown in Figure 3-56, click on the BROWSE button to search correct driver.
R:\system\periph\SonyUP-D897
verify correct path, otherwise [Browse] for R:\system\periph\SonyUP-D897 Figure 3-56 Search for Network path 5.) Confirm the correct path and click NEXT to install the driver. All necessary files are copied. 6.) If the following Warning message appears, click CONTINUE ANYWAY.
Figure 3-57 Finish installation 7.) Confirm the installation by clicking FINISH to close the Hardware Wizard. 8.) Close all open windows and restart the system (turn off and on the system).
!! NOTICE:
"Adjustment of Printer Settings" on page 3-52. Section 3-7 - Printer Installation
3-44
3-7-4
NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: NOTE:
Installing Mitsubishi B&W P95 and Color Printer CP30

Mouse functions" can be performed by using the trackball for moving the cursor. "Normal select" (Click) = left/right trackball key; "Opening a context menu" = upper trackball key To use the Mitsubishi Printer with older Systems and Software versions a printer driver has to be installed. A printer driver disk is included with the new printer. If you use the Printer, please always take the same USB port. If the same system software version (where Mitsubishi driver installation was performed) is re-installed by performing "Restore", "Initialize" and "New Disk" via LINUX, this printer will be found again as a new hardware device when connecting it to the system. The printer driver will have to be installed again via hardware wizard. Please be sure to leave the printer driver disk at the customer site with the other current software discs. Dip-Switch Settings for the Color Printer (KTZ302616); 1 and 2 ON; 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 OFF. If you use the B&W Printer (KTZ302617) you must first activate USB Serial number. 1.) The Printer must be switched OFF. 2.) Press the "COPY" and "CONT" button together and switch ON the Printer. When the display shows "S1" let off the both button. 3.) Press the "FUNC" button; the display shows "U0". 4.) Adjust to "U2" by using the turning knob. 5.) Press the "FUNC" button again and then switch OFF the Printer. 1.) Connect the printer to the system. 2.) Switch ON the power of the system and wait till the system has booted and then turn ON the printer. 3.) The "Found New Hardware Wizard" window appears.
NOTE: NOTE:
Figure 3-58 Found New Hardware Wizard / select "Install from ..." 4.) Select "Install from a list or specific location" and click on NEXT.
3-45
3-7-4
Installing Mitsubishi B&W P95 and Color Printer CP30 (contd)

5.) In the next window select "Search for the best driver in these locations", select "Include this location in the search:" and browse for the right path. "R:\system\periph\Mitsubishi P95D" for the B&W Printer and "R:\system\periph\Win2000_XP" for the Color Printer or "C:\Utilities\PrinterDriver\Mitsubishi PD95" for the B&W Printer and "C:\Utilities\PrinterDriver\Win2000_XP" for the Color Printer. Path depeD95 or F:\Win2000_XP. (where F: stands for CD/DVD Drive) Then click on NEXT.
NOTE:
If the "Printer Driver" Disk is defective or not available, download driver from GE folders
http://libraries.ge.com/foldersIndex.do?entity_id=15869258101&sid=101&SF=1
and extract files to CD or USB disk.
Search for the best driver in these location
Include this location in the search
Figure 3-59 select "Search for the ..." and "Include this location ..." 6.) Confirm the installation by clicking FINISH to close the Hardware Wizard.
Figure 3-60 Finish installation 7.) Close all open windows and verify the correct settings in the printer "Properties", see: Section 3-7-6 "Adjustment of Printer Settings" on page 3-52.
3-46
3-7-5
Printer Installation manually

1.) On the control panel, press the UTILITIES key. 2.) In the Utilities menu on the left side of the screen, select SYSTEM to invoke the setup desktop. 3.) Select the SERVICE page. The password window appears automatically.
Figure 3-61 System Setup Service page 4.) Enter the password SHE and click the ACCEPT button to display the Service Tools window.
Printer button
Figure 3-62 Service Tools window 5.) Click on the PRINTER button.
3-47
3-7-5
Printer Installation manually (contd)

6.) Click the ADD PRINTER button. A warning message appears: Please read this message carefully and click YES if you have skills to do this.
Figure 3-63 Add Printer and Printer Installation/Properties 7.) Click the NEXT button to start the Add Printer Wizard. 8.) Select the Local Printer, deselect Automatically install Plug and Play printer and then click NEXT.
Figure 3-64 Add Printer Wizard
3-48
3-7-5 Printer Installation manually (contd)

9.) Select the corresponding Printer Port (e.g., Figure 3-65 = USB001) and click NEXT.
Figure 3-65 Select Printer Port 10.)In the following window select the HAVE DISK button.
Figure 3-66 Have Disk... 11.)Use the BROWSE button to search the Printer Driver path (C:\Utilities\PrinterDriver\xxxx).
3-49
3-7-5 Printer Installation manually (contd)
Figure 3-67 Select Printer Driver path (C:\Utilities\PrinterDriver\....) 12.)Click OPEN, select the xxx.inf file and click OPEN again. 13.)Verify the selected Printer Driver path and confirm with OK.
Figure 3-68 verify selected Printer Driver path 14.)Select the manufacturer and model of your printer and confirm with the NEXT button.
3-50
3-7-5
Printer Installation manually (contd)

15.)Assign a name, decide if the printer should be used as default printer and confirm with NEXT. see: Figure 3-69.
Figure 3-69 Assign name and select Printer Sharing - no 16.)Select Do not share this printer and confirm the Printer Sharing window (Figure 3-69) by clicking NEXT. 17.)The Complete the Add Printer Wizard window appears on the screen.
Figure 3-70 Complete manual Printer Installation 18.)Complete the manual Printer Installation with the FINISH button. 19.)Close all open windows, close the System Setup with SAVE & EXIT and restart the system (turn off and on the system).
!! NOTICE:Ver
"Adjustment of Printer Settings" on page 3-52.
3-51
3-7-6
Adjustment of Printer Settings

1.) After system restart, press the UTILITIES key, and then select SYSTEM from the menu area. 2.) Select the SERVICE page. The password window appears automatically. 3.) Enter the password SHE and click the ACCEPT button. 4.) Click on the PRINTER button. 5.) Select the desired printer from the pull-down menu and click the EDIT SETTINGS button. 6.) Confirm the warning message with the YES button. The Printer Properties appear.
select the desired printer from the pull-down menu
Figure 3-71 Select the desired printer To adjust the Line Printer see: Section 3-7-6-1 "HP 990cxi / HP 995c- Printer Settings" . To adjust the Color Printer see: Section 3-7-6-2 "UP-D23MD / UP-D25MD - Printer Settings" . To adjust the CP30D Color Printer see: Section 3-7-6-3 "Mitsubishi Printer - Settings" To adjust the Black&White Printer see: Section 3-7-6-4 "UP-D897 - Printer Settings" . To adjust the Bluetooth printer see: Section 3-7-6-5 "Bluetooth Deskjet - Printer Settings"
WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
After each printer installation, the leakage currents have to be measured acc. IEC 60601-1 resp. UL2601-1.
3-52
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 3-7-6-1 HP 990cxi / HP 995c- Printer Settings
1.) Call up the Printer Properties; operation see: Section 3-7-6 "Adjustment of Printer Settings" . 2.) Select the GENERAL page and click the PRINTING PREFERENCES... button. 3.) Select the SETUP page for adjusting print quality and paper size. Paper type should be set to Automatic. See left Figure 3-72. 4.) Select the FEATURES page for adjusting Two-Side Printing if desired. Orientation must be set to Portrait. See right Figure 3-72.
Figure 3-72 HP Printer - Settings 5.) For saving the adjusted printer settings click APPLY and then OK. 6.) Select the PORTS page and selct/verify the correct USB printer port. 7.) For saving the adjusted printer settings click APPLY and then OK. Finally close the Printers -window with the close button and exit System Setup with SAVE&EXIT. 8.) Assign the HP 990cxi / HP 995c printer as Report Printer; see: Section 3-7-7 "Remote Control Selection" on page 3-59. 9.) Print report page(s) containing measurements. For operation see Basic User Manual of Voluson 730Pro/ProV. 10.) Turn off the system!
3-53
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 3-7-6-2 UP-D23MD / UP-D25MD - Printer Settings
1.) Call up the Printer Properties; operation see: Section 3-7-6 "Adjustment of Printer Settings" .
NOTICE Settings for Paper Size MUST match with the used Paper (large/small) and also the right color ink
!! NOTICE:
cartridge has to be used. Otherwise you will get an error message at printing. 2.) Select the PAPER page and select: Paper Size: UPC-23L (large) / UPC-23S (small) Orientation: Landscape (recommended when using large paper size) High Speed (check mark on)
Figure 3-73 Paper page
3-54
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 3-7-6-2 UP-D23MD / UP-D25MD - Printer Settings (contd)
3.) Select the GRAPHICS page. From the Color Adjust pop-up menu select: a.) Color Balance: Cyan = 0; Magenta = 0; Yellow = 0 b.) Gamma Select: Gamma 1
Figure 3-74 Graphics page (Color Balance + Gamma Select) c.) Color Correction: set Printer Hardware Color Correction d.) Lightness: Sharpness = 7 or 8; Dark = 0; Gamma = -12; Light = 8
Figure 3-75 Graphics page (Color Correction + Lightness) 4.) For saving the adjusted printer settings click APPLY and then OK. Finally close the Printers-window with the close button and exit System Setup with SAVE&EXIT. 5.) Assign the Printer to remote keys PRINT A and/or PRINT B; see: Section 3-7-7 on page 3-59. Chapter 3 - Setup Instructions 3-55
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 3-7-6-3 3-7-6-3-1 Mitsubishi Printer - Settings Color Printer CP30
1.) Call up the Printer Preferences; operation see: Section 3-7-6 "Adjustment of Printer Settings" . 2.) Select the PAPER page and select: Paper Size: L (large) Orientation: Landscape (recommended when using large paper size)
Figure 3-76 Paper page 3.) For saving the adjusted printer settings click APPLY and then OK. Finally close the "Printer Preferences" window with the close button and exit System Setup with SAVE&EXIT. 3-7-6-3-2 B&W Printer P95 1.) Printer Settings directly on the B&W Printer: a.) Press the BRT button on the printer and adjust Brightness to 0 by using the turning knob. b.) Press the CONT button on the printer and adjust Contrast to 0 by using the turning knob. c.) Press the SHARP button on the printer and adjust Sharpness to 3 by using the turning knob. d.) Press the FUNC button on the printer and adjust Gamma to r5 by using the turning knob. For saving and exit press the BRT button twice.
Brightness: 0
Contrast: 0
Sharpness: 3
Gamma: 5
Figure 3-77 Printer Settings - B&W Printer If necessary remove the CD and restart the system (turn off and on the system). 3-56 Section 3-7 - Printer Installation
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 3-7-6-4 UP-D897 - Printer Settings
1.) Call up the Printer Properties; operation see: Section 3-7-6 "Adjustment of Printer Settings" . 2.) Select the LAYOUT page (see: Figure 3-78 below) and select: Paper: 960x1280 Orientation: Portrait Interpolation Method: Bilinear
Figure 3-78 Layout + Density Adjust page 3.) Select the DENSITY ADJUST page (see: Figure 3-78 above) and select: Gamma: TONE2 Sharpness = 0; Dark = 0; Light = 0 ; Sharpness = 2
4.) For saving the adjusted printer settings click APPLY and then OK. Finally close the Printers -window with the close button and exit System Setup with SAVE&EXIT. 5.) Assign the Printer to the remote keys PRINT A and/or PRINT B; see: Section 3-7-7 "Remote Control Selection" on page 3-59.
3-57
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 3-7-6-5 Bluetooth Deskjet - Printer Settings
CAUTION The Bluetooth Connection Set as well as the color printer MUST NOT be installed by the user!
For installation please contact your local distributor or GE service representative.

!! CAUTION:
1.) Call up the Printer Properties; operation see: Section 3-7-6 "Adjustment of Printer Settings" . 2.) Select the GENERAL page and click the PRINTING PREFERENCES... button. 3.) Select the PAPER/QUALITY page and select the adequate paper size.
Figure 3-79 Paper/Quality page 4.) For saving the adjusted paper size settings click APPLY and then OK. 5.) In the next window, click OK again. Finally close the Printers -window with the close button and exit System Setup with SAVE&EXIT. 6.) Assign the Deskjet printer as Report Printer; see: Section 3-7-7 "Remote Control Selection" on page 3-59. 7.) Print report page(s) containing measurements. For operation see Basic User Manual of Voluson 730Pro/ProV. 8.) Turn off the system!
3-58
3-7-7
Remote Control Selection

To assign an auxiliary device (e.g., printer) to the remote keys PRINT A and/or PRINT B, or to adjust Record Type, Foot switch, etc.: 1.) On the control panel, press the UTILITIES key. 2.) In the Utilities menu on the left side of the screen select SYSTEM to invoke the setup desktop. 3.) Select the PERIPHERALS page.
Record Type
VCR Source
Foot Switch Remote Control
Report Printer Print B Print A Figure 3-80 Peripherals page NOTE: Record Type: Select whether you use a VCR (Video Cassette Recorder) or DVR (DVD Recorder). VCR Source: Select S-VHS. Remote Print A: Select the desired Printer for the remote control PRINT A key. Remote Print B: Select the desired Printer for the remote control PRINT B key.
Optionally the Remote Control can be done by Foot switches. Therefore select Print A or Print B in Foot Switch Left or Foot Switch Right - section. Report Printer: Select the desired Report Printer from the drop-down menu.
NOTICE The selected Report Printer is usually used for printing reports and images from Sonoview.
!! NOTICE:
Foot Switch Left/Right: Select desired function of the Foot switch Left and Right.
After adjustment, click SAVE&EXIT to save Settings and exit System Setup.
3-59
Section 3-8 System Configuration

3-8-1 System Setup
Modifications of system parameters are supported by diverse dialog pages and windows on the system setup desktop: General - Date, Time, Clinic Name, Language, Screen saver, etc. User Settings - to save User programs, 3D/4D programs, Auto Text, Doppler 2D Refresh, etc. Peripherals - to adjust assignment of PRINT keys, Foot Switch, selection of Save Destination, etc. Option - shows which options are installed in the system Service - enter the password to get access to the Service Tools functions Backup - Save/Load User Settings Only, Save/Load/Delete Full Backup Network - to set up all DICOM, Sonoview and Network configuration nodes System Info - shows which Software/Hardware version is installed in the system
NOTICE More detailed information pertaining System Setup adjustments is found in the Voluson 730Pro/ProV
!! NOTICE:
Basic User Manual; see: Table 9-19, System Manuals, on page 9-31. 3-8-1-1 To invoke the Setup procedure:
1.) Press the UTILITIES key on the Control Panel. The menu area changes to the Utilities menu. 2.) Select the SYSTEM item to activate the setup desktop screen.
In general operations are done with the trackball and the trackball keys (mouse emulation).
Trackball (mouse position): positions the pointing device (arrow) on the desktop
left trackball key (left mouse button): sets, fixates markers and activates pages/buttons etc. marked by the pointing device
upper trackball key (right mouse button): no function in system desktop
right trackball key (left mouse button): sets, fixates markers and activates pages/buttons etc. marked by the pointing device
3-60
Section 3-8 - System Configuration
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 3-8-1-2 How to enter Date and Time
1.) Invoke System Setup as described in Section 3-8-1-1 on page 3-60. 2.) Select the GENERAL page in the System Setup desktop.
select Date Format
Display options select Time Format select Date/Time and Time Zone enter Clinic Name change Language change EUM Language Exit without saving Save Settings & Exit Figure 3-81 System Setup - General page 3.) Select the Date Format (only one can be active). 4.) Click the DATE/TIME button to activate a sub dialog window to enter date, time and time zone. 5.) Click the TIME FORMAT button to activate a sub dialog window to choose preferred time format. 6.) Click SAVE&EXIT to save Settings and exit System Setup.
3-8-1-3
How to enter Hospital Name 1.) Invoke System Setup as described in Section 3-8-1-1 on page 3-60. 2.) Select the GENERAL page in the System Setup desktop. 3.) Select the text box to enter a new Clinic Name with the keyboard. 4.) Click SAVE&EXIT to save Settings and exit System Setup. The clinic name will be copied into the Hospital ID in the information header.
3-8-1-4
How to change Language and the EUM Language 1.) Invoke System Setup as described in Section 3-8-1-1 on page 3-60. 2.) Select the GENERAL page in the System Setup desktop. 3.) Select the desired language from the pop-up menu. 4.) Click SAVE&EXIT to save Settings and exit System Setup.
NOTE:
After changing the language the system has to reboot.
3-61
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 3-8-1-5 How to activate Screen Lock
1.) Invoke System Setup as described in Section 3-8-1-1 on page 3-60. 2.) Select the GENERAL page in the System Setup desktop. 3.) Check mark Screen Lock. a.) If no password previously entered, the following dialog appears.
Figure 3-82 Screenlock Password b.) Enter New Password. NOTE: A new screen lock password must be at least 6 characters long and has a maximum length of 80 characters. The password must contain at least 2 non-letter characters, 0...9 or !@#$%^*(). c.) Retype new Password and then click SAVE&EXIT to save new screen lock password. 4.) Click SAVE&EXIT to save Settings and exit System Setup. NOTE: If screen is locked you have to enter the password to get full system control. If password is unknown click EMERGENCY. This enables standard - but limited - operation.I
Figure 3-83 screen is locked

NOTICE The Screen Lock password cannot be reset by the user! Please contact your GE service representative.
!! NOTICE:
3-62
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 3-8-1-6 How to change Video Norm 1.) Press the UTILITIES key on the Control Panel.
2.) Select the SYSTEM item from the Utilities menu - which is shown in the menu area on the left side of the screen - to activate the setup desktop screen. 3.) Select the SERVICE page in the System Setup, enter the password SHE and then click ACCEPT.
select Video Norm
Exit without saving Figure 3-84 Service Functions window 4.) If not currently selected, click the desired field PAL (50Hz) or NTSC (60Hz). NOTE: The Adjustment of the Video Norm will take about 3 minutes! 5.) Click SAVE&EXIT to exit System Setup. 6.) The system will reboot. 3-8-1-7 How to change the Keyboard Layout see: Chapter 6 - Modification of Keyboard Layout
Save Settings & Exit
3-63
3-8-2
On-Board Optional Peripherals

Mains outlets: Mains socket ST1, ST2, ST3, ST4, ST5 for accessories. All mains outlets are co-switched by the units mains switch via built-in isolation transformer. Output voltage for: ST1 - ST5: 115V or 230V.
CAUTION Modification of voltage setting only by an authorized service person!

!! CAUTION:
The maximum power consumption of equipment (inclusive color video monitor) connected to these outlets must not exceed 350VA !
Table 3-8
Approved Peripherals
Device Manufacturer
SONY SONY SONY
Model
UP-895MD UP-D897 UP-D21MD UP-D23MD SVO-9500MD SVO-9500-MDP HS-MD3000U HS-MD3000E hp deskjet 990cxi hp deskjet 995c HP 5600 Series Olivetti Job Jet 210 HP 5940 Pixma MP600/MP610 Pixma MP550 MCM3130AP MT5634ZBA MAN6 MFT7
Video Signal/ Connection

NTSC/PAL USB-Port USB-Port USB-Port NTSC PAL NTSC PAL USB-Port USB-Port USB-Port (Bluetooth) USB-Port (Bluetooth) USB-Port (Bluetooth) USB-Port (Bluetooth) USB-Port (Bluetooth)
B/W Video Printer Digital B/W Video Printer Digital Color Printer
SONY SONY Video Cassette Recorder Mitsubishi Hewlett Packard Line Printer Hewlett Packard Hewlett Packard Olivetti Color Deskjet Printer (Bluetooth) Hewlett Packard Canon Canon Magneto-Optical Drive (MOD) Global Modem ECG Preamplifier Footswitch DVD Recorder 19 LCD Secondary Monitor Sony DELL Fujitsu Multi-Tech
DVO-1000MD 1907FP/1908FP
PAL/NTSC
3-64
3-8-3
External I/O Connection Panel (GES)

1 2 3 4 5 6
Figure 3-85 External I/O Panel Connectors
Table 3-9
Item
1 2 3 4 5 6
External I/O Connector Descriptions

Table Number
Table 3-10 Table 3-11 Table 3-12 Table 3-13 Table 3-13 Table 3-14
Connector Name
VGA OUT MODEM NETWORK USB-1 USB-2 COMP VIDEO OUT
Description
print out VGA signal with monitor/printer RJ-11 with global adapter kit for modem connection DICOM input/output twisted pair RJ-45 10/100 megabit/s USB port USB port BNC Connector, Color Video Output
3-65
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 3-8-3-1 External I/O Pin Outs Table 3-10 VGA OUT Connector, Sub-D 15 Pin
Pin No
1 2 3 4, 9,11,12,15 5, 6, 7, 8, 10 13 14
Output Signal
VGA OUT1 R VGA OUT1 G VGA OUT1 B N/C GND VGA OUT1 HS VGA OUT1 VS
Description
Red Green Blue N/C GND H Sync V Sync
Table 3-11
Modem, RJ-11 Modular 6 Pin

Pin No
2 3 4 5 Others
Output Signal
TEL L4 TEL L2 TEL L1 TEL L3 NC
Description
Telephone L4 Telephone L2 Telephone L1 Telephone L3 Non-connection
Table 3-12
Network Connector, RJ45 Modular 8 Pin

Pin No
1 2 3 6 Others
Output Signal
ETHER TD ETHER TD ETHER RD ETHER RD NC
Description
Ethernet RD+ Ethernet RDEthernet TD+ Ethernet TDNon-connection
Table 3-13
USB 1, 2 Connectors
Pin No
1 2 3 4
Output Signal
VCC - Data + Data GND
Description
USB Power Supply USB Data (-) USB Data (+) USB Power Ground
3-66
Table 3-14
COMP VIDEO OUT Connector

Pin No Signal
Signal Signal GND
Description
1 (Center Pin) 2 (Coax Pin)
Table 3-15
Footswitch Connector (located at Power Supply Module CPN - rear side)

Pin No
1 2 3 4
Input Signal
Signal GND right switch left switch not connected
Description
normally open normally open not connected
3-8-4
Video Specification
Video specifications may be needed to be able to connect laser cameras or other devices to the Voluson 730Pro/ProV. Table 3-16 Video Specifications VGA Connector
Value
800 x 600 47.20 21.20 1.50 2.94 16.15 0.616 pos 75.00 13.30 0.170 0.276 12.68 0.174 49.54
Timing Parameter
Visible Resolution Horizontal Rate [kHz] H Total cycle time [s] H Sync width [s] H Back Porch [s] H Active Video Time [s] H Front Porch [s] Horizontal +/Vertical Rate [Hz] Vertical Total cycle time [ms] V Sync Width [ms] V Back Porch [ms] V Active Video Time [ms] V Front Porch [ms] Dot Clock [MHz]
3-67
3-8-4
Video Specification (contd)

Electrical Specifications on VGA Connector Signal Level: 700 mV at 75 Ohm H/V Sync: TTL Level Video Specifications for Composite, Video Connector
PAL 50Hz
800 x 600 17.734475 MHz = 4* ft 64s / 1135 Pixel 50.50s / 902 Pixel 1.96s / 35 Pixel 4.62s / 82 Pixel 6.52s / 116 Pixel 20ms / 312.50 Lines 18.18ms / 284 Lines 256us 4 Lines 160us / 2.50 Lines 1408us / 22 Lines 5 yes 14.75 (H) : 17.734475 (V)
Table 3-17
S-Video Output set to: Timing Parameter

Visible Resolution Pixel Clock Horizontal Total Line Horizontal Active Display Horizontal Front Porch Horizontal Sync Width Horizontal Back Porch Vertical Total Lines Vertical Active Lines Vertical Front Porch Vertical Sync Vertical Back Porch Serration Pulses Interlaced Aspect Ratio pixel size Video levels on 75 Ohm: white level black level blanking level sync level*
NTSC 60Hz
800 x 600 14.318 MHz = 4* ft 63.56s / 910 Pixel 52.50s / 752 Pixel 1.62s / 23 Pixel 4.68s / 67 Pixel 4.76s / 68 Pixel 16.68ms / 262.50 Lines 15.22ms / 239.50 Lines 381us / 6 Lines 190us 7 3 Lines 890us / 14 Lines 6 yes 14.75 (H) : 14.318 (V)
1020mV 370mV 320mV 20mV
1020mV 370mV 320mV 20mV
Section 3-9 Available Probes

See Chapter 9 - System Manuals, for part numbers to be used when ordering new or replacement service probes.
Section 3-10 Software/Option Configuration

For description refer to: Section 3-8-1 "System Setup" on page 3-60
NOTICE More detailed information pertaining System Setup and Measure Setup adjustments is found in the
!! NOTICE:
Voluson 730Pro/ProV Basic User Manual, which is available in different languages.
3-68
Section 3-9 - Available Probes
Section 3-11 Network IP Address Configuration

NOTE: Following Information must be provided by customer or hospital engineer before you can start: A Station name, AE Title, IP address and Port Number for the Voluson 730Pro/ProV. The IP addresses for the default gateway and other routers at the site for ROUTING INFORMATION. Only if necessary (e.g. for Internet access). 1.) Press the UTILITIES key on the Control panel once to display the Utilities menu. 2.) Select SYSTEM and then open the NETWORK page on the System Setup desktop screen. 3.) Click the NETWORK CONFIGURATION button, read the message and confirm with YES.
click Network Configuration button, read message and afterwards confirm with Yes Figure 3-86 Network Configuration 4.) The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog page appears.
You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability. You need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate settings.
Type in: IP address Subnet mask Default gateway NOTE:This example shows fictional numbers!
Figure 3-87 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) To specify a DICOM Address, follow the instructions of described in the Basic User Manual, Chapter 17 of the Voluson 730Pro/ProV. Chapter 3 - Setup Instructions 3-69
3-11-1
Map Network Drive

1.) Select the MAP NETWORK DRIVE button (in the System Setup - Network page, see: Figure 3-86) to open a dialog where the system can be connected to a shared network drive of another server.
Figure 3-88 Map Network Drive window 2.) Enter the name of the shared network folder in the Network Folder Name field. 3.) Supply a valid user name and a password for this folder. NOTE: If you check the Automatic Reconnect box, the system tries to establish the connection again when starting up. Otherwise, the connection must be re-established manually after a shutdown or reboot. 4.) Select the CONNECT button to establish the connection to the remote machine. If successful, the DISCONNECT button becomes active.
NOTICE If there is an error during the connection, a warning message appears inside the dialog.
!! NOTICE:
In this case, please verify the data in the dialog.

NOTICE If there already is a connection to the remote server, the CONNECT button is grayed.
!! NOTICE:
To change the existing connection, first click on DISCONNECT and then enter the new settings.
WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
Please make sure that the server you are connecting to is trustworthy and reliable. For details, contact your local system administrator. If you backup Sonoview data to this server, all the patients demographic data will be copied to this server!
3-70
Section 3-11 - Network IP Address Configuration
Section 3-12 Connectivity Setup Worksheet

Site System Information
Site: Dept: Serial #: Type: Floor: Room: REV: Comments:
CONTACT INFORMATION Name Title Phone E-Mail Address
TCP/IP Settings
Name - AE Title:
IP Settings
IP Address: Subnet Mask: Default Gateway:
Remote Archive Setup

Remote Archive IP: Remote Archive Name:
Services (Destination Devices)

Device Type Manufacturer Name IP Address Port AE Title
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
3-71
Section 3-12
Voluson 730Pro/ ProV Host Name AE Title
Connectivity Setup Worksheet (contd)
Local Port
IP Address Net Mask
. .
. .
. .
ROUTING INFORMATION
Destination IP Addresses . . . . . . . . .
GATEWAY IP Addresses Default . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROUTER1 ROUTER2 ROUTER3 DICOM APPLICATION INFORMATION NAME Store 1
MAKE/REVISION
AE TITLE
IP ADDRESSES . . .
PORT
Store 2
Store 3D_1
Store 3D_2
Print
Worklist
Structured Reporting
Storage Commit
MPPS
Figure 3-89 Worksheet for DICOM Network Information
3-72
Section 3-12 - Connectivity Setup Worksheet
Section 3-13 Paperwork

NOTE: During and after installation, the documentation (i.e. User Manual, Installation Manual,...) for the peripheral units must be kept as part of the original system documentation. This will ensure that all relevant safety and user information is available during the operation and service of the complete system.
3-13-1
NOTE:
Product Locator Installation

The Product Locator Installation Card shown may not be same as the provided Product Locator card.
Figure 3-1 Product Locator Installation Card
3-13-2
User Manual(s)
Check that the correct User Manual(s) for the system and software revision, is included with the installation. Specific language versions of the User Manual may also be available. Check with your GE Sales Representative for availability.
3-73
3-74
Section 3-13 - Paperwork
Chapter 4 Functional Checks

This chapter provides procedures for quickly checking major functions of the Voluson 730Pro/ProV scanner diagnostics by using the built-in service software, and power supply adjustments. Table 4-1
Section
4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 Overview Required Equipment General Procedure Functional Checks Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images Software Configuration Checks Peripheral Checks Mechanical Function Checks Site Log
4-1 4-1 4-2 4-7 4-32 4-42 4-43 4-44 4-45
NOTICE Most of the information pertaining to this Functional Checks chapter is found in the Voluson 730Pro/
!! NOTICE:
ProV (BT05, BT08) Basic User Manual; see: Table 9-19, System Manuals, on page 9-31.
Section 4-2 Required Equipment

An empty (blank) DVD/CD+(R)W or MO Disk. At least one transducer. See System Manuals on page 9-31 for an overview. (normally you should check all the transducers used on the system)
Chapter 4 - Functional Checks
4-1
Section 4-3 General Procedure

CAUTION
!! CAUTION:
SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERS Operate this unit only when all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. The covers are required for safe operation, good system performance and cooling purposes. Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA only) Follow OSHA Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring you are in total control of the Power Cable on the system.
NOTICE
!! NOTICE:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
4-3-1
Power On / Boot Up
NOTICE After turning off a system, wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again.
4-3-1-1
Scanner Power On 1.) Connect the Power Cable to the back of the system. 2.) Screw on the pull-out protection of the mains power cable with the 2 screws. 3.) Connect the Power Cable to an appropriate mains power outlet. 4.) Switch ON the Circuit Breaker at the rear of the system.
Circuit Breaker 2 screws
pull-out Protection Mains Power Cable
Figure 4-1 Circuit Breaker, Protection and Power Cable on back of Voluson 730Pro/ProV
NOTICE When AC power is applied to the scanner, the ON/OFF switch on the Control panel illuminates amber,
!! NOTICE:
indicating the System (including the Back-end Processor) is in standby mode.
4-2
Section 4-3 - General Procedure
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 4-3-1-1 Scanner Power On (contd)
5.) Press the ON/OFF Standby switch left below the control panel.
ON/OFF Standby switch
Figure 4-2 ON/OFF Standby Switch NOTE: The mains outlet of the system for peripheral auxiliary equipment are commonly switched with the Standby switch. So the auxiliary equipment need not to be switched ON/OFF separately. When the ON/OFF Stand-By switch left below the control panel is pressed, the System (including the Back-end Processor) starts and the software code is distributed to initiate the scanner. As soon as the software has been loaded, the system enters 2D-Mode with the probe and application that were used before the system was shut down. Depending on the BIOS-Version no status messages are displayed during this process. Boot up time is about 2 minutes.
4-3-2
Power Off / Shutdown

NOTICE After turning off a system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again.
4-3-2-1
Scanner Shutdown 1.) Press the ON/OFF Standby switch left below the Control Panel. 2.) Switch OFF the Circuit Breaker at the rear of the system.
NOTE:
The mains outlet of the system for peripheral auxiliary equipment are commonly switched with the Standby switch. So the auxiliary equipment need not to be switched ON/OFF separately.
WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
Disconnection of the Main Power Cable is necessary! For Example: When repairing the system.
3.) After complete power down, unscrew the 2 screws and remove the pull-out protection to disconnect the main power cable from the system or unplug it from the AC wall outlet socket. Refer to Figure 4-1 on page 4-2. 4.) Press once on the brakes to block the front wheels (brakes on front wheels under the foot rest). 5.) Disconnect probes. (Turn the probe locking handle counterclockwise and then pull the connector straight out of the probe port.)
CAUTION DO NOT disconnect a probe while running (Live Scan Write mode)!
A software error may occur. In this case switch the unit OFF (perform a reset).
!! CAUTION:
4-3
4-3-3
4-3-3-1
System Features
Control Panel 1 2 3
4 19 18 17 16 6 7 15 8 5
14
13
12
11
10
Figure 4-3 Control Panel Tour 1.) Ultrasound scanning gel holder 2.) Sonoview (Image Management) key 3.) VCR Remote Control key 4.) TGC - Slider Controls 5.) Mode/Gain keys 6.) 3D Volume Mode, 4D Volume Mode and Harmonic Imaging key 7.) Inter memory keys to save to Sonoview or send to DICOM server 8.) Print A-, Print B-Trigger key 9.) Freeze / Run key 10.)Trackball and Trackball keys 11.)Trackball Menu Navigation key 12.)Annotation and Measurement keys 13.)Menu Control digipots and toggle switch controls 14.)Exit key 15.)Navigation wheel (Menu control element) 16.)Probe key 17.)Patient Data Entry key 18.)Utilities key 19.)Keyboard with shortcut function keys and F1 key to invoke the Electronic User Manual (EUM) 4-4 Section 4-3 - General Procedure
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 4-3-3-2 Menu Control
Figure 4-4 Menu Control Area- 2D Main Menu 1.) User Program: shows all setting for the active application. The active one is highlighted 2.) Additional functions which are supported by the selected Mode. 3.) Sub Menu: to adjust settings of the selected Scan mode. 4.) Status Area: shows the current functionality of the digipots, toggle switch controls and the trackball 5.) Status of the FREEZE key NOTE: Different menus are displayed depending on which Menu and which Mode is selected. DIGIPOTS, TOGGLE SWITCH CONTROLS and TRACKBALL Activated functions are easily controlled by these controls. By rotating resp. switching, they deliver digital pulses and can be selected by program call-up. They are displayed in the status area by their location, their function, and their actual value of setting. NAVIGATION WHEEL and corresponding KEYBOARD-SHORTCUT FUNCTIONS The available menus are shown in the menu area on the left side of the screen. The current menu selection is highlighted. Roll the navigation wheel and the blue arrow moves to another selection. Press the navigation wheel to select the desired item.The corresponding keyboard shortcuts (1, 2, 3, etc.) are shown to the right of the actual function. If the TRACKBALL MENU NAVIGATION key is illuminated, the trackball is consequently assigned to select the menu items in the menu area on the left side of the screen. Pressing SET (the left or right trackball key) starts selected menu function.
4-5
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 4-3-3-3 Monitor Display
Figure 4-5 Monitor Display Tour
Table 4-2
1. Logo
Monitor Display Features

14. Image Area 15. Measurement results 16. Status (volume box, saved images, gray map) 17. Status area of the Freeze key 18. Status area of the trackball 19. Status area of digipots and flip switch controls 20. Menu (Softkey) area 21. Bodymarks 22. Depth scale markers 23. Gray scale wedge 24. Focal zone marker(s) 25. Orientation marker
2. Patient Name (Last-, First-, Middle Name) 3. Patient ID-number ; GA (Gestational Age) 4. Probe / Application 5. Depth / Frame rate 6. Mechanical Index 7. Thermal Index 8. Sonographers Name 9. Hospital Name (Identification) 10. Date 11. Time 12. Image Info 13. TGC curve
4-6
Section 4-3 - General Procedure
Section 4-4 Functional Checks

For a basic functional check of the systems different modes, following pages will familiarize you with image optimization for: 2D Mode (B Mode), see: Section 4-4-1 on page 4-8 M Mode, see: Section 4-4-2 on page 4-11 NOTE: NOTE: MCFM Mode MTD Mode PW - Pulsed Wave Doppler CW - Continuous Wave Doppler CFM - Color Flow Mode PD - Power Doppler TD - Tissue Doppler 3D Static 4D Real Time 4D Biopsy* VCI* Volume Contrast Imaging (A-Plane, C-Plane and VCI Static) STIC* T.U.I.* (Tomographic Ultrasound Imaging) VOCAL II*
Spectral Doppler Modes, see: Section 4-4-3 on page 4-13
Color Doppler Modes, see: Section 4-4-4 on page 4-15
Volume Modes, see: Section 4-4-5 on page 4-17
Some software may be considered standard depending upon system configuration. If any Modes or Options are not part of the system configuration, the check can be omitted. Different menus are displayed depending on which Menu and which Mode is selected. Some function only appear in the menu area and the status area of the digipots and flip switch controls if they are available for the selected Probe.
NOTICE Not all Options are available on the Voluson 730Pro V (marked with * in this manual).
!! NOTICE:
4-7
4-4-1
2D Mode Checks
Figure 4-6 2D Main and 2D Sub
Table 4-3
Step
1
2D Mode Functions
Task Expected Results
Rotate the 2D MODE key to adjust the sensitivity (brightness) of the entire image.
2D Mode Gain Transmit Power
Optimizes image quality and allows user to reduce beam intensity.
Depth 3 Adjusts the depth range of the ultrasound image for the region of interest. The number of image lines and the frame rate are automatically optimized.
Screen Format (Dual, Quad, Single) 4
Press this keys to change the display Mode from Single to DUAL or QUAD display mode. Press the SINGLE format key or the 2D MODE key to change from Dual or Quad to Single display.
Image Orientation 5 Use the LEFT/RIGHT respectively the UP/DOWN keys on the control panel to alternate the image orientation. The orientation marker on the screen shows the actual orientation. 2D Automatic Optimization 6
Pressing the AUTO key causes automatic optimization of the gray scale to enhance the contrast resolution. Pressing again: optimization will be updated and remain active. Press the AUTO key twice to switch off the Automatic Optimization in 2D. Pulses are transmitted not only perpendicularly to the acoustic window, but also in oblique directions. The advantages of XBeam-CRI are enhanced contrast resolution with better tissue differentiation and clear organ borders.
XBEAM-CRI (CrossBeam Compound Resolution Imaging)
4-8
Section 4-4 - Functional Checks

Step
8
2D Mode Functions
Speckle Reduction Imaging is a smoothing type filter to reduce speckle in the ultrasound image. Changes the Single image display to two simultaneous half images. The left frame shows only the 2D Mode image. The right frame shows the 2D Mode image with SRI information. Changes the Single image display to two simultaneous half images. The left frame shows only the 2D Mode image. The right frame shows the 2D Mode image with XBEAM CRI and SRI information. FFC combines a low frequency to increase the penetration and higher frequency to keep a high resolution. It reduces speckle and artifacts in the 2D image. Coded Excitation improves image resolution and penetration in the far field. This allows to use a higher frequency on technically difficult patients. Advantage of the Trapezoid Mode: The scan area is very increased in relation to the linear display by steering the ultrasound lines in the border of the probe. Press this key in write mode. The displayed zoom box can be placed over the entire 2D image area, also the size and position of the zoom box can be changed. Press the HR-ZOOM key again to activate the zoom and again to exit the High Resolution Zoom function.
SRI * (Speckle Reduction Imaging)
2D+2D/SRI *
10
2D+2D/CRI/SRI *
11
FFC (Focus and Frequency Composite)
12
CE (Coded Excitation)
13
LINEAR / TRAPEZOID
High Resolution Zoom 14
Harmonic Imaging 15 Press the HI key on the control panel to switch on/off the Coded Harmonic Imaging function in 2D Mode provided the active probe allows this function.
XTD View 16 Press the BX key on the control panel to activate or deactivate the XTD-View mode. A blue box is displayes at the border of the 2D image. Start and Stop the XTD-image acquisition with the RIGHT TRACKBALL KEY.
17
To adjust the range of the receive frequency. FREQUENCY resp. high resolution / lower penetration, mid resolution / mid penetration, or HARM.FREQU. in case of Harm. Imaging lower resolution / high penetration OTI (Otimized Tissue Imaging) FOC # OTI allows to fine tune the system for scanning different kinds of tissue. Increases the number of transmit focal zone, so that you can tighten up the beam for a specific area. To select the depth position of the actual focus zone(s). Arrows at the left edge of the 2D image mark the active focal zone(s) by their depth position. Use this control to select a part of interest of the 2D image. The advantage of the decreased field-of-view is an increased 2D frame rate due to the smaller sector width. This function allows the adjustment of the Volume O-Axis position of 3D probes in 2D Mode. The green line in the displayed symbol indicates the position of the acoustic block. Image magnification (Pan Zoom) in read-/ and write mode. Control to improve the resolution by reducing the frame rate. Respectively reducing the resolution by increasing the image frame rate.
18 19
20
FOC DEPTH
21
ANGLE
22
BETA VIEW
23 24
ZOOM QUALITY
4-9

Step
2D Mode Functions
The signals of the neighboring pulses are less weighted for the display of the actual pulse which considerably improves the detail lateral resolution and signal-to-noise ratio. This function is only available if CRI is switched off. Enhance brings out subtle tissue differences and boundaries by enhancing the gray scale differences corresponding to the edges of structures. Adjustments to M Mode's edge enhancement affects the M Mode only. Dynamic Range controls how echo intensities are converted to shades of gray, thereby increasing the adjustable range of contrast. Persistence is a temporal filter that averages frames together. This has the effect of presenting a smoother, softer image. This function is only available if CRI is switched off.
25
LINE FILTER
26
ENHANCE
27
DYN.CON.
28
PERSIST.
29
CRI ENHANCE
If this filter is set to high, the XBeam-CRI image is smoothed. CRI Enhance setting off leads to a sharper impression of the XBeam-CRI image. This function is only available if X-BEAMCRI is switched on. Selects a level below which echoes will not be amplified (an echo must have a certain minimum amplitude before it will be processed). Press the EXIT key on the control panel to exit the 2D Sub menu.
30 31
REJECT EXIT
For further details refer to the Voluson 730Pro/ProV Basic User Manual, Chapter 5, 2D Mode.
4-10
4-4-2
M Mode Checks
Figure 4-7 M Main and M Sub
Table 4-4
Step
1 2 3 4
M Mode Functions
Task
Cursor Position Activation of M Mode M Mode Gain M Mode Depth Invert
Expected Results
Adjust the M Cursor position with the TRACKBALL in the 2D Single image. Press the right or left trackball key to activate both Modes (2D/M). Rotate the M MODE key to adjust the sensitivity (brightness) of the entire M image. Common with 2D Mode Depth.
This function inverts the M mode trace from up to down in the M mode display area. (The Invert function is only available with endovaginal probes.)
6 7 8 9 10 11
SPEED FREQUENCY FORMAT DYN.CON. ENHANCE REJECT Exit
By touching up or down, four different sweep speeds can be selected. Common with 2D Mode Frequency resp. Harm.Frequ. in case of Harm. Imaging. For selection of three different rations of display format. Dynamic Range enhances a part of the grayscale to make it easier to display pathology. Due to this function a finer, sharper impression of the image is produced. It determines the amplitude-level below which echoes are suppressed (rejected).
12
Press the EXIT key on the control panel to exit the M Sub menu.
For further details refer to the Voluson 730Pro/ProV Basic User Manual, Chapter 6, M Mode.
4-11
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 4-4-2-1 MCFM Mode Check
By pressing the M control and the C control, the MCFM mode is switched on in the preparation mode. The M-cursor with M-Color window appears on the active 2D image.
Figure 4-8 MCFM Main and MCFM Sub Menu For further details refer to the Voluson 730Pro/ProV Basic User Manual, Chapter 6.4. 4-4-2-2 MTD Mode Check By pressing the M control and the TD control, the MTD mode is switched on in the preparation mode. The M-cursor with M-Color window appears on the active 2D image.
Figure 4-9 MTD Main and MTD Sub Menu For further details refer to the Voluson 730Pro/ProV Basic User Manual, Chapter 6.5. 4-12 Section 4-4 - Functional Checks
4-4-3
NOTE: NOTE:
Spectral Doppler Mode Checks

Different menus are displayed depending on which Spectral Doppler Mode (PW or CW) is selected. The Continuous Wave Doppler Mode is an Option. The CW key is only illuminated if the option is installed and the selected probe is capable for the Continuous Wave Doppler Mode.
Figure 4-10 PW Main and PW Sub
Table 4-5
Step
1
Spectral Doppler Mode (PW, CW) Functions

Adjust the Gate- position resp. size with the TRACKBALL in the 2D single image. The upper trackball key changes from Gate position to Gate size. Press the right trackball key to activate the motion display. Press the left trackball key to activate both Modes (B/D). Rotate the PW MODE key to adjust the amplification of the entire spectrum.
Gate Position and Gate Size
2 3
Activation of Doppler Mode Doppler Gain Steering
The steering function is only possible with linear probes.
RT TRACE (Real Time Auto-Trace) Invert
The envelope curve of the Doppler spectrum (maximum velocities) and the corresponding evaluations are automatically displayed on the monitor.
This function inverts the Doppler spectrum display in relation to the direction of the flow. (The Invert function is possible in read and write mode.)
7 8 9 10
SPEED BASELINE WMF (Wall Motion Filter) PRF
By touching up or down, four different sweep speeds can be selected. Adjusting the baseline is possible in read- and write Mode (up/down in 8 steps). Used to eliminate Doppler noise that is caused by vessel wall motion. The Velocity Range display is governed by the pulse repetition frequency (PRF) Exceeding the maximum PRF, the HPRF-Mode is automatically switched on.
4-13

Step
11 12 13 14 15 ANGLE SCALE FORMAT FREQUENCY DYNAMIC Exit 16
Spectral Doppler Mode (PW, CW) Functions

The angle cursor can be turned in both directions without stop. By pressing the angle knob repeatedly the angle correction switches from +60 to 0 and to -60. To select the displayed measuring unit (in relation to the zero-line). For selection of either one of three formats. Serves for selection of the required transmit frequency for actual gate position. Dynamic Range adjusts the display cutoff of the Doppler analysis waveform.
Press the EXIT key on the control panel to exit the PW or CW Sub menu.
For further details see: Voluson 730Pro/ProV Basic User Manual, Chapter 7, Spectral Doppler Mode.
4-14
4-4-4
NOTE:
Color Doppler Mode Checks

Different menus are displayed depending on which Color Doppler Mode (CFM, PD or TD) is selected.
Figure 4-11 CFM Main and CFM Sub Menu
Table 4-6
Step
1
Color Doppler Mode (CFM, PD, TD) Functions

Adjust the Box- Position resp. Size with the TRACKBALL in the 2DSingle image. The upper trackball key changes from Box position to Box size. Rotate the C MODE key to ensure that continuous flow is displayed, where appropriate. Rotate the PD MODE key to adjust the Power Doppler Gain. Rotate the C MODE key to adjust the Tissue Doppler Gain. Changes the Single image display to two simultaneous half images. The left frame shows only the 2D Mode image. The right frame shows the 2D Mode image with color information.
Color Box Position and Color Box Size CFM Gain
PD Gain TD Gain
2D+2D/C (PD or TD) Steering
Beam Steering is only possible with linear probes in CFM and PD Mode.
Invert 5 The color of the color wedge inverts around the baseline. (impossible in PD Mode)
6 7
QUALITY FREQUENCY
Improves the Color Resolution by reducing the image frame rate, respectively vice versa. It serves for selection of the Transmit Frequency which also depends on the Color Box position. Used to eliminate Doppler noise that is caused by vessel wall or cardiac wall motion. (CFM,PD) By touching toward up the PRF increases. By touching toward the PRF decreases. Image magnification (PAN-Zoom) in read- and write mode.
8 9 10
WMF (Wall Motion Filter) PRF ZOOM
4-15

Step
11 12 13
Color Doppler Mode (CFM, PD, TD) Functions

To select the CFM- Display Mode (V; V-T; V-Pow; Pow-T; or T). The maximum velocities are displayed above and under the color scale in kHz, cm/s or m/s. With Line Filter the signals of the neighboring pulses are less weighted for the display of the actual pulse which considerably improves the detail lateral resolution and signal-to-noise ratio. Gently means the transition between color and gray scale information. The embedding of the color into 2D Mode is performed smoothly with less colored splashes. Switch on/off the artifact suppression. The baseline shift can be used to prevent aliasing in one flow direction similar to the Doppler baseline shift. There are 8 steps in each direction. (impossible in PD Mode) Controls the number of pulses to constitute one Color- or Power-Doppler line in the display. Determines the line density within the Color-Box. The lower the line density, the larger the line distance and the size of the color pixels. Provides selectability of the color coding for an optimization of the display of blood flow (similar to the post-processing curves with grayscale 2D scans). After a selection has been made, the color bar displays the resultant map. To select different filter periods for raising velocity. Filtering of the rise velocity leads to noise suppression. To select different filter periods for falling velocity. This filter leads for prolongation of the display flow. The Flow Resolution function controls the axial resolution of color in the display. It adjusts the axial sample depth of color pixels. The Balance controls the amount of Color display over bright echoes and helps to confine color within the vessels wall. After FREEZE you can adjust the Color Threshold. It eliminates small color noise or motion artifact signals in the color image. (small number cuts off fewer signals than a higher setting)
DISPLAY MODE SCALE (CFM, TD) LINE FILTER
14 15 16 17 18
GENTLY COLOR ARTEFACT (on/off) BASELINE ENSEMBLE LINE D.
19
C-MAP (PD, TD)
20
SM. RAISE
21
SM. FALL
22
FLOW RES.
23
BALANCE
24
THRESHOLD Exit
25
Press the EXIT key on the control panel to exit the CFM, PD or TD Sub menu.
For further details refer to the Voluson 730Pro/ProV Basic User Manual: Chapter 8, CFM Mode (Color Flow Mode) Chapter 9, PD Mode (Power Doppler Mode) Chapter 10, TD Mode (Tissue Doppler Mode)
4-16
4-4-5
Volume Mode Checks

Options. If these options is not a part of the system configuration, the appendant checks can be omitted.
NOTICE Real Time 4D (freeware on Voluson 730ProV), RT_4D_Biopsy*, VCI*, STIC*, TUI* and VOCAL II* are
!! NOTICE:
BT-Version:
BT Version: VCI is optional at BT05 Voluson 730Pro systems. However, at Voluson 730Pro systems with BT08 software (SW 5.4.x), this feature is standard. NOTE: 4-4-5-1 Different menus are displayed depending on which Menu and which Volume Mode is selected. Pre-Volume Mode Functions
1. select the desired Volume Acquisition Mode: Volume Acquisition: Static 3D Volume Acquisition: Real Time 4D
The Volume Mode function is switched on, the 3D Pre respectively 4D Pre menu appears on the screen (write mode) and the volume box appears on the Image area.
2. select Acquisition and/or Visualization Mode
3. select an User Program
4. Start the Volume Acquisition with the Freeze key resp. the right trackball key. Figure 4-12 Pre-Volume Mode menus
4-17
Table 4-7
Step
1
Pre-Volume Mode Functions

AQUISITION:
4D REAL TIME 4D BIOPSY *

VCI A-PLANE * VCI C-PLANE * STIC * 2 VISUALIZATION:
Real Time 4D - continuous volume acquisition and parallel calculation of 3D rendered images Real Time 4D Biopsy - continuous volume acquisition and parallel calculation of 3D rendered image. Volume Contrast Imaging - improves the contrast resolution and the signal / noise ratio and therefore facilitates finding of diffuse lesions in organs Volume Contrast Imaging (coronal plane) - improves the contrast resolution and the signal / noise ratio and therefore facilitates finding of diffuse lesions in organs With this acquisition method the fetal heart or an artery can be visualized in 4D. (also in combination with PD or CFM Mode)
3D RENDERING
3D Static volume acquisition + rendered 3D image (also in combination with PD or CFM Mode) After the 3D acquisition the system switches automatically to the read menu. The selected format will be present on the monitor (e.g., A, B, C + rendered 3D image). Continuous volume acquisition + calculation of rendered 3D image in real time 3D Static volume acquisition resp. 4D volume acquisition without rendered 3D image (also in combination with PD or CFM) Parts of orthogonal sections A, B and C are compiled to a 3D-section aspect. The name Niche has been chosen because the aspect shows a quasi spatial cut into the reference image. This method of visualization is consistent with the way other medical systems such as CT or MRI, present the data to the user (slices through the data set, which are parallel to each other). The data set is represented such as in Static 3D - Sectional Planes. However, the three planes are VCI renderings (tissue information of a thick slice), computed from the 3D dataset. - Quarter size display of Sectional Planes without 3D image or
4D RENDERING SECT. PLANES
NICHE T.U.I. * VCI STATIC *
- Quarter size display of Sectional Planes + rendered 3D image (Note: The display depends on selected Acquisition- and Visualization Mode!) Dual size display of Sectional Planes + rendered 3D image. (Note: The display depends on selected Acquisition- and Visualization Mode! This format is not possible for Static 3D Acquisition) - Full size display of a the reference image or
- Full size display of the rendered 3D image. (Note: The display depends on selected Acquisition- and Visualization Mode!) Volume Box Position and Volume Box Size QUALITY VOL. ANGLE Start Acquisition Adjust the Volume Box (ROI) Position resp. Size with the TRACKBALL in the 2D Single image. The upper trackball key to change the Trackball function from Box Position to Box Size. Changes the line density against the acquisition speed (low, mid1, mid2, high1, high2). To select the Volume Sweep Angle. Press the FREEZE key resp. the right trackball key to start the Volume acquisition.
6 7 8 9
4-18
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 4-4-5-2 Functions after the 3D Acquisition
Figure 4-13 3D/4D Main - Sectional Planes and Image Rendering
Table 4-8
Step
Functions after the 3D Acquisition

X-ROT: Rotation about X-axis of the reference image.
Y-ROT: Rotation about the Y-axis of the reference image. Z-ROT:Rotation about the Z-axis of the reference image.
PAR. SHIFT: Movement along Z-axis of the reference image. TRACKBALL: Movement along X- and Y-axis of the reference image.
NICHE
Parts of the orthogonal sections A, B and C are complied to a 3D section aspect. The aspect shows quasi a spatial cut into the reference image. The basic idea behind VOCAL II is the combination of 3D ultrasound tissue (presented as voxels) and the geometric information of surfaces in a 3D dataset. After definition of contour in 3D space (semi-automatically, manually or spherical) a wide range of functionality is given. Display of orientation help image figure.
VOCAL *
O.H. GRAPHIC Choosing a reference image
Press the left trackball key repeatedly to choose the Reference image among A, B or C. Choosing a reference image automatically determines the control functions of the rotary controls and the trackball for the liberal adjustment of a sectional plane.
Initial Condition 7 Resets the rotations and translations of a volume section to the initial (start) position.
4-19

Step
Functions after the 3D Acquisition

3D Image Orientation 8 To change the image orientation of the rendered 3D image.
9 10 11 12 13 14
ZOOM S.TXT/S.SM. MIX TH. LOW respectively PD LOW in case of 3D+PD MAGI CUT RENDER PARAM. RESET CURVE
The 3D image as well as the sectional planes can be varied by their aspect ratio. To adjust the mix ratio between two calculated modes. All echoes below the level will be disregarded for calculation of the surface. All color values below the level will be disregarded for calculation of the surface. Ability to electronically manipulate the images and cut way 3D artifacts. To select the Render Mode (Basic Mode and Render Algorithm) Reset the curvature of render start to default position
4-20
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 4-4-5-3 Sub Menu
Figure 4-14 3D/4D Sub Menu
Table 4-9
Step
1 2 3 4
Sub Menus
To select the desired Render View Direction (green line symbolizes direction of the view). Note: The Render View Direction keys are not available in Static 3D Sectional Planes. Depending on individual requirements a harder or softer image can be obtained. On/Off switch to show full or reduced Image Info parameter on screen. On/Off switch to show an acquired 3D+CFM or 3D+PD image with or without the color information. Speckle Reduction Imaging (SRI) can be activated in all 3D/4D modes (except Full size display) to reduce speckle which interferes with the sectional planes (A, B and C). Note: The rendered 3D image is not affect. Adjusts the contrast of the screen background from dark to bright. Note: This key is not available in Static 3D Sectional Planes mode. To set the start point of the gamma curve bending. (Graphic display on screen) Note: This key is not available in Static 3D Sectional Planes mode. To set the contrast of the bending. (Graphic display on screen) Note: This key is not available in Static 3D Sectional Planes mode. Only available if a 3D+CFM or a 3D+PD image is acquired. Note: This key is only available if a 3D+CFM or a 3D+PD image is acquired. Only available if a 3D+CFM or a 3D+PD image is acquired. Note: This key is only available if a 3D+CFM or a 3D+PD image is acquired.
RENDER VIEW DIRECTION GRAY/CHROMA 3D/4D INFO COLOR OFF
SRI *
BACKGR.
CONTR. POS
CONTRAST
POWER THRESH.
10 11
BALANCE
PROBE ORIENTATION Adjust and activate the display of direction markers at border of the image.
For further details refer to the Voluson 730Pro/ProV Basic User Manual, Chapter 11. Chapter 4 - Functional Checks 4-21
4-4-6
4-4-6-1
Using Cine
Activating Cine Press FREEZE, then roll the TRACKBALL to display the images of the stored sequence one by one.
4-4-6-2
Cine-Split Function (Multiple Format) After FREEZE of a sequence in 2D Mode two or four different images of the sequence can be displayed simultaneously in Dual respectively Quad Display Mode. Move the TRACKBALL to display the images of the stored sequence. Use the FORMAT keys to change to the next (part of) frozen 2D image sequence to play back the cine memory.
NOTE: 4-4-6-3
The Cine-Split function (multiple format) is also possible in 2D Auto Cine mode. Activating 2D Auto Cine 1.) After Freeze press the LEFT TRACKBALL KEY. 2.) Select the start image of the sequence by rotating the START digipot. The selected image is simultaneously displayed. 3.) Turn the END digipot to the end image of the sequence. The selected image is displayed. 4.) Select the review SPEED and the read ZOOM factor. 5.) Select the Cine Mode review direction. 6.) To start/stop the Cine Loop playback press the RIGHT OR LEFT TRACKBALL KEY. After stopping the sequence, move the TRACKBALL to display the images one by one.
4-4-6-4
Spectral Doppler- or M Cine Loop Press FREEZE, then roll the TRACKBALL to display the Cine / Loop one by one. The UPPER TRACKBALL KEY changes from the 2D Cine to the D Loop (respectively M Loop).
NOTE: 4-4-6-5
The active Cine is displayed on the screen: Cine xxx/Loop or Cine/Loop xxx. Activating 3D Rotation Cine 1.) After 3D Volume acquisition select the 3D ROT. CINE item from the menu area. 2.) Select the ROTATION ANGLE from the menu area or manually with START / END rotary controls. 3.) Select the STEP ANGLE and the ROTATION AXIS. 4.) Select CALCULATE or press the RIGHT OR LEFT TRACKBALL KEY to start the calculation. 5.) To start/stop the 3D Rotation Cine sequence press the RIGHT OR LEFT TRACKBALL KEY.
4-4-6-6
Activating Volume Cine 1.) After Real Time 4D acquisition move the TRACKBALL horizontally to display the Volumes of the stored sequence one by one. (Alternative use the VOL CINE # control to select the desired volume.) For further details refer to the Voluson 730Pro/ProV Basic User Manual, Chapter 11.
4-4-6-7
Activating 4D Cine 1.) After Real Time 4D acquisition press UPPER TRACKBALL KEY to display the 4D Cine menu. 2.) Press the LEFT TRACKBALL KEY (Toggle function: Start/Stop). 3.) Select the Cine Mode direction and the review SPEED. 4.) To start/stop the Real Time 4D Cine sequence press the LEFT TRACKBALL KEY.
NOTE: 4-22
After stopping a sequence, move the TRACKBALL to display the images / volumes one by one. Section 4-4 - Functional Checks
4-4-7
NOTE:
Generic Measurements
Different menus are displayed depending on: the currently selected Application and Display Mode, the selected Study, and the settings in the Measure Setup - MEASURE & CALC page. For further details refer to the Voluson 730Pro/ProV Basic User Manual, Chapter 13. General remarks to perform Generic Measurements: By pressing the CALIPER key on the control panel the Generic Measurement function is switched on. Selection of the desired measurement marks is done with the NAVIGATION WHEEL or by pressing the corresponding keyboard shortcuts. If the TRACKBALL MENU NAVIGATION key is illuminated, the trackball is consequently assigned to select the menu items in the menu area on the left side of the screen. Positioning of measurement marks is done with the TRACKBALL. Entering and storage of measuring marks is done with SET (right or left trackball key). To change measuring marks before completion press CHANGE (upper trackball key). Depending on the setting in the Measure Setup, also the FREEZE key can be used for confirming the last measuring mark of the currently performed measurement. To cancel the measurement of the currently selected item, select CANCEL or press BACKSPACE. To delete the results of the last measured item, select DELETE or press BACKSPACE. To delete all measurement results of the selected Study from the monitor as well as from the corresponding Worksheet, select the CLEAR GROUP or press the DELETE key. All measurement results will be automatically included in the Generic patient worksheet. To erase measurement results, press the CLEAR ALL key on the control panel or the DELETE MEAS. key on the keyboard.
To exit from Generic measurements, press the CALIPER key or the EXIT key on the control panel. The following instructions assume that you first scan the patient and then press FREEZE. Distance and Tissue Depth Measurements (2D and M Mode) 1.) Press the CALIPER key and then select the GENERIC DIST. in the menu area. 2.) Select the appropriate item from the menu area. An active cursor appears. 3.) To position the active cursor at the start point (distance) or the most anterior point (tissue depth), move the TRACKBALL. 4.) To fix the start point, press SET (the right or left trackball key). The system fixes the first cursor and displays a second active caliper. 5.) To position the second active caliper at the end point (distance) or the most posterior point (tissue depth), move the TRACKBALL. 6.) To complete the measurement, press SET. The system displays the distance or tissue depth value in the measurement results window. Before you complete a measurement: To toggle between active calipers, or to re-adjust the traced line, press the upper trackball key. To erase results, press the CLEAR ALL key on the control panel or the DELETE MEAS. key on the keyboard.
NOTE: 4-4-7-1
NOTE:
To alternate the control from one cursor to the other, press CHANGE (the upper trackball key). To re-adjust a traced line, press UNDO (the upper trackball key) repeatedly. Chapter 4 - Functional Checks 4-23
4-4-7
4-4-7-2
Generic Measurements (contd)

Circumference/Area Measurements 1.) Press the CALIPER key and then select the GENERIC AREA in the menu area. 2.) Select the corresponding item from the menu area. An active cursor displays. 3.) To position the active cursor, move the TRACKBALL. 4.) To fix the start point, press SET (the right or left trackball key). The system fixes the first cursor and displays a second active caliper. 5.) To position the second caliper, move the TRACKBALL and press SET (Rt. / Lt. trackball key).
NOTE:
If you have selected a trace item, the measurement is finished and the area and circumference results appear on the screen. 6.) An ellipse appears the axis of which is defined by these two points. To adjust the width of the ellipse, move the TRACKBALL. 7.) To toggle between calipers, or to readjust a traced line, press the upper trackball key. 8.) To complete the measurement, press SET (right or left trackball key). The system displays the circumference and area in the measurement results area. Before you complete a measurement: To erase the ellipse resp. trace and the current data measured, select DELETE or press the BACKSPACE key on the keyboard. The original caliper is displayed to restart the measurement. To exit the measurement function, press the CALIPER key or EXIT key on the control panel.
4-4-7-3
Volume Measurements 1.) Press the CALIPER key and then select the GENERIC VOLUME in the menu area. 2.) Select the appropriate item. 3.) Perform the measurement(s) using the TRACKBALL and SET (right or left trackball key). For further details: see 4-4-7-1 and 4-4-7-2.
4-4-7-3-1 NOTE:
Multiplane Measurements This volume measurement is only possible in 3D Mode. 1.) Select the reference image in which the measurement is to be performed (A, B or C). 2.) Press the CALIPER key once and then select the MULTIPLANE item in the menu area. 3.) Select the first section through the body by rotating the REF.SLICE digipot (first section should be set at the edge of the object). 4.) Position the start dot of the area which should be surrounded and store it with SET. 5.) Surround the area with the trackball, then press SET (right or left trackball key). The area is calculated and displayed. It may even be zero. Press the SET key twice. 6.) Select the next parallel section with the REF. SLICE digipot and measure the area. 7.) Repeat 5. and 6. until the edge of the measured object is reached.
NOTE: NOTE:
The contour of the measured area is not erased if a new section is adjusted. To call back the measured areas touch the PREV / NEXT flip switch control. To erase the results, select the INIT item at the menu area.
4-24
4-4-7
4-4-7-4 NOTE: 4-4-7-4-1
Generic Measurements (contd)

Measurements in Spectral Doppler Mode The Spectral Doppler image is displayed based on time (X-axis) and velocity (Y-axis). Auto Trace 1.) Press the CALIPER key. 2.) Select AUTO TRACE item from the menu area on the left side of the screen. It traces the Spectral Doppler image automatically and displays the results. 3.) Select the SENSITIVITY of the envelope curve (to eliminate artifacts). 4.) Select the TRACE MODE channel of the envelope curve (upper, both, lower). 5.) If necessary, select the Angle and the Baseline. 6.) Press the right or left trackball key SET to finish the measurement. Before you complete the measurement: To readjust the start cycle (vertical yellow line), press CHANGE (upper trackball key). Press SET (right or left trackball key) to fix the line. Press the CHANGE key again to readjust the end cycle (vertical green line). Press SET to fix the line.
NOTE:
The determination of the envelope curve requires a clear and low-noise record of the Doppler spectrum. Otherwise the reliability of the displayed measurement results may not be ensured! Manual Trace 1.) Press the CALIPER key. 2.) Select the MANUAL TRACE item from the menu area. A cursor appears on the screen. 3.) Move the cursor with the TRACKBALL to the start point of the measurement and press SET (right or left trackball key) to fix the marker. 4.) Trace to the end of the period and press the SET key again to fix the mark. The measurement results appear on the screen. Before you complete the measurement: To readjust the traced line, press UNDO (upper trackball key) repeatedly.
4-4-7-4-2
4-4-7-4-3
Heart Rate 1.) Press the CALIPER key. 2.) Select the HR item from the menu area. A line appears on the screen. 3.) Move the line with the TRACKBALL to the start point of the period and press SET (right or left trackball key). A second line appears. 4.) Move the second line to the end point of the period. 5.) Select the number of HR cycles for the measurement with the digipot. 6.) Press the SET (right or left trackball key) again to fix the line. The Heart Rate is displayed.
NOTE:
For further Doppler Measuements and other details refer to the Voluson 730Pro/ProV Basic User Manual, Chapter 13
4-25
4-4-8
Calculations
The Voluson 730Pro/ProV system supports calculation packages and application-oriented patient Worksheets (Reports) for following applications: Abdomen Calculations Small Parts Calculations Obstetric Calculations Cardiology Calculations Urology Calculations Vascular Calculations Gynecology Calculations Pediatric Calculations Neurology Calculations Orthopedics Calculations
NOTE: NOTE:
Confirm that the patient information is correct and the probe and application are selected properly. Different menus are displayed depending on: the currently choosen Application the selected Display Mode, the selected Study, and the settings in the Measure Setup - MEASURE & CALC page. For further details refer to the Voluson 730Pro/ProV Basic User Manual, Chapter 14 General remarks to perform Calculations: By pressing the CALC key on the control panel the Calculation function is switched on. Selection of the desired measurement marks is done with the NAVIGATION WHEEL or by pressing the corresponding keyboard shortcuts. If the TRACKBALL MENU NAVIGATION key is illuminated, the trackball is consequently assigned to select the menu items in the menu area on the left side of the screen. Positioning of measurement marks is done with the TRACKBALL. Entering and storage of measuring marks is done with SET (right or left trackball key). To change measuring marks before completion press CHANGE (upper trackball key). Depending on the setting in the Measure Setup, also the FREEZE key can be used for confirming the last measuring mark of the currently performed measurement. To cancel the measurement of the currently selected item, select CANCEL or press BACKSPACE. To delete the results of the last measured item, select DELETE or press BACKSPACE. To delete all measurement results of the selected Study from the monitor as well as from the corresponding Worksheet, select the CLEAR GROUP or press the DELETE key. All measurement results will be automatically included in the Generic patient worksheet. To erase measurement results, press the CLEAR ALL key on the control panel or the DELETE MEAS. key on the keyboard. To exit from Generic measurements, press the CALIPER key or the EXIT key on the control panel.
4-4-8-1
Worksheet (Report) Pages Press the WORKSHEET key on the control panel to view the application dependent patient worksheet pages that contain the results of calculations and measurements. Any stored patient worksheet can be edited, printed, transferred, saved to Sonoview or sent to DICOM server.
4-26
4-4-9
4-4-9-1
Probe/Connectors Usage
Connecting a probe 1.) Place the probe's carrying case on a stable surface and open the case. 2.) Carefully remove the probe and unwrap the probe cable. 3.) DO NOT allow the probe head to hang free. Impact to the probe head could result in irreparable damage. 4.) Turn the connector locking handle counterclockwise. 5.) Align the connector with the probe port and carefully push into place. 6.) Turn the connector locking handle clockwise to secure the probe connector. 7.) Open the right-hand side door, lay the cable into the intended cable holders and close the door. So it is free to move, but not resting on the floor.
4-4-9-2
Activating the probe 1.) Press the PROBE key to activate the Probe Select menu. 2.) Select the appropriate probe using the TRACKBALL and the TRACKBALL KEYS. 3.) Upon selection of an Application, the programmed user presets appear. 4.) Clicking a Setting field causes loading of the preset. The probe is initialized, the main menu (2D mode) and the ultrasound image appears on the monitor in write mode (real time display).
4-4-9-3
Deactivating the probe When deactivating the probe, the probe is automatically placed in standby mode (read mode). 1.) Press the FREEZE key. 2.) Gently wipe the excess gel from the face of the probe. (Refer to the Basic User Manual of Voluson 730Pro/ProV for complete cleaning instructions.) 3.) Carefully slide the probe around the right side of the keyboard, toward the probe holder. Ensure that the probe is placed gently in the probe holder.
4-4-9-4
Disconnecting the probe Prior to disconnect a probe freeze the image. It is unnecessary to switch the unit off.
CAUTION If a probe is disconnected while running (write mode) a software error may occur.
In this case switch the unit OFF (perform a reset).

!! CAUTION:
1.) Open the right-hand side door, remove the cable from the cable holder and close the door. 2.) Turn the probe locking handle counterclockwise. Pull the probe and connector straight out of the probe port. 3.) Carefully slide the probe and connector away from the probe port and around the right side of the keyboard. Ensure the cable is free.
4-27
4-4-10
Image Management (Sonoview)

For Sonoview - Image Management functionality refer to Chapter 15 in the Basic User Manual of Voluson 730Pro/ProV. It talks about several topics: Clipboard Sending Exams Printing Exams / Images Export Exams / Images Backup Exams Restore the Backup Exams DICOM Print / Send Verifying and Pinging a Device Sending Images via e-mail Browsing and Managing an Exams stored Image Connectivity, and Dataflow Concept and Creation Configuring Connectivity Services (Destinations) Input of comments and voice annotations Measure Distance and Ellipse Buttons Views DVD/CD+(R)W and MO Erasing/Formatting Changing Backup Folder on mapped Network Drive etc.
Figure 4-15 Sonoview
4-28
4-4-11
Using the MOD (Magneto-Optical Drive)
NOTICE The MOD (Magneto-Optical Drive) is an Option.

!! NOTICE:
The optional 3.5 inch Magneto-Optical disk drive supports the following medias: 1.3GB; 640MB; 540MB; 230MB and 128MB
Magneto-Optical Drive (MOD)
Eject Button
Figure 4-16 Magneto-Optical Drive 1.) Before installing an MO disk in the MOD, check the MO disk for loose hardware or damaged labels which could jam inside the MOD. Also, ensure that the slide switch in one corner of the disk is set so that the disk is write enabled (disk hole closed). 2.) Insert the disk into the MOD with the label facing up.
NOTICE
!! NOTICE:
Never move the unit with a disk in the MOD because the drive actuator will not be locked and the MOD could break. 3.) There are different methods to eject a disk from the MOD. Manual ejection methods are listed below in preferred order from best (1) to worst (3). a.) Press the EJECT switch on the MOD while system is ON. b.) Press and hold the EJECT switch while the system is booting. c.) Mechanical ejection. Insert the end of a paper clip into the hole next to the EJECT switch while system power is OFF.
NOTICE
!! NOTICE:
Avoid mechanical ejection whenever possible. Mechanical ejection leaves the actuator unlocked and the MOD susceptible to damage if moved. If forced to use this method, reboot the system, then insert and eject a known good disk using one of the other manual ejection methods.
4-29
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 4-4-11-1 Formatting Media
To erase/format the backup media, DVD/CD+(R)W or MOD, press the SONOVIEW key on the Control panel. The Sonoview screen appears on the monitor; see: Figure 4-15 on page 4-28. a.) Select the DVD/CD+(R)W and MO Formatting tool on the left side of the Sonoview screen. b.) Insert the medium and select the DVD/CD+(R)W or the MO icon. By selecting MO cartridge the unit displays the MO Disk Formatter window as shown in Figure 4-17. 1.) Select a Format Type from the drop down menu. If desired, mark the Low Level Format icon. 2.) Click the START button to start the formatting process.
MO and DVD/CD+(R)W Formatting tool
MO icon
DVD/CD+(R)W icon Format Type Selection Low Level Format Selection
Start Formatting Process Figure 4-17 MO Disk Formatter Window 3.) A message box appears on the screen. Confirm with OK. 4.) When the formatting has been completed, click OK to continue.
Figure 4-18 MO Disk Formatter messages 5.) Select the CLOSE button and press the EXIT key on the control panel to return to the Scan Mode.
4-30
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 4-4-11-1 Formatting Media (contd)
By selecting DVD/CD the unit displays the Erase DVD/CD window as shown in Figure 4-19. 1.) Select the Erase Mode and click the [OK] button to start the process.
NOTICE It is highly recommended to use the complete erase mode, to avoid problems with the CD-(R)W or
!! NOTICE:
DVD-(R)W! When using a DVD-(R)W, the complete erase mode is not possible.
Figure 4-19 Erase DVD/CD Window 2.) During erasing the Ultrasound system displays following message.
Figure 4-20 Erasing disk 3.) Press the EXIT key on the control panel to return to the Scan Mode. 4-4-11-1-1 Adjusting the Write Speed of the DVD/CD Recorder 1.) Click the SETTINGS icon on the left side of the Sonoview screen. 2.) Select DVD/CD RECORDER from the tool bar.
Settings icon
Figure 4-21 Settings of the DVD/CD Recorder 3.) Choose the Write Speed from the corresponding pop-up menu.
4-31
Section 4-5 Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images
1.) Press the UTILITIES key on the control panel. The menu area changes to the Utilities menu. 2.) Select the SYSTEM item from the menu area to activate the setup desktop screen. 3.) Select the BACKUP page.
User Settings Only group
Full Backup group
Stop USB Devices
Figure 4-22 System Setup - Backup page The Backup page is subdivided in two main groups: A.) User Settings Only Section 4-5-1 "Save User Settings Only (Application Settings)" on page 4-33 Section 4-5-2 "Load User Settings Only (Application Settings)" on page 4-34 Section 4-5-3 "Save Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)" on page 4-36 Section 4-5-4 "Load Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)" on page 4-38 Section 4-5-5 "Delete Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)" on page 4-40
B.) Full Backup
The User Settings and/or Full Backup can be saved to the following destinations: D: partition of internal hard disk DVD/CD+(R)W MOD (if present) Mapped Network Drive Z: see: Section 3-11-1 "Map Network Drive" on page 3-70 USB-Stick Any other drive connected to the system (e.g.; an external USB-hard disk) Note: This function is only available in the Full Backup utility. For further details review: Section 3-5-13 "External USB-Devices" on page 3-32.
NOTICE When connecting external USB devices, be sure to execute Safety Directions found in Chapter 2 of the
!! NOTICE:
Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08) Basic User Manual.
4-32
Section 4-5 - Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images
4-5-1
Save User Settings Only (Application Settings)

The User Settings contains: Application Settings User Programs Auto Text 3D/4D Programs
1.) Insert a DVD/CD+(R)W or MO (Magneto-Optical Disk) into the drive. 2.) Press the UTILITIES key on the control panel. The menu area changes to the Utilities menu. 3.) Select the SYSTEM item from the menu area to activate the setup desktop screen. 4.) Select the BACKUP page. 5.) Click the SAVE button of the User Settings Only group.
Choose the media and

then click Save
Figure 4-23 User Settings Only - Save window 6.) Choose the media (e.g., DVD/CD+RW) and click the SAVE button. 7.) Select the NEW FILE... key and enter a file name (without extension). 8.) Click the OK key to start the process. When the saving has been completed, click OK.
4-33
4-5-2
Load User Settings Only (Application Settings)
CAUTION The loading procedure overwrites the existing application settings on the local hard drive. Make sure to
insert the correct DVD/CD or MO. Additionally you can load the backup from D:\User Settings.
!! CAUTION:
1.) Insert the DVD/CD+(R)W or MO (Magneto-Optical Disk) into the drive. 2.) Press the UTILITIES key on the control panel. The menu area changes to the Utilities menu. 3.) Select the SYSTEM item from the menu area to activate the setup desktop screen. 4.) Select the BACKUP page and click the LOAD button of the User Settings Only group.
Choose the media and then click Load
Figure 4-24 User Settings Only - Load window 5.) Choose the media (e.g., DVD/CD+RW) and click the LOAD key. 6.) Select the appropriate file and click OK. The Load Backup Data window appears.
NOTICE It is highly recommend to use Application settings which are adapted for the systems software version!
!! NOTICE:
Complete Backup
>> button
Load button Figure 4-25 Load Backup Data 4-34 Section 4-5 - Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images
4-5-2
Load User Settings Only (Application Settings) (contd)

7.) Select the Complete Backup (marked blue; see: Figure 4-25) and click the >> button to copy the Complete Backup into the Load Data field. 8.) Click the LOAD button to start the loading procedure of the complete backup into the system.
NOTE:
Also only parts of a User Settings Only Backup can be loaded into the database to overwrite, restore, copy, etc.... the database in the system. 1.) Click the + sign to open the content tree.
sign to open the content tree >> button
<< button
Load button Figure 4-26 Load only parts of the Backup 2.) Click the >> button to copy the selected item into the Load Data field. NOTE: To return selected items from the Load Data field to Backup Data field select the << button. 3.) Click the LOAD button to start loading procedure of the selected Backup item into the system.
4-35
4-5-3
Save Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)

A full backup always contains the following data Patient demographic and exam data (database containing the patient data and measurements) SonoView image data (NOT available when saving to the internal hard disk, DVD/CD or MOD) User Settings (databases and files containing gray curves and the user settings.) Image transfer settings (DICOM settings e.g., DICOM servers, AE Title, Station Name, etc.) Measure Setup Settings (user specific measure settings) V730 settings (general settings such as language, time/date format and the enabled options) Windows Network Settings (network settings including the computer name) Service Platform (state of the service platform) VP (additional system data)
CAUTION It is recommended to create a full backup of the settings once a week.

!! CAUTION:
NOTE:
Always Full Backup any presets, configurations and application settings to HDD and/or DVD or MOdisk before upgrading the software and/or application settings. This ensures that if the presets need to be reloaded, will be the same ones the customer was using prior to service. 1.) Press the UTILITIES key on the control panel. The menu area changes to the Utilities menu. 2.) Select the SYSTEM item from the menu area to activate the setup desktop screen. 3.) Select the BACKUP page and click the SAVE button of the Full Backup group.
choose destination
enter description
click Next Figure 4-27 Full Backup Save 4.) Choose the Destination (e.g., Network Drive). 5.) Enter the description of the full backup. 6.) If desired and possible (Network Drive and Other drive only), activate Include Images. NOTE: The Include Images option may result in a large amount of data: up to 70 Gigabytes! 7.) Select the NEXT button to start the backup process. After copying the data, the Voluson 730Pro/ProV reboots and the application starts again. 4-36 Section 4-5 - Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images
4-5-3
Save Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings) (contd)

When the Full Backup is stored on a network drive (to map a network drive see: Section 3-11-1 "Map Network Drive" on page 3-70), it may be desirable to move the data (e.g., for backup or maintenance). The backups reside in sub folders of the main fullbackup -folder found at the root of the drive. For Example: Backups on the mapped Network Drive are below path Z:\fullbackup. The directory structure of the full backup data is as follows:
The sub folders have the names fbX where X is a number (e.g., Z:\fullbackup\fb1). The data resides within a directory structure within these sub folders. It is possible to move the fbX sub folders, even leaving gaps in the numeration sequence. However, NO change MUST be made to the contents of the fbX folders itself, otherwise the backup data cannot be restored!
Figure 4-28 directory structure of full backup data
If the destination Other drive is selected, the available drives (e.g., external USB-memory stick) can be chosen from the drop down menu. Figure 4-29 Other drive drop down menu
NOTICE When the backup is saved to an external USB-device, the system has to be informed about the removal
!! NOTICE:
of the hardware. For this purpose every last dialog of "Full Backup Save" and "Full Backup Delete" has a STOP USB DEVICES button (see: Figure 4-30).
Figure 4-30 Please stop USB Devices before unplugging! For further details review: Section 3-5-13 "External USB-Devices" on page 3-32.
4-37
4-5-4
WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
Load Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)

Always backup any data before an upgrade; see: Section 4-5-3 on page 4-36. The Full Backup loading procedure replaces (overwrites) ALL the existing data on the local hard drive of the Voluson 730Pro/ProV system!
The following rules specify the restrictions:
CAUTION There are circumstances where it is not possible to load (restore) all the data.
!! CAUTION:
1.) Generally, only restoring data from an older to a newer software version is possible. Loading a backup into a system that has a lower software version than the system the backup was created on is prohibited. 2.) Options can only be restored on the same Voluson 730Pro/ProV system within the same major software version. 3.) When loading a backup into a system with a software version that has a higher major number (2.x.x -> 3.x.x -> 4.x.x -> 5.x.x), the following items will not be restored: A.) User Settings B.) Options C.) State of the Service Platform (new model type necessary for VOLC) 4.) The user is only allowed to restore data to a different system if and only if the software version on this system is the same as in the backup. 5.) The user is only allowed to restore data onto the same system if and only if the software version on this system is equal or higher than the version in the backup. 6.) The user is not allowed to restore the following items to a different system: A.) Windows Network Settings B.) Options C.) DICOM AE Title D.) DICOM Station Name E.) State of the Service Platform
4-38
4-5-4
Load Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings) (contd)

1.) Press the UTILITIES key on the control panel. The menu area changes to the Utilities menu. 2.) Select the SYSTEM item from the menu area to activate the setup desktop screen. 3.) Select the BACKUP page and click the LOAD button of the Full Backup group. choose destination
select backup
click Next Figure 4-31 Full Backup Load 4.) Choose the Destination (e.g., Network Drive). 5.) Click on the backup to be restored (additional information is displayed in the table). 6.) Select the NEXT button. The following window will be displayed.
Figure 4-32 Select Data to be restored 7.) Select the data to be restored to the Voluson 730Pro/ProV system and then click on NEXT. NOTE: For description of the check box names review: A full backup always contains the following data
4-39
4-5-4
Load Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings) (contd)

8.) Select YES to start, or NO to cancel the restore procedure.
Figure 4-33 Start Restore Backup now?

WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
When clicking YES, the current data on the system will be permanently replaced by the data of the backup and can not be restored!
After restoring the data, the Voluson 730Pro/ProV reboots and the application starts again.
4-5-5
Delete Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)

1.) Press the UTILITIES key on the control panel. The menu area changes to the Utilities menu. 2.) Select the SYSTEM item from the menu area to activate the setup desktop screen. 3.) Select the BACKUP page and click the DELETE button of the Full Backup group. choose destination select backup
select Delete Figure 4-34 Full Backup Delete 4.) Choose the Destination (e.g., HDD = Hard disk). 5.) Click on the backup to be deleted (additional information is displayed in the table). 6.) Select the DELETE button.
WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
There is no UNDO function for this action!
4-40
4-5-6
Archiving Images
1.) Press the SONOVIEW key on the control panel. 2.) Insert the DVD/CD+(R)W or MOD into drive. If required, format/erase the media, see Section 4-4-11-1 "Formatting Media" on page 4-30. 3.) When you click the OPEN button on the upper left side of the screen, a list of all the exams is displayed see Figure 4-35.
capacity of selected exams Open button
Backup button Figure 4-35 Sonoview Screen 4.) Select the exam(s) using the TRACKBALL, the CTRL or SHIFT key on the alphanumeric keyboard and the right trackball key SET. The number of all exams, the number of currently selected exams, the number of images and the capacity of selected images are displayed automatically at the right and upper corner of the exams list. 5.) Click the BACKUP button. 6.) Select the destination for the backup. NOTE: For destination NET perform Section 3-11-1 "Map Network Drive" on page 3-70 first. 7.) After finishing the backup, select whether the selected exam(s) is to be deleted or not.
Figure 4-36 Backup windows

NOTICE If you select to delete the exam after finishing the backup, it will be absolutely deleted from the hard
!! NOTICE:
disk of the ultrasound scanner Voluson 730Pro/ProV! For further information refer to Chapter 15 in the Basic User Manual of Voluson 730Pro/ProV. Chapter 4 - Functional Checks 4-41
Section 4-6 Software Configuration Checks

Press the UTILITIES key and select the SYSTEM item from the Utilities menu - which is shown in the menu area on the left side of the screen. The System Setup desktop offers different pages to check: Table 4-10
Step
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Software Configuration (System Setup) Checks

Task Expected Result(s)
Date and Time are correct Location Name is correct desired Language is displayed desired EUM Language is displayed settings assigned as desired by the customer settings assigned as desired by the customer Print A and Print B keys are assigned as desired by the customer Foot Switch left and right are assigned as desired by the customer assigned as desired by the customer assigned as desired by the customer settings assigned as desired by the customer D = Demo , I = Inactive , P = Permanent settings assigned as desired by the customer
General: Check Date and Time setting General: Check that Location (Clinic Name) is correct General: Check Language settings General: Check EUM Language settings User Setting: Check all the User Settings User Settings: Check settings of the Patient ID field Peripherals: Check assignment of Printer keys
8 9 10 11 12 13
Peripherals: Check assignment of Foot switch Peripherals: Check Save Destination assignment Peripherals: Check 2D Save key assignment Peripherals: Check Remote Print A, Remote Print B, Report Printer and DICOM Print Job assignment Option: Check that all options are set up correct Network: Check DICOM, Sonoview and Network configurations
14
Service: Check the Video Norm standard as described in settings assigned as required for the country Section 3-8-1-6 on page 3-63
Press the UTILITIES key and select the MEASURE item from the Utilities menu - which is shown in the menu area on the left side of the screen. The Measure Setup desktop offers three different pages to check.
NOTICE Parameters and possible adjustments depend on the selected Application.
!! NOTICE:
To view, add, delete, reorder, edit or when creating a new parameter (in the MEASURE & CALC page), it is very important that all items are chosen correctly and that the relevant item is highlighted. For further information refer to Chapter 18 in the Basic User Manual of Voluson 730Pro/ProV. Table 4-11
Step
11
Measurement Setup Checks

setting assigned as desired by the customer
Measure & Calc: Check all settings for all applications Application Parameters: Check all settings for all applications Global Parameters: Check all settings
2 3
setting assigned as desired by the customer setting assigned as desired by the customer
4-42
Section 4-6 - Software Configuration Checks
Section 4-7 Peripheral Checks

Check that peripherals work as described below: Table 4-12
Step
1 2 3 4 5
Peripheral Checks
Task to do Expected Result(s)
Stop image acquisition. The image displayed on the screen is printed on printer, depending on the key assignment configuration
Press the FREEZE key. Press the PRINT A or PRINT B key on the Control Panel.
Press the VCR key on the Control Panel twice. VCR resp.DVR starts recording (REC - will be displayed on the screen) Press the VCR key twice again. Press the VCR key on the Control Panel once. VCR resp.DVR stops recording The VCR resp.DVR Remote Control menu is displayed in the menu area as well as the status area on the screen. to start recording A red dot is displayed in the VCR/DVR status area on the Title bar to indicate that recording has begun.
Press the RECORD digipot or select the RECORD item from the menu area.
Press the STOP digipot or select the STOP item To Stop recording from the menu area. The video status icon is changed to (Pause) Press the PLAY digipot or select the PLAY item To start, Play back an examination from the menu area. Press the EXIT key on the control panel. to return to the scanning mode
8 9
10
Use the assignable keys on the control panel to perform actions on the recorded session, such as stop, pause, (their functions are shown in the status area) or rewind or fast forward. select the corresponding item from the menu The video status icon is updated accordingly. area on the screen.
4-7-1
ECG Check Out

Connect the ECG preamplifier MAN and check: Table 4-13
Step
1
ECG preamplifier Check

Connect the ECG at the Connector on the rear panel of the It will display a curve along the bottom edge of the image scanner. Press the ECG key on the control panel to sector display the ECG menu on in the screen.
4-7-2
Power Supply Adjustment

There are no adjustments on the power supplies. The DC Power is self-regulated. If a voltage is outside the specified range, it means that something is wrong, either with the power supply itself or with a component connected to that specific power outlet.
4-43
Section 4-8 Mechanical Function Checks

4-8-1 Rotation of the Control Console
locking lever for locking and unlocking the control console Figure 4-37 locking lever under Control Console
Table 4-14
Step
1
Rotation of the Control Console

It is possible to rotate the Control Console up to 30 to the right.
Pull the locking lever under the Control Console forward, grasp it at the front grip and rotate the console.
WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
Do not put your hand between the control console and the main unit when moving the console to the 0 position: Danger of injuries!
4-8-2
Brakes and Direction Locks
Brake pedal
steer able Front Wheel
Figure 4-38 Front Wheel with Brake
Table 4-15
Step
1
Brakes and Direction Lock

Flap the foot rest up and press the release brake pedals on The front wheels are engaged / disengaged for the front wheels. transportation.
4-44
Section 4-8 - Mechanical Function Checks
Section 4-9 Site Log

4-9-1 Site Log - System (Service Database)
1.) Press the UTILITIES key on the Control Panel. The menu area changes to the Utilities menu. 2.) Select the SYSTEM item from the menu area to activate the setup desktop screen. 3.) Select the SERVICE page. The password window appears automatically. 4.) Enter the password SHE and click the ACCEPT button to display the Service Tools window.
Figure 4-39 System Setup Service page and Service Tools window 5.) Click the MAINTENANCE REPORT button. The following message box will be displayed.
Figure 4-40 Maintenance Report 6.) Fill in the requested information and click OK. 7.) Click the EXIT button on the Service Tools window and the EXIT button on the System Setup Service page. NOTE: After Hardware or Software modifications normally the Maintenance Report message box (Figure 4-40) appears automatically on the screen.
4-45
4-9-2
Site Log - Paper Documentation

Table 4-16
Date
Site Log
Service person Problem Comments
4-46
Section 4-9 - Site Log
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

This chapter explains Voluson 730Pro/ProVs system concepts, component arrangement, and subsystem function. It also describes the Power Distribution System (PDS) and probes. Table 5-1 Contents in Chapter 5
Section
5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 Overview General Information Main board Chassis - GEZ Module FrontEnd Processor BackEnd Processor Internal I/O Top Console Monitor External I/O Peripherals Power Distribution Mechanical Descriptions Air Flow Control Service Platform Service Page
Description
Page Number
5-1 5-2 5-21 5-22 5-28 5-32 5-41 5-46 5-47 5-48 5-49 5-51 5-54 5-55 5-57
Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory)
5-1
Section 5-2 General Information

Voluson 730Pro/ProV is a digital beamforming curved-, linear- and phased array ultrasound imaging system. It has provisions for analog input sources like ECG and Phono. A CW-Doppler probe may also be connected and used. The system can be used for: 2D Mode and Color Doppler Imaging (CFM, PD and TD) M Mode + MCFM Imaging Doppler (PW, CW) 3D Mode and Real Time 4D Imaging Different combinations of the above modes
Monitor Monitor Controls Gel Holder TGC - Slider Controls Control Console Name Plate Stand By switch DVD/CD+(R)W Drive Front Grip Lever to rotate and lock the Control Console (mounted at the front below the Console) Place for B/W and/or Color printer and/or Video Recorder (VCR)
3.5 MOD Drive (optional) Place for ECG Module
Probe Connectors part incl. CW Connector and Probe storage connector (not active for scanning)
Foot rest
Brakes to block the front wheels (under the foot rest) Figure 5-1 Voluson 730Pro/ProV Major Components
5-2
Section 5-2 - General Information
Section 5-2
General Information (contd)
Monitor
GEU
GEM
GES
GW without GEU
GEZ
CPN Figure 5-2 Major System Components Major System Components: GEZ: Main Board Chassis: Section 5-3 on page 5-21 Front-End processor: Section 5-4 on page 5-22 Back-End processor: Section 5-5 on page 5-28
GEU: Top Console User interface (System I/O with hard keys) Section 5-7 on page 5-41 Monitor: Section 5-8 on page 5-46 GES: External I/O Connection Module Section 5-8 on page 5-46 GEM: Removable Disk drive module (MO-Drive and ECG-preamplifier - optional) Section 5-10 on page 5-48 CPN: Primary Power supply and Isolation transformer for the peripherals Section 5-11 on page 5-49 GW: System mechanical chassis, stand alone trolley to keep all major components Section 5-12 on page 5-51
5-3
Section 5-2
Monitor
GEU User-Interface-Module
GEMECG+Diskdrive Module
GW Trolley (housing, mechanical framework).
GES External IO
GEZ Main board Chassis
PC Box Subboards: PC-Motherboard with

Processor and Memory, ADD2 DVI Card, CKV(Video-Card, DMA Control), CPE(BackplaneCard)
The following components are part of GW: - monitor-table, - shaft for GEU, - GES External IO, - GEM ECG-Diskdrive, - framework, - cover-panels, - CPN MainPowerSupply - wheels.
CPP Powersupply- Secondaryboard
CRS RFI-Board:
MKD Proc/SysCtrl/MotCtrl/PW Doppler
CRW CW-Dopplerboard (Optional)

Subboards: 32xCPD CPR Beamformer-Motherboard
CPV Probeboard
CPN MainPowerSupply Module
Figure 5-3 Basic Block diagram of Voluson 730Pro/ProV
5-4
Section 5-2
The Voluson 730Pro/ProV used digital beamforming technology which provides high resolution and high penetration performance. It is a general purpose, mobile, software controlled diagnostic ultrasound scanner. Its function is to acquire ultrasound data and to display the data of different modes. Voluson 730Pro/ProV gives the operator the ability to measure anatomical structures and offers analysis packages that provide information that is used to make a diagnosis by competent health care professionals. The Calculation and Report function supports following application packages: Abdomen (ABD) Obstetrics (OB) Gynecology (GYN) Cardiology (CARD) Urology (URO) Vascular (VAS) Neurology (NEURO) Small Parts (SM P) Pediatrics (PED) Orthopedics (ORTHO)
The Voluson 730Pro/ProV supports a variety of linear-, curved-, phased array and pencil probes for various clinical applications. Any 3 probes may be connected at the same time (+ 1 pencil CW-probe). Medical application fields include: Obstetrics Gynecology and Fertility Radiology Internal Medicine Neurology Cardiology Oncology Urology Orthopedics Pediatrics
The system is designed for follow-up expansion. In addition to the initial operational settings for each transducer pre-programmed in the system, usercustomized parameter settings for each transducer may be inserted by the operator and stored for recall as needed via the system control panel. System configuration is stored on the hard drive and all necessary software is loaded from the hard drive on power up. Biopsy guidelines are provided on screen to assist in the collection of tissue samples, using biopsy guide adapters offered as an optional accessory. The system provides the ability to perform remote viewing of images without compression, via DICOM 3.0 compatible output. Management of patient history is possible by Sonoview image-filing function. High-resolution images are provided by utilizing a technology called digital dynamic receive focusing.
5-5
Section 5-2
Signal flow travels from the Probe Connector Panel to the Front End Electronics, to the Back-End Processor, and finally displayed on the monitor and peripherals. For more detailed explanations of functions and controls refer to the Voluson 730Pro/ProV Basic User Manual.
5-2-1
5-2-1-1
Description of Voluson 730Pro/ProV Operating Modes

B-Mode or 2D-Mode B-Mode or 2D-mode is a two-dimensional image of the amplitude of the echo signal. It is used for location and measurement of anatomical structures and for spatial orientation during operation of other modes. In 2D-mode, a two-dimensional cross-section of a three-dimensional soft tissue structure such as the heart is displayed in real time. Ultrasound echoes of different intensities are mapped to different gray scale or color values in the display. The outline of the 2D cross-section may be a rectangle, parallelogram, sector or 360-degree circle, depending on the particular transducer used. 2D-mode can be used in combination with any other mode.
5-2-1-1-1
Coded Harmonic Imaging (HI) In Harmonic Imaging, acoustic aberrations due to tissue are minimized by receiving and processing the second harmonic signal that is generated within the insonified tissue. Voluson 730Pro/ProVs high performance HI provides superb detail resolution and penetration, outstanding contrast resolution, excellent acoustic clutter rejection and an easy to operate user interface. Coded Harmonics enhances near field resolution for improved small parts imaging as well as far field penetration. It diminishes low frequency amplitude noise and improves imaging technically difficult patients. It may be especially beneficial when imaging isoechoic lesions in shallow-depth anatomy in the breast, liver and hard-to-visualize fetal anatomy. Coded Harmonics may improve the B-Mode image quality without introducing a contrast agent.
5-2-1-2
M-Mode In M-mode, soft tissue structure is presented as scrolling display, with depth on the Y-axis and time on the X-axis. It is used primarily for cardiac measurements such as value timing on septal wall thickness when accurate timing information is required. M-mode is also known as T-M mode or time-motion mode. Ultrasound echoes of different intensities are mapped to different gray scale values in the display. M-mode displays time motion information of the ultrasound data derived from a stationary beam. Depth is arranged along the vertical axis with time along the horizontal axis. M-mode is normally used in conjunction with a 2D image for spatial reference. The 2D image has a graphical line (M-line) superimposed on the 2D image indicating where the M-mode beam is located.
5-2-1-2-1
MCFM Mode (M Mode + Color Flow Mode) Color Flow Mode and Color M Mode are Doppler modes intended to add color-coded qualitative information concerning the relative velocity and direction of fluid motion within the 2D mode or M mode image. Color Flow overlays color on the M mode trace using velocity and variance color maps. The Color Flow wedge overlays the 2D mode image and M mode timeline.
5-6
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 5-2-1-3 Color Doppler Modes
Color Doppler is used to detect motion presented as a two-dimensional display. There are following applications of this technique: 5-2-1-3-1 Color Flow Mode (C) - used to visualize blood flow velocity and direction Power Doppler (PD) - used to visualize the spatial distribution of blood Tissue Doppler (TD) - used to visualize tissue motion direction and velocity Color Flow Mode A real-time two-dimensional cross-section image of blood flow is displayed. The 2D cross-section is presented as a full color display, with various colors being used to represent blood flow (velocity, variance, power and/or direction). Often, to provide spatial orientation, the full color blood flow crosssection is overlaid on top of the grayscale cross-section of soft tissue structure (2D echo). For each pixel in the overlay, the decision of whether to display color (Doppler), gray scale (echo) information or a blended combination is based on the relative strength of return echoes from the soft tissue structures and from the red blood cells. Blood velocity is the primary parameter used to determine the display colors, but power and variance may also used. A high pass filter (wall filter) is used to remove the signals from stationary or slowly moving structures. Tissue motion is discriminated from blood flow by assuming that blood is moving faster than the surrounding tissue, although additional parameters may also be used to enhance the discrimination. Color flow can be used in combination with 2D and Spectral Doppler modes as well as with 3D mode. 5-2-1-3-2 Power Doppler A real-time two dimensional cross-section of blood flow is displayed. The 2D cross-section is presented as a full color display, with various colors being used to represent the power in blood flow echoes. Often, to provide spatial orientation, the full color blood flow cross-section is overlaid on top of the gray scale cross-section of soft tissue structure (2D echo). For each pixel in the overlay, the decision of whether to display color (Doppler power), gray scale (echo) information or a blended combination is based on the relative strength of return echoes from the soft-tissue structures and from the red blood cells. A high pass filter (wall filter) is used to remove the signals from stationary or slowly moving structures. Tissue motion is discriminated from blood flow by assuming that blood is moving faster than the surrounding tissue, although additional parameters may also be used to enhance the discrimination. The power in the remaining signal after wall filtering is then averaged over time (persistence) to present a steady state image of blood flow distribution. Power Doppler can be used in combination with 2D and Spectral Doppler modes as well as with 3D mode. 5-2-1-3-3 Tissue Doppler The Tissue Color Doppler Imaging is used for color encoded evaluation of heart movements. The TD image provides information about tissue motion direction and velocity. 5-2-1-4 Pulsed (PW) Doppler PW Doppler processing is one of two spectral Doppler modalities, the other being CW Doppler. In spectral Doppler, blood flow is presented as a scrolling display, with flow velocity on the Y-axis and time on the X-axis. The presence of spectral broadening indicates turbulent flow, while the absence of spectral broadening indicates laminar flow. PW Doppler provides real time spectral analysis of pulsed Doppler signals. This information describes the Doppler shifted signal from the moving reflectors in the sample volume. PW Doppler can be used alone but is normally used in conjunction with a 2D image with an M-line and sample volume marker superimposed on the 2-D image indicating the position of the Doppler sample volume. The sample volume size and location are specified by the operator. Sample volume can be overlaid by a flow direction cursor which is aligned, by the operator, with the direction of flow in the vessel, thus determining the Doppler angle. This allows the spectral display to be calibrated in flow velocity (m/sec.) as well as frequency (Hz). PW Doppler also provides the capability of performing spectral analysis at a selectable depth and sample volume size. PW Doppler can be used in combination with 2D and Color Flow modes. Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory) 5-7
5-2-2
3D Imaging
The Voluson 730Pro/ProV Ultrasound System will be used to acquire multiple, sequential 2D images which can be combined to reconstruct a three dimensional image. These 3D images are useful in visualizing three-dimensional structures, and in understanding the spatial or temporal relationships between the images in the 2D sequence. The 3D image is presented using standard visualization techniques, such as surface or volume rendering.
5-2-2-1
3D Data Collection and Reconstruction 2D gray scale images including Color Flow or Power Doppler information may be reconstructed. The acquisition of volume data sets is performed by sweeping 2D-scans with special transducers (called 3D-transducers) designed for the 2D-scans and the 3D-sweep. 2D ultrasound imaging modes are used to view a two dimensional cross-sections of parts of the body. For example in 2D gray scale imaging, a 2 dimensional cross-section of a 3-dimensional soft-tissue structure such as the heart is displayed in real time. Typically, the user of an ultrasound machine manipulates the position and orientation of this 2D cross-section in real time during an ultrasound exam. By changing the position of the cross-section, a variety of views of the underlying structure are obtained, and these views can be used to understand a 3-dimensional structure in the body. To complete survey a 3-dimensional structure in the body, it is necessary to collect 2D images which span a volume containing the structure. One way is to sweep the imaging cross-section by translating it in a direction perpendicular to the cross-section. Another example method is to rotate the cross section about a line contained in the cross section. The Voluson 730Pro/ProV Ultrasound System uses the automated so called C-Scan for the motion perpendicular to automated B-scan. Once a representative set of 2D cross-sections are obtained, standard reconstruction techniques can be used to construct other 2D cross-sections, or to view the collection of the cross-sections as a 3D images.
5-2-2-2
3D Image Presentation Several techniques can be used to aid the human observer in understanding the resulting 2D image as a representation of a three-dimensional object. One is to rotate the volume of data, and present the resulting sequence of 2D projections to the observer. The changing direction of observation helps the observer to separate the features in the volume according to their distance from the observer.
5-2-2-3
3D Rendering The 3D (volume) rendering is a calculation process to visualize certain 3D-structures of a scanned volume by means of a 2D-image. The gray value for each pixel of the 2D-image is calculated from the voxels along the corresponding projection path (analyzing beam) through the volume. The render (calculation) algorithm, surface or transparent mode, determines how 3D-structures are visualized.
VOXEL
X
X Z Y
PROJECTION WAY PIXEL
VOLU
ME -
BLOC K
Y ISPLA D 2D
Figure 5-4 Principle: Volume Rendering 5-8 Section 5-2 - General Information
5-2-3
Front End
Board CRS RFI PCI to Local I/F DMA Video Mgmt
Board CKV
Probe MUX and Connectors Board CPU
Beamformer Board CPR
CRT Monitor 15
System Control Control

PCI 32 Bit / 33 MHz Dig. VGA Out Aux. VGA
Block diagram Voluson 730Pro/ProV
User I/F
Figure 5-5 Top Level Architecture
Motor Control
IPCPentium 4 3.06 GHz 768 MB

LVPS HDD 80 GB
AGP VGA
RS232
HVPS
LAN 10/100 MBit
USB 2.0
Motor Power Drive
DVD MO +RW Drv
PS Unit
5-9
5-10
5-2-3
5V,12V Data
Harddisk
PC-Motherboard
LINE OUT PS/2 RS232 6x USB2.0 UI-Disp. Aux-Power Connector Components: Network, USB, Sound MajorTasks: SystemControl, 3D-Rendering, ImageProcessing (ScanConversion, CFM,CRI, etc)
PS2-Adaptercable
LineOut eg. for SonoviewSound Records
CW-Channels selected by Relais
Monitor CRW
Power Connector
CPZ Coverboard CPV
CPR
T/R(192)
CWTX(16)
ADD2 DVI Graphic Adatper

DVI-Out
CPV
CW-Dopplerboard (Optional) MID-Processingboard PowersupplySecondaryboard
CPR Beamformer-Motherboard
CRW CRS CPP
Probeboard
Transmitter-Receiver
1 CW-PrbConnector
32 x CPD
CKV-Video-Card
Overlay-Logic, VGA-Adapter,Video-Converter RGB-VHS, etc DVI-In
3 Prb-Connectors 260pol 1 Dummy-PrbConn. 260pol
System Control: Clock Oscillator (60 MHz) - PRF-Generator - BeamformerConfiguration - TX/RX Focus Timing - Line number (lateral Powersupply: 59VDC to: +3.3V,+-5V,+12V,+-15V, +FAN(17...24VDC) +TX_POW(+-90V)
for B,C,D modes: -Multibeam-DeInterleave -SubtractionFilter (for THI) -Dig.TGC, DC-Canceling -Mixer with NCO -FIR-Low Pass Position)
DMA-Controller
S-VHS IN VHS IN S-VHS1 S-VHS2 VHS1 O VHS2 O
CPD-Beamformer-Subboard
Motor-SIN-COS-PowAmp VGA1 VGA2 RGB
1x : Beamformer-ASIC
-Probe Select Relais -Probe Recognition (Signals to CPC)
generates TX-Pulses+TxFocus+TxApodisation, RxFocusDelay+Summation. 16x : TX-PowerAmplifier
-Separate ClkOsc.+Clockgenerator PRF,FN -TxDelayMatrix -Transmitter, -RxAmp, -RxDelayMatrix -Analog: Mixer, Amps, Filter(WMF,AntiAliasing) -PRF-SampADC16Bit,
US-LineMemory, FrameMemory DSC(Dig.ScanConverter) f. 2D DMA-Controller f. HighSpeed DataTransfer Motherboard CPU-Memory
8x : TGC+AntiAliasingFilter+ADC
Each CPD capable of 16 TX-Channels, 4 RX-Channels - Sin Cos Motor Drive - Frame Start-On Trigger - Write Logic Trigger CKV (DMA Controller)
B mode: -Magnitude Calculator -Logarithmic Amplifier -Resample -Edge Enhance -LineFilter -Blending -Frame Filter Sweep
- contains Tx-Power Doppler + CFM: - CFM-Processing: - Color Doppler shot lines transfer to CKV -Doppler Processing: - DSP, Audio DAC Motor Control: - Master of Control of 3D
CPE-Backplane-Card
Multiplexer+Amp for PC-Sound<>DopplerAudio Feedthrough f. Power, Stdby, etc.
Aux_Supply
SIN-COS US-Data
CPN
Console
Sound IN
Block diagram Voluson 730Pro/ProV (contd)
"EBF_D"(18) CW-Data serial, D,Q,16Bit each
Mot-Strobes
CPU-Control "MCPU_A"(12) "MCPU_D"(8)
Figure 5-6 Voluson 730Pro/ProV - Block diagram

Additional CPE-Connectors: - Lamp, - ECG, - RS232-3 - Remote B/W Printer - Audio VTR OUT, ...VTR IN

PCW CRS CPP
USB Cable PowerSupply-Cable 5V,12V
SIN-COS Powered
BeamformerConfiguration-Data: "EH_DATA"(16) "EH_ADR"(8)
CPK Motherboard of GEZ-Module: CPV CPR
GEM-
ECG+DiskdriveModule:
CPN-MainPowerSupply-Module CPH
Trafo
KVN
(59VDC, Power-OFF-Signals)
GEU-User-InterfaceModule
VGA-Signal to V730EXPERTTouchscreen. (Signal is in fact analog, but is re-sampled and digitalized in Touchscreen.) Cable does not exist at V730PRO PC-Keyboard, Trackball
External Diskdrives ECG-Module
StdbySwitch
CCF
PowersupplyPrimaryboard
CPY
PowerswitchPlugboard
(User Power ON/ OFF)
FootSwitch
5-2-4
Data Flow Control Description

This section describes functions of Voluson 730Pro/ProV Boards vs different Operation Modes. CPR - Beam former Board CRS - Mid-Processor, System Control and Spectral Doppler Audio Board CKV - DMA Controller / Video Management Board (CKV-Block diagram) see Figure 5-16 on page 5-29
5-2-4-1
B-Mode 1.) CRS The CRS contains the Clock-Oszillator(60MHz) and PRF-Generator. It generates(drives) BF(=Beamformer)-ASIC-Clock(60MHz) and Shot-Trigger for the CPR. Configures CPV (Probe board) and Beamformer (CPD-Subboards on CPR) with TX-Frequ, TXFocus, RX-Focus, LineNo (lateral Position), TX- Apodisation, RX-Apodisation, Multibeam, etc. CRS also contains the TX-Power-Reference-DAC. Furthermore it contains Multibeam-DeInterleave, Subtraction Filter (for HI-Mode, see: Section 5-24-1-1 "Special B-Mode Techniques" on page 5-12, DigitalTGC, DC-Canceler, Mixer (Part of Demodulator), LowPassFilter, Decimation (Pixel rate Conversion), Magnitude Calculator (Part of Demodulator), Logarithmic Amplifier, Re-Sample, Edge Enhance (Contrast Enhancement through differentiation), LineFilter, Blending (adapting Brightness in order to perfectly combine NearfieldFrame with Farfield-Frame in FFC-Mode, see: Section 5-2-4-1-1 "Special B-Mode Techniques" on page 5-12, FrameFilter. Multibeam-DeInterleave means: Incoming Pixel order shot1pix1-shot2pix1-shot3pix1-shot4pix1 shot1pix2-shot2pix2-shot3pix2-shot4pix2... is converted to the new order: shot1pix1-shot1pix2-shot1pix3..... - shot2pix1-shot2pix2-shot2pix3..... After DC-cancelling the signal is mixed with RX-Frequency and brought to LF-Spectrum, where the LowPassFilter cuts HF. Mixer and Magnitude-Calculator arrange Complex Demodulation, and Logarithmic Amplifier arrange the conversion from High-Dynamic LinearSignal to the LowDynamik(e.g.8Bit) Log-Signal. Several Postprocessing steps (LineFilter, FrameFilter, ReSample, Edge Enhance) enable smooth image quality while keeping contrast high. 2.) CPR Contains 32 CPD (Beamformer-Subboards). The CPD consists of Beamformer-ASIC, TX-Amplifier, RX-TGC-Amplifier, Signal-ADC. Each CPD can support 8 TX-Channels and 4 RX-Channels. TX-Channel: ASIC generates TX-Freq through dividing 60MHz by 2,3,4,5,... and TX-Focus. RX-Channel: ASIC generates Sample-Clocks for the ADC, manages RX-Focus (Delay and Chain-Adder) and Apodization.
3.) CKV - Direct Memory Access (DMA) section B-mode-Data from CRS is written via Signal Processor (SP) Channel 0 into SDRAM Fifo Buffer memory. DMA Controller 0 transfers the data into PC main memory where scan conversion is performed per software. Cine Mode: Reserved area in PC main memory is used. 4.) CKV - Video section Video Information is provided by the PC on the DVI (Digital Visual Interface) output connector. The signal is connected to CKV, where the analog VGA signals for the monitor and standard video timing outputs are generated. Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory) 5-11
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 5-2-4-1-1 Special B-Mode Techniques
a.) HI (Coded Harmonic Imaging): In one method of HI the RX-Frequency is doubled, so that the radial resolution is increased due to the higher RX-Frequency. The second method of HI is pulse-inversion: 2 TX-Beams are shot to the same Tissue-location, one with positive, one with negative polarity. The subtraction of both shots (Subtraction Filter) brings to bear the nonlinear-echo-reflection-properties of the tissue (especially in usage of Contrast-medias), which is very useful with extremely difficult-to-image patients. b.) FFC (Frequency and Focus Composite): 2 or more TX-Beams are shot to the same Tissue-location. The Beams have different TX-foci. By means of Blending (adaption of Brightnesses) they are composed to one whole RX-Line. c.) XBEAM CRI (CrossBeam - Compound Resolution Imaging): Does not need any special functions of CRS. Image is composed of more than one different-direction-steered images. PC-calculated. 5-2-4-2 M-Mode 1.) CRS see: 5-2-4-1 B-Mode 2.) CPR see: 5-2-4-1 B-Mode 3.) CKV - DMA section B-mode-Data from CRS is written via SP0 into SDRAM Fifo Buffer memory. DMA Controller 1 transfers the data into PC main memory where scan conversion is performed per software, i.e. the sweep image is generated (scaling and interpolation between lines). CineMode: CineMode-Memory is the PC main memory. CineMode with ECG: CineMode-Memory for the ECG-Curve is inside PC-Memory. Software has to take care that M-Mode-Image and ECG-Curve are placed exactly one upon the other, means: have the same Cine-Shift. 4.) CKV - Video section see: 5-2-4-1 B-Mode
5-12
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 5-2-4-3 D-Mode (Pulsed Wave- and Continuous Wave Doppler) 1.) CRS PRF-generator; see: 5-2-4-1 B-Mode
After DC-cancelling the signal is mixed with RX-Frequency and brought to LF-Spectrum, where the LowPassFilter cuts HF. Mixer and Magnitude-Calculator arrange Complex Demodulation. D-Mode Data uses the dedicated 16-bit Bus SP0 to the CKV.
2.) CPR
see: 5-2-4-1 B-Mode 3.) CKV - DMA section D-mode-Data from CRS is written via SP0 into SDRAM Fifo Buffer memory. DMA Controller 1 transfers the data into PC main memory where FFT and scan conversion is performed per software, i.e. the sweep image is generated (scaling and interpolation between lines). CineMode: CineMode-Memory is the PC main memory. CineMode with ECG: CineMode-Memory for the ECG-Curve is inside PC-Memory. Software has to take care that D-Mode-Image and ECG-Curve are placed exactly one upon the other, means: have the same Cine-Shift. 4.) CKV - Video section see: 5-2-4-1 B-Mode 5-2-4-4 D-Mode Autotrace (draws PC-calculated envelope to D-Spectrum) (ECG-Curve is similar to Autotrace-Curve) 1.) CRS PRF-generator; see: 5-2-4-1 B-Mode After DC-cancelling the signal is mixed with RX-Frequency and brought to LF-Spectrum, where the LowPassFilter cuts HF. Mixer and Magnitude-Calculator arrange Complex Demodulation. D-Mode Data use the dedicated 16-bit Bus SP0 to the CKV.
2.) CPR
see: 5-2-4-1 B-Mode 3.) CKV - DMA section D-mode-Data from CRS is written via SP0 into SDRAM Fifo Buffer memory. PC calculates Autotrace-Curve from D-Mode data. Cine Mode with Autotrace/ECG: Cine Mode-Memory for the Autotrace/ECG-Curve is inside PCMemory. Software has to take care that D-Spectrum and Autotrace/ECG-Curve are placed exactly one upon the other, means: have the same Cine-Shift. 4.) CKV - Video section see: 5-2-4-1 B-Mode
5-13
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 5-2-4-5 CFM-Mode (Color Flow Mode) 1.) CRS PRF-generator; see: 5-2-4-1 B-Mode
After DC-cancelling the signal is mixed with RX-Frequency and brought to LF-Spectrum, where the LowPassFilter cuts HF. Mixer and Magnitude-Calculator arrange Complex Demodulation.
2.) CPR see: 5-2-4-1 B-Mode 3.) CKV - DMA section see: 5-2-4-1 B-Mode 4.) CKV - Video section see: 5-2-4-1 B-Mode 5-2-4-6 3D-Mode (Freezes after 1 volume sweep) see: 5-2-4-1 B-Mode 5-2-4-7 Real Time 4D-Mode (nonstop volume rendering) see: 5-2-4-1 B-Mode 5-2-4-8 XBeam CRI-Mode (CrossBeam Compound Resolution Imaging) see: 5-2-4-1 B-Mode 5-2-4-9 Extern-Video-Mode (display Video from Video-Recorder) 1.) CRS Not used for Signal-Processing 2.) CPR Not used for Signal-Processing 3.) CKV - DMA section Not used for Signal-Processing 4.) CKV - Video section Analog input from an external video source (YC or CVBS) is converted to a digital RGB data stream by a video decoder. It is mixed with the DVI video output from PC in an overlay unit (Chroma keying mechanism). Generation of analog VGA signals for the monitor and standard video timing outputs follows this block.
5-14
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 5-2-4-10 Sonoview write mode (store Image to Sonoview) 1.) CRS Not used 2.) CPR Not used 3.) CKV - DMA section Not used 4.) CKV - Video section Not used
5-2-5
Description of Software Options

Service Manual). To activate the software options, see: Section 8-8 "Replacement or Activation of Options" on page 8-17. Table 5-2 Software Options & Application Packages
Fetal Echo Package*
NOTICE Not all Options are available on the Voluson 730Pro V (marked with * in the following sections of the
individual SW-Options Real Time 4D DICOM RT_4D_Biopsy* VOCAL II* XTD-View STIC* VCI* SRI* SRI II* TUI*
Description 5-2-5-1 Real Time 4D 5-2-5-2 DICOM 5-2-5-3 Real Time 4D-Biopsy * 5-2-5-4 VOCAL II* - Virtual Organ Computer-aided Analysis 5-2-5-5 XTD-View (Extended View) 5-2-5-6 STIC* (Spatio-Temporal Image Correlation) 5-2-5-7 VCI* - Volume Contrast Imaging 5-2-5-8 SRI* - Speckle Reduction Imaging 5-2-5-9 SRI II*- Speckle Reduction Imaging 5-2-5-10 T.U.I* - Tomographic Ultrasound Imaging
X X
NOTE:
BT-Version:
Additional options are not yet implemented.
BT Version: "VCI" is optional at BT05 Voluson 730Pro systems. However, at BT08 systems (SW5.4.x installed), or systems that were upgraded to BT08 via upgrade kit, this feature is standard. A software only update (no new BT-version key) does NOT activate this feature. It remain optional and can be obtained via sales order. BT Version: Application Packages are only available for Voluson 730Pro systems with BT08 software (SW 5.4.x).
BT-Version:
Breast Package*
X X X X
Gyn Package*
5-15
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 5-2-5-1 Real Time 4D
Real Time 4D mode is obtained through continuous volume acquisition and parallel calculation of 3D rendered images. In Real Time 4D mode the volume acquisition box is at the same time the render box. All information in the volume box is used for the render process. In Real Time 4D mode a frame rate of up 16 volumes/second (at Voluson 730Pro V up to 10 volumes/second) is possible. By freezing the acquired volumes, size can be adjusted, manipulated manually as known from the Voluson 3D Mode. 5-2-5-2 DICOM Voluson 730Pro/ProV software package providing following DICOM functionality: Storage Service Class Print Management Service Class Modality Worklist Management Service Class Structured Reporting Service Class Storage Commit Service Class Modality Performed Procedure Step Service Class
Sending of reports - Additionally all OB/Gyn measurements can be sent to a PC*. Receiving of these reports is supported by ViewPoint workstation PIA only. All other workstations can be adapted individually. * Without using structured reporting. 5-2-5-3 Real Time 4D-Biopsy * For minimal invasive procedures like biopsies, ultrasound is a widely used method to visualize and guide the needle during puncture. The advantage in comparison with other imaging methods is the realtime display, quick availability and easy access to any desired region of the patient. The 4D biopsy allows for real time control of the biopsy needle in 3D multi-planar display during the puncture. The user is able to see the region of interest in three perpendicular planes (longitudinal, transversal and frontal section) and can guide the biopsy needle accurately into the centre of the lesion. 5-2-5-4 VOCAL II* - Virtual Organ Computer-aided Analysis Diagnosis and therapy of cancer is one of the most important issues in medical care. The VOCAL II - Imaging program allows completely new possibilities in cancer diagnosis, therapy planning and follow-up therapy control. VOCAL II offers additional functions: Manual or Semi automatic Contour detection of structures (such as tumor lesion, cyst, prostate, etc.) and subsequent volume calculation. The accuracy of the process can be visually controlled by the examiner in multi-planar display. Construction of a virtual shell around the contour of the lesion. The wall thickness of the shell can be defined. The shell can be imagined as a layer of tissue around the lesion, where the tumor vascularization takes place. Automatic calculation of the vascularization within the shell by 3D color histogram by comparing the number of color voxels to the number of grayscale voxels.
5-2-5-5
XTD-View (Extended View) XTD-View provides the ability to construct and view a static 2D image which is wider than the field of view of a given transducer. This feature allows viewing and measurement of anatomy that is larger than what would fit in a single image. XTD-View constructs the extended image from individual image frames as the operator slides the transducer along the surface of the skin in direction of the scan plane. Examples include scanning of vascular structures and connective tissues in the arms and legs.
NOTE: 5-16
XTD is only working together with BT05 HW. Section 5-2 - General Information
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 5-2-5-6 STIC* (Spatio-Temporal Image Correlation)
With this acquisition method the fetal heart or an artery can be visualized in 4D. It is not a Real Time 4D technique, but a post processed 3D acquisition. In order to archive a good result, try to adjust the size of the volume box and the sweep angle to be as small as possible. The longer the acquisition time, the better the spatial resolution will be. A good STIC, STIC CFM (2D+CFM), or STIC PD (2D+PD) data set shows a regular and synchronous pumping of the fetal heart or of an artery. The user must be sure that there is minimal movement of the participating persons (e.g., mother and fetus), and that the probe is held absolutely still throughout the acquisition period. Movement will cause a failure of the acquisition. The acquired images are post processed to calculate a 4D Volume Cine sequence. Please make sure that the borders of the fetal heart or the artery are smooth and there are no sudden discontinuities. If the user (trained operator) clearly recognizes a disturbance during the acquisition period, the acquisition has to be cancelled. 5-2-5-7 STIC - Fetal Cardio is only available on RAB & RIC probes in the OB/GYN application. STIC - Vascular is only available on the RSP probe in the Peripheral Vascular application.
VCI* - Volume Contrast Imaging Volume Contrast Imaging utilizes 4D transducers to automatically scan multiple adjacent slices and delivers a real-time display of the ROI. This image results from a special rendering mode consisting of texture and transparency information. VCI improves the contrast resolution and therefore facilitates finding of diffuse lesions in organs. VCI has more information (from multiple slices) and is of advantage in gaining contrast due to improved signal/noise ratio. Static VCI is a part of the VCI option, which allow to apply the contrast enhancing VCI method to 3D data sets after the acquisition.
BT-Version:
BT Version: "VCI" is optional at BT05 Voluson 730Pro systems. However, at BT08 systems (SW5.4.x installed), or systems that were upgraded to BT08 via upgrade kit, this feature is standard. A software only update (no new BT-version key) does NOT activate this feature. It remain optional and can be obtained via sales order. 5-2-5-8 SRI* - Speckle Reduction Imaging Speckle Reduction Imaging (SRI) is a smoothing type filter to reduce speckle in the ultrasound image. It may be used when image speckle interferes with the desired image detail. 5-2-5-9 SRI II*- Speckle Reduction Imaging A type of image noise or interference is generally considered undesirable and can obscure the quality or interpretation of B-mode images. Although somewhat associated with the underlying echogenicity of tissue scatters, image speckle characteristics such as brightness, density or size have no apparent value in determining tissue structure or related properties. The elimination of or significant reduction in speckle improves the quality or diagnostic potential of the image. The method applied in the subject modification utilizes a nonlinear diffusion filtering technique that permits effective speckle reduction in real time. The speckle reduction filter is available to the user in all B-mode imaging, independent of the transducer used.
NOTICE Software 5.0.3 or higher is required.
5-17
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 5-2-5-10 T.U.I* - Tomographic Ultrasound Imaging
TUI is a new visualisation mode for 3D and 4D data sets. The data is presented as slices through the data set which are parallel to each other. An overview image, which is orthogonal to the parallel slices, shows which parts of the volume are displayed in the parallel planes. This method of visualisation is consistent with the way other medical systems such as CT or MRI, present the data to the user. The distance between the different planes can be adjusted to the requirements of the given data set. In addition it is possible to set the number of planes. The planes and the overview image can also be printed to a DICOM printer, for easier comparison of the ultrasound data with CT and/or MRI data.
5-18
5-2-6
Description of Hardware Options

Table 5-3 Hardware Options
HW-Options
1 2 3 4 5 CW-Doppler ECG Digital Module MOD (Magneto-Optical Drive) Scan/Freeze Foot switch Global Modem
Description
5-2-6-1 CW - Continuous Wave Doppler 5-2-6-2 ECG Preamplifier 5-2-6-3 MOD (Magneto-Optical Drive) 5-2-6-4 Scan/Freeze Footswitch 5-2-6-5 Global Modem
5-2-6-1
CW - Continuous Wave Doppler CW Doppler mode provides real time spectral analysis of CW Doppler signals. This information describes the Doppler shifted signal from the moving reflectors in the CW Doppler beam. CW Doppler can be referenced through a small pencil probe or phased array scan head, but it can also be used in conjunction with a 2D image which has an M-line superimposed on the 2D image indicating the position of the Doppler sample volume. For through-the-beamformer CW, this beam is steerable by the operator, and is done by adjusting the location of the M-line. The CW Doppler beam, or M-mode line, can be steered allowing interrogation along an operator-selected line within the image. This option can be upgraded by implementing the CW-Dopplerboard (CRW).
5-2-6-2
ECG Preamplifier MAN6 (internal, digital version) For details see: Section 5-10-2 "ECG-preamplifier (MAN6 - optional)" on page 5-48.
5-2-6-3
MOD (Magneto-Optical Drive) For details see: Section 5-10-4 "Magneto-Optical Drive (optional)" on page 5-48.
5-2-6-4
Scan/Freeze Footswitch
Footswitch connected to Power Supply-Box (below Main Electronic-Box) Figure 5-7 Footswitch Connector on CPN 5-2-6-5 Global Modem The Multi-Tech global modem is a standard modem that connects to an analog phone line. It provides high-speed data transfers and fax capabilities. Features like remote configuration, callback security, and 2-wire leased line support set it apart from basic desktop modems. In addition, it is approved for use in many countries around the world.
5-19
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 5-2-6-5-1 Location in the Unit
Figure 5-8 Modem (placed on the GEZ-box) 5-2-6-5-2 LEDs The Modem has 10 LEDs on its front.
TD
RD CD 56
33
14
OH TR EC FX
Figure 5-9 LEDs on Modems Front Panel Table 5-4

LED Color - Red - Red - Red - Red - Red - Red
LEDs on Modem
Description TD (Transmit Data) RD (Receive Data) CD (Carrier Detect) 56 (56K Mode) 33 (V.34 Mode) 14 (V.32bis Mode) Normally State Flashes during use. Flashes during use. ON when detecting a carrier from another modem and during communication. OFF indicates no or broken connection. During Power On: Briefly Flashing These LEDs indicates communication speeds above 14 kbs. If one of this LEDs are ON during communication, it will stay ON until the modem is reset or connected the next time. At speeds below 14 kbs, these LEDs are OFF. ON when dialing, online, or answering a call
- Red
OH (Off hook)
Flashes if puls dialing Off when modem not in use ON when the system initializes the modem. It indicates that the modem is ready for an outgoing or incoming call. OFF indicates that communication on the RS232 (COM) port has been broken. The connected (remote) modem will disconnect. ON: Error Correction (V42) is turned ON Blinking: Compression turned ON OFF: Normal operation. Always OFF
- Red
TR (Terminal Ready)
- Red
EC (Error Correction (V.42)) FX (Fax)
- Red
5-20
Section 5-3 Main board Chassis - GEZ Module

The GEZ Module contains the Front End processor and the Back End processor and the Secondary Power supply for the full GEZ Chassis. Additionally GEZ Module is the connection point of the internal I/O wiring.
Front
View from Right with Internal I/O (PC-part)
View from Left
Rear with Internal I/O (Audio Video)
Top View
Front End
Secondary Power Board
CPP
Back End
Figure 5-10 Mechanic of GEZ Module
5-21
5-22
CRW
CWTX(16)
Section 5-4 FrontEnd Processor
CW-Channels selected by Relais
CPZ Coverboard CPV
CPR
T/R(192)
CPV
CW-Dopplerboard (Optional) MID-Processingboard
System Control: Clock Oscillator (60 MHz) - PRF-Generator - BeamformerConfiguration - TX/RX Focus Timing - Line number (lateral Powersupply: 59VDC to: +3.3V,+-5V,+12V,+-15V, +FAN(17...24VDC) +TX_POW(+-90V) Motor-SIN-COS-PowAmp
CPR Beamformer-Motherboard
PowersupplySecondaryboard
CRW CRS CPP
Probeboard
Transmitter-Receiver
1 CW-PrbConnector
32 x CPD
3 Prb-Connectors 260pol 1 Dummy-PrbConn. 260pol
for B,C,D modes: -Multibeam-DeInterleave -SubtractionFilter (for THI) -Dig.TGC, DC-Canceling -Mixer with NCO -FIR-Low Pass Position)
CPD-Beamformer-Subboard
1x : Beamformer-ASIC
-Probe Select Relais -Probe Recognition (Signals to CPC)
generates TX-Pulses+TxFocus+TxApodisation, RxFocusDelay+Summation. 16x : TX-PowerAmplifier
-Separate ClkOsc.+Clockgenerator PRF,FN -TxDelayMatrix -Transmitter, -RxAmp, -RxDelayMatrix -Analog: Mixer, Amps, Filter(WMF,AntiAliasing) -PRF-SampADC16Bit,
8x : TGC+AntiAliasingFilter+ADC
Each CPD capable of 16 TX-Channels, 4 RX-Channels - Sin Cos Motor Drive - Frame Start-On Trigger - Write Logic Trigger CKV (DMA Controller)
B mode: -Magnitude Calculator -Logarithmic Amplifier -Resample -Edge Enhance -LineFilter -Blending -Frame Filter Sweep
- contains Tx-Power Doppler + CFM: - CFM-Processing: - Color Doppler shot lines transfer to CKV -Doppler Processing: - DSP, Audio DAC Motor Control: - Master of Control of 3D
"EBF_D"(18) CW-Data serial, D,Q,16Bit each
Mot-Strobes
CPU-Control "MCPU_A"(12) "MCPU_D"(8) SIN-COS
Figure 5-11 Front End Processor - Block diagram

US-Data
Section 5-4 - FrontEnd Processor

PCW CRS CPP
SIN-COS Powered
BeamformerConfiguration-Data: "EH_DATA"(16) "EH_ADR"(8)
CPK Motherboard of GEZ-Module: CPV CPR
5-4-1
5-4-1-1
FrontEnd - Board Descriptions

CPV - Probe Connector Board 1 CW-Probe Connector 3 Probe-Connectors 260pin 1 Dummy-Probe Connector 260pin Probe Select Relays Probe Recognition
32 * Tx/Rx Channels
to CRW
CW Probe
CPV Probe Board

TX / RX
CPZ
Cover Board
CPR Beamformer Motherboard

Transmitter/Receiver
Probe 1
Probe 3
Power 192 TX / RX MOT_signals CTRL-signals
192 * Tx/Rx Channels
Probe 2
MCPU_A [0..12] SIN-COS, Mot-Strobes CTRL-signals PowerSupply MCPU_D [0..7]
192 * Tx/Rx Channels
32 * CPD Beamformer Subboard
EBF_D(18) to CRS
CPK Motherboard
Figure 5-12 CPV + Beamformer (CPR) 5-4-1-2 CPR - Beamformer-Motherboard Transmitter-Receiver (192 transmitter channel used, 128 Receiver channels) CPR contains 32 pieces of CPD (see: Section 5-4-1-3 "CPD - Beamformer Sub-board" on page 5-24)
5-23
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 5-4-1-3 CPD - Beamformer Sub-board
1x : Beamformer-ASIC generates TX-Pulses + TX-Focus +TX-Apodization, Rx Focus Delay and Summation 16x : TX-Power Amplifier 4x : TGC + Anti Aliasing Filter + Analogue Digital Conversion (ADC) Each CPD is capable of 16 TX-Channels and 4 RX-Channels
From ASIC(n-1) +TX_POW1/ -TX POW1 El_0 +TX_POW2/ -TX POW2 Driver EN_A EN_B EN_A EN_B EN_A EN_B EN_A EN_B Tx_1n Tx_1p Tx_0n Tx_0p
Sep.
Tx_0
Driver Driver Driver Driver
El_128
Sep.
Tx_1
Driver Driver Driver
8*
8*2* Pushpull Output stage

Driver Tx_6 Driver Driver Driver Driver
8*
EN_A EN_B EN_A EN_B EN_A EN_B EN_A EN_B Tx_7n Tx_7p Tx_6n Tx_6p
El_3
Sep.
El_131
Driver
Sep.
Tx_7
Driver Driver
ASIC BFIC
2:1 Mux
TGC
AntialiasingFilter
ADC 10 Bit
Rx_0
El_1 El_129 2:1 Mux
TGC
AntialiasingFilter
ADC 10 Bit
Rx_1
El_2 El_130 2:1 Mux
TGC
AntialiasingFilter
ADC 10 Bit
Rx_2
2:1 Mux
TGC
AntialiasingFilter
ADC 10 Bit
Rx_3
to ASIC(n+1)
Figure 5-13 Block diagram CPD 5-24 Section 5-4 - FrontEnd Processor
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 5-4-1-4 CRW - CW-Doppler Board (optional) 5-4-1-5 Separate Clock Oscillator + Clock generator PRF, FN TxDelayMatrix Transmitter, Receiver Amplifiers (RxAmp), Receiver Delay matrix (RxDelayMatrix) Analogue: Mixer, Amplifier, Filter (WMF, Anti Aliasing) PRF-SampADC16Bit,
CPZ - Cover Board Transfers the analogue transmitting / receiving signals between the following boards: CPV CPR CRW
192 Transmitter-, 128 Receiver channels, 16 CW-Doppler channels - switched by relays at CPZ 5-4-1-6 CPK - Motherboard of GEZ-Module Following boards are direct connected to the CPK: CPV - Probe connector Board CPR - Beam former Board CRW - CW-Doppler Board CRS - Signal Processing Board CPP - Power Supply Board
5-25
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 5-4-1-7 CRS - Signal Processor Board A.) MID-Processor: 1.) For B, C, D modes: Multi Beam-DeInterleave Subtraction Filter (for HI) Digital TGC, DC-Cancelling Mixer with NCO FIR-Low Pass Magnitude Calculator Logarithmic Amplifier Resample Edge Enhance Line Filter Blending Frame Filter Clock Oscillator (60MHz) PRF (Pulse Repetition Frequency) Generator Beamformer Configuration:
2.) For B mode only:
B.) System Control:
Tx (transmitting Frequency, TxRx (transmitting/receiving) Focus timing TxRx (transmitting/receiving) Apodization Line number (lateral Position) contains TX-Power-DAC
C.) Doppler + CFM: 1.) CFM-processing: Color-Doppler shot lines transfer to CKV DSP, Audio DAC "EH_DATA"(16) "EH_ADR"(8) B-Mode-Data Master of Control of 3D-Sweep Drives Motor via SIN-COS Triggers Frame-start on CPR (Beamformer) Triggers Write-Logic on CKV (DMA-Controller) 2.) Doppler-Processing: 3.) Beamformer- Configuration-Data:
D.) Motor Control:
5-26
Section 5-4 - FrontEnd Processor
CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board + Motor Power stage used for Supply of both FrontEnd and BackEnd DC-DC-Converter: 59VDC to following output voltages: + 3.3V, +/-5V, +12V, +/-15V, + FAN (10 -24V / 15 Watt; adjustable by software) +TX_POW (+/-90V) -TX_POW (+/-90V) +TX_POW2 -TX_POW2
BLOCKDIAGRAMM POWERSUPPLY CPP90 POWER-BOX
AC -INPUT
SWITCH
INRUSHCURRENT LIMITER
FAN
TRAFO 920VA STANDBY -CTRL PFC 59V8A
EXTERNAL AC DEVICES max. 350VA
FAN 10-24V 5V/12,5A 5V 150 W 5V/12,5A 3V3/18A 3,3 V 150W 3V3/24A
10-24V
FAN
FAN
FAN
15V 30W
15V/2A
15V 50W
-15V/3A
12V 150W
12V/13A
+/- 5V_RX
-5V/1.5A
TX_POW1 +/- 0-80V / 40W
+/-10 - 90V
TX_POW2 +/- 0-80V / 40W
+/-10 - 90V
TX_MUX +/- 100V / 2W
+/- 100V
MOT_Voltage +/- 10-32V/50W
MOTORDRIVER
CONVERTER-BOARD
Figure 5-14 Block diagram CPP Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory) 5-27
5-28
5V,12V Data
Harddisk
PC-Motherboard
LINE OUT PS/2 RS232 6x USB2.0 UI-Disp. Aux-Power Connector
PS2-Adaptercable
Components: Network, USB, Sound MajorTasks: SystemControl, 3D-Rendering, ImageProcessing (ScanConversion, CFM,CRI, etc)
LineOut eg. for SonoviewSound Records
Section 5-5 BackEnd Processor
Monitor
Power Connector
ADD2 DVI Graphic Adatper

DVI-Out
CPP
PowersupplySecondaryboard
CKV-Video-Card
Overlay-Logic, VGA-Adapter,Video-Converter RGB-VHS, etc DVI-In
Powersupply: 59VDC to: +3.3V,+-5V,+12V,+-15V, +FAN(17...24VDC) +TX_POW(+-90V)
DMA-Controller
S-VHS IN VHS IN VHS1 O VHS2 O US-LineMemory, FrameMemory DSC(Dig.ScanConverter) f. 2D DMA-Controller f. HighSpeed DataTransfer Motherboard CPU-Memory VGA1 VGA2 RGB S-VHS1 S-VHS2
Motor-SIN-COS-PowAmp
CPE-Backplane-Card
Multiplexer+Amp for PC-Sound<>DopplerAudio Feedthrough f. Power, Stdby, etc.
Aux_Supply
CPN
Console
Sound IN
Figure 5-15 BackEnd Processor - Block diagram

US-Data Additional CPE-Connectors: - Lamp, - ECG, - RS232-3 - Remote B/W Printer - Audio VTR OUT, ...VTR IN
Section 5-5 - BackEnd Processor

CPP
USB Cable PowerSupply-Cable 5V,12V
GEM-
ECG+DiskdriveModule:
CPN-MainPowerSupply-Module CPH
Trafo
KVN
(59VDC, Power-OFF-Signals)
GEU-User-InterfaceModule
VGA-Signal to V730EXPERTTouchscreen. (Signal is in fact analog, but is re-sampled and digitalized in Touchscreen.) Cable does not exist at V730PRO PC-Keyboard, Trackball
External Diskdrives ECG-Module
StdbySwitch
CCF
PowersupplyPrimaryboard
CPY
PowerswitchPlugboard
(User Power ON/ OFF)
FootSwitch
5-5-1
Block diagram CKV

DMA Controller
PCI Bus 32 Bit / 33MHz PLX PCI 9054
Signal Proc. No. 0 data 16 Bit / 30 MHz (B/MB/C/MC)
DMA 0 (Demand Mode) SP0 I/F 1 us Write slot 0 Local Bus 32 Bit / 33MHz
DMA 1 (Block Mode)
Host PC Access
Signal Proc. Channel No.1 data 8 Bit / 30 MHz (PW/CW)
SP1 I/F
1 us Write slot 1
DMA 0 I/F B/C
DMA 1 I/F MB/MC/ PW/CW
Ext. Bus I/F
UART 16C550
B / MB / C-IQ / MC -IQ / PW / CW Read/Write Address generator Fifo Buffer Memory SDRAM 32 Bit / 66 MHz
2 us Read slot VGA Retrace Interrupt To/From U/S Frontend H/W 32 Bit / 16.7 MHz
VCR Remote
Video I/O
Local Bus 32 Bit / 33MHz FPGA DVI TMDS I/F Overlay (ext. Video) DAC VGA VGA Boot FLASH
YC CVBS
Video Decoder
Scaler
Scaler + Deflicker
RGB Video Encoder CVBS (C)VBS YC YC
RAM
RAM
Figure 5-16 Block diagram CKV Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory) 5-29
5-5-2
5-5-2-1
BackEnd - Board Descriptions

SBC - Single Board Computer Built in or external Components: On Board VGA 1 Gbit LAN USB 2.0 Sound
Major Tasks: 5-5-2-2 System Control 2D / 3D-Image processing and Rendering RS232 (User Interface) PS2 (User Interface PC-Keyboard, Mouse as Trackball) Control GEM drives (USB)
ADD2-DVI (Add-On) Graphic Adapter Card DVI graphic extension card which supplies CKV (Video manager) board with DVI Video
5-5-2-3
CKV - DMA-Controller / Video-Card DMA-Controller f. High Speed Data Transfer into Slot-CPU-Memory VGA- Output (2 Channels) for the System Main Monitor and external device Video-Converter VGA RGB to: VHS, S-VHS, RGB Display External Playback Video and adding Overlay graphics to it.
see also: Figure 5-16: Block diagram CKV on page 5-29 5-5-2-4 Hard Disk Drive Minimum 80GB; IDE Stores the system programs and Image filing (patient data, Report files) 5-5-2-5 CPE - Back Panel I/O-Card Multiplexer +Amplifier for PC-Sound<>Doppler Audio Feed through for DC- Power and signals and for built in Peripherals (User Interface, Disk drive module, ECG, etc.)
5-30
Section 5-5 - BackEnd Processor
CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board + Motor Power stage used for Supply of both FrontEnd and BackEnd DC-DC-Converter: 59VDC to following output voltages: + 3.3V, +/-5V, +12V, +/-15V, + FAN (10 -24V / 15 Watt; adjustable by software) +TX_POW (+/-90V) -TX_POW (+/-90V) Motor Sinus2 Powerstage Amplifier Motor Cosinus2 Powerstage Amplifier +TX_POW2 -TX_POW2
see also: Section 5-4-1-8 on page 5-27
5-31
Section 5-6 Internal I/O

Internal I/O depends on the SBC-board installed. If Kontron ATX SBC-board is installed, see: Section 5-6-1 on page 5-33. If Tyan SBC-board is installed, see: Section 5-6-2 on page 5-35. If Kontron Flex SBC-board is installed, see: Section 5-6-3 on page 5-37. If DFI ATX SBC-board is installed, see: Section 5-6-4 on page 5-39.
However, connectors on the Main Module of the GEZ-box are the same (independent of installed SBC).
Figure 5-17 Connectors on the Main Module of the GEZ
Item
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Connector Name
VGA1 VGA2 RGB S-VHS 1 S-VHS 2 VHS 1 VHS 2 VHS S-VHS Audio IN Sound Remote BW Printer AUX Supply Console CPN Lamp RS232-3 ECG --------------Audio OUT / VTR Audio IN / VTR
Description
Connector for the internal color video monitor Connector for an external color monitor Output for color video printer S-VHS 1 OUT S-VHS 2 OUT Video 1 OUT: 1Vss @ 75 Ohm, PAL ; 1Vss @ 75 Ohm, NTSC Video 2 OUT: 1Vss @ 75 Ohm, CCIR ; 1Vss @ 75 Ohm, FCC Video IN: 1Vss @ 75 Ohm, PAL / CCIR ; 1Vss @ 75 Ohm, NTSC / FCC S-VHS IN Audio IN R/L Sound Remote control for BW Printer Power Supply for Module GEM Connector for Console Connector for Power Supply (CPN) input Connector for external lamp Remote control for Video or DVD Recorder Connector for MAN (ECG-preamplifier) Diagnostic LEDs (for voltage check; see: Section 7-3-1 on page 7-3) 1 = +15V ; 2 = -15V ; 3 = Fan ; 4 = +12V ; 5 = +5V ; 6 = +3.3V Audio OUT / R/L Video Recorder Audio IN / R/L Video Recorder
5-32
Section 5-6 - Internal I/O
5-6-1
Internal I/O - if Kontron ATX SBC-board is installed
* Cable is only used in combination with Kontron SBC-board version. Other versions have internal connector cable, directly connected f rom CPE flat cable connector (S5) to SBC CO M1 (J22) connector.
Figure 5-18 Internal I/O (Kontron ATX SBC-board installed) Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory) 5-33
5-6-1
Internal I/O - if Kontron ATX SBC-board is installed (contd)

1 3 5 7 6 2 4
8 10 11 12
13
14 Figure 5-19 Connectors on PC-part of the GEZ (Kontron ATX SBC-board installed)
Item
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Connector Name
PS2 Kbd. PS2 Mouse USB GEM USB 2 RS-232 Out UI Disp. Parallel Port USB 3 and USB 4 LAN Audio DVI Out USB 5 and USB 6 DVI In RS-232 In
Description
Connector for Keyboard Connector for Mouse Connector for Disk Drive Module GEM USB port connector Electrical-Signal-Connection between CPS and PIC_MG_Slot-CPU Connector for User Interface Display NOT used at: Voluson 730Pro/ProV Parallel Port for PC-Line Printer USB port connectors Connector for Network twisted pair RJ-45 10/100 megabits/s MIC = Connector for Microphone Line-Out = Connector for Sound card (green connector) Digital Visual Interface (TMDS cable) / Out USB port connectors Digital Visual Interface (TMDS cable) / In Electrical-Signal-Connection between CKV and PC-Board (SBC)
5-34
5-6-2
Internal I/O - if Tyan SBC-board is installed
Figure 5-20 Internal I/O (Tyan SBC-board installed)
5-35
5-6-2
Internal I/O - if Tyan SBC-board is installed (contd)

1 3 5 4 2
6 7 9 11 12 8 10
13
Figure 5-21 Connectors on PC-part of the GEZ (Tyan SBC-board installed)
Item
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Connector Name
PS2 Kbd. PS2 Mouse ******* UI Disp. Parallel Port Audio USB GEM USB 2 USB 3 and USB 4 LAN DVI Out USB 5 and USB 6 DVI In
Description
Connector for Keyboard Connector for Mouse *********** not used Connector for User Interface Display NOT used at: Voluson 730Pro/ProV Parallel Port for PC-Line Printer MIC = Connector for Microphone Line-Out = Connector for Sound card (green connector) Connector for Disk Drive Module GEM USB port connector USB port connectors Connector for Network twisted pair RJ-45 10/100 megabits/s Digital Visual Interface (TMDS cable) / Out USB port connectors Digital Visual Interface (TMDS cable) / In
5-36
5-6-3
Internal I/O - if Kontron Flex SBC-board is installed
Figure 5-22 Internal I/O (Kontron Flex SBC-board installed)
5-37
5-6-3
Internal I/O - if Kontron Flex SBC-board is installed (contd)
1 3
2 12
4 6 8
5 7
9 10
11
Figure 5-23 Connectors on PC-part of the GEZ (Kontron Flex SBC-board is installed)
Item
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Connector Name
PS2 Kbd. PS2 Mouse UI Disp. USB GEM USB 2 USB 3 and USB 4 LAN USB 5 and USB 6 Audio DVI Out DVI In *******
Description
Connector for Keyboard Connector for Mouse Connector for User Interface Display NOT used at: Voluson 730Pro/ProV Connector for Disk Drive Module GEM USB port connector USB port connectors Connector for Network twisted pair RJ-45 10/100 megabits/s USB port connectors MIC = Connector for Microphone Line-Out = Connector for Sound card (green connector) Digital Visual Interface (TMDS cable) / Out Digital Visual Interface (TMDS cable) / In ***************not used
5-38
5-6-4
Internal I/O - if DFI ATX SBC-board is installed
Figure 5-24 Internal I/O (DFI ATX SBC-board installed)
5-39
5-6-4
Internal I/O - if DFI ATX SBC-board is installed (contd)
5 7
6 8
9 10 11 12 Figure 5-25 Connectors on PC-part of the GEZ (DFI ATX SBC-board is installed)
Item
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Connector Name
PS2 Kbd. PS2 Mouse ******* UI Disp. USB GEM USB 2 USB 3 and USB 4 LAN Audio DVI Out USB 5 and USB 6 DVI In
Description
Connector for Keyboard Connector for Mouse *********** not used Connector for User Interface Display NOT used at: Voluson 730Pro/ProV Connector for Disk Drive Module GEM USB port connector USB port connectors Connector for Network twisted pair RJ-45 10/100 megabits/s MIC = Connector for Microphone Line-Out = Connector for Sound card (green connector) Digital Visual Interface (TMDS cable) / Out USB port connectors Digital Visual Interface (TMDS cable) / In
5-40
Section 5-7 Top Console

The Voluson 730Pro/ProV Operator Control Panel (OCP) consists of the following electronic subassemblies and/or functional components: Console module: C515 micro controller Atmel micro controller Slide pots TGC with zero raster position) Rotary Encoders with integrated push buttons PS/2 compatible Trackball (2) with standard PC interface PS/2 compatible Qwerty Keyboard with standard PC interface LED indicators with 3 intensity levels (off, 50%,100%) 2 Speaker, used for Doppler and voice replay Converts 12V DC input voltage to 5V DC output voltage for supplying UI components
DC/DC Converter:
25 pol. Connector
12V DC/DC Converter RS232 5V
Hardkey Board
C515
Beeper
PS2
LED's and Hardkeys

TGC- Slider Speaker
Loudspeaker for Top Console
Alpha-numeric keyboard
Trackball Kit
Trackball Keyboard Atmel
Figure 5-26 Top Console
5-41
5-42 156 107

F5 F6 F7 Delete Line Delete Abc Delete Arrow Delete Meas. PrtSc Pause
Section 5-7
138 148 153
106
157
Esc
F1
F2
F3
F4
162 151 140

ECG Mic
! 1
@ 2
# 3
$ 4
% 5
^ 6
& 7
* 8
( 9
) 0
_ -
+ =
<--Backspace } ] | \
|<--->| Tab T Y U I O P { [ G H J K L : ; Enter "
Caps Lock
110 111 109
Top Console (contd)
Shift
< , Shift
> .
? /
Ctrl
Fn
Alt
~ ` Ins
Del
144 123 122 155 128

PW C BX M TD PD 2D
121
145 174 124
164 191 120

B
165 166 167 168 169 170

Inv Init CW Steer
101 173 159 103

auto
Abc
1 2 3
Util.
Menu
104
158
192
4D 3D
175
HI
Figure 5-27 Voluson 730Pro/ProV - Control Console

Calc
Section 5-7 - Top Console 126 182

Abc
102
132 172
136 146
190 127 131
Exit
163
2D
3D/4D
141
Freeze
188 181 178 184 179 186 180 189 183 187 185 133 134 135
160 177
105 142
Table 5-5
key code
101 102 103 104 105 106 107 109 110 111 120 121 122 123 124 126 127 128 131 132 133 134 135 136 138 140 141 142 144 145
Voluson 730Pro/ProV - key codes

Voluson 730Pro/ProV - Functionality
call-up of the patient data entry menu call-up of the probe program menu displays a pointer arrow or hand Patient and measurement data are stored in the Data manager Remote printer trigger key B to shift from scan mode to Sonoview call-up of the Patient report page Quad-Screen format Dual-Screen format (vertical distribution) Dual-Screen format (horizontal distribution) - not yet implemented M-Mode (Motion mode) PD-Mode (Power Doppler) and HD-Mode (Bi-Directional Angio) PW-Mode (Pulsed Wave Doppler) Continuous Wave Doppler Harmonic Imaging Image documentation - to write onto the screen Bodymark display - to enter Bodymark symbols to clear graphics, measurements and annotations on the screen Calculation tables High Resolution Zoom left trackball key upper trackball key right trackball key UP - penetration depth of the B-image UP - acoustic output (Power) call-up of the VCR Remote control menu Remote printer trigger key A Read/Write (Freeze/Run) C-Mode (Color Flow mode) 2D-Mode (B mode)
Description
PID (patient identification) Probe Indicator End Exam Print_b Sonoview Report Quad Format Dual Format (V) Dual Format (H) Mode_Switch1 Mode_Switch2 Mode_Switch3 CW HI Text Bodymark ClrScreen MeasCalcs HR_Zoom Trball_b Trball_a Trball_c B_Depth AcousticPWr VtrRec Print_a Freeze Mode_Switch4 Mode_Switch5
5-43

key code
146 148 151 152 153 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 172 173 174 175 177 178 179 180 181 182 OTO 4D-Mode 3D-Mode Save 3D/4D Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3 Soft 4 Soft_Flip 1 Exit Utilities Invert Left/Right UP/Down Mirror Init Steering B_Depth AcousticPWr ECG Trackball Navigation MIC Single Format Speaker Volume Speaker Volume SieScape BiFlow Save 2D Save Menu

DOWN - penetration depth of the B-image DOWN - acoustic output (Power) ECG line ON/OFF Trackball menu Navigation Microphone Single-Screen format UP - speaker volume DOWN - speaker volume XTD-View (Extended View) B-Flow to save/send 2D images and sequences Save Menu - to save/send images (volumes) NOT USED Exit Utilities Menu Invert image orientation of 3D-image up/down image orientation left/right image orientation reset to initial position in volume mode Beam steering NOT USED Automatic Optimization 4D-Mode ON/OFF 3D-Mode ON/OFF to save/send 3D and 4D images and sequences Soft_Switch 1 Soft_Switch 2 Soft_Switch 3 Soft_Switch 4 UP - Soft Flip 1 (Toggle switch function)
Description
5-44
Section 5-7 - Top Console

key code
183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192

DOWN - Soft Flip 1 (Toggle switch function) UP - Soft Flip 2 (Toggle switch function) DOWN - Soft Flip 2 (Toggle switch function) UP - Soft Flip 3 (Toggle switch function) DOWN - Soft Flip 3 (Toggle switch function) UP - Soft Flip 4 (Toggle switch function) DOWN - Soft Flip 4 (Toggle switch function) Menu Navigation wheel Change Menu Basic Measurements
Description
Soft_Flip 1 Soft_Flip 2 Soft_Flip 2 Soft_Flip 3 Soft_Flip 3 Soft_Flip 4 Soft_Flip 4 Menu Selector (Wheel Switch) Change Menu Measure_User
NOTICE Key codes which are not listed in the table are not available at Voluson 730Pro/ProV.
!! NOTICE:
5-45
Section 5-8 Monitor

LEFT
RIGHT
KEY FUNCTION a. MENU KEY This button will enable the On Screen Display. This button is also used to select the function in the Main Menu or to save the setting in the Sub Menu. (Push for 3sec) b. DECREASE [LEFT] Use this button to move down the OSD selection menu and adjust the attribute of the monitor while in OSD mode. Pressing this button out of the OSD menu allows you to decrease the level of contrast of the display screen. c. INCREASE [RIGHT] Use this button to move up the OSD selection menu and adjust the attribute of the monitor while in OSD mode. Pressing this button out of the OSD menu allows you to increase the level of contrast of the display screen. d. LAMP ON/OFF Lamp ON/OFF S/W e. MICROPHONE Allows to record voice NOTE: There is no function of microphone.
Figure 5-28 Monitor Adjustment buttons For further details refer to: Section 6-3 "Monitor Adjustment" on page 6-2.
5-46
Section 5-8 - Monitor
Section 5-9 External I/O

1 2 3 4 5 6
Figure 5-29 External I/O Panel Connectors
Table 5-6
Item
1 2 3 4 5 6
External I/O Connector Description

Connector Name
VGA OUT MODEM NETWORK USB-1 USB-2 COMP VIDEO OUT
Description
print out VGA signal with monitor/printer RJ-11 with global adapter kit for modem connection DICOM input/output twisted pair RJ-45 10/100 megabit/s USB port USB port BNC Connector, Color Video Output
5-47
Section 5-10 Peripherals

5-10-1 General Information
The GEM Module contains the DVD/CD+(R)W Drive. Additionally the Magneto Optical Drive and the ECG-preamplifier (MAN6) can be installed as an Option.
optional ECG (MAN6)
DVD+(R)W Drive
optional Magneto-Optical Drive (MOD)
Figure 5-30 GEM incl. optional MOD and ECG
5-10-2
ECG-preamplifier (MAN6 - optional)

The ECG-preamplifier is used for acquiring an ECG-signal to be displayed with the ultrasound image. This optional peripheral serves for gaining an ECG-signal to mark the systolic and end diastolic moments in M-Mode and Doppler evaluations. The ECG-preamplifier must not be used for ECG-diagnostics. It is not intended for use as a cardiac monitor and must not be used for an intraoperative application on the heart.
5-10-3
DVD/CD+(R)W Drive
The DVD/CD+(R)W Drive (Writer) is used to backup images and reports. In addition, it is used as the main source of software upgrades and other service utility operations. The DVD/CD+(R)W Drive can read/write CDs and DVDs.
5-10-4
Magneto-Optical Drive (optional)

Storage capacity by disk: 1.3GB, 640MB, 540MB, 230MB, 128MB The MO-Drive allows to read and write any GIGAMO standard 1.3GB disk at twice the liner bit density. Additionally it retains full read/write compatibility with ISO/IEC 3.5 - inch disks ranging from original 128MB to current 640MB. MO disks are nearly indestructible and immune from the problems that plague magnetic media. MO disks can be rewritten an unlimited number of times.
5-48
Section 5-10 - Peripherals
Section 5-11 Power Distribution

5-11-1 CPN - Primary Power Module
Figure 5-31 Primary Power Module - CPN 5-11-1-1 Mechanical Concept and Overview The AC Powers main tasks are to supply the various internal subsystems with AC power and to galvanically isolate the scanner from the on site Mains Power System. To reduce inrush current, an inrush current limiter is implemented. Voltage to peripherals can be configured to either 115 VAC or 230 VAC. The mains cord has plugs in both ends. A female plug connects to the scanner and a male plug to the mains outlet on site. From the Mains Power Input module, the AC power is routed via an Inrush Current Limiter to a internal outlet connector for the Mains Transformer. 5-11-1-2 Major Functions of CPN NOTE: NOTE: Inrush Current limiter Power factor correction transformer for Sinus load for the mains voltage Power down Circuitry + Standby-Switch The CPN module generates 57VDC (+/-2V) as an input voltage for the Secondary Power supply of the GEZ module. The CPN module contains also the isolation transformer for the peripherals. (Maximum load: 350VA) see: Basic User Manual Chapter 23 Technical Data/Information
All DC-supply voltages for built in peripherals are generated in GEZ-module not inside CPN. The system mains supply input voltage can be set to: 100V, 115V, 130V, 230V, 240V. The output voltages may be set to 115V or 230VAC (independent from the input voltages).
5-49
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 5-11-1-3 Fuses on Rear Panel
F1 + F2: The main Input voltage is fused by two 16 Ampere fuses (rated current 16A) labeled F1 and F2. F3: The AC Output voltage (115/230V) is fused by either: a 1.6 Ampere / 250V fuse for auxiliary output voltage 230 VAC a 3.2 Ampere / 250V fuse for auxiliary output voltage 115 VAC F4: 16 Ampere fuse for the input voltage for the switching power supply generating the DC-Supply voltage for the Secondary power supply inside GEZ-Module
Figure 5-32 Fuses of CPN 5-11-1-4 Fuses inside CPN F1 on CCF board: fuses the surge current limiter circuit. NOTE: If this fuse is blown, the NTC (limiting the surge current will remain hot during system operation and if the system is switched off/on within a few seconds the surge current could be to high. Because of this reason Fuse F1 on CPN Rear Panel or the Hospital circuit fuse could be blown.
5-11-2
Disk Drive Module (GEM)

The check points for the drives voltages can be found at the AUX Supply connector (= GEM Power connector) on Backpanel of GEZ-Box; see: Section 7-3 "Check Points Voltages" on page 7-3. MO drive is supplied by +5V only DVD/CD drive is supplied by both +5V and +12 V Fan on the GEM module needs only 12 V power.
5-11-2-1
Fuses on CPE-Board for Disk Drive Module (GEM) Description of fuses: 5A / 250V / slow-blow fuse / 5 x 20 mm
F1 +12V
F2 +5V
Figure 5-33 fuses for disk drives
5-50
Section 5-11 - Power Distribution
Section 5-12 Mechanical Descriptions

5-12-1 Physical Dimensions
851.5
1415 1041,1
607,6 668
337,5 399,5 456 516 560,5
Figure 5-34 Physical Dimensions
678,3
5-51
5-12-2
Monitor
Tilt: 11 forwards and backwards Swivel: +/-90 rotation.
5-12-3
Top Console Positioning
30
Figure 5-35 Top Console Positioning
5-12-4
Rotation of the Control Console
Locking Lever for locking and unlocking the control console Figure 5-36 Locking lever under Control Console Horizontal Access: The control panel offers 30 of horizontal adjustment to the right.
5-52
Section 5-12 - Mechanical Descriptions
5-12-5
Assembly Drawing GW & GEU & Monitor
Figure 5-37 Assembly Drawing Voluson 730Pro/ProV
5-53
Section 5-13 Air Flow Control

5-13-1 Air Flow Distribution
The fans at the right side of the Main Board Chassis draw air into the scanner, through the filter grid, and pushes it through the card rack. Air holes in the left and right side of the rack allow the air to move down through the card rack. Air exits the scanner through holes the Main Air Outlet at the left side panel. 5-13-1-1 Air Flow Distribution Overview
Main Air Outlet
Main Air Inlet ( Filter grid)
CPN Air Outlet
Figure 5-38 Console Views Main Air Outlet

Fan
CPP
Fan 2
Main Air Inlet
Fan 1
PC F an
Fan 1: for CPP and CRS Fan 2: for CRW and CPR
Figure 5-39 Air Flow Control 5-54 Section 5-13 - Air Flow Control
Section 5-14 Service Platform

5-14-1 Introduction
The Service Platform will increase service productivity and reduce training and service costs. This web-enabled technology provides linkage to e-Services, e-Commerce, and the iCenter, making GEs scanners more e-enabled than ever. The Service Platform contains: specific software/hardware test modules, system setup, update, etc. for Voluson systems; see: Section 5-15 "Service Page" on page 5-57.
5-14-2
Access / Security
The Service Platform has different access and security user levels. Each user is only granted access to the tools that are authorized for their use.
5-55
5-14-3
iLinq Interactive Platform

Many of the services of the Service Platform come from its integration with iLinq. If an iLinq checkout was performed on the Voluson 730Pro/ProV, the ILINQ selection item is available in the menu area (on the left side of the screen) of the Utilities menu. By selecting this item, the Netscape browser starts the iLinq Home Page.
Figure 5-40 iLinq Home Page
5-56
Section 5-14 - Service Platform
Section 5-15 Service Page

5-15-1 Introduction
The Service Page contains specific software/hardware test modules, system setup, update, etc. for Voluson systems only.
5-15-2
Access / Security
The service page has different access and security user levels. Each user is only granted access to the tools that are authorized for their use.
5-15-3
Service Login
1.) Press the UTILITIES key on the Control Panel. The menu area changes to the Utilities menu. 2.) Select the SYSTEM item from the menu area to activate the setup desktop screen. 3.) Select the SERVICE page. The password window appears automatically.
Figure 5-41 System Setup Service page
5-57
4.) Enter the password SHE and click the ACCEPT button to display the Service Tools window.
Update Auto Tester Service Viewer Monitor Test Printer Maintenance Report Export System Data Process Logger Keyboard Layout Figure 5-42 Service Tools window 5-15-3-1 Auto Tester File Autotest is a log function of customer activities. It records all user actions (scanning, entries, performing Calculations, review of Patient Reports, etc.). It is possible to safe (record) as file on HDD. But also export to DVD/CD or MOD can be done to allow replay of the records on other units.
NOTICE For intermittent problems this file can be requested from the Service Engineer or customer.
!! NOTICE:
Video Norm Video out VHS2 TCP/IP Buffersize Delete all patients
It is possible to burn this file on DVD/CD+(R)W or to store it on MO-disk. Operation see: Section 7-5 "How to use the Auto Tester program" on page 7-7. 5-15-3-2 Video Norm To change to Video Norm from PAL(50Hz) to NTSC(60Hz) or vice versa. Operation see: Section 3-8-1-6 "How to change Video Norm" on page 3-63. 5-15-3-3 Video out VHS2 Factory setting is B/W. Only VHS2 output can be modified (Color B/W) 5-15-3-4 Process Logger The Process Logger is a separate software application that runs on the system. It is used for detecting software problems and their root causes. Process information and thread information is gathered in cycle time intervals, compressed and written to a file which is located on D:/export. NOTE: 5-15-3-5 This tool must not be used. Please contact your service representative. Keyboard Layout To change the keyboard layout to different languages. Operation see: Section 6-6 "Modification of Keyboard Layout" on page 6-7. NOTE: Reconfigure the layout of the keyboard is only useful by changing the concerned keys also. see: Section 8-14 "Replacement of Key Caps (by special native language keys)" on page 8-26 Section 5-15 - Service Page
5-58
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 5-15-3-6 TCP/IP Buffersize
The TCP/IP Buffersize selects the amount of buffer memory used for DICOM transfers (both directions). 5-15-3-7 Service Viewer Provides common information about System Temperature, Probes, Working hours of system components and probes. 1.) Select the SERVICE VIEWER button to get access to the E-Service page.
Figure 5-43 Kretztechnik E-Service 5-15-3-8 Delete all Patients 1.) Click the DELETE ALL PATIENTS button. Following WARNING message appears on the screen.
Figure 5-44 Warning message

WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
If you select the YES button, all patients data, studies, images and measure report data will be deleted permanently from the hard disk and cannot be recovered!
Export System Data Select the EXPORT SYSTEM DATA button on the Service Tools page to export dump-files and text files, the full Service Database informations about probes, boards, Software, Options, Service Actions and the Event Log File to the DVD/CD Drive (or the optional MO Drive). Operation see: Section 7-4-2 "Export Logs and System Data" on page 7-4.
5-15-3-9
5-59
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 5-15-3-10 Maintenance Report
Any modification upgrade and maintenance action should be entered in this report to get a history of all service actions. 1.) Click the MAINTENANCE REPORT button. The following message box will be displayed.
Figure 5-45 Maintenance Report 2.) Fill in the requested information and click OK. 3.) Click the EXIT button on the Service Tools window and the EXIT button on the System Setup Service page. NOTE: After Hardware or Software modifications normally the Maintenance Report message box (see: Figure 5-45) appears automatically on the screen. Monitor Test 1.) To perform the Monitor test, select the MONITOR TEST button. The following message appears on the screen.
5-15-3-11
Figure 5-46 Monitor Test - Instructions 2.) Read the displayed instructions. Afterwards confirm with YES.
5-60
Section 5-15 - Service Page
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 The Monitor Test main menu appears on the screen.
EXIT
Figure 5-47 Monitor Test - Main menu 3.) Open the desired test page: select the respective icon and press the right/left trackball key. 4.) To return to the Main menu, press the upper trackball key. 5.) To exit the Monitor Test program, click the Exit icon. 5-15-3-12 Printer Printer installation is possible without entering the Windows Desktop. Operation see: 3-7-5 "Printer Installation manually" on page 3-47.
WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
Only accessories explicitly recognized and released by the system manufacturer GE Medical Systems - Kretztechnik may be used in connection with the system.
Update
5-15-3-13
NLS Reserved for loading Software patches.
EUM is for updating the Electronic User Manual
Operation see: Section 8-6 "Electronic User Manual (EUM) Upgrade Procedure" on page 8-13.
UIS is for updating the Ultrasound Application Software
Operation see: Section 8-2-5 "Software - Installation Procedure (via Service Page)" on page 8-7.
SSW is for updating the Service Software
Operation see: Section 8-5 "Service Platform (SSW) Upgrade Procedure" on page 8-11. .
5-61
5-62
Section 5-15 - Service Page
Chapter 6 Service Adjustments

This chapter describes how to test and adjust the mechanical capabilities of a scanner that may be out of specification. Although some tests may be optional they should only be performed by qualified personnel. Table 6-1
Section
6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-7 Overview Regulatory Monitor Adjustment Control Console, Transport Lock Trackball Adjustment Modification of Keyboard Layout Daylight Saving Time (DST) - New Dates
Chapter 6 Contents
6-1 6-1 6-2 6-5 6-6 6-7 6-9
Section 6-2 Regulatory

Verify, where applicable, that any regulatory information or tests required by national law are present and accounted for, and any regulatory tests required by national law are performed and documented.
Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments
6-1
Section 6-3 Monitor Adjustment

The Monitor can be tilted or rotated. Tilt angle: up/down 11 Rotation angle: right/left 90
The digital control panel is located at the front of the color monitor. If you are not satisfied with the factory settings, use these controls to program those you prefer in each resolution. Then, these adjusted settings are kept in memory even if you change the resolution or turn off the monitor.
Decrease (Left)
Menu
Increase (Right)
Figure 6-1 Monitor Adjustment buttons Menu key: This button will enable the On Screen Display (OSD-instructions). This button is also used to select the function in the Main Menu or to save the settings in the Sub Menu. (Push for 3 sec.) Decrease (Left): Use this button to move down the OSD selection menu and adjust the attribute of the monitor while in OSD menu. Pressing this button out of the OSD menu allows you to decrease the level of contrast of the display screen. Increase (Right): Use this button to move down the OSD selection menu and adjust the attribute of the monitor while in OSD menu. Pressing this button out of the OSD menu allows you to increase the level of contrast of the display screen.
6-3-1
NOTE:
Monitor Calibration
Please warm up the monitor for 5-10 minutes before starting calibration. This procedure consists of 7 parts: 1.) Degauss 2.) Color Temp - Calibration 3.) Contrast and Brightness 4.) Geometry 5.) Convergence 6.) Color temperature 7.) B-Mode Quality
6-2
Section 6-3 - Monitor Adjustment
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 6-3-1-1 Degauss
Degaussing refers to the process of removing magnetic-field effects from the monitor. Operation of the monitor within a magnetic field may adversely effect color purity. Degaussing can be used to correct the problem.
NOTICE The monitor should automatically degauss itself each time power is applied if you wait at least 10
!! NOTICE:
seconds before you turn power back ON. 1.) Press and hold the MENU (middle) key (see: Figure 6-1) on the monitor controls for approximately 4 seconds till the OSD menu appears on the screen. 2.) Press the RIGHT button 2 times to the DEGAUSS and then press the MENU key again to select it. 3.) Wait till DEGAUSS is completed. 6-3-1-2 Color Temp - Calibration 1.) On the control panel, press the UTILITIES key. 2.) In the Utilities menu on the left side of the screen, select SYSTEM to invoke the setup desktop. 3.) Select the SERVICE page, enter the password SHE and click the ACCEPT button. 4.) Select the MONITOR TEST button in the Service Tools menu. 5.) Confirm the Monitor Test message with YES. The Monitor Test main menu appears on the screen.
raster lines color bars color bars
gray scale Color calibration icon EXIT
Figure 6-2 Monitor Test - Main menu 6.) Select the Color calibration icon and press the right/left trackball key once (monitor is white). 7.) Press and hold the MENU (middle) key on the monitor controls for approximately 4 seconds till the OSD menu appears on the screen. 8.) Press the RIGHT button 3 times to the COLOR TEMP and then press the MENU key to select it. 9.) Press the RIGHT button until CALIBRATION is highlighted and then press the MENU key again. NOTE: The calibration cycle will immediately start for Red, Green and Blue. Wait till its completion message It has completed... appears. During the Calibration process do not touch any key. 10.)To return to the Main menu, press the upper trackball key 2 times. NOTE: Contrast and Brightness (see: 6-3-1-3) has to be adjusted after color calibration. Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments 6-3
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 6-3-1-3 Contrast and Brightness
Adjusting the monitors contrast and brightness is one of the most important factors for proper image quality. If these controls are set incorrectly, the Gain, TGC, Dynamic Range and even Acoustic Output may have to be changed more often than necessary to compensate. The proper setup displays a complete gray scale. The lowest level of black should just disappear into the background and the highest white should be bright, but not saturated. NOTE: Brightness and Contrast should be adjusted at examination room light conditions. Typically values for Contrast and Brightness are 70 to 75, depending on the operator! 1.) Press the MENU (middle) key (see: Figure 6-1) on the monitor controls (= toggle button for contrast and brightness). 2.) Adjust the CONTRAST by pressing the LEFT or RIGHT button to decrease/increase the value. 3.) Press the MENU key again to toggle to brightness. 4.) Adjust the BRIGHTNESS by pressing the LEFT or RIGHT button to decrease/increase the value. 6-3-1-4 Geometry Check the raster lines of the test pattern by referring to Figure 6-2. Expected results: 1.) Squares are not distorted. 2.) Raster lines are straight. 3.) No keystone and pincushion distortion. 4.) Horizontal and vertical width is correct. 6-3-1-5 Convergence Check the color of the raster lines (see: Figure 6-2). Expected result: Raster lines have only one color. 6-3-1-6 Color temperature Check the grey scale and the color bars of the test pattern (see: Figure 6-2). Expected results: 1.) White is displayed without a tint (discolor). 2.) Colors are displayed correctly. 3.) To exit the Monitor Test program, touch EXIT. 6-3-1-7 B-Mode Quality Connect an abdominal probe (AB or RAB), press the PROBE key, select the Abdomen application and start the Default program. Record a B-Image of the liver. If there is no abdominal probe, record a B-Image of the Thyroid by using a small parts probe (SP6-12 or SP4-10) and the corresponding program. Expected result: Regular and homogenous B-Image without tint. 6-3-1-8 Screen Saver If you install SW 5.4.x or higher, please adjust the better screensaver.
6-4
Section 6-3 - Monitor Adjustment
Section 6-4 Control Console, Transport Lock

6-4-1 Control Console
The control console can be rotated 30 to the right. When rotating the control console grasp it only the front grip.
locking lever for locking and unlocking the control console Figure 6-3 Locking Lever under Control Console 1.) Push the lever under the control console forward. 2.) Rotate the console to wanted position.
6-4-2
Transport Lock
There is a locking lever for locking and unlocking the control console, mounted at the front below the control console. When preparing the system for transport, the lock has to be engaged in order to secure the console against uncontrolled rotation. The lock catches in when the console is rotated to its center 0 position.
WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:Do no
Do not put your hand between the control console and the Main unit when moving the console to the 0 position: Danger of injuries!
6-5
Section 6-5 Trackball Adjustment

Adjustment of the mechanical movement may be necessary to ensure smooth running of the trackball. 1.) Remove the outer fixing ring by turning it counterclockwise.
rotate clockwise to mount the fixing ring
rotate counterclockwise to remove the fixing ring
Figure 6-4 Trackball with fixing ring 2.) Adjust the trackball for smooth running by rotating the black securing ring. CCW: smooth run CW: tighten run
tighten run
smooth run
Securing ring
Figure 6-5 Trackball - Securing Ring
NOTICE Avoid tightening of thread caused by improper mounting of securing ring!

!! NOTICE:
3.) Mount the outer fixing ring by turning it clockwise. see Figure 6-4.
6-6
Section 6-5 - Trackball Adjustment
Section 6-6 Modification of Keyboard Layout

NOTE: Configuring the layout of the keyboard is only useful by changing the concerned keys also. see: Section 8-14 "Replacement of Key Caps (by special native language keys)" on page 8-26.
6-6-1
Setup the Voluson 730Pro/ProV Keyboard Language Layout

1.) Press the UTILITIES key on the Control Panel. The menu area changes to the Utilities menu. 2.) Select the SYSTEM item from the menu area to activate the setup desktop screen. 3.) Select the SERVICE page in the System Setup desktop. 4.) Enter the password SHE and click the ACCEPT button to display the Service Tools window.
[Keyboard Layout] button
Figure 6-6 Service Page 5.) Click the KEYBOARD LAYOUT button on the service window.
6-7
6-6-1
Setup the Voluson 730Pro/ProV Keyboard Language Layout (contd)

6.) In the INPUT LOCALES tab, select the default input language.
default input language
[Add] button [Remove] button to remove unused language(s) [Set as Default] button
Figure 6-7 default input language NOTE: If the desired language is not listed, click the ADD button, choose the desired input language from the drop down menu, as shown in Figure 6-8 below, and then confirm with OK.
default input language (drop down menu)
Figure 6-8 Add Input Locale 7.) Click the SET AS DEFAULT button. 8.) Click on APPLY and then close the window with OK. 9.) Close the Service page with the SAVE&EXIT button and restart the system. 10.)Reenter Keyboard Layout by repeating step 1.) to step 6.). This time remove unused language(s). 11.)Test the Keyboard function: Press the ABC key on the control panel. Press some keys on the keyboard and verify the entered text.
6-8
Section 6-6 - Modification of Keyboard Layout
Section 6-7 Daylight Saving Time (DST) - New Dates
Issue: Cause:
The automatic Daylight Saving Time feature in Microsoft Windows products may no longer run on the correct date, causing the systems time to be incorrect. Some countries have changed their start and end dates for Daylight Saving Time (DST). Access Microsoft website http://support.microsoft.com/kb/928388 to determine if the systems location site is affected. If the Voluson 730Pro/ProV relies on the automatic DST feature in Microsoft Windows, turn off the feature and then set the correct system time manually at the start of DST and again at the conclusion of DST. Procedure: 1.) Press the UTILITIES key on the Control Panel. The menu area changes to the Utilities menu. 2.) Select the SYSTEM item from the menu area to activate the setup desktop screen. 3.) Select the GENERAL page in the System Setup. 4.) Click the DATE/TIME button. 5.) In the displayed Date/Time Properties window select the TIME ZONE tab. 6.) Uncheck Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes check box and then click APPLY (see: left image of Figure 6-9 below).
Solution:
Figure 6-9 Uncheck check box / adjust time 7.) Select the DATE / TIME tab in the Date/Time Properties window. 8.) Set the proper time for the systems location and then click OK (right image of Figure 6-9, above). 9.) Click the SAVE&EXIT button to save your changes and exit the System Setup page. The System is shutting down automatically and restarts again.
6-9
6-10
Section 6-7 - Daylight Saving Time (DST) - New Dates
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
This section describes how to setup and run the tools and software that help maintain image quality and system operation. Basic host, system, and board level diagnostics are run whenever power is applied. Some Service Tools may be run at the application level.
7-1-2
Overview
There may be a time when it would be advantageous to capture trouble images and system data (logs) for acquisition through remote diagnostics (InSite) or to be sent back to the manufacturer for analysis. There are different options to acquire this data that would give different results. Table 7-1
Section
7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-7 7-8 Overview Collect Vital System Information Check Points Voltages Screen Captures and Logs How to use the Auto Tester program Minimum Configuration to Scan Troubleshooting Trees, Instructions and Tech Tips Error Messages
7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-7 7-10 7-12 7-21
Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
7-1
Section 7-2 Collect Vital System Information

The following information is necessary in order to properly analyze data or images being reported as a malfunction or being returned to the manufacturer: Press the UTILITIES key, select the SYSTEM item and then enter the SERVICE INFO page. System Type System Serial number (also visible on label on the back of the system) Application Software version Backup Version (File Name) additional information (e.g., Hardware ID, SLOT_CPU version, etc.)
System Type Serial number Application Software Backup File Name Date of Factory Settings Serviceplatform information Hardware ID
Move the scroll bar downwards to review additional information about installed software/hardware.
Operating System (e.g., Service Pack 4)
SLOT_CPU (e.g., KONTRON)
Figure 7-1 System Setup - System Info page (e.g. V730 Pro)
7-2
Section 7-2 - Collect Vital System Information
Section 7-3 Check Points Voltages

7-3-1 How to check power
Open the locking on the back of theVoluson 730Pro/ProV and remove the service lid. Check the status of the Diagnostic LEDs.
(+15V) (-15V) (Fan)
LED 1 LED 2 LED 3
LED 6 (+3.3V) LED 5 (+5V) LED 4 (+12V)
In case of problems, check the above voltages with a Digital Volt Meter (DVM) to Ground.
LED 1, 2 and 5 ECG connector on Backpanel of GEZ-Box
LED 4 AUX Supply (= GEM Power connector) on Backpanel of GEZ-Box Pin 4

(+5V)
Additionally check 59V/DC (Power connection-cable from CPN to GEZ)
1 15
8 9
Pin 1
(+12V)
Pin 15
(+5V)
Pin 13
(+15V)
Pin 11
(-15V)
Location of fuses on CPE; see: Section 5-11-2-1 on page 5-50
DVM
LED 6 Footswitch connector on Power Supply Module (CPN) (Pin 2 and 3 = +3.3V ; Pin 1 = GND)
LED orange visual check for 59V: orange LED (at CPN power supply) is lightening
22
Figure 7-2 Diagnostic LEDs and corresponding voltage check points Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-3
Section 7-4 Screen Captures and Logs

There may be times when the customer or field engineer will want to capture a presentation on the screen so it may be recovered by the OnLine Center. This is accomplished by saving the image(s): A.) to SonoView and export them (as jpg, bmp or tiff ) to DVD/CD+(R)W or MO-disk B.) as jpg and bmp to D:\export by pressing the ALT + P key on the alphanumeric keyboard C.) creates one snapshot (Alt-D.bmp) + Full Backup of the System state (fullbackup -> fb1) saved on D:\export by pressing the ALT + D key on the alpha-numeric keyboard.
7-4-1
Capturing a screen
The following is the generic process to capture any screen from the scanner. 1.) Navigate to and display the image/screen to be captured. 2.) Press the SAVE 2D key on the control panel and save the image to Sonoview. 3.) Select the stored image(s) in Sonoview (Exam List) and EXPORT the image(s) to DVD/CD+(R)W or MO-Disk (jpg, bmp or tiff).
7-4-2
Export Logs and System Data

There are two possibilities to export system data (and logs): 1.) by pressing the ALT + D key to save a snapshot and Full Backup of the System state; see: Section 7-4-2-1 on page 7-5 2.) via the EXPORT SYSTEM DATA button in the System Setup SERVICE page; see: Section 7-4-2-2 on page 7-6
7-4
Section 7-4 - Screen Captures and Logs
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 7-4-2-1 Export System Data (by pressing the ALT + D key)
ALT + D uses Full Backup to gather data from the system. In addition it creates one screenshot (Alt-D.bmp) of the point in time when ALT + D was pressed. The main use is when R&D or OLC need detailed information about the system (e.g., when experiencing strange behaviour or when the problem should be investigated by R&D). It is not intended to replace or enhance the existing Full Backup functionality. Data can be stored on the hard disk (D:\export\fullbackup\fb1), or you can export them to DVD/CD (including the D:\export folder, which contains logs and dump-files; for details see: Section 7-4-2-2-1). NOTE: Successive ALT + D keystrokes overwrite existing snapshots at destination HDD. 1.) Press the ALT + TAB key on the keyboard. simultaneously.
Figure 7-3 select destination for System state backup 2.) Select the destination of the System state backup among HDD or DVD/CD. 3.) Select the NEXT button to start the backup process. After saving the data, the Voluson 730Pro/ProV reboots and the application starts again.
7-5
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 7-4-2-2 Export Logs and System Data (via Service Page)
1.) Press the UTILITIES key, select the SYSTEM item from the menu area. 2.) Select the SERVICE page on the screen. The password window appears automatically. 3.) Enter the password SHE and click the ACCEPT button to display the Service Tools window.
Export System Data
Figure 7-4 Service Tools window 4.) Click on the EXPORT SYSTEM DATA... button, to export dump-files (see: Section 7-4-2-2-1), text files, the Event Log File, the full Service Database and information about probes, boards, software, options and service actions to DVD/CD Drive (or the optional MO drive). 7-4-2-2-1 Dump-file Every time an error message like Figure 7-5 is produced, a dump-file and a text file containing the error dump and the error message are created in D:\export. Up to 20 dump files are stored there.
important dump-file informations
Figure 7-5 system has encountered a problem After clicking on OK the system reboots automatically. 7-6 Section 7-4 - Screen Captures and Logs
Section 7-5 How to use the Auto Tester program

NOTE: Startup the system. Before starting an exam Auto Tester must be turned on. Immediately after occurrence of the issue you need to stop the Auto Tester and save the results! In case of a system shut down, the Auto Tester stops automatically and the results will not be saved! 1.) Press the UTILITIES key, and then select SYSTEM from the menu area. 2.) Select the SERVICE page on the screen. The password window appears automatically. 3.) Enter the password SHE and click the ACCEPT button to display the Service Tools window.
Start Auto Tester
Figure 7-6 Service Tools window 4.) Activate the Auto Tester program by clicking the START button. The following message box appears.
Alt Gr key on the right lower corner of the keyboard
Figure 7-7 Message Box 5.) Click OK. 6.) Press the ALT GR key on the alphanumeric keyboard.
7-7
Section 7-5
How to use the Auto Tester program (contd)
7.) Activate the Auto Tester program by clicking the Record icon on the displayed screen.
Record icon
Figure 7-8 Start Auto Tester 8.) Start scanning. You can scan normally and everything will be recorded to the program (up to several hours.) NOTE: It is important that you are recording the processes where the errors normally occur. Stop the program by clicking on [Stop] shown on the screen, or by pressing the [ALT GR] key on the alphanumeric keyboard. Figure 7-9 Stop Autotester The following screen will appear.
Disc icon
Figure 7-10 Auto Tester Finished
7-8
Section 7-5 - How to use the Auto Tester program
Section 7-5
How to use the Auto Tester program (contd)
9.) Maybe have it read to save the file, press the Disc icon, the following screen will appear:
Figure 7-11 Auto Tester 10.)The file will be saved in D:\Export\AutotesterScripts\*.*.
Figure 7-12 Enter a Filename 11.) ALT + D contains the needed logs. NOTE: To analyze the workflow the exact date and time of occurrence needs to be documented!
7-5-1
Limitation of the Auto Tester

The following infomation will not be recorded, depending on the moment the Auto Tester is activated so this must be provided by the customer of the FSE: Which probe is in use and which probes are connected? Which Mode is activated? Which peripherals are connected (Dicom, Printer, etc..)?
NOTE:
The standalone recorded Auto Tester file makes only sense with the ALT + D Log! Collected information from all steps above can be sent to the Make Center. With this infomation the Make Center can see how the customer is using the system and reproduce potential failures. Providing all information at once will help the Make Center find the root cause and speeds up finding a solution for the customer.
7-9
Section 7-6 Minimum Configuration to Scan

Following cables must be connected to scan; see: Figure 7-13 and/or Figure 7-14 a.) PS2 (connector for Mouse/Keyboard) b.) UI Disp. (connector for User Interface Display) - NOT used at Voluson 730Pro/ProV c.) DVI (Digital Video Cable from ADD-On DVI Output to CKV-board) d.) VGA (Monitor) e.) Console f.) CPN (Primary Power Supply) g.) Standby switch h.) Monitor (Power Supply)
*** RS-232 Serial Interface for Console (GEU)
a b
Tyan SBC-board installed (similar is DFI ATX)
a b
Kontron ATX SBC-board installed
f c c f
***
This connection is only necessary, if Kontron SBC-board version is installed. Other versions have internal connector cable, directly connected from CPE flat cable connector to SBC COM1 connector.
Figure 7-13 cable- minimum configuration Tyan and Kontron ATX
7-10
Section 7-6 - Minimum Configuration to Scan
Section 7-6Minimum Configuration to Scan (contd)
a b
c d
f e
Figure 7-14 cable- minimum configuration Kontron Flex Connect mains power cable to the system and to an appropriate mains power outlet. Connect a probe, boot up the system and start an User program.
7-11
Section 7-7 Troubleshooting Trees, Instructions and Tech Tips

7-7-1 System Does Not Power On / Boot Up
Is the scanner plugged in? Make sure the Scanner isn't plugged into emergency power (red outlet)
No Yes
+ These three condidtions should be the first items checked if the scanner doesn't boot up. + If all three conditions are present, the scanner should be in a standby mode with the ON/OFF switch illuminated with amber color. + Follow the flow chart to determine the reason the scanner doesn't boot up.
Is there AC at the wall outlet?
Yes No
Is the circuit breaker on
Yes
+ Check if the power switch over the mains plug of the Primary Power Supply isn't switched off. + Check the connections to and from the Power Supply.
Switch in ON Position Fan Noise ?
No
+ Check the power of the cable which connects the Power Supply with the GEF module. (description Check Points Voltages) Section 7-3 + If ther is no power and the connections are O.K., replace the Primary Power Supply.
Yes
System is on and ready for use
Figure 7-15 System does not boot up
7-12
Section 7-7 - Troubleshooting Trees, Instructions and Tech Tips
7-7-2
Noise disturbs the Image
Noise is shown in Image.
Is there any electrical devices that affect the Scanner?
YES
NO
Keep the Scanner away from those electrical devices.
use another wallsocket
Check probes.
Figure 7-16 Noise disturbs the Image - Troubleshooting
7-13
7-7-3
Trackball
The trackball is low sensitive!
Does the trackball move at all?
YES
NO
Remove the ball from the Trackball unit, and clean it.
Replace the trackball unit.
Figure 7-17 Trackball - Troubleshooting
7-14
7-7-4
System Does Not Power Off / Shutdown
System has been switched off
System starts with the shut down procedure
No
system switched off automatically in approx. 3min.
Yes
Primary Power (CPY inside) Supply is defekt
Yes
No
System is down
Check the Standby-switch and the cable. If ok, Primary Power Supply is defekt.
Figure 7-18 Power Off / Shutdown - Troubleshooting
7-15
7-7-5
Monitor Troubleshooting
Fault symptom Check these items
Check the power cord is properly connected. CPN: Check the AC output voltage fused by F3 on back of system. No image Check the video cable is properly connected. Check no pins of the video cable are bent. Check if video is present on backplane. Color is not uniform Colored streaks appear in image Turn ON the power to activate the Auto-Degauss function. Check for presence of magnetic sources near the monitor. Eliminate the sources and then degauss the monitor. Adjust the picture location, picture size, picture rotation or pincushion distortion. Screen image is not centered or sized properly Some video modes do not fill the screen to the edge of the monitor. There is no single answer to solve the problem. This phenomenon may occur on higher refresh rates (vertical frequency). Adjust the picture contrast and picture brightness. Some SVGA cards having an excessive video output level will cause a fuzzy picture at the maximum contrast level. Turn ON the power to activate the Auto-Degauss function. Video test patterns are not clear, bright, parallel or square Replace the monitor.
Picture is fuzzy
NOTICE The monitor should automatically degauss itself each time power is applied if you wait at least 10
!! NOTICE:
seconds before you turn power back ON. For further details refer to Section 6-3 "Monitor Adjustment" on page 6-2.
7-16
7-7-6
Unable to Record to VCR
Unable to record to VCR!
Is the VCR properly connected?
NO
YES
Check that all signal, and power supply cable connections to the VCR unit are OK.
Is the VCR tape put into the device?
NO
YES
Put the tape into the device and rewind it.
Is recording unable even by manual operation?
NO
YES
- Check the signal cable connections between VCR and Internal I/O.
Video Output of System o.k. ?
NO
YES
Replace CKV
Replace VCR
Figure 7-19 VCR - Troubleshooting
7-17
7-7-7
Printer Troubleshooting
Unable to use Printer(s)!
Is the printer(s) properly connected?
NO
YES
Check that all signal, and power supply cable connections between Printer and Scanner are OK.
Are there print papers left?
NO
YES
Insert the printer papers.
Is proper configuration for the Print key(s) set?
NO
Configure the Print key(s).
See next page.
Figure 7-20 Printer - Troubleshooting
7-18
7-7-7
Printer Troubleshooting (contd)
Still unable to use the Printer(s)!
Is printing unavailable even by manual operation? YES
NO
Check the signal cables between GEZ and Backpanel.
Still no image on the print out
YES
NO
Printer o.k.
Replace the Printer
YES
Video Output of System o.k.?
NO
Replace CKV
Figure 7-21 Printer Troubleshooting (contd)
7-19
7-7-8
DVD/CD-(R)W Troubleshooting (DVD/CD Drive)

1.) Insert an empty DVD/CD-(R)W into the Drive. 2.) Enter Sonoview by pressing the SONOVIEW key on the control panel; see Figure 7-22. 3.) Click the Open icon to display the list of exams. 4.) Select exam(s) and backup them to DVD/CD-(R)W. 5.) Choose DVD/CD Drive. 6.) The images, which you have choosen during backup should be visible.
1. Press Sonoview key
2. Click Open icon and backup exams
3. After Backup, choose DVD/CD (resp. MO)
Figure 7-22 To backup exams to DVD/CD+(R)W resp. MO-Disk

NOTICE In case of any problems, check status of the Diagnostic LEDs and voltages of the AUX Supply
!! NOTICE:
connector (= Disk Drive Module power connector) on the backpanel of the GEZ-Box; see: Section 7-3 "Check Points Voltages" on page 7-3
7-7-9
MOD Troubleshooting
1.) Insert an empty MO into the Drive. 2.) Enter Sonoview by pressing the SONOVIEW key on the control panel; see Figure 7-22. 3.) Click the Open icon to display the list of exams. 4.) Select exam(s) and backup them to MO. 5.) Choose MO Drive. 6.) The images, which you have chosen during backup should be visible.
NOTICE In case of any problems, check status of the Diagnostic LEDs and voltages of the AUX Supply
!! NOTICE:
connector (= Disk Drive Module power connector) on the backpanel of the GEZ-Box; see: Section 7-3 "Check Points Voltages" on page 7-3
7-7-10
7-7-10-1
Network Troubleshooting
No Connection to the Network at All 1.) Check that the network cable between the scanner and the wall network is connected and well seated in both ends. (Use a network cable that is known to be OK.) 2.) Check the cable from network-connector on the Back Panel to the LAN-connector on the GEZ. 3.) Connect a network cable between your Scanner and your PC. Try to ping from the Scanner to the IP address on the PC. If OK, the hardware connection inside the Scanner is OK.
7-20
Section 7-8 Error Messages

NOTICE If the problem (error message) still exists after performing the described actions, call technical support.
!! NOTICE:
Error Messages
3D B_RxLines exceeded! 3D B-O_Frames exceeded! 3D C_RxLines exceeded! 3D C-O_Frames exceeded! 530-Probe connected on. AcousticUnitType not supported by BF_Interface: Array bounds exceeded Attempt to read Probe-ID from an invalid probe connector. AVI Save function fails B_Enhance Out Of Range B_Gain Out Of Range B_Reject Out Of Range B_TxFocus - not calculated and B_SHOT_PART_ON restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system
Actions
Disconnect and reconnect the probe. If error remains don't use such a probe. restart the system restart the system reboot system. check cable connections - restart the system and try again press ok and save this user-setting once again press ok and save this user-setting once again press ok and save this user-setting once again restart the system check storage destination for Full Backup (e.g., DVD/CD not empty, insufficient rights on target Network drive, write protection on MO or USB-drive) repeat backup press ok and save this user-setting once again restart the system restart the system press ok and save this user-setting once again press ok and save this user-setting once again restart the system press ok and save this user-setting once again restart the system restart the system restart the system
Backup error while writing. (Error during writing of backup data.)
Backup error while verifying. (Checksum mismatch) BC Ensemble Out Of Range BC lines_per_sequenz < 1 BC lines_per_sequenz < 2 BC_Dynamic Out Of Range BC_Gain Out Of Range BC_Lines: BC_LineDensity out of limit BCMC_Balance Out Of Range bCP_ConvertParameters failed bCP_ProcessIQEnsemblePacket failed bCP_ProcessIQMModePacket failed
7-21

Error Messages
B-DynContrast Out Of Range BF: can't set BM RxApod BF: cant set C Rx Apod BF: can't set D RxApod binary file not found Binary path not set BM_Resample: overrun SampleLengthOnLineMem Cannot create instance Cannot read a valid Probe-ID (xxx) from. Cannot import volume data to 3D dll Can't create hardware configuration index file in D:\\SERVICE Can't detect PCI 9054 Can't import session Can't open file: can't open MotCtrl RS232 Serial connection Can't open: .......... Can't open: C:\V730\Distribution\Hardware\patterndat.bin can't write XilinxFiles.ini CD write error Cine2D_CtrlBlock::vSetState: value of m_GIP_eCineType undefined!! Cine2D_CtrlBlock::vSetState: value of m_pGIP_eR_W_Mode undefined!! Communication thread is dead! ConManager - RC_ConstructGOPs: Memory allocation failed CPF Hardware not found CPS_InterfaceToHW::vSet_VOL_MODE -- incorrect value for ColorDMA_Active CPS_InterfaceToHW::vSet_VOL_MODE -- incorrect value for EndOfFrameInt CPS_InterfaceToHW::vSet_VOL_MODE -- incorrect value for LongLineMemFIFO CPS_InterfaceToHW::vSet_VOL_MODE -- incorrect value for Mode_4D

Actions
press ok and save this user-setting once again restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system disconnect and reconnect the probe load volume files from other storage medium restart the system restart the system use a new CDR to write data to CD restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system use a new CDR restart the system
restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system
restart the system
restart the system
restart the system
7-22
Section 7-8 - Error Messages

Error Messages
CtrlMvGrpRepresentations::isInWriteMode not supported for mode nr xx CW quant TX Frequ out of range CW_BaseLinePos Out Of Range CW_Gain Out Of Range CW-hardware doesn't support CW-HW-PRF == 0 CW-TxFrequency == 0 CW-TxPower Out Of Range D:\\SERVICE\\ConfIndexFile is corrupt Datatype misalignment

Actions
restart the system restart the system press ok and save this user-setting once again press ok and save this user-setting once again pencil probe + CW-Hardware not available->HW problem restart the system restart the system press ok and save this user-setting once again restart the system restart the system check storage destination of Full Backup (e.g., DVD/CD, insufficient rights on target Network drive, write protection on MO or USB-drive) press ok and save this user-setting once again This backup cannot be restored by the user. use a new CDR for writing data to CD restart the system restart the system restart the system load appropriate backup for installed version restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system install Electronic User Manual (EUM) and try it again restart the system restart the system restart the system
Delete error (Backup data could not be deleted.)
Density Out Of Range Different software error (Backup data was made on another system with a different software version.) Disc full! Display:Rect Region fails Division by zero done is low! Downgrade error (Backup data was made with a software version higher than the installed version.) DSP - Gamma Corr - Load Data Timeout DSP - HilbertCoeff - Load Data Timeout DSP - Low Pass Coeff - Load Data Timeout DSP - SetFFT_Para - Load Data Timeout DSP - SetWMF_Koeff - Load Data Timeout DSP/MSE:Hanning-Window Load Data Timeout ECG_InterfaceToHW::vLookupForNewSamples() allocating expanded buffer[xxx] for TimeStamps failed!! Electronic user manual not installed. Please install. End Bandwidth too big End ET too big End frequency too big
7-23

Error Messages
Enhance Out Of Range Ensemble Out Of Range Error in CreateCineImage Error in File: . Error in Select Tx-channel for B-mode Error in Select Tx-channel for C-mode Error in Select Tx-channel for CW-mode Error in Select Tx-channel for PW-mode Error no HW present Error not enough time for BC shot! Error on LoadBootMem Page: xx, Addr: xx Error programming Flashcomplette Error setting state ERROR_MSG_INIT_FAILED ERROR_MSG_NO_ACK ERROR_MSG_NO_CASSETTE ERROR_MSG_NO_RESPONSE ERROR_MSG_WRITE_PROTECTED Execute privileged instruction FallSmooth Out Of Range File Could not CRC Check File CRC Error File CRC Missing File Data Missing File Datalength Not Consistent File Decompress Error File Decompress method Unknown File End Error File Execute Error File Memory Missing File Not Found

Actions
press ok and save this user-setting once again press ok and save this user-setting once again try to store again; restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system Check connection from US machine to VCR, VCR has power and is on. check VCR cables and try again put cassette into drive of VCR check VCR cables, casette,... and try again remove cassette from VCR and put writeable cassette into drive of VCR. restart the system press ok and save this user-setting once again load volume files from other storage medium load volume files from other storage medium load volume files from other storage medium load volume files from other storage medium load volume files from other storage medium load volume files from other storage medium load volume files from other storage medium load volume files from other storage medium load volume files from other storage medium load volume files from other storage medium load volume files from other storage medium
7-24

Error Messages
File Pos File Read Error File Type Unknown File Volume size not consistent FLT: Denormal operand FLT: Divide by zero FLT: Invalid operation FLT: Stack overflow FLT: Underflow FrameUp - TempBuffer: Memory allocation failed GeoDescription3D_TissueCF::operator=: handed over argument is not of same type, dynamic cast failed!! GeoDescriptionMotion Constructor: unknown mode Parameter handed over GeoDescriptionMotion::operator=: handed over argument is not of same type, dynamic cast failed!! GeoDescriptionPWMode::operator=: handed over argument is not of same type, dynamic cast failed!! GeoDescriptionTissueCF Constructor: unknown mode Parameter handed over GeoDescriptionTissueCF::operator=: handed over argument is not of same type, dynamic cast failed!! Hardware doesn't support CW-mode hardware error on HardwareRelatedSoftware_Windows in write have different ProbeAcousticUnitIDs HardwareRelatedSoftware_Windows in write have different ProbeScanFuncIDs IBegrenzer.cpp Bshots TxMultiFocus problem IBegrenzer.cpp Mshots TxMultiFocus problem In the 3D Image Measure is not allowed incorrect VersionByte, xx of xx cycles OK iSetVideoSource(eVideoIntern) function fails iSetVideoSource(eVideoIntern) function fails LineFilt Out Of Range LP_KoefBlock: SamplePRF too big

Actions
load volume files from other storage medium load volume files from other storage medium load volume files from other storage medium load volume files from other storage medium restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system
restart the system
restart the system
restart the system
restart the system
restart the system pencil probe + CW-Hardware not available->HW problem restart the system disconnect all connected probes and connect them again; if not ok restart the system disconnect all connected probes and connect them again; if not ok restart the system restart the system restart the system change to another format than 3D Fullscreen mode contact technical support reboot the system the system will restart itself by pressing OK press ok and save this user-setting once again restart the system
7-25

Error Messages
M_Gain Out Of Range M_Reject Out Of Range MC Ensemble Out Of Range MC_Balance Out Of Range MC_BaseLinePos Out Of Range MC_Dynamic Out Of Range MC_FallSmooth Out Of Range MC_Gain Out Of Range MC_RiseSmooth Out Of Range M-DynContrast Out Of Range+ Memory access violation memory allocation error missing BCMCPW_TxFocusData missing BM_TxFocusData missing CW_TxFocusData missing ProbeAcousticUnit, wrong ProbeAcousticUnitID. missing ProbeGeneral data - wrong ProbeID missing ProbeScanFunc - wrong ProbeScanFuncID MotCtrl RS232 communication timeout

Actions
press ok and save this user-setting once again press ok and save this user-setting once again press ok and save this user-setting once again press ok and save this user-setting once again press ok and save this user-setting once again press ok and save this user-setting once again press ok and save this user-setting once again press ok and save this user-setting once again press ok and save this user-setting once again press ok and save this user-setting once again restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system Confirm the message by pressing the OK button, disconnect and reconnect the active probe and use it again. If the message appears again, usually the probe itself has an defect, so you should contact the service restart the system restart the system restart the system look into the System Setup to see the current MotCtrl version and contact technical support look into the System Setup to see the current MotCtrl version and contact technical support check the connection and the Power cable - plug the cable off and on and try again. (restart the system) insert disk, if fails again reboot and try again (with another disk) select another destination to save Full Backup
MotCtrl: No Referenzposition signal!
MotionColor-DSC 1st:Memory allocation failed MotionColor-DSC 2nd:Memory allocation failed Motion-DSC:Memory allocation failed MoveVolumeAxis only supported by RealTime-probes !
MoveVolumeAxis only supported by RealTime-probes (RRE)
No CD Writer found
No disc in drive Not enough space. (Not enough space on destination to hold the backup data.)
7-26

Error Messages
Overflow Persistance Out Of Range Persistence coeff page index too big pGetActualUnitBuffer failed, RepresentationManager is not initialized pGetActualUnitBuffer failed, RepresentationManager is not initialized Please plug off and on probe and try again PlxMemCheck ERROR pNextUnitCompleted failed, RepresentationManager is not initialized PRF_GeneratorBoundary: BBC Ensemble Limitation out of limit PRF_GeneratorBoundary: BBCPW Ensemble Limitation out of limit Probe Scan Function Not Supplied PW_BaseLinePos Out Of Range PW_BurstCalcBlock: UserProgApplication out of range PW_CW_FFT_FactBlock: DSC_ScrollX_Zoom darf nicht kleiner als eins sein! PW_Dynamic Out Of Range PW_Reject Out Of Range PWCW-DSC:Memory allocation failed PWGain Out Of Range ReplayCtrlInterface::vReconnect failed, selected movie group unknown ReplayCtrlInterface::vRunAcquisition failed, selected movie group unknown ReplayCtrlInterface::vSetForAllRepMngrsParams failed, selected movie group unknown RepresentationManager returned NULL write position RepresentationManager: NextChunkGenerated failed, number bytes written!=UnitSize RepresentationManager::addListener called within Transaction!! RepresentationManager::Destructor caused exception, Open Transaction!!

Actions
restart the system press ok and save this user-setting once again restart the system restart the system
restart the system plug of and on the probe and try again, plug it on a different probe connector. restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system press ok and save this user-setting once again restart the system restart the system press ok and save this user-setting once again press ok and save this user-setting once again restart the system press ok and save this user-setting once again restart the system
restart the system
restart the system restart the system restart the system
restart the system
restart the system
7-27

Error Messages
RepresentationManager::pActualUnitWrtAddr called within Transaction!! RepresentationManager::pNextUnitsCompleted called within Transaction!! RepresentationManager::removeAllListener called within Transaction!! RepresentationManager::removeListener called within Transaction!! RepresentationManager::vClear called within Transaction!! RepresentationManager::vCreate: Dimension unknown, arguments of vSetReplayParams() incorrect!! RepresentationManager::vCreate: Nr. Dim 0 incorrect, see vSetReplayParams() call RepresentationManager::vCreate: Nr. Dim 1 incorrect, see vSetReplayParams() call RepresentationManager::vCreate: Nr. Dim 2 incorrect, see vSetReplayParams() call RepresentationManager::vResizeBufferLength called within Transaction!! RepresentationManager::vResizeBufferLength caused exception, replay buffer is not empty!! RepresentationManager::vSetGeoDescription called within Transaction!! RepresentationManager::vSetReplayParams called within Transaction!! Restore error (Error while reading backup data.) RiseSmooth Out Of Range RT_4DTissueFilterBlock:: Storage Error, no dynamic memory for filter operations available!! RT_4DTissueFilterBlock:: storage needed for one filtered volume differs from available Unitsize within replay buffer!! RT_4DTissueFilterBlock::bDllLineFilter call failed!! RT_4DTissueFilterBlock::bDllLineFrameFilter call failed!! RT_4DTissueFilterBlock::DMA Block size and calculated frame size differs!! RT_ColorFlowFilterBlock Constructor: Memory allocation failed RT_ColorFlowFilterBlock::vCheckIQDataSizeAndUpdateTable s: Memory allocation failed RT_ColorFlowFilterBlock::vDebugDrawIQDataCurve: Memory allocation failed

Actions
restart the system
restart the system
restart the system
restart the system
restart the system
restart the system
restart the system
restart the system
restart the system
restart the system Backup data are probably damaged. Try again or load another backup. press ok and save this user-setting once again restart the system
restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system
restart the system
7-28

Error Messages
RT_ConnectionMngr::vAssembleRTSet: no RT_TissueFilterBlock found for TISSUE3D Blocks RT_ECG_Block::bStart ECGInterface failed!! RT_MColorFilterBlock::RT_MColorFilterBlock: Memory allocation failed RT_MColorFilterBlock::vCheckIQDataSizeAndUpdateBuffer: Memory allocation failed RT_MColorFilterBlock::vDebugDrawIQDataCurve: Memory allocation failed RT_MotionMBlock::execute caused exception:: Addr from DMA= xx, ReplayBuffAddr= xx, (Line+Header)Size= xx, blockLength= xx, value i= xx!! RT_PWorCW_Block::replay buffer size smaller than expected RT_PWorCW_Block::execute caused exception:: Addr from DMA= xx, ReplayBuffAddr= xx, (Line+Header)Size= xx, blockLength= xx, line index= xx!! RT_PWorCW_Block::execute: Error, length of DMA block 2 [xx] is not aligned to linesize!! Start Bandwidth too small Start ET too small Start frequency too small StoragePool: Not sufficient replay storage for B & CF Mode available StoragePool: Not sufficient replay storage for ECG available StoragePool: Not sufficient replay storage for M Mode available StoragePool: Not sufficient replay storage for MC or PW Mode available System detected severe error, please call technical support. System detected severe error. Some components like Touch Panel server may not be registered. Please register Touch Panel server and restart. The Database UserPrograms Corrupted The Date format not stored properly The Handle Unregistered The Registry not closed

Actions
restart the system
restart the system
restart the system
restart the system
restart the system
restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system, call technical support
restart the system, call technical support
restart the system close registry, restart, try again close registry, restart, try again restart the system if possible, save Full Backup (see: Section 4-5-3 on page 4-36) to DVD/CD, Network, or Other drive (including images) if not currently done, save all images via Sonoview (see: Section 4-5-6 on page 4-41) , call technical support
The System detected a problem with your harddisk. Please do not reboot or shut down the machine! Please contact your service department as soon as possible.
7-29

Error Messages
Thickness mismatch xx - GIP xx UI_BBC_Wnd::vSet() has an wrong ImageType UI_BBC_Wnd::vSet() will change from eB_Wnd to wrong ImageType UI_BBC_Wnd::vSet() will change from eBBC_Wnd to wrong ImageType UI_Manager::vDestroyWnd: dynamic cast to UI_MMC_Wnd* failed UI_Manager::vDestroyWnd: dynamic cast to UI_PW_Wnd* failed UI_Manager::vHRS_Execute multiple call Unable to save... undefined CW ADC_Clk-Teiler Unknown Error unknown Xilinx-Version unrecordable disc in drive Unsupported color mode Verify error (Error while checking backup data.) ViewerConMngr::vAssembleCF_DFE: attempt to get ECG_Consumer_2D- or ECG_Draw_2D-Block from ECGViewer Objects failed!! ViewerConMngr::vAssembleM_DFE: attempt to get ECG_Consumer_2D- or ECG_Draw_2D-Block or ECGCalcHR-Block from ECGViewer Objects failed!! Volume_dB Out Of Range WMF_KoefBlock: SamplePRF too big XTD - pucBackScaledBImage: Memory allocation failed XTD - pucDSCBImage: Memory allocation failed XTDTrackballCtrlState::No frame to trackball position found, internal failure!!

Actions
restart 3D (go to 2D); restart the system restart the system restart the system
restart the system
restart the system
restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system load volume files from other storage medium restart the system try again with another disk restart the system Backup data are probably damaged. Try again or load another backup.
restart the system
restart the system
press ok and save this user-setting once again restart the system restart the system restart the system restart the system
7-30
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

This chapter contains replacement procedures for different modules and their subsystems.
NOTICE The Manpower, time and Tools indicated in the Sub-sections include all requirements from
!! NOTICE:
Preparations to Installation Procedures.
WARNING WARNING
!! WARNING:
No covers or panels should be removed from the system (high-voltage risk). Service and repairs must only be performed by authorized personal. Attempting do-it-yourself repairs invalidate warranty and are an infringement to regulations and are inadmissible acc. to IEC 60601-1.
The waste of electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed as unsorted municipal waste and must be collected separately. Please contact the manufacturer or other authorized disposal company for information concerning the decommission of your equipment.
Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures
8-1
Table 8-1
Section
8-1 8-2 8-3 8-4 8-5 8-6 8-7 8-8 8-9 8-10 8-11 8-12 8-13 8-14 8-15
Chapter 8 Contents
Description
Overview Ultrasound Application Software (UIS) Installation Procedure User Settings Only (Application Settings) Loading Procedure Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Appl. Settings) Loading Procedure Service Platform (SSW) Upgrade Procedure Electronic User Manual (EUM) Upgrade Procedure Software and Functional Checks after the Upgrade Replacement or Activation of Options Transfer of Patient Database and Images from System-to-System Replacement of the Monitor Task Lamp Replacement of the Trackball top fixation ring Replacement of Digipots and TGC Slider controls Replacement of the Probe Holder Replacement of Key Caps (by special native language keys) Replacing optional Peripherals / How to mount Peripherals at a later date 8-15-1 Mounting/Replacing the 19 LCD secondary Patient Monitor
Page Number
8-1 8-3 8-10 8-10 8-11 8-13 8-16 8-17 8-19 8-24 8-25 8-25 8-25 8-26 8-27 8-28
8-2
Section 8-1 - Overview
8-1-2
Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts

Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances. GEMS policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to shipment. GEMS employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/equipment have been properly decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part or equipment with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils or and ultrasound probe). The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry, as well as the people who will receive or open this package.
NOTE:
The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that items what were saturated and/or dripping with human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended for use in patient care are regulated medical waste for transportation purpose and must be transported as a hazardous material.
Section 8-2 Ultrasound Application Software (UIS) Installation Procedure

8-2-1 Introduction
SERVICE
NOTICE It is possible to update the Ultrasound Application Software via the UPDATE button in the System Setup
!! NOTICE:
page; see: Section 8-2-5 on page 8-7.
8-2-2
Manpower
One Person, 20 min.
8-2-3
Tools
System DVD
8-3
8-2-4
Preparations
Before performing the Software Update/Upgrade: A.) make sure that all system functions are working correct B.) check the current Software Version and installed Options 1.) Press the UTILITIES key on the control panel once to display the Utilities menu. 2.) Select the SYSTEM item from the Utilities menu - which is displayed on the left side of the screen. 3.) Select the SYSTEM INFO page on the System Setup desktop screen to see which Software/Hardware version is installed in the unit.
currently installed Software version
Figure 8-1 Version check
8-4
Section 8-2 - Ultrasound Application Software (UIS) Installation Procedure
8-2-4
4.) Select the OPTION page on the System Setup desktop screen to see which Options are installed.
D = Demo
(Option is activated for demo and expires on the date shown in the Valid column)
I = Inactive
(Option is not activated)
P = Permanent
(Option is permanently activated [purchased])
Permanent Key
Figure 8-2 Option page (e.g. V730 Pro)

NOTICE Please print out the OPTION page or write down the Permanent Key!
!! NOTICE:
5.) Select the NETWORK page on the System Setup desktop screen. a.) Click on the DICOM / SONOVIEW CONFIGURATION button in the NETWORK page.
Figure 8-3 DICOM Configuration

NOTICE Please print out the DICOM Configuration dialog page or write down the DICOM designations
!! NOTICE:
(AE Title, Station name, Retry Count, Retry Interval). Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-5
8-2-4
b.) Click on the NETWORK CONFIGURATION button in the NETWORK page.
NOTE:This example shows fictional numbers!
Figure 8-4 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)

NOTICE Please print out the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog page or write down the IP settings.
!! NOTICE:
8-6
8-2-5
Software - Installation Procedure (via Service Page)

1.) Insert the System DVD into the drive. 2.) Press the UTILITIES key and then select SYSTEM item from the Utilities menu. 3.) Select the SERVICE page.
Figure 8-5 System Setup Service 4.) Type in the password SHE and click ACCEPT.
UIS button
Figure 8-6 Service Tools 5.) Click on the UIS button for updating the Ultrasound Application Software.
8-7
8-2-5
Software - Installation Procedure (via Service Page) (contd)

6.) Confirm the following message with YES.
Figure 8-7 Update UIS message 7.) A new window pops up on the screen and the InstallShield starts extracting files.
Figure 8-8 Install Shield Wizard - Extracting Files 8.) Click the NEXT button In the Welcome to Kretz V730 Software Installation window.
Figure 8-9 Welcome to ... Software Installation The contents of the Software package are being extracted.
8-8
8-2-5
Software - Installation Procedure (via Service Page) (contd)

9.) Complete the Software installation with the FINISH key.
Figure 8-10 V730 Software Setup The system restarts automatically. 10.)If desired, load the appropriate factory settings; see Section 8-3 on page 10 or the full backup; see: Section 8-4 on page 8-10. 11.)If necessary, update the Service Software (SSW) as described in Section 8-5 on page 8-11. 12.)Afterwards update the Electronic User Manual (EUM) as described in Section 8-6 on page 8-13. 13.)Perform Software and Functional checks as described in Section 8-7 on page 8-16.
8-9
Section 8-3 User Settings Only (Application Settings) Loading Procedure

8-3-1 Introduction
The User Settings contains: Application Settings User Programs Auto Text 3D/4D Programs
8-3-2
Loading Procedure
see: Section 4-5-2 "Load User Settings Only (Application Settings)" on page 4-34
Section 8-4 Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Appl. Settings) Loading Procedure
8-4-1 Introduction
The Full Backup contains following data: Patient demographic and exam data (database containing the patient data and measurements) SonoView image data (NOT available when saving to the internal hard disk, DVD/CD or MOD) User Settings (databases and files containing gray curves and the user settings.) Image transfer settings (DICOM settings e.g., DICOM servers, AE Title, Station Name, etc.) Measure Setup Settings (user specific measure settings) V730 settings (general settings such as language, time/date format and the enabled options) Windows Network Settings (network settings including the computer name) Service Platform (state of the service platform) VP (additional system data)
8-4-2
Loading Procedure
see: Section 4-5-4 "Load Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)" on page 4-38
8-10
Section 8-3 - User Settings Only (Application Settings) Loading Procedure
Section 8-5 Service Platform (SSW) Upgrade Procedure

8-5-1 Manpower
One Person, 10 min.
8-5-2
Tools
System DVD or Upgrade CD
8-5-3
Upgrade Procedure
1.) Insert the System DVD or Upgrade CD into the drive. 2.) Press the UTILITIES key on the control panel once to display the Utilities menu. 3.) Select the SYSTEM item from the Utilities menu - which is displayed on the left side of the screen. 4.) Select the SERVICE page. 5.) Enter the password SHE, and click the ACCEPT. 6.) The Service Tools menu appears on the screen.
SSW button
Figure 8-11 Service Tools 7.) Click on the SSW button for updating the Service Platform Software.
8-11
Section 8-5
Service Platform (SSW) Upgrade Procedure (contd)

8.) Select the DVD/CD DRIVE button. 9.) Browse for the install.bat file and click OK.
Figure 8-12 Browse for Folder 10.)Confirm the following message with YES.
Figure 8-13 Update SSW message 11.)A new window pops up on the screen and the InstallShield starts extracting files.
Figure 8-14 Install Shield Wizard - Extracting Files 12.) Press any key to continue to finish Service Platform installation procedure. 13.)Close the SERVICE page with EXIT and close the System Setup with SAVE & EXIT. 14.)If necessary, perform Service Platform checkout.
8-12
Section 8-5 - Service Platform (SSW) Upgrade Procedure
Section 8-6 Electronic User Manual (EUM) Upgrade Procedure

8-6-1 Manpower
One Person, 15 min.
8-6-2
Tools
System DVD or Upgrade CD
8-6-3
Preparations
1.) Restart the system (turn off and on the system).
NOTICE The electronic user manual (EUM) must never be opened (by pressing the F1 key on the keyboard)
!! NOTICE:
after last restart! Even if closed again before installing the new EUM. 2.) Insert the System DVD or Upgrade CD into the drive. 3.) Press the UTILITIES key on the control panel once to display the Utilities menu. 4.) Select the SYSTEM item from the menu area to invoke the setup desktop on the screen. 5.) Select the SERVICE page. 6.) Enter the password SHE, and click the ACCEPT. 7.) The Service Tools menu appears on the screen.
EUM button
Figure 8-15 Service Tools
8-13
8-6-4
EUM - Upgrade Procedure

1.) Click the EUM button. The Update Software dialog appears. 2.) Select the DVD/CD DRIVE button. 3.) Browse for the EUMSetup_en_V730Pro.exe file and click OK.
Figure 8-16 Browse for Folder 4.) Confirm the following message with YES to proceed the update.
Figure 8-17 Update Package The contents of this package are being extracted. 5.) Confirm the following warning message with OK to proceed the update.
Figure 8-18 confirm warning message 6.) Confirm the Maintenance Complete message: InstallShield Wizard has finished performing maintenance operations on V730 Pro User Manual with the FINISH button.
8-14
Section 8-6 - Electronic User Manual (EUM) Upgrade Procedure
8-6-4
EUM - Upgrade Procedure (contd)

7.) Click the EUM button again to install the new EUM. 8.) Select the MO DRIVE or the DVD/CD DRIVE button, depending on the storage medium you use. 9.) Browse for the EUMSetup_en_V730Pro.exe file again and click OK. 10.)Confirm the following message with YES to proceed the update. The contents of this package are being extracted. 11.)Follow the instructions of the InstallShield Wizard (confirm the messages with the NEXT key). 12.)After successfully installation of the Electronic User Manual, click FINISH to exit the wizard.
Figure 8-19 Complete Installation 13.)Close the SERVICE page with EXIT and close the System Setup with SAVE & EXIT. 14.)Restart the system (turn off and on the system). 15.)After rebooting the system, fill in the requested information into the System Status Messenger box and click OK. 16.)Press the F1 key on the keyboard to invoke the electronic user manual. 17.)Press the EXIT key to exit the EUM. NOTE: If desired, change the EUM Language as described in Section 3-8-1-4 on page 3-61.
8-15
Section 8-7 Software and Functional Checks after the Upgrade

1.) Press the UTILITIES key on the control panel once to display the Utilities menu. 2.) Select the SYSTEM item from the Utilities menu - which is displayed on the left side of the screen. 3.) Select SYSTEM INFO to see which Software/Hardware version is installed in the unit.
System Type Serial number Application Software Backup File Name Date of Factory Settings Serviceplatform information Hardware ID
Move the scroll bar downwards to review additional information about installed software/hardware.
Operating System (e.g., Service Pack 4)
SLOT_CPU (e.g., KONTRON)
Figure 8-20 System Setup - System Info page 4.) Verify the correct settings of the OPTION page; see: Figure 8-2 on page 8-5. If necessary, customize the settings according to the printout. 5.) Check and (if necessary) match the NETWORK page settings according to the printout: DICOM Configuration dialog page; see: Figure 8-3 on page 8-5 Network Configuration dialog page; see: Figure 8-4 on page 8-6 6.) Restart the system and perform basic functional checks to ensure system is functioning normally. 8-16 Section 8-7 - Software and Functional Checks after the Upgrade
Section 8-8 Replacement or Activation of Options

NOTICE Not all Options are available on the Voluson 730ProV (marked with * in this manual).
!! NOTICE:
Following Options are available: at BT05 systems (SW 5.0.x - 5.3.x)

Real Time 4D DICOM Real Time 4D Biopsy* VOCAL II* Tomographic Ultrasound Imaging* (T.U.I.) SRI II* (Speckle Reduction Imaging) Enhanced version
(Software 5.0.3 or higher is required)
at BT08 systems (SW 5.4.x onwards)

Real Time 4D DICOM Real Time 4D Biopsy* VOCAL II* Tomographic Ultrasound Imaging* (T.U.I.) SRI II* (Speckle Reduction Imaging) Enhanced version
VCI* (Volume Contrast Imaging) SRI* (Speckle Reduction Imaging) STIC* (Spatio-Temporal Image Correlation) XTD View (Extended View)
(Software 5.2.0 or higher is required)
SRI* (Speckle Reduction Imaging) STIC* (Spatio-Temporal Image Correlation) XTD View (Extended View)
NOTE:
Additional option fields are not yet implemented in the Voluson 730Pro/ProV.
8-8-1
Operation for activating Options

1.) Press the UTILITIES key on the control panel once to display the Utilities menu. 2.) Select the SYSTEM item from the menu area to invoke the setup desktop on the screen. 3.) Select the OPTION page where you can see which options are installed in the system.
D = Demo
I = Inactive
P = Permanent
Figure 8-21 Option page in the System Setup (Voluson 730Pro - BT08)
8-17
8-8-1
Operation for activating Options (contd)
D = Demo
I = Inactive
P = Permanent
Figure 8-22 Option page in the System Setup (Voluson 730ProV - BT08) NOTE: For more detailed description of Software Options and Application Packages (Voluson 730Pro BT08 only) refer to: Description of Software Options on page 5-15. Operation for installing a Demo Key or a Permanent Key: 1.) Position the cursor inside the input field desired and press the right/left trackball key. 2.) If one exists, clear/edit the current key code. 3.) Enter the encrypted serial code with the keyboard and click on SUBMIT. (Code will be checked.) 4.) Click the SAVE&EXIT button. NOTE: After activating a key code, restart (turn of and on) the Voluson 730Pro/ProV system.
8-8-1-1
8-18
Section 8-8 - Replacement or Activation of Options
Section 8-9 Transfer of Patient Database and Images from System-to-System

8-9-1 Introduction
NOTICE It is possible to backup Sonoview Image data to a Mapped Network Drive (Z:\)
!! NOTICE:
8-19
8-9-2
8-9-2-1
Transfer of Patient Database and Images via Sonoview

Introduction This section describes how to transfer the complete patient database and images from one system (= old system) to another system (= new system) via Network drive in Sonoview. Thus in addition, the patient database and images can be shared between different systems within the same network.
NOTICE Both systems MUST be capable to BACKUP the Sonoview exams to the mapped network drive (Z:\).
!! NOTICE:
This means that both systems have to be: a BT04 or a BT05, a BT03, with at least Software Version 3.1.x installed and/or a BT02, with at least Software Version 2.2.x installed 8-9-2-2 Manpower One Person, time depends on amount of stored images 8-9-2-3 Tools 8-9-2-4 Mapped Network Drive Z: (see: Section 3-11-1 "Map Network Drive" on page 3-70)
Backup all Exams of the old system 1.) On the system (= old system) from which the data should be transferred, press the SONOVIEW key on the Control panel. 2.) Click on the OPEN icon on the upper left side of the screen and verify that Drive HDD is selected. 3.) Using the TRACKBALL, and the right trackball key SET, select the first exam of the list. 4.) To select all available exams, click on SELECT TO END and then on the BACKUP button.
Sonoview key
Open button
Select to End button
Drive HDD all exams are selected
Backup button Figure 8-23 Step 1.) to 5.) 5.) In the Backup window select the destination NET.
Close button
6.) After finishing the backup, select whether the selected exam(s) is to be deleted or not.
NOTICE If you select to delete the exams after finishing the backup, they will be absolutely deleted from the hard
!! NOTICE:
disk of the ultrasound scanner Voluson 730Pro/ProV! Section 8-9 - Transfer of Patient Database and Images from System-to-System
8-20
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 8-9-2-4 Backup all Exams of the old system (contd)
7.) Click on the close button and then select the SETTINGS icon on the left side of the screen. 8.) In the displayed window click on the CHANGE BACKUP FOLDER ON NETWORK DRIVE button. The first line in the dialog (see: Figure 8-24) displays the name (e.g., serial number A09008) of the Backup Folder used for storing data on, and reading data from the network drive. Name of the Backup Folder on Network Drive Figure 8-24 Backup Folder on Network Drive 9.) Notice this name of the old systems Backup Folder (e.g., A09008) and then click CANCEL.
8-9-2-5
Restore all Exams (of the old system) to the new system 1.) On the system (= "new" system), that should receive data and images, press the SONOVIEW key on the Control panel. 2.) Select the SETTINGS icon on the left side of the screen. 3.) In the displayed window click on the CHANGE BACKUP FOLDER ON NETWORK DRIVE button.
Sonoview key
Settings icon Change Backup Folder on Network Drive Figure 8-25 Step 1.) to 3.) 4.) Choose folder of the old system (e.g., A09008) from the drop-down list and click on RENAME.
choose folder of old system e.g., A09008
Rename button
Figure 8-26 Select folder of old system and rename it Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures 8-21
Restore all Exams (of the old system) to the new system (contd)
NOTICE The folder which is selected to be renamed (e.g., A09008, that contains the backup data from a different
!! NOTICE:
system - in this case the backup data of the old system), it is not copied, but simply renamed. Thus, the same data can be shared between two systems by renaming the respective backup folders to the serial number of the accessing system (in this case the new system). 5.) Close the Settings window with the OK button. 6.) Click on the OPEN icon on the upper left side of the screen and choose Drive Network. 7.) Using the TRACKBALL, and the right trackball key SET, select the first exam of the list. 8.) To select all available exams, click on the SELECT TO END button. 9.) Click on the BACKUP / RESTORE button.
Open button
Select to End button
Drive Network
all exams are selected
Backup / Restore button Figure 8-27 Step 5.) to 9.) 10.)In the Backup / Restore window click on the RESTORE button.
Close button
NOTICE If an exam is about to be restored that already exists on the hard disk of the new system, a dialog
!! NOTICE:
shows the Patient Name and Patient ID and asks for the action to be taken.
Figure 8-28 Identical exam already exists
8-22
Section 8-9 - Transfer of Patient Database and Images from System-to-System
Restore all Exams (of the old system) to the new system (contd) 11.)Select the desired action:
Yes Yes to all No No to all
The exam on the hard disk is replaced with the exam in the backup. The system will ask again if another identical exam is found during the restore process. All identical exams are replaced without further notice. The exam on the hard disk is not replaced by the exam in the backup. The system will ask again if another identical exam is found during the restore process. No identical exams are replaced with the exams in the backup.
12.)After finishing the restore, select whether the selected exam(s) is to be deleted or not.
NOTICE If you select to delete the exams after finishing the restore, they will be absolutely deleted from the
!! NOTICE:
network drive!
8-23
Section 8-10 Replacement of the Monitor Task Lamp

8-10-1 Manpower
One person, 15 min.
8-10-2
Tools
Philips screwdriver 1 and 2, stubby (length ~30mm)
8-10-3
Preparations
1.) Power Off/Shutdown the system; see: Section 4-3-2 on page 4-3.
8-10-4
Task Lamp - Removal Procedure

1.) Use the stubby screwdriver and unscrew the 2 screws, which fixes the cover of the task lamp.
task lamp
Figure 8-29 remove cover of the task lamp 2.) Screw out the task lamp and remove it.
8-10-5
Task Lamp - Installation Procedure

1.) Screw in the new task lamp into the lamp socket. 2.) Mount the cover of the task lamp and fix it with the 2 screws.
8-24
Section 8-10 - Replacement of the Monitor Task Lamp
Section 8-11 Replacement of the Trackball top fixation ring

8-11-1 Manpower
One person, 5 min.
8-11-2
Trackball top fixation ring - Replacement Procedure

1.) Remove the fixation ring by turning it counterclockwise.
rotate clockwise to mount the fixing ring
rotate counterclockwise to remove the fixing ring
Figure 8-30 Trackball with top fixation ring 2.) Mount the fixation ring by turning it clockwise.
Section 8-12 Replacement of Digipots and TGC Slider controls

8-12-1 Manpower
One person, 5 min.
8-12-2
Tools
small-sized slotted screwdriver or tweezers
8-12-3
Cap and/or Spring - Replacement Procedure

1.) Remove the cap (for Rotation digipots or for Slider-potentiometer TGC). 2.) Mount the cap (for Rotation digipots or for Slider-potentiometer TGC).
Section 8-13 Replacement of the Probe Holder

8-13-1 Manpower
One person, 1 min.
8-13-2
Probe Holder - Replacement Procedure

1.) Remove the probe holder from the bottom housing of the User Interface. 2.) Place the new probe holder on the bottom housing.
8-25
Section 8-14 Replacement of Key Caps (by special native language keys)
NOTICE Table 9-12 on page 9-16 shows the available Key Cap Kits.
!! NOTICE:
Keys to be removed depend on the (special native) language kit.
8-14-1
Manpower
One person, 30 minutes
8-14-2
Tools
Use the removal tool which is part of the key cap kits, a commercial key removal tool, or a small-sized slotted screwdriver or tweezers.
8-14-3
Preparations
1.) Power Off/Shutdown the system; see: Section 4-3-2 on page 4-3.
8-14-4
Key Caps - Removal Procedure

1.) Carefully place the removal tool or a small flat screwdriver between the key cap you wish to remove and its neighboring key cap (as shown in Figure 8-31 below). 2.) Gently lift the key cap, until it is completely loosened from its base. 3.) Remove the key cap.
Figure 8-31 removal tool in place
8-14-5
Key Caps - Installation Procedure

1.) Carefully place the appropriate key cap in positionon the keyboard, taking care to place the plastic alignment pin in the correct position so that the key cap is the right way up and reads correctly. 2.) Push the key cap down until it snaps into position. 3.) Power On/Boot Up the system; see: Section 4-3-1 on page 4-2. 4.) Setup the Keyboard Language Layout as described in Section 6-6 on page 6-7 and then type with the keyboard to check the function of each key.
8-26
Section 8-14 - Replacement of Key Caps (by special native language keys)
Section 8-15 Replacing optional Peripherals / How to mount Peripherals at a later date
NOTICE Normally auxiliary devices and peripherals come pre-installed with the Voluson 730Pro/ProV system.
!! NOTICE:
8-27
8-15-1
Mounting/Replacing the 19 LCD secondary Patient Monitor
CAUTION The 19 LCD secondary Patient Monitor MUST NEVER be connected to the Voluson 730Pro/
ProV ultrasound Systems mains supply directly!

!! CAUTION:
Always connect it to the supplied Isolation Transformer! The Secondary Monitor is the only item to be connected to the Transformer!
NOTICE The 19 LCD secondary Patient Monitor is NOT intended for diagnostic use.
It is an additional device used to allow the patient to watch the proceedings. Take your time to think about the best position of the monitor in your facilities. Patients should be able to view the monitor easily and without having to bend or turn around.
NOTICE DO NOT connect the 19 LCD secondary Patient Monitor to the Voluson 730Pro/ProV via USB
cable. Use the supplied VGA cable.
NOTICE For more detailed description, how to mount/replace the 19 LCD secondary Patient Monitor refer to:
Section 3-5-12 "Worldwide 19 secondary Patient Monitor kit" on page 3-25
8-28
Section 8-15 - Replacing optional Peripherals / How to mount Peripherals at a later date
Chapter 9 Renewal Parts

This chapter gives you an overview of Spare Parts available for the Voluson 730Pro/ProV. NOTE: Furthermore refer to SN79040, which is the best source for new FRU parts that are not yet implemented in this Service Manual. Table 9-1
Section
9-1 9-2 9-3 9-4 9-5 9-6 9-7 9-8 9-9 9-10 9-11 9-12 9-13 9-14 9-15 Overview List of Abbreviations Parts List Groups Housing (GW) and additional Console Hardware User Interface (GEU Top Console) Monitor + Monitor replacement parts Disk Drives (GEM) Main Power Module (CPN) Main Board Module (GEZ) Options and Upgrades Miscellaneous Cables Optional Peripherals and Accessories System Manuals Probes Biopsy Needle Guides
9-1 9-2 9-3 9-4 9-6 9-8 9-9 9-10 9-11 9-16 9-19 9-26 9-31 9-33 9-38
Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts
9-1
Section 9-2 List of Abbreviations

AC ADC ASIC Assy BEP CKV CPD CPE CPK CPN CPP CPR CPU CPV CPY CPZ CRB CRS CRU CRW CSD DAC DC DSP EUM FRU 1 FRU 2 GEB GEM GES GEU GEZ GW HDD Int I/O LCD MAN MOD SBC SMBus SSW UIS Alternating Current Analog to Digital Converter Application Specific Integrated Circuit Assembly Back End Processor Video Converter Board Sub-Board on Beamformer (CPR) Motherboard Extension (Backpanel I/O-Card) Motherboard of GEZ-Module Primary Power Supply Module Power Supply Secondary Board + Motor Power stage Beamformer Motherboard Central Processing Unit Probe Connector Board Power Switch Board Cover Board USB to IDE Converter Board Signal Processing Board--/ Customer Replaceable Unit CW-Doppler Board (optional) Common Service Desktop Digital to Analog Converter Direct Current Digital Signal Processing Electronic User Manual Replacement part available in parts hub Replacement part available from the manufacturer (lead time involved) PC-Box (Backend Processor) Disk Drive module (with or without MO-Drive and MAN) I/O-Interface (User accessible) User interface: Keyboard, EL-Display, TGC Unit Main Board Module (Ultrasound (FrontEnd) and PC-Board (Backend Processor)) Console housing (except GEU and GEM) Hard Disk Drive Internal Input/Output Liquid Crystal Display ECG module Magneto Optical Disk Single Board Computer (PC-Board) System Management Bus Service Software (Service Platform) Ultrasound Application Software
9-2
Section 9-2 - List of Abbreviations
Section 9-3 Parts List Groups
Figure 9-1 Console Views
Table 9-2
Item
100200250300400500510570600700800-
Mechanical and user accessible parts

Table Number
Table 9-3 on page 9-5 Table 9-4 on page 9-7 Table 9-5 on page 9-8 Table 9-6 on page 9-9 Table 9-7 on page 9-10 Table 9-8 on page 9-11 Table 9-9 on page 9-12 Table 9-10 on page 9-13 Table 9-11 on page 9-15 Table 9-12 on page 9-16 Table 9-13 on page 9-19 Table 9-16 on page 9-28 Table 9-18 on page 9-30 Table 9-19 on page 9-31 Printers, Video Recorder, ECG-Module (MAN), etc.
Part Group Name

Housing (GW) and additional Console Hardware User Interface (GEU Top Console) Monitor + Monitor replacement parts Disk Drives (GEM) Main Power Module (CPN) Main Board Module (GEZ) FrontEnd (US-Part) FrontEnd (US-Part) contd Back Processor (PC-Part) Options and Upgrades Miscellaneous Cables Optional Peripherals and Accessories Optional Peripherals and Access. contd System Manuals Probes 2D curved array Transducers 2D linear- and phased array Transducers Real-Time 4D Volume Probes Real-Time 4D Volume Probes contd CW-Pencil Probes Biopsy Needle Guides
Description
GW -Console housing (except GEU and GEM) GEU - User interface: Keyboard, TGC Unit Monitor + Monitor replacement parts GEM - Disk Drive module (with or without MAN) CPN - Primary power module GEZ - Main Board Module Ultrasound (FrontEnd) PC-Boards (Backend Processor)
900906920930950
Table 9-20 on page 9-33 Table 9-21 on page 9-34 Table 9-22 on page 9-35 Table 9-23 on page 9-36 Table 9-24 on page 9-37 Table 9-25 on page 9-39
9-3
Section 9-4 Housing (GW) and additional Console Hardware
107
101 104
102
105
103 111
110
108 106 109
114 112
115
113
116 117 8 pieces each
Figure 9-2 Housing (GW) and additional Console Hardware NOTE: The illustrations may not correspond to the actual product!
9-4
Section 9-4 - Housing (GW) and additional Console Hardware
Table 9-3
Item
101 102 103 104
Housing (GW) and additional Console Hardware

Part Number
KTZ134468 KTZ208109 KTZ154728 KTZ154736
Part Name
Rear Handle for Trolley Blind Cap for rear screws Rear Metal Cover Plate Guide for Probe cables
Description
Rear Handle for Trolley covers housing screws to make them invisible (1 pcs.) Rear metal cover plate complete Guide for Probe cables - optional (includes 4 hooks and mounting rail) Side panel Kit (left and right side panel) including guide for probe cables and plastic guide Cap Rubber (set includes 8 pieces) Monitor mounting plate Rear wheel non-steerable (1 pcs.) Front wheel steerable (1 pcs.) Foot rest Housing with wheels, Power Supply (CPN), Disk Drive Module (GEM), backpanel with connectors (GES) and cables External Rear Panel with electrical Signal- and SupplyConnection-Cables to the systems main unit (internal) Rear-Panel. Top Cover of Trolley Hinge for Foot rest (1 pcs.) Standby Switch left below the control panel Pull-out Protection for Mains Power cable (incl. screws) odds and ends side panels mounting kit incl. sockets, lock washers, screws and rubber caps (8 pieces. each)
Qty
1 2 1 1
CRU
Y Y N Y
FRU
1 1 2 1
105 106 107 108 109 110
Side panel Kit (left an right) Cap Rubber (8 pcs.) Monitor Mounting Plate Voluson 730Pro/ProV Rear Wheel (175 mm x 32) Steerable Wheel Foot rest GW140 Trolley Voluson 730Pro/ProV
KTZ154735 KTZ154737 KTZ134111 KTZ211081 KTZ211080 KTZ134467
1 8 1 2 2 1
N Y N Y Y Y
2 1 1 1 1 1
111
KTZ154734
112
GES8 I/O Connection Panel
KTZ195901
113 114 115 116
Top Cover of Trolley Hinge for Foot rest Standby Switch Pull-out Protection for Mains Power cable
KTZ208119 KTZ220018 KTZ207125 KTZ154717
1 2 1 1
N N N N
1 1 1 1
117
Side Panels Mounting Kit
KTZ280046
9-5
Section 9-5 User Interface (GEU Top Console)
203 201 205 207 202
204
208 209
206
210 212 213
211
219
217
218
214 215 216
Figure 9-3 User Interface (GEU) NOTE: The illustrations may not correspond to the actual product!
9-6
Section 9-5 - User Interface (GEU Top Console)
Table 9-4
Item
201 202 203 204 205
User Interface (GEU)

Part Number
KTZ209344 KTZ209346 KTZ208264 KTZ208256 KTZ214798
Part Name
Front Handle User Interface Probe Holder Kit V730 Trackball Kit V730 Trackball top fixation ring Caps for Rotation digipots (8 pcs.)
Description
Voluson 730Pro/ProV Front Handle, silver right hand Probe holder part, removable generates X-Y-Coordinates of Trackball-Movements like moving a PC-Mouse Trackball for top fixation ring Caps for Rotation digipots (set includes 8 pieces with premounted brackets) Caps for TGC Slide-pot. (set includes 8 pieces with premounted brackets) Keytop Kit Voluson 730Pro/ProV Alpha-numeric keyboard for Voluson 730Pro/ProV English Compatibility: can be replaced by KTZ300100, if the Hardkey board is also exchanged Alpha-numeric keyboard for Voluson 730Pro/ProV English (check if special key cap kit is needed; see: Table 9-12 on page 9-16) Compatibility: can replace KTZ208217, if the Hardkey board is also exchanged Gel holder Voluson 730Pro/ProV Loudspeaker on GEU User Interface (1 pcs.) English keyboard, trackball, special knobs, and switches (check if special key cap kit is needed; see: Table 9-12 on page 9-16) Pay attention to use lower FRUs like trackball, A/N keyboard, Hardkey board, etc. Top housing of GEU70, painted, empty Bottom housing of GEU, painted, without interior Hardkey Board(s) for Voluson 730Pro/ProV (large board - Part A ; small board - Part B) Compatibility: can be replaced by KTZ300098, if the alpha-numeric keyboard is also exchanged Hardkey Board(s) for Voluson 730Pro/ProV (large board - Part A ; small board - Part B) Compatibility: can replace KTZ208284, if the alpha-numeric keyboard is also exchanged Distance Rod for GEU8 Wheel control for Voluson 730Pro/ProV Digipot Set 4 pcs.
Qty
1 1 1 1 8
CRU
Y Y N Y Y
FRU
1 1 1 1 1
206 207
Caps for TGC Slide-pot. (8 pcs.) Keytop Kit Voluson 730Pro/ProV
KTZ214818 KTZ207558
8 1
Y N
1 1
208
Alpha-numeric keyboard V730Pro/ ProV (English)
KTZ208217
209
Alpha-numeric keyboard V730Pro / ProV GEU70 (English)
KTZ300100
210 211
Gel holder Voluson 730Pro/ProV Loudspeaker for Top Console
KTZ134521 KTZ208132
1 2
Y N
1 1
212
GEU70 User Interface Voluson 730Pro/ProV
KTZ154730
213 214
Top housing of GEU70, painted Bottom housing of GEU, painted
KTZ214819 KTZ214799
1 1
N N
1 1
215
Hard key Board for V730Pro / ProV
KTZ208284
216
Hard key Board for V730Pro / ProV - GEU 70
KTZ300098
217 218 219
Distance Rod for GEU Wheel control for V730Pro / ProV Digipot Set 4 pcs.
KTZ14B596 KTZ208257 KTZ280105
1 1 1
N N N
1 1 1
9-7
Section 9-6 Monitor + Monitor replacement parts
250
251
253
252
256
254 255
Figure 9-4 Monitor + Monitor replacement parts NOTE: The illustrations may not correspond to the actual product! Table 9-5
Item
250 251 252 253 254 255 256
Monitor + Monitor replacement parts

Part Number
KTZ212115 KTZ134474 KTZ154713 KTZ208445 KTZ208446 2300008 2317347
Part Name
Color Monitor 15 Painted Monitor Base Cover Monitor Mounting Set Set Monitor Front Housing Set Monitor Housing Monitor Switch Assembly Task Lamp
Description
AY-15CUI Color Image Monitor, lacquered Monitor Base Cover, silver colored Monitor Mounting Set (fixing part for Monitor) Set Monitor Front Housing (incl. cover of task lamp) Set Monitor Housing (left-, right-, and top cover) Common part with L5 and L3 Common part with L5 and L3
Qty
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CRU
N N N N N N N
FRU
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
9-8
Section 9-6 - Monitor + Monitor replacement parts
Section 9-7 Disk Drives (GEM)

301 302
303
304
305 306 307 309
308
Figure 9-5 Disk Drives (GEM) NOTE: The illustrations may not correspond to the actual product! Table 9-6
Item
301 302 303 304
Disk Drives (GEM)

Part Number
KTZ207257 KTZ301629 KTZ207602 KTZ207269
Part Name
Disk Drive IDE DVD+(R)W DVD Drive TEAC DV-W5000E Fan axial 62 x 62 x 14 mm Disk Drive IDE MOD 1.3GB internal GEM11-11A MO-Drive + DVD+(R)W GEM 21-21A DVD+(R)W GEM30 DVD+R/RW CRB1c.P1 USB to IDE Converter Board Board USB2.0 to IDE Converter
Description
DVD+(R)W Writer internal (no own cabinet) DVD Drive TEAC DV-W5000E Fan for Air-Cooling of GEM (SCSI-Drive-Module) Magneto-Optical-Drive 1.3GB internal (no own cabinet) MO-Drive and DVD+(R)W DVD+(R)W (without MO-Drive) GEM30 DVD+R/RW CRB1c.P1 USB to IDE Converter Board AP039 USB to IDE Converter
Qty
1 1 1 1
CRU
N N N N
FRU
1 1 1 1
305 306 307 308 309
KTZ196000 KTZ196001 KTZ301669 KTZ195891 KTZ280163
1 1 1 1 1
N N N N N
2 2 1 1 1
9-9
Section 9-8 Main Power Module (CPN)
401
402
404
403 408
405 406 407
409
Figure 9-6 Main Power Module (CPN) NOTE: The illustrations may not correspond to the actual product! Table 9-7
Item
401 402 403 404 405 406
Main Power Module (CPN)

Part Number
KTZ207486 KTZ209338 KTZ209339 KTZ209340 KTZ209341 KTZ209342
Part Name
CPN80-81 Power Supply Module CPY80.P1 Power Switch CCF100.P1 Power Primary Board Mains Power switch and Input connector Fuses 16 Ampere 6.3 x 32 (10 pcs.) Fuses 3.2 Ampere 6.3 x 32 (10 pcs.)
Description
CPN80 Power Supply Module Board to switch on and shut down Ultrasound System Power Primary Board Mains Power Switch and Input Connector used at primary and secondary side (10 pcs.) fuse for auxiliary power output at 110V setting (10 pcs.) fuse for auxiliary power output at 230V setting (10 pcs.) KVN2 - Fan for Primary Power Supply (CPN) Fuse Hoder Set (4 pcs.)
Qty
1 1 1 1 3 1
CRU
N N N N Y Y
FRU
1 1 1 1 1 1
407 408 409
Fuses 1.6 Ampere 6.3 x 32 (10 pcs.) KVN2 - Fan for Primary Power Supply Fuse Holder Set (4 pcs.)
KTZ209343 KTZ195440 KTZ280062
1 1 1
Y N N
1 1 1
9-10
Section 9-8 - Main Power Module (CPN)
Section 9-9 Main Board Module (GEZ)
501
502
Figure 9-7 Main Board Module (GEZ) NOTE: The illustrations may not correspond to the actual product! Table 9-8
Item
501 502
Main Board Module (GEZ)

Part Number
KTZ154738 KTZ154748
Part Name
Fan for GEZ-box - FrontEnd (2 fan) Fan for GEB-PC-box - BackEnd (2 fan)
Description
Fan for GEZ-box - FrontEnd (2 fan) Fan for GEB-PC-box - BackEnd (2 fan)
Qty
1 1
CRU
N N
FRU
1 1
9-11
9-9-1
FrontEnd (US-Part)
511
512 513
514 516
515
Figure 9-8 FrontEnd (US-Part) NOTE: The illustrations may not correspond to the actual product! Table 9-9
Item
511 512
FrontEnd (US-Part)
Part Number
KTZ196024 KTZ196086
Part Name
CPR82.P11 Beam former Board CRW3.P2 CW Doppler Board
Description
Beam former Board CW-Doppler Board (can be replaced by CRW4, if SW 5.2.0 or higher is installed) CW-Doppler Board SW 5.2.0 or higher is required electrical signal connection between CPV,CPR and CW-Board; contains Relays for Signal to CW-Board. Signal Processing Board (can replace CRS22) Signal Processing Board (can replace CRS5) SW 5.0.4 or higher is required
Qty
1 1
CRU
N N
FRU
1 1
513
CRW4.P2 CW Doppler Board
KTZ196306
514
CPZ50-50a.P3 Cover Board
KTZ195592
515 516
CRS5.P3 Signal Processing Board CRS22B.P8 Signal Processing Board
KTZ196074 KTZ300428
1 1
N N
1 1
9-12
Section 9-9 - Main Board Module (GEZ)
9-9-1
FrontEnd (US-Part) (contd)
519
518
520
Figure 9-9 FrontEnd (US-Part) contd NOTE: The illustrations may not correspond to the actual product! Table 9-10
Item
518 519 520
FrontEnd (US-Part) contd

Part Number
KTZ196053 KTZ208498 KTZ196063
Part Name
CPK95.P8 Motherboard V730 CPP90a.P2 Power Supply Board CPV90a.P6 Module Board
Description
Electrical Signal- and Supply-Connection for all boards Power Supply Board Output Power: 900 W Probe Connector Board, Module Board
Qty
1 1 1
CRU
N N N
FRU
1 1 1
9-13
9-9-2
BackEnd Processor (PC-Part)
571
573
574 572
575
577
576
579 578
Figure 9-10 Back Processor (PC-Part) NOTE: The illustrations may not correspond to the actual product!
9-14
Section 9-9 - Main Board Module (GEZ)
Table 9-11
Item
571 572
Back Processor (PC-Part)

Part Number
KTZ208497 KTZ195902
Part Name
CKV85-86 Video management Board* CPE80.P5 Motherboard - Extension Universal Hard disk for all Voluson 730 (V730, V730Expert and V730Pro) systems HDD-Holder complete** Lithium Battery CR2032 (3V)
Description
PC-Video converter Board Motherboard Extension Universal Hard disk (Maxtor or Western digital) System/Boot DVD (see: Table 9-12) is required HDD-Holder complete for 160GB HDD and higher Lithium Battery CR2032 (3V) for SBC-Board Kit contains ATX Motherboard (Kontron) Pentium IV chip, CPU cooler, 1Gb RAM, Serial Slot (used only with Kontron types), Serial interface cable, Power Cable Set ATX Fans, USB cable (without HDD and ADD). Can replace Tyan ATX types, but system C: image MUST be loaded! In this case, System/Boot DVD (see: Table 9-12) is required Kit contains ATX Motherboard (Kontron Flex) Pentium IV chip, CPU cooler, 1 Gb RAM, SATA cable, SATA to IDE converter, Power cable set ATX, Fans, USB cable (without HDD and ADD). Can replace Tyan ATX, Kontron ATX, DFI ATX types, but system C: image MUST be loaded! In this case, System/Boot DVD (see: Table 9-12) is required ADD2-DVI (Add-On) card for Kontron ATX only can be replaced by KTZ208588 ADD2-DVI (Add-On) card, can be used at both PC-board versions (Kontron and Tyan)
Qty
1 1
CRU
N N
FRU
1 1
573
KTZ196003
574 575
KTZ302126 KTZ208791
1 1
N N
1 1
576
SBC Kontron ATX Kit (BT05, BT08) incl. housing
KTZ208599
577
SBC Kontron Flex Kit (BT05, BT08) incl. housing
KTZ300633
578
ADD2-DVI card for Kontron SBC-board *** ADD2-DVI card***
KTZ208615
579
KTZ208588
* If the stock of CKV85.P7 VIDEOMANAGEMENT BOARD will be empty, the CKV86.P8 VIDEOMANAGEMENT BOARD will come automatically **Using of HDD-Holder complete (KTZ302126) is necessary for 160GB HDD and higher. ***The currently installed Single Board Computer (PC-Board) is shown in the System Setup - System Info page; see: Figure 7-1 on page 7-2, SLOT_CPU: TYAN or KONTRON ATX, DFI ATX or Kontron Flex.
9-15
Section 9-10 Options and Upgrades

Table 9-12
Item Part Name
System/Boot DVD (SW 5.4.0, BT08) Note: Refer to SN79009, which is the best source for the latest revision System/Boot DVD (SW 5.4.1-Rev.B, BT05/BT08) Note: Refer to SN79009, which is the best source for the latest revision
Options and Upgrades

Part Number Description
bootable DVD for System HDD recovery Contents: SP with newest MS Patches, Linux rescue partition, System C: Image (Windows 2000, Kontron SBC + Tyan SBC supplied), UISApp, Backup, EUM, Database Repair Tool, etc. bootable DVD for System HDD recovery Contents: SP with newest MS Patches, Linux rescue partition, System C: Image (Windows 2000, Kontron Flex SBC + DFI ATX SBC supplied), UISApp, Backup, EUM, Database Repair Tool, etc., (incl. 3 DVDs) bootable DVD for System HDD recovery Contents: SP with newest MS Patches, Linux rescue partition, System C: Image (Windows 2000, Kontron Flex SBC + DFI ATX SBC supplied), UISApp, Backup, EUM, Database Repair Tool, etc., (incl. 3 DVDs) bootable DVD for System HDD recovery Contents: SP with newest MS Patches, Linux rescue partition, System C: Image (Windows 2000, Kontron Flex SBC + DFI ATX SBC supplied), UISApp, Backup, EUM, Database Repair Tool, etc., (incl. 3 DVDs) bootable DVD for System HDD recovery Contents: SP with newest MS Patches, Linux rescue partition, System C: Image (Windows 2000, Kontron Flex SBC + DFI ATX SBC supplied), UISApp, Backup, EUM, Database Repair Tool, etc., (incl. 3 DVDs) bootable DVD for System HDD recovery Contents: SP with newest MS Patches, Linux rescue partition, System C: Image (Windows 2000, Kontron Flex SBC + DFI ATX SBC supplied), UISApp, Backup, EUM, Database Repair Tool, etc., (incl. 3 DVDs) Microsoft Vulnerability Patch CD (MS08-067)
Qty
CRU
FRU
601
KTZ280060
602
KTZ280120
603
System/Boot DVD (SW 5.4.2, BT05/BT08) Note: Refer to SN79009, which is the best source for the latest revision
KTZ280129
604
KTZ280181
605
KTZ280188
606
System/Boot DVD (SW 5.4.6, BT05/BT08) Note: Refer to SN79009, which is the best source for the latest revision Patch DVD Voluson 730Pro/ProV (MS08-067) Voluson 730Pro BT05 -> Voluson 730Pro BT08 Upgrade Kit Voluson 730ProV BT05 -> Voluson 730ProV BT08 Upgrade Kit Voluson 730ProV BT05 -> Voluson 730Pro BT08 Upgrade Kit Upgrade to new SW Voluson 730Pro/ProV BT05/08 VERSI
KTZ280198
607
KTZ280115
608
H48671DZ
BT08 Upgrade kit (incl. System DVD, Manuals, etc.)
609
H48671E
610
H48671BH
611
H48681AB
Upgrade kit includes actually BT05/08 SW Version
9-16
Section 9-10 - Options and Upgrades

Item
612

Part Number
H48651GB
Part Name
Real Time 4D Biopsy
Description
encrypted Software Option string (password) which is specific for each Voluson 730Pro/ProV system encrypted Software Option string (password) which is specific for each Voluson 730Pro system encrypted Software Option string (password) which is specific for each Voluson 730Pro system encrypted Software Option string (password) which is specific for each Voluson 730Pro system (BT05 only) This feature is standard at BT08 systems (SW 5.4.x). encrypted Software Option string (password) which is specific for each Voluson 730Pro system encrypted Software Option string (password) which is specific for each Voluson 730ProV system encrypted Software Option string (password) which is specific for each Voluson 730Pro system encrypted Software Option string (password) which is specific for each Voluson 730Pro system encrypted Software Option string (password) which is specific for each Voluson 730Pro system encrypted Software Option string (password) which is specific for each Voluson 730Pro system Software 5.0.3 or higher is required. encrypted Software Option string (password) which is specific for each Voluson 730Pro system Software 5.2.0 or higher is required. encrypted Software Option string (password) which is specific for each Voluson 730ProV system encrypted Application Package string (password) which is specific for each Voluson 730Pro system (BT08 only) encrypted Application Package string (password) which is specific for each Voluson 730Pro system (BT08 only) encrypted Application Package string (password) which is specific for each Voluson 730Pro system (BT08 only) stand alone PC-Software which can be used to view and work on data produced with Kretztechniks Voluson 730Pro/ProV Ultrasound system CW-Doppler Upgrade Kit incl. upgrade instructions kit includes special native language keys kit includes special native language keys kit includes special native language keys
Qty
-
CRU
N
FRU
N
613
Real Time 4D
H48651GC
614
VOCAL II - Volume Calculation
H48651GD
615
VCI - Volume Contrast Imaging
BT Version:
BT-Version:
H48651GE
616
Interface for DICOM 3 standard
H48651GF
617
Interface for DICOM 3 standard
H48651HH
618
SRI - Speckle Reduction Imaging TUI - Tomographic Ultrasound Imaging STIC
H48651GH
619
H48651GJ
620
H48651JS
621
SRI II - Speckle Reduction Imaging
H48651NG
622
XTD View (Extended View)
H48651PJ
623
XTD View (Extended View)
H48651PL
624
Fetal Echo Package
H48671EG
625
Gyn Package
H48671EH
626
Breast Package
H48671EJ
627
4D View PC Software
H48651FB (BT05) H48651SZ (BT08) H48651HE H48651ED H48651EE H48651EF
628 629 630 631
CW-Doppler Upgrade Kit external Key Cap Kit - Swedish Key Cap Kit - Danish Key Cap Kit - Norwegian
N N N N
N Y Y Y
1 1 1 1
9-17

Item
632 633 634 635 636

Part Number
H48651EG H48651EH H48651JD H48651JE H48651JF
Part Name
Key Cap Kit - Finnish Key Cap Kit - Spanish Key Cap Kit - French Key Cap Kit - German Key Cap Kit - Italian
Description
kit includes special native language keys kit includes special native language keys kit includes special native language keys kit includes special native language keys kit includes special native language keys
Qty
N N N N N
CRU
Y Y Y Y Y
FRU
1 1 1 1 1
NOTICE A sales order has to be obtained for item 608 - 636!

!! NOTICE:
Software Options (item 612 - 627): Once the order has been processed, the option string can be either entered by the customer or Applications support. BT Version: "VCI" is optional at BT05 Voluson 730Pro systems. However, at BT08 systems (SW5.4.x installed), or systems that were upgraded to BT08 via upgrade kit, this feature is standard. A software only update (no new BT-version key) does NOT activate this feature. It remain optional and can be obtained via sales order.
BT-Version:
BT-Version:
BT Version: Application Packages are only available for Voluson 730Pro systems with BT08 software (SW 5.4.x). For more details see: Table 5-2, Software Options & Application Packages, on page 5-15.
9-18
Section 9-10 - Options and Upgrades
Section 9-11 Miscellaneous Cables

Table 9-13
Item Part Name
Miscellaneous Cables
Splits the PS2 connector for GEU User Interface (mouse and PC-keyboard
Qty
CRU
FRU
701
Adapter Cable PS2 Y-splitter
KTZ208585
Power cable for Harddisk 4pin
702
Power Cable for Harddisk
KTZ212401
HDD power connector to Pentium4 power connector
703
Cable ATX 12Volt
KTZ212267
Flat cable(s) from CKV to CPK board, 40pin (1 pcs.) Cable ATA CKV -> CPK board (40 pin)
704
KTZ212453
9-19

Item Part Name
Serial Interface Cable (only used in combination with Kontron SBC-boards)
Qty
CRU
FRU
705
Cable RS-232 Loop
KTZ208617
Power connection cable from CPP-board to Pentium IV SBC (Tyan only) and to the Hard disk
KTZ208591
706
Power Cable Set ATX Power connection cable from CPP-board to Pentium IV SBC and to the Hard disk (can be used at both PC-board versions, Kontron and Tyan)
KTZ220417
Cable from PC-Sound-StereoJack to External Rear Panel
707
Cable Stereo Jack - Chinch
KTZ212074
9-20
Section 9-11 - Miscellaneous Cables

Item Part Name
Data cable for IDE-Hard disk 40pin
Qty
CRU
FRU
708
Data Cable HDD ATA66/100
KTZ208147
External Rear Panel with electrical Signal- and SupplyConnection-Cables to the Voluson 730Pro/ProV MainUnit (internal) Rear-Panel. 709 GES8 I/O Connection Panel KTZ195901 1 N 1
Electrical Power-Supply for Drives (5V/12V)
710
KGS10 Cable Power GEM-GEZ
KTZ195464
VCR -Remote Control Cable 711 KUG5 Remote Cable KTZ195606 1 N 1
electrical-Signal-Connection between CRS and SBC (only used in combination with Tyan SBC-boards) 712 KTZ195717 1 N 1
KVS2 Cable Serial Interface
Cable from external rear Panel to the Voluson 730Pro/ ProV Main-Unit (internal) rear-Panel 1m 713 KVX1 Network Cable KTZ212016 1 N 1
9-21

Item Part Name
Line cord for Supply from Main-Device to Sub-Devices
Qty
CRU
FRU
714
Monitor Power Connection Cable
KTZ212116
Power Cord Europe 230V/240V
715
Power Cord Europe 230V
KTZ212317
Power Cord Japan Hospital Grade
716
Power Cord Japan (Hosp. grade)
KTZ212448
Power Cord United Kingdom 240V
717
Power Cord UK
KTZ212441
9-22

Item Part Name
Power Cord USA Hospital Grade
Qty
CRU
FRU
718
Power Cord USA (Hosp.grade)
KTZ212402
Power Cord India
719
Power Cord India
KTZ212452
Power Cord China
720
Power Cord - China
KTZ212451
Power Cord Brazil
721
Power Cord - Brazil
KTZ280186
9-23

Item Part Name
Standby Switch Cables
Qty
CRU
FRU
720
Standby Switch Cable
KTZ195514
Set contains two parts: Not to be used at Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08) systems
721
USB to SBC-Board
KTZ207029
USB for PC-Slot, Connector on Backpanel. Cables are connected to PC-Board. Leads the USB-signals to the PC-Backpanel
USB Cable from Disk Drive Module (GEM) to connector USB-GEM on the PC-part of main board module (GEZ)
722
USB Cable A to B (from GEM to PC-part on GEZ)
KTZ212125
9-24

Item Part Name
VGA cable HD15-HD15
Qty
CRU
FRU
723
VGA cable HD15-HD15
KTZ212275
Cable TMDS (Digital Video Cable from ADD-On DVI Output to CKV)
724
Cable TMDS (Digital Video cable from Add-On DVI Output to CKV)
KTZ208574
USB -> -RS-232 Adapter Data Cable for (optional) Global Modem
725
USB -> RS-232 Adapter (Modem Data Cable)
KTZ212114
Power Connection Cable
726
Power Connection Cable
KTZ212032
9-25
Section 9-12 Optional Peripherals and Accessories

Table 9-14 below outlines the optional peripherals and accessories described in the sub-sections Table 9-14 Optional Peripherals and Accessories - Replacement Parts
Description
Recording Tools Printers Optional Equipment
Sub-section
9-12-1 9-12-2 9-12-3
Page Number
9-26 9-27 9-29
9-12-1
Recording Tools
Figure 9-11 Optional Peripherals and Accessories - Recording Tools NOTE: The illustrations may not correspond to the actual product! Table 9-15
Item
800
Optional Peripherals and Accessories - Recording Tools

Part Number
KTZ211368 (H46801D) KTZ211369 (H46801C) KTZ154759 (H48651ND)
Part Name
S-VHS Medical Grade VCR - NTSC (Mitsubishi VCR HS-MD3000U) S-VHS Medical Grade VCR - PAL (Mitsubishi VCR HS-MD3000E) DVD Recorder - PAL/NTSC (Sony DVO-1000MD)
Description
NTSC (Video Converter required) PAL (Video Converter required) DVD Recorder (PAL/NTSC) (Video Converter required)
Qty -
CRU N
FRU 1
801
802
9-26
Section 9-12 - Optional Peripherals and Accessories
9-12-2
Printers
803 804 805
808 806 807 809
811 810 813 812
817
815
814
816
818
Figure 9-12 Optional Peripherals and Accessories - Printers NOTE: The illustrations may not correspond to the actual product!
9-27
Table 9-16
Item
803 804 805
Optional Peripherals and Accessories - Printers

Part Number
KTZ211332 (H46801A) KTZ195643 KTZ220507 (H48651ML) KTZ302617 (H48681TH) KTZ211373 (H46831B) KTZ195776 KTZ211373 (H46831B) KTZ302616 (H48681TJ)
Part Name
Sony B/W Video Printer UP-895MD (CE) PPP55 Connection Set Digital B/W Video Printer (Sony UP-D897) Mitsubishi B/W Printer P95D Sony Digital Color Printer UP-D23MD PZP60 Connection Set Digital Color Printer (Sony UP-D25MD) Mitsubishi Color Printer CP30D Line Printer (Bluetooth) HP 5600 Series or Olivetti Job Jet 210 (license product of HP) Line Printer Bluetooth (HP 5940) Line Printer Bluetooth (e.g., HP Officejet H470) Line Printer Bluetooth (Canon Pixma MP600/MP610)
Description
Analog B/W Video Printer NTSC/PAL Connection Set UP-895MD Digital Black&White Video Printer (USB-Port)
Qty
-
CRU
N N N
FRU
1 1 1
806
Mitsubishi B/W Printer P95D
807 808 809
USB-Port Connection Set UP-D23MD Digital Color Printer (USB-Port)
N N N
1 1 1
810
Mitsubishi Color Printer CP30D
811
KTZ211503 (H46631L)
(Bluetooth Connection Set KTZ196002 is required) replaced by KTZ220510
812
KTZ220510 (H48651WE)
Line Printer Bluetooth (USB-Port) without cartridge (Bluetooth Connection Set KTZ196002 is required) can be replaced by Canon printer KTZ300182 Line Printer Bluetooth incl. Ink, Bluetooth Adapters + power cable US and EU Line Printer Bluetooth incl. Ink, Bluetooth Adapters + power cable US and EU (replaces HP printer KTZ220510) Line Printer Bluetooth incl. Ink, Bluetooth Adapters + power cable US and EU (replaces Canon MP600/MP610)
813
814
KTZ300182 (H48661MT)
815
Line Printer Bluetooth (Canon Pixma MP550) KTZ196002 (H46631M) KTZ280057 (H48661MW) KTZ195492 KTZ280123
816
Bluetooth Connection Set
Bluetooth Connection Set (HP 5600 Series and Olivetti Job Jet 210 only) Line printer power cable set for US, EU and ROW (rest of world) Connection Set for VCR without remote control Driver-DVD for easy installation Bluetooth Canon Pixma (808)
817 818 819
Line Printer Destination Set PRR50 Connection Set Canon Driver Kit
N N N
1 1 1
BT Version: The Digital B/W Video Printer UP-D897 is only applicable at systems with BT08 software (SW 5.4.x).
BT-Version:
9-28
9-12-3
Optional Equipment
821
820
825 824 822 823
Figure 9-13 Optional Peripherals and Accessories NOTE: The illustrations may not correspond to the actual product! Table 9-17
Item
820
Optional Peripherals and Accessories contd

Part Number
KTZ220525
Part Name
19 LCD Secondary Monitor
Description
19 LCD Secondary Patient Monitor without Wall Mount kit and Isolation Transformer Isolation Transformer kit for Secondary Monitor incl. power cord set for US, EU and ROW (rest of world), monitor power cable, fuses, documentation, etc. Isolation Transformer without cables, etc. Fuses for Isolation Transformer (2AT, 4AT; 10 pcs. each = 20) Wall Mount kit for 19 LCD Secondary Monitor 19 LCD Secondary Patient Monitor incl. Wall Mount kit, Isolation Transformer, cables, etc.
Qty
-
CRU
Y
FRU
2
821
Isolation Transformer kit
H48671WN
822 823
Isolation Transformer Fuses for Isolation Transformer Wall Mount kit for 19 LCD Secondary Monitor 19 LCD Secondary Monitor kit
KTZ220714 KTZ196333
Y Y
1 1
824
KTZ220526
825
H48671EM
9-29
9-12-3
Optional Equipment (contd)
830
831
834
835
832
833 Figure 9-14 Optional Peripherals and Accessories contd NOTE: The illustrations may not correspond to the actual product! Table 9-18
Item
830
Optional Peripherals and Accessories contd

Part Number
KTZ195446 (H46681D) KTZ154644 (H46681H) 2245794 (H48651HF) KTZ195858 (H46681S) KTZ154680
Part Name
Foot switch (MFT7)
Description
Foot switch consists of ECG-preamplifier and patient connection cable Global Modem analog (Common Part with L9 and V7) use modem cable: KTZ212114 + KTZ212032 Converter from USB to RS-232 Serial Port (Connection Module - Report data) contains blue, dark-gray, bright-gray and black 4x 2cl bottles incl. brush Probe holder used for Real-time 4D endocavity probes (RIC) during disinfection process DVD+RW Disk (re-writable)
Qty
-
CRU
Y
FRU
1
831
ECG-preamplifier (MAN 6)
832
Global Modem (Analog)
833
USB-RS232 Connection kit PRY
834
Touch-up Paint Set (gray-blue)
835
RIC-Holder
KTZ225469 KTZ196204 (H48641D) KTZ207077 (H46681M)
DVD+RW Disk blank
MO Disk Media 1.3GB
MO-Disk Media (Standard)
9-30
Section 9-13 System Manuals

Table 9-19
Item
System Manuals
Part Name Part Number
KTI105991
Kretz #
KTI105991
Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08) Service Manual System User Manuals Basic User Manual, Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08), English Basic User Manual, Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08), German Basic User Manual, Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08), Spanish Basic User Manual, Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08), Portuguese Basic User Manual, Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08), Italian Basic User Manual, Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08), French Basic User Manual, Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08), Chinese Basic User Manual, Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08), Danish Basic User Manual, Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08), Dutch Basic User Manual, Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08), Finnish Basic User Manual, Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08), Greek Basic User Manual, Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08), Norwegian Basic User Manual, Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08), Polish Basic User Manual, Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08), Russian Basic User Manual, Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08), Swedish Basic User Manual, Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08), Turkish Basic User Manual, Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08), Czech Basic User Manual, Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08), Hungarian Basic User Manual, Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08), Latvian Basic User Manual, Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08), Lithuanian Basic User Manual, Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08), Estonian Basic User Manual, Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08), Slovakian Basic User Manual, Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08), Bulgarian Basic User Manual, Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08), Romanian Basic User Manual, Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08), Serbian Basic User Manual, Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08), Croatian Basic User Manual, Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08), Indonesian Basic User Manual, Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08), Korean
H48651FR H48651FS H48651FT H48651FW H48651FY H48651FZ H48651G H48651HX H48651HY H48651HZ H48651J H48651JP H48651JA H48651JB H48651JC H48651KA H48661HW H48661HY H48661HZ H48661J H48661JA H48661JB H48661LM H48661JC H48671LM H48671LP H48681TD H48661ED
KTI105974 KTI105978 KTI105979 KTI105980 KTI105981 KTI105982 KTI105983 KTI106011 KTI106012 KTI106013 KTI106014 KTI106015 KTI106016 KTI106017 KTI106018 KTI106021 KTI106079 KTI106080 KTI106081 KTI106082 KTI106083 KTI106084 KTD100703 KTI106085 KTD101013 KTD101014 KTI106117
9-31

Item
System Manuals
Part Name Part Number
H48671EA H48651FE
Kretz #
KTD100706 KTI106019
Basic User Manual, Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08), Portuguese (European) Advanced Reference Manual Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08), English
9-32
Section 9-13 - System Manuals
Section 9-14 Probes

9-14-1 2D-Probes
901
902
903
904
905
Figure 9-15 2D curved array Transducers NOTE: The illustrations may not correspond to the actual product! Table 9-20
Item
901
2D curved array Transducers

Description
electronic broadband curved array transducer, frequency range of 2-7 MHz Applications: Abdominal, Obstetrics, Gynecology, Urology, Pediatrics electronic broadband curved array transducer, frequency range of 2-5 MHz Applications: Abdominal, Obstetrics, Gynecology, Pediatrics electronic broadband curved array transducer, frequency range of 2-5 MHz Applications: Abdominal, Obstetrics, Gynecology electronic endocavity broadband curved array transducer with a frequency range of 5-9 MHz and a field-of-view of max. 150 Applications: Obstetrics, Gynecology, Urology electronic endocavity broadband curved array transducer with a frequency range of 5-9 MHz and a field-of-view of max. 150 Applications: Obstetrics, Gynecology, Urology
Part Name
AB2-7
Part Number
KTZ195757 (H46701T) KTZ195784 (H46701U) KTZ156952 (H46701AA) KTZ195386 (H46701F) 5118195 (H40422LL)
Qty
-
CRU
Y
FRU
1
902
AC2-5
903
4C-A
904
IC5-9
905
IC5-9H
9-33
9-14-1
2D-Probes (contd)
907
908
909
910
911
Figure 9-16 2D linear- and phased array Transducers NOTE: The illustrations may not correspond to the actual product! Table 9-21
Item
907
2D linear- and phased array Transducers

Description
electronic broadband linear array transducer, frequency range of 4-10 MHz, electronically steerable Applications: Small Parts, Peripheral Vascular, Pediatrics, Orthopedics electronic broadband linear array transducer, frequency range of 6-12 MHz, electronically steerable Applications: Small Parts, Peripheral Vascular, Pediatrics, Orthopedics electronic broadband linear array transducer, frequency range of 10-16 MHz, electronically steerable Applications: Small Parts, Peripheral Vascular, Pediatrics, Orthopedics electronic broadband phased array transducer, frequency range of 2-5 MHz Applications: Abdominal, Cardiology, Transcranial electronic broadband phased array transducer, frequency range of 6-8 MHz Applications: Cardiology, Pediatrics/Neonatology
Part Name
SP4-10
Part Number
KTZ195530 (H46701A) KTZ195362 (H46701B) KTZ195531 (H46701C) KTZ195773 (H46701V) KTZ195532 (H46701J)
Qty
-
CRU
Y
FRU
1
908
SP6-12
909
SP10-16
910
PA2-5P
911
PA6-8
9-34
Section 9-14 - Probes
9-14-2
Real-Time 4D Volume Probes
921 922
923 924 925 926
Figure 9-17 Real-Time 4D Volume Probes NOTE: The illustrations may not correspond to the actual product! Table 9-22
Item
921

Description
Real-time 4D broadband electronic curved-array transducer with a frequency range of 2-5MHz. Applications: Abdominal, Obstetrics, Gynecology, Interventional Radiology Real-time 4D broadband electronic curved-array transducer with a frequency range of 4-8MHz. Applications: Abdominal, OB, Gyn, Pediatrics, Interventional Radiology Real-time 4D broadband electronic curved-array transducer with a frequency range of 2-5MHz. Applications: Abdominal, Obstetrics, Gynecology, Interventional Radiology Voluson 730ProV: Software 5.1.0 or higher is required. Real-time 4D broadband electronic curved-array transducer with a frequency range of 4-8MHz. Applications: Abdominal, OB, Gyn, Pediatrics, Interventional Radiology Voluson 730ProV: Software 5.1.0 or higher is required. Real-time 4D broadband electronic linear array transducer with a frequency range of 5-12MHz and a scan width of 40 mm. Applications: Small Parts, Periph.Vascular, Pediatrics, Urology, Orthopedics Real-time 4D broadband electronic linear array transducer with a frequency range of 6-16 MHz and a scan width of 40 mm. Applications: Small Parts, Periph.Vascular, Pediatrics, Urology, Orthopedics
Part Name
RAB2-5
Part Number
KTZ156736 (H46701M) KTZ156767 (H46701N)
Qty
-
CRU
Y
FRU
1
922
RAB4-8P
923
RAB2-5L
KTZ156845 (H48621X)
924
RAB4-8L
KTZ156846 (H48621Z)
925
RSP5-12
KTZ195763 (H46701W)
926
RSP6-16
KTZ156965 (H46701AB)
9-35
9-14-2
Real-Time 4D Volume Probes (contd)
927 928 929 930
Figure 9-18 Real-Time 4D Volume Probes NOTE: The illustrations may not correspond to the actual product! Table 9-23
Item
927

Description
Real-time 4D endocavity broadband electronic curved array transducer with a frequency range of 5-9MHz. Applications: Gynecology/Fertility, Obstetrics, Urology Real-time 4D broadband electronic curved-array transducer with a frequency range of 4-8MHz. Applications: Abdominal, OB, Gyn, Pediatrics, Interventional Radiology Real-time 4D broadband electronic Wide Angle curved-array transducer with a frequency range of 5-9MHz. Applications: Gynecology/Fertility, Obstetrics, Urology Note: This probe is only applicable at systems with BT08 software (SW5.4.x) Real-time 4D neonatal broadband electronic curved array transducer with a frequency range of 5-9MHz. Applications: Obstetrics, Pediatrics/Neonatology, Cardiology, Small Parts
Part Name
RIC5-9
Part Number
KTZ195242 (H46701R) KTZ156920 (H48651DA)
Qty
CRU
Y
FRU
1
928
RIC5-9H
929
RIC5-9W
KTZ157094 (H48661HJ)
930
RNA5-9*
KTZ156936 (H48651DB)
NOTICE * NOT applicable on the Voluson 730Pro V.

!! NOTICE:
BT Version: The probe RIC5-9W is only applicable at systems with BT08 software (SW 5.4.x).
BT-Version:
9-36
Section 9-14 - Probes
9-14-3
CW-Pencil Probes
931 Figure 9-19 CW- Pencil Probes NOTE: The illustrations may not correspond to the actual product! Table 9-24
Item
931
932
CW- Pencil Probes

Description
single element Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler pencil probe with a nominal operating frequency of 4.0 MHz (no B-image) Applications: Cardiology, Pediatrics single element Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler pencil probe with a nominal operating frequency of 2.0 MHz (no B-image) Applications: Cardiology (suprasternal)
Part Name
PCW4.0
Part Number
KTZ195540 (H46701L) KTZ195538 (H46701K)
Qty
CRU
FRU
1
932
SCW2.0
9-37
Section 9-15 Biopsy Needle Guides
950
951
953 952
956 954 955
957
959 958
961 960
962
964 965
963
Figure 9-20 Biopsy Needle Guides 9-38 Section 9-15 - Biopsy Needle Guides
Table 9-25
Item
950
Biopsy Needle Guides

Description
disposable Biopsy needle guide for probe IC5-9H needle diameter: < 1.65 mm reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe IC5-9H needle diameter: < 1.65 mm reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe IC5-9 needle diameter: < 1.8 mm reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe RIC5-9 / RIC5-9H needle diameter: < 1.8 mm reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe SP6-12 needle diameter: < 1 mm, 1.4 mm, 2.2 mm reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe RAB2-5 / RAB4-8P needle diameter: < 1 mm, 1.4 mm, 2.2 mm reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe RSP5-12 / RSP6-16 needle diameter: < 1 mm, 1.4 mm, 2.2 mm (can be replaced by PEC75) reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe AB2-7 needle diameter: < 1 mm, 1.4 mm, 2.2 mm reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe RAB2-5L / RAB4-8L needle diameter: < 1 mm, 1.4 mm, 2.2 mm Non Sterile Single Angle Bracket needle guide for probe RAB2-5-L/RAB48-L needle diameter: > 0.6 mm - < 2.1 mm reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe RSP5-12 / RSP6-16 needle diameter: < 1 mm, 1.4 mm, 2.2 mm (can replace PEC68) Non Sterile Single Angle Bracket needle guide for probe RSP5-12 / RSP616 needle diameter: > 0.6 mm - < 2.1 mm reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe RNA5-9 needle diameter: < 1 mm, 1.4 mm, 2.2 mm Non Sterile Single Angle Bracket needle guide for probe RNA5-9 needle diameter: > 0.6 mm - < 2.1 mm 3.5C Biopsy Starter Kit for probe AC2-5 needle diameter: > 0.6 mm - < 2.1 mm Non Sterile Multi Angle Bracket needle guide starter kit for probe 4C-A needle diameter: > 0.6 mm - < 2.1 mm
Part Name
***** (disposable) ***** (reusable) PEC42
Part Number
E8385MJ
Qty
-
CRU
N
FRU
N
951
H40412LN
952
H46721F
953
PEC63
H46721R
954
PEC64
H46721B
955
PEC65
H46721M
956
PEC68
H46721P
957
PEC71
H46721D
958
PEC74 RAB Singleangle bracket
H48621Y
959
H46701AE
960
PEC75
H46721W
961
RSP Singleangle bracket PEC76 RNA Singleangle bracket 3.5C Biopsy Kit 4C Multiangle bracket
H46701AD
--
962
H48651DG
963
H46701AF
964
E8385MG
965
E8385NA
9-39
9-40
Section 9-15 - Biopsy Needle Guides
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance

10-1-1 Periodic Maintenance Inspections
It has been determined by engineering that your Voluson 730Pro/ProV system does not have any high wear components that fail with use, therefore no Periodic Maintenance Inspections are mandatory. Some Customers Quality Assurance Programs may require additional tasks and or inspections to be performed at periods of frequency different from those listed in this manual.
10-1-2
Purpose of Chapter 10
This chapter describes Care & Maintenance on the Voluson 730Pro/ProV system and its peripherals. These procedures are intended to maintain the quality of the systems performance. Read this chapter completely and familiarize yourself with the procedures before performing a task. Table 10-1
Section
10-1 10-2 10-3 10-4 10-5 10-6 10-7 10-8 10-9 10-10
Overview Why do Maintenance Maintenance Task Schedule Tools Required System Maintenance Using a Phantom Electrical Safety Tests When There's Too Much Leakage Current... Ultrasound Equipment Quality Check (EQC) Electrical Safety Test Form
10-1 10-2 10-2 10-5 10-6 10-12 10-12 10-22 10-23 10-24
CAUTION Practice good ESD prevention. Wear an antistatic strap when handling electronic parts and
even when disconnecting/connecting cables.

!! CAUTION:
DANGER
!! DANGER:
THERE ARE SEVERAL PLACES ON THE BACKPLANE, THE AC DISTRIBUTION, AND DC DISTRIBUTION THAT ARE DANGEROUS. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG AND SWITCH OFF THE MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER (F1) BEFORE YOU REMOVE ANY PARTS. BE CAUTIOUS WHENEVER POWER IS STILL ON AND COVERS ARE REMOVED.
CAUTION Do not pull out or insert circuit boards while power is ON.
!! CAUTION:
CAUTION Do not operate this unit unless all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. System
performance and cooling require this.

!! CAUTION:
Chapter 10 - Care & Maintenance
10-1
Section 10-2 Why do Maintenance

10-2-1 Keeping Records
It is good business practice that ultrasound facilities maintain records of quality checks and corrective maintenance. The Ultrasound Equipment Quality Check form provides the customer with documentation that the ultrasound scanner is maintained on a periodic basis. A copy of the Ultrasound Equipment Quality Check (EQC) form (see: page 10-23) should be kept in the same room or near the scanner.
10-2-2
Quality Assurance
In order to gain accreditation from organizations such as the American College of Radiology (USA), it is the customers responsibility to have a quality assurance program in place for each scanner. The program must be directed by a medical physicists, the supervising radiologist/physician or appropriate designer. Routine quality control testing must occur regularly. The same tests are performed during each period so that changes can be monitored over time and effective corrective action can be taken. Testing results, corrective action and the effects of corrective action must be documented and maintained on the site. Your GE service representative can help you with establishing, performing and maintaining records for a quality assurance program. Please contact us for coverage information and/or price for service.
Section 10-3 Maintenance Task Schedule

10-3-1 How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed?
The Customer Care Schedule (see: page 10-3) specifies how often your Voluson 730Pro/ProV should be serviced and outlines items requiring special attention. NOTE: It is the customers responsibility to ensure the Voluson 730Pro/ProV care & maintenance is performed as scheduled in order to retain its high level of safety, dependability and performance. Your GE Service Representative has an in-depth knowlegde of your Voluson 730Pro/ProV ultrasound scanning system and can best provide competent, efficient service. Please contact us for coverage information and/or price for service. The service procedures and recommended intervals shown in the Care & Maintenance Task Schedule assumes that you use your Voluson 730Pro/ProV for an average patient load (10-12 per day) and not use it as a primary mobile unit which is transported between diagnostic facilities. NOTE: If conditions exist which exceed typical usage and patient load, then it is recommended to increase the maintenance frequencies. Abbreviations used in the Periodic Maintenance Schedule Table 10-2: 10-2 D = Daily W = Weekly M = Monthly A = Annually Section 10-2 - Why do Maintenance
10-3-1
How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed? (contd)

Table 10-2 Periodic Maintenance Schedule
Item
Air Filter Grid
Service at Indicated Time

Clean the air filter grid with vacuum cleaner from outside (left side of the system front view). Remove back panel and board chassis and clean the housing from inside. (vacuum cleaner and soft brush) Inspect AC Mains Cable
Notes
more frequently depending on your environment
Air Filter Grid
more frequently depending on your environment Mobile Unit Check weekly
AC Mains Cable
Remove the Back Panel and check if all cables are well seated and if there is no Cables and Connectors mechanical damage visible; Check if they are fixed and well seated at the correct position. Clean alphanumerical keyboard, Functional keys, Digital potentiometers, TGC-Shift potentiometers. (vacuum cleaner, lukewarm soap water on a soft, damp cloth) Clean Top surface, Monitor and Probe holder with a fluid detergent in warm water on a soft, damp cloth. Clean and inspect the mechanical function of wheels, casters, brakes and swivel locks as well as side door, foot rest, front and rear handle, and monitor holder. Remove Dust and Coupling gel. Check Turn mechanism Check proper operation (Cursor movement X, Y direction) Remove trackball ring; open the trackball housing and take out the trackball (refer to Section 7-7-3 on page 7-14). Clean the trackball (and X, Y axes) with soft tissue and screwdriver shaft.
also after corrective maintenance
User Interface
Be careful not to get the cloth too wet so that moisture does not enter the loudspeakers, TGC-Slider, or other keys! Be careful not to get the cloth too wet so that moisture does not enter the entire system.
Monitor and Probe holder
Mechanical parts
Mobile Unit Check Daily
Control Panel movement Trackball Check
Mobile Unit Check Daily If failure occurs go to trackball cleaning.
Trackball Cleaning
Disk Drives (Sonoview Data Backup)
Test Image filing (Sonoview) Import and Export data capability (MO-, CD-RW Drive)
* save the image filing data monthly or weekly on CD depending on the number of examinations
Safe Probe Operation
Clean probes and probe cables and check acoustic lens housing (cracks) and probe cables. In case of mechanical damage, dont use them! Danger: Safety risk for operator and patient. To detect air bubbles in filling liquid, shake the probe carefully and check abnormal noise. Remove dust/dirt of all probe connectors. Clean with vacuum cleaner if dust is visible.
* or before each use
Probe Air bubbles
Probe connectors
10-3
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 Table 10-2 Periodic Maintenance Schedule

Item
Console Leakage Current Checks
Service at Indicated Time
Notes
Also after corrective maintenance or as required by your facilities QA program. Also after corrective maintenance or as required by your facilities QA program. Also after corrective maintenance or as required by your facilities QA program. Also after corrective maintenance or as required by your facilities QA program. Also after corrective maintenance or as required by your facilities QA program.
Peripheral Leakage Current Checks
Surface Probe Leakage Current Checks Endocavity Probe Leakage Current Checks Measurement Accuracy Checks Check axial and lateral resolution (see Basic User Manual Technical specifications). Check Gain and TGC changes, vary the focus and check reaction on screen. NOTE! Probe/Phantom Checks The use of a Phantom is not required during Preventive Maintenance. Customer may use it as part of their Quality Assurance Program tests. NOTE! The use of a Phantom is not required Functional Checks during Preventive Maintenance. Customer of all probes Section 10may use it as part of their Quality Assurance 5-2 on page 10-7 Program tests.
Also after corrective maintenance or as required by your facilities QA program.
Also after corrective maintenance or as required by your facilities QA program.
10-4
Section 10-3 - Maintenance Task Schedule
Section 10-4 Tools Required

10-4-1 Special Tools, Supplies and Equipment used for Maintenance
Table 10-3 Overview of Requirements for Care & Maintenance
Tool
Digital Volt Meter (DVM) 46194427P231 46194427P279 Anti Static Kit 46194427P369 46194427P373 46194427P370 Anti Static Vacuum Cleaner 46194427P278 46194427P279
Part Number
Comments
minimum 5% accuracy, 3.5 digit and 200 Ohm range required Kit includes antistatic mat, wrist strap and cables for 200 to 240 V system 3M #2204 Large adjustable wrist strap 3M #2214 Small adjustable wrist strap 3M #3051 conductive ground cord 120V 230V RMI Grayscale Target Model 403GS
QIQ Phantom
E8370RB
NOTE! The use of a Phantom is not required during Preventive Maintenance. Customer may use it as part of their Quality Assurance Program tests. (minimum quad speed) blank 4,7GB DVD+RW disc see printer user manual for requirements see printer user manual for requirements
CD-RW Media DVD+RW Disc Media blank B/W Printer Cleaning Sheet Color Printer Cleaning Sheet Disposable Gloves
10-5
Section 10-5 System Maintenance

10-5-1 Preliminary Checks
The preliminary checks take about 15 minutes to perform. Refer to the system user documentation whenever necessary.
Table 10-4
Step
1 2
System Checks
Item Description
Ask the customer if they have any problems or questions about the equipment. Fill in the top of the Ultrasound Inspection Certificate. Note all probes and system options. Turn the system power on and verify that all fans and peripherals turn on. Watch the displays during power up to verify that no warning or error messages are displayed. Verify that the system properly recognizes all probes. Verify proper display on the monitor. Full Backup all customer presets on Hard disk and/or DVD (see: Section 4-5-3 "Save Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)" on page 4-36).
Ask & Listen Paperwork
3 4 5 6
Power up Probes Displays Presets
10-6
Section 10-5 - System Maintenance
10-5-2
Functional Checks
The functional checks take about 60 minutes to perform. Refer to the Voluson 730Pro/ProV Basic User Manual whenever necessary.
10-5-2-1
System Checks Table 10-5

Step
1
System Functional Checks

Item
B Mode
Description
Verify basic B Mode (2D) operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of operation. Verify basic M Mode operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of operation. Verify basic CFM Mode (Color Flow Mode) operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of operation. Verify basic PD Mode (Power Doppler Mode) operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of operation. Verify basic Doppler Mode operation (PW and CW if available). Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of operation. Verify basic 3D Mode operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of operation. Verify the basic operation of all optional modes Check the basic system controls that affect each options operation. Perform the Keyboard Test Procedure to verify that all keyboard controls are OK. Verify basic Monitor display functions. Scan a gray scale phantom and use the measurement controls to verify distance and area calculation accuracy. Refer to the Basic User Manual, Chapter 13, for measurement accuracy specifications.
M Mode
C Mode
PD Mode
Doppler Modes
3D Mode *Applicable Software Options Keyboard Test Monitor
7 8 9
10
Measurements
NOTE:
* Some software may be considered standard depending upon system model configuration.
10-7
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 10-5-2-2 Peripheral/Option Checks
If any peripherals or options are not part of the system configuration, the check can be omitted. Refer to Table 3-8, Approved Peripherals, on page 3-64 for a list of approved peripherals. Table 10-6
Step
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Approved Peripheral/Hardware Option Functional Checks

Item
VCR
Description
Verify record/playback capabilities of the VCR. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
DVD Recorder Verify record capabilities of the DVD recorder. Clean heads and covers if necessary. B/W Printer Color Printer Verify hardcopy output of the B/W video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary. Verify hardcopy output of the Color video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
Line Printer / Verify hardcopy output of the Line or Bluetooth printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary. Bluetooth Printer DICOM Footswitch DVD and/or MO-Drive Modem ECG Verify that DICOM is functioning properly. Send an image to a DICOM device. Verify that the footswitch is functioning as programed. Clean as necessary. Verify that the DVD-drive and/or optional MO-drive reads/writes properly (export/recall images in Sonoview). Verify modem remote connection. Verify basic operation with customer.
10-5-2-3
Mains Cable Inspection Table 10-7

Step
1 2 3 4
Mains Cable Inspection

Item Description
Disconnect the mains cable from the wall and system. Inspect it and its connectors for damage of any kind. Verify that the LINE, NEUTRAL and GROUND wires are properly attached to the terminals, and that no strands may cause a short circuit. Inlet connector retainer is functional.
Unplug Cord Inspect Verify Verify
10-5-2-4
Optional Diagnostic Checks Optionally you can access the diagnostic software as described in Chapters 5 or 7. View the error logs and run desired diagnostics.
10-8
10-5-3
Physical Inspection
Table 10-8
Step
1 2 3
Physical Checks
Item
Labeling
Description
Verify that all system labeling is present and in readable condition. Inspect the console for dents, scratches or cracks. Inspect keyboard and control panel. Note any damaged or missing items. (Replace faulty components as required.) Verify proper operation of Control Panel backlighting and TGC sliders. Verify ease of control panel (Operator I/O Panel) movement in acceptable direction. Ensure that it latches in position as required. Check all wheels and casters for wear and verify operation of foot brake, to stop the unit from moving, and release mechanism. Check all wheel locks and swivel locks for proper operation.
Scratches & Dents Control Panel and Keyboard Control Panel Movement Wheels & Brakes
Cables & Connectors Check all internal cable harnesses and connectors for wear and secure connector seating. Pay special attention to footswitch assembly and probe strain or bend reliefs. Shielding & Covers External I/O Op Panel Lights Check to ensure that all EMI shielding, internal covers, air flow panels and screws are in place. Missing covers and hardware could cause EMI/RFI problems while scanning. Check all connectors for damage and verify that the labeling is good. Check proper operation of all operator panel key illuminations (flash once during system start-up).
7 8 9 10
External Microphone Check for proper operation of external microphones by recording an audio test if available.
NOTICE There is no Microphone built in and released for Voluson 730Pro/ProV.

!! NOTICE:
10-5-4
10-5-4-1
Cleaning
General Cleaning Frequent and diligent cleaning of the Voluson 730Pro ultrasound system reduces the risk of spreading infection from person to person, and also helps to maintain a clean work environment. Table 10-9
Step
1
General Cleaning
Item Description
Use a fluid detergent in warm water on a soft, damp cloth to carefully wipe the entire system. Be careful not to get the cloth too wet so that moisture does not enter the console. Caution: DO NOT allow any liquid to drip or seep into the system. Clean Top surface and Monitor and with a fluid detergent in warm water on a soft, damp cloth. Caution: DO NOT spray any liquid directly onto the systems Covers, Monitor, keyboard, etc.
Console
Monitor
10-9
10-5-5
10-5-5-1
Probe Maintenance
Probe Related Checks Table 10-10 Probe Related Checks
Step
1 2
Item
Probes Probe Holder
Description
Thoroughly check the system probe connectors and remove dust from inside the connector sockets if necessary. Visually check for bent, damaged or missing pins. Clean probe holders (they may need to be soaked to remove excess gel).
10-5-5-2
Basic Probe Care The Basic User Manual and/or care card provides a complete description of probe care, maintenance, cleaning and disinfection. Ensure that you are completely familiar with the proper care of GE probes. Ultrasound probes can be easily damaged by improper handling. Review the Basic User Manual of Voluson 730Pro/ProV for more details. Failure to follow these precautions can result in serious injury and equipment damage. Failure to properly handle or maintain a probe may also void its warranty.
OK OK OK
Figure 10-1 Care Card Any evidence of wear indicates the probe cannot be used. Do a visual check of the probe pins and system sockets before plugging in a probe. 10-5-5-3 Basic Probe Cleaning and/or Disinfection Refer to the Basic User Manual of Voluson 730Pro/ProV for details on cleaning and disinfection.
WARNING WARNING
To help protect yourself from blood borne diseases, wear approved disposable gloves. These are made of nitrile derived from vegetable starch to prevent allergic latex reactions.
warranty. DO NOT soak or wipe the lens with any product not listed in the Voluson 730Pro/ProV Basic User Manual and/or care card. Doing so could result in irreparable damage to the probe and/or Voluson 730Pro/ProV system.
CAUTION Failure to follow the prescribed cleaning or disinfection procedures will void the probes
CAUTION Follow the Care Card instructions supplied with each probe (inside the transducer boxes)
for disinfectants and gels that are compatible with the surface material of the probes.
!! CAUTION:
NOTICE For the latest list of compatible cleaning solutions and disinfectants refer to:
http://www.gehealthcare.com/usen/ultrasound/products/probe_care.html
CAUTION Disinfect a defective probe before you return it. Be sure to tag the probe as being disinfected.
10-10

CAUTION
CAUTION:
Basic Probe Cleaning and/or Disinfection (contd)
Please be aware of the sensitive probe head. TAKE EXTREME CARE!
NEVER place or store a probe on its scan head!
When disinfecting a probe, ensure that there is sufficient space between the probe and the container bottom!
10-5-5-4
Disinfection by means of the RIC-Holder Especially for Real-time 4D endocavity probes (RIC), it is necessary to take extreme care when transporting the system with the probe attached, or during the disinfection process. Inadequate handling may lead to dead elements, shocked head mechanics, etc. The RIC-Holder (especially developed for RIC Real-time 4D endocavity probes) guarantees that the sensitive probe head does not hit the bottom of the container during the disinfection procedure.
NOTE:
Instructions are supplied with each RIC-Holder (KTZ225469).

RIC-Holder Endocavity soaking cup kit
OK
OK
RIC-Holder
RIC-Holder
10-11
Section 10-6 Using a Phantom

The use of a Phantom is not required during Preventive Maintenance. Customer may use it as part of their Quality Assurance Program tests.
Section 10-7 Electrical Safety Tests

10-7-1 Safety Test Overview
The electrical safety tests in this section are based on IEC60601 standartd including national deviatons for Health Care Facilities and IEC 62353 Medical electrical equipment Recurrent test and test after repair of medical electrical equipment. These standards provide guidance on evaluating electrical safety of medical devices which are placed into service and are intended for use in planned maintenance (PM) or testing following service or repair activities. They differ somewhat from the standards that are used for design verification and manufacturing tests (e.g., IEC 60601-1 including national deviations) which require a controlled test environment and can place unnecessary stress on the system. Prior to initiating any electrical test, the system must be visually inspected. Perform the following visual checks: Check for missing or loose enclosure covers that could allow access to internal live parts. Examine the mains cord, mains plug and appliance inlet for damaged insulation and adequacy of strain relief and cable clamps.
Locate and examine all associated transducers. Inspect the cables and strain relief at each end. Inspect the transducer enclosure and lens for cracks, holes and similar defects.
CAUTION Compare all safety-test results with safety-test results of previously performed safety tests (e.g.
last year etc). In case of unexplainable abrupt changes of safety-test results consult experienced authorized service personnel or GE for further analysis.
WARNING WARNING
Equipment users must ensure that safety inspections are performed whenever damage is suspected and at least every 12 months in accordance with local authorities and facility procedures. DO NOT use the system or individual probes which fail any portion of the safety test. TO MINIMIZE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ONLY TRAINED PERSONS ARE ALLOWED TO PERFORM THE ELECTRICAL SAFETY INSPECTIONS AND TESTS.
equipment. Remove all interconnecting cables and wires. The unit under test must not be contacted by users or patients while performing these tests.
WARNING WARNING
CAUTION To avoid electrical shock, the unit under test must not be connected to other electrical
!! CAUTION:
CAUTION Possible risk of infection. Do not handle soiled or contaminated probes and other components
!! CAUTION:
that have been in patient contact. Follow appropriate cleaning and disinfecting procedures before handling the equipment.
CAUTION For all instructions in Section 10-7:
In case of using an UPS (uninterruptable power supply) the terms outlet, wall outlet, AC wall outlet or power outlet refer to the AC power outlet of the UPS. In case of further available AC (or DC) power outlets at the same used UPS these must remain unused; i.e. not connected to any other devices.
10-12
Section 10-6 - Using a Phantom
10-7-2
NOTE:
Leakage Current Limits

The following acceptance limits and test conditions are summarized from IEC60601 including national deviations and IEC 62353 and in some cases are lower than that specified by the standards. In accordance with these standards, fault conditions like Reverse Polarity of the supply mains and Open Neutral are no longer required for field evaluation of leakage current. Because the main source of leakage current is the mains supply, there are different acceptance limits depending on the configuration of the mains (100-120VAC or 230-240VAC). Table 10-11 Leakage Current Limits for Operation on 100-120 Volt Mains (US/Canada/Japan)
Leakage Current Test
Chassis/Enclosure Leakage Type BF Applied Parts
System Power
On and Off On (transmit)
Grounding/PE Conductor Limit mA

Open Closed Open Closed Open Closed 0.3 0.1 0.5 0.01 0.05 0.05
Type CF Applied Parts Type CF Applied Parts (sink leakage)
On (transmit) On and Off
Table 10-12 Leakage Current Limits for System Operation on 230-240 Volt Mains
Leakage Current Test
Chassis/Enclosure Leakage Type BF Applied Parts Type CF Applied Parts Type CF Applied Parts (sink leakage)
System Power
On On (transmit) On (transmit) On and Off
Grounding/PE Conductor Limit mA

Open and Closed Open Open Closed 0.5 0.5 0.05 0.05
Table 10-13 ISO (on Dale 600) and Mains Applied (on Dale 601) Limits*
Probe Type
BF CF
Measurement
5 mA 0.05 mA
* ISO (on Dale 600) and Mains Applied (on Dale 601) refer to the sink leakage test where mains (supply) voltage is applied to the part to determine the amount of current that will pass (or sink) to ground if a patient contacted mains voltage. Table 10-14 Equipment Type and Test Definitions
Applied Parts (AP) Parts or accessories that contact the patient to perform their function. For ultrasound equipment, this includes transducers and ECG leads. Body Floating or non-conductive ultrasound probes which are marked with the 'man in box' BF symbol. This includes all transducers. Cardiac Floating or non-conductive intraoperative probes for direct cardiac contact and isolated ECG connections so marked with the 'heart in box' CF symbol. The current resulting from the application of mains voltage to the applied part. This test is required test for Type CF applied parts.
Type BF
Type CF
Sink Leakage
10-13
10-7-3
Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Canada

Test all outlets in the area for proper grounding and wiring arrangement by plugging in the neon outlet tester and noting the combination of lights that are illuminated. Any problems found should be reported to the hospital immediately and the receptacle should not be used.
Figure 10-2 Typical Outlet Tester NOTE: No outlet tester can detect the condition where the Neutral (grounded supply) conductor and the Grounding (protective earth) conductor are reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this should be suspected as a possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected.
10-14
Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests
10-7-4
Grounding Continuity
The patient or operator MUST NOT come into contact with the equipment during this test
CAUTION Electric Shock Hazard.

!! CAUTION:
Measure the resistance from the third pin of the attachment plug to the exposed metal parts of the case. The ground wire resistance should be less than 0.2 ohm. Reference the procedure in the IEC 60601-1-1.
ACCESSIBLE METAL PARTS

Potential equilibrium connector
GROUND PIN
OHMMETER Figure 10-3 Ground Continuity Test

CAUTION Lacquer is an isolation barrier! Resistor may be high-impedance!
Measure only on blank parts, stated in Figure 10-3, above.

!! CAUTION:
10-7-4-1
Meter Procedure Follow these steps to test the Ground wire resistance. 1.) Turn the Voluson 730Pro/ProV unit OFF. 2.) Plug the unit into the meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet. 3.) Plug the black chassis cable into the meter's CHASSIS connector and attach the black chassis cable clamp to an exposed metal part of the Voluson 730Pro/ProV unit. 4.) Set the meters FUNCTION switch to the RESISTANCE position. 5.) Set the meter's POLARITY switch to the OFF (center) position. 6.) Measure and record the Ground wire resistance.
10-15
10-7-5
DANGER
!! DANGER:
Chassis Leakage Current Test Electric Shock Hazard.

When the meter's ground switch is OPEN, DO NOT touch the unit!
CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity and the status of Neutral when the unit
!! CAUTION:
is powered ON. Be sure to turn the unit power OFF before switching them using the POLARITY switch and/or the NEUTRAL switch. Otherwise, the unit may be damaged. 10-7-5-1 Definition This test measures the current that would flow through a grounded person who touches the accessible conductive parts of the equipment during normal and fault conditions. The test verifies the isolation of the power line from the chassis. The meter is connected to parts of the equipment, easily contacted by the user or patient. Measurements should be made under the test conditions specified in: Table 10-11 on page 10-13, or Table 10-12 on page 10-13, as applicable.
Record the highest reading. 10-7-5-2 Generic Procedure The test verifies the isolation of the power line from the chassis. The testing meter is connected from accessible metal parts of the case to ground. Measurements should be made under the test conditions specified in: Table 10-11 on page 10-13, or Table 10-12 on page 10-13, as applicable.
Record the highest reading of current. When using the Microguard or a similar test instrument, its power plug may be inserted into the wall outlet and the equipment under test is plugged into the receptacle on the panel of the meter. This places the meter in the grounding conductor and the current flowing from the case to ground will be indicated in any of the current ranges. The maximum allowable limit for chassis source leakage is shown in: Table 10-11 on page 10-13, or Table 10-12 on page 10-13, as Chassis/Enclosure Leakage.
10-16
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 10-7-5-3 Data Sheet for Enclosure/Chassis Leakage Current
Table 10-15 shows a typical format for recording the enclosure/chassis leakage current. Measurements should be recorded from multiple locations for each set of test conditions. The actual location of the test probe may vary by system. Record all data in the Electrical safety tests log. Table 10-15 Typical Data Format for Recording Chassis Source Leakage
Unit Under Test: ________________________ Test Conditions Potential equilibrium connector Date of Test: _____________________ Measurement/Test Point Location Monitor housing Probe connector
System Power
off off on on
Grounding/PE
closed open closed open
10-17
10-7-6
Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage-Lead to Ground

Be sure to turn the unit power OFF before switching the polarity using the POLARITY switch. Otherwise, the unit may be damaged.
CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity when the unit is powered ON.
!! CAUTION:
10-7-6-1
Definition This test measures the current which would flow to ground from any of the isolated ECG leads. The meter simulates a patient who is connected to the monitoring equipment and is grounded by touching some other grounded surface. Measurements should be made under the test conditions specified in: Table 10-11 on page 10-13, or: Table 10-12 on page 10-13, as applicable.
For each combination the operating controls, such as the lead switch, should be operated to find the worst case condition. 10-7-6-2 Generic Procedure Measurements should be made under the test conditions specified in: Table 10-11 on page 10-13, or: Table 10-12 on page 10-13, as applicable.
For each combination the operating controls, such as the lead switch, should be operated to find the worst case condition.
Appliance power switch (use both "off" and "on" positions) Polarity reversing switch (use both positions) Appliance H (Black) H POWER OUTLET N N (White) G G (Green) Building ground Grounding contact switch (use in both "open" and "closed" positions) Current meter H = Hot N = Neutral (grounded) G = Grounding conductor Insulating surface Internal circuitry Between each patient lead and ground Patient lead selector switch (if any) (activated as required) Patient connected leads
The connection is at service entrance or on the supply side of a separately derived system
Figure 10-4 Test Circuit for Measuring Patient Lead Leakage
10-18
10-7-7
Isolated Patient Lead (Source) LeakageLead to Lead

When using the Dale 600, switch the meter's function selector to the LEAD-LEAD position. Select and test each of the ECG lead positions (except ALL) on the LEAD selector, testing each to the power and ground condition combinations found in: Table 10-11 on page 10-13, or: Table 10-12 on page 10-13, as applicable.
Record the highest leakage current measured. 10-7-7-1 Lead to Lead Leakage Test Record Table 10-16 shows a typical format for recording the patient lead to lead leakage current. Measurements should be recorded from each lead combination under each set of test conditions specified in: Table 10-11 on page 10-13, or: Table 10-12 on page 10-13, as applicable.
Record all data on the EQC inspection certificate. Table 10-16 Typical Data Format for Recording Patient Lead to Lead Leakage
Unit Under Test: ________________________ Test Conditions System Power
Mains on RF on
Date of Test: _____________________
Patient Lead or Combination Measured RA-LA LA-LL LL-RA
Grounding/PE
open open
NOTE:
Values in italics font are given as examples only.
10-19
10-7-8
Isolated Patient Lead (Sink) Leakage-Isolation Test

hazard, the system being tested must not be touched by patients, users or anyone while the ISO TEST switch is depressed. 1.) When using the Dale 600, switch the meters function selector to the LEAD-ISO. 2.) Select the ALL position on the lead selector since the test is performed with mains applied to all leads at the same time. 3.) Depress the rocker switch to ISO TEST to test lead isolation.
CAUTION Line voltage is applied to the ECG leads during this test. To avoid possible electric shock
!! CAUTION:
10-7-8-1
Isolated Lead (sink) Leakage Test Record Table 10-17 shows a typical format for recording the isolated patient lead sink leakage current. Measurements should be recorded for the full lead combination under each set of test conditions specified in: Table 10-11 on page 10-13, or: Table 10-12 on page 10-13, as applicable.
Record all data on the EQC inspection certificate. Table 10-17 Typical Data Format for Recording Patient Lead to Lead Leakage
Unit Under Test: ________________________ Test Conditions System Power
Mains on RF on
Date of Test: _____________________
Patient Lead or Combination Measured RA-LA LA-LL LL-RA
Grounding/PE
open open
NOTE:
Values in italics font are given as examples only.
10-20
10-7-9
DANGER
Probe Leakage Current Test Do not use the probe if the insulating material has been punctured or otherwise compromised. Integrity of the insulation material and patient safety can be verified by safety testing according to IEC60601-1.
Definition This test measures the current that would flow to ground from any of the probes through a patient who is being scanned and becomes grounded by touching some other grounded surface.
10-7-9-1
NOTE:
Some leakage current is expected on each probe, depending on its design. Small variations in probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from differences in line voltage and test lead placement. It is abnormal if no leakage current is measured. If no leakage current is detected, check the configuration of the test equipment. Tools For needed tools, see: Section 10-4 "Tools Required" on page 10-5
10-7-9-2
10-7-9-3
Generic Procedure on Probe Leakage Current The most common method of measuring probe leakage is to partly immerse the probe into a saline bath while the probe is connected to the ultrasound system and active. This method measures the actual leakage current resulting from the transducer RF drive. Measurements should be made under the test conditions specified in: Table 10-11 on page 10-13, or: Table 10-12 on page 10-13, as applicable.
For each combination, the probe must be active to find the worst case condition.
POLARITY REVERSING SWITCH H (BLACK) CONSOLE POWER OUTLET N (WHITE) PROBE
G (GREEN) MOMENTARY SWITCH LEAKAGE TEST METER
Figure 10-5 Set Up for Probe Leakage Current NOTE: Each probe will have some amount of leakage current, dependent on its design. Small variations in probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from differences in line voltage and test lead placement.
10-21
Section 10-8 When There's Too Much Leakage Current...

10-8-1 Chassis Fails
Check the ground on the power cord and plug for continuity. Ensure the ground is not broken, frayed, or intermittent. Replace any defective part. Tighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs. Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage. Test the wall outlet; verify it is grounded and free of other wiring abnormalities. Notify the user or owner to correct any deviations. As a work around, check the other outlets to see if they could be used instead. NOTE: No outlet tester can detect the condition where the white neutral wire and the green grounding wire are reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this should be suspected as a possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected.
10-8-2
Probe Fails
NOTE: Test another probe to isolate if the fault lies with the probe or the scanner. Each probe will have some amount of leakage, dependent on its design. Small variations in probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from differences in line voltage and test lead placement. The maximum allowable leakage current for body surface contact probe differs from inter-cavity probe. Be sure to enter the correct probe type in the appropriate space on the check list. Test the probe in another connector to isolate if the fault lies with the probe or the scanner. If excessive leakage current is slot dependent, inspect the system connector for bent pins, poor connections, and ground continuity. If the problem remains with the probe, replace the probe.
10-8-3
Peripheral Fails
Tighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs. Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage.
10-8-4
Still Fails
If all else fails, begin isolation by removing the probes, external peripherals, then the on board ones, one at a time while monitoring the leakage current measurement.
10-8-5
New Unit
If the leakage current measurement tests fail on a new unit and if situation can not be corrected, submit a Safety Failure Report to document the system problem. Remove unit from operation.
10-8-6
ECG Fails
Inspect cables for damage or poor connections.
10-8-7
In case of using an UPS (Uninterruptable Power Supply)

In case of using an UPS (Uninterruptable Power Supply) repeat the tests without using the UPS, i.e. directly plug the ultrasound system to the AC wall outlet.
10-22
Section 10-8 - When There's Too Much Leakage Current...
Section 10-9 Ultrasound Equipment Quality Check (EQC)

Please download and use the latest version of this form (DOC0537351). It is stored in MyWorkshop.
Figure 10-6 Ultrasound Equipment Quality Check (EQC) Chapter 10 - Care & Maintenance 10-23
Section 10-10 Electrical Safety Test Form

Electrical Test Performed
Outlet (correct ground & wiring config.) System Ground Continuity Chassis Source Leakage Current Potential equilibrium connector Chassis Source Leakage Current Monitor housing Chassis Source Leakage Current Probe connector Patient Lead Source Leakage (Lead to Ground) Patient Lead Source Leakage (Lead to Lead) Patient Lead Source Leakage (Isolation) Peripheral 1 Leakage Current Peripheral 1 Ground Continuity Peripheral 2 Leakage Current Peripheral 2 Ground Continuity Peripheral 3 Leakage Current Peripheral 3 Ground Continuity
Max Value Allowed
Value Measured
OK?
Comments
PROBES Probe Number (from previous page)

Probe 1: Probe 2: Probe 3: Probe 4: Probe 5: Probe 6: Probe 7: Probe 8: Probe 9:
Max Value Allowed
Max Value Measured
OK?
Comments
10-24
Section 10-10 - Electrical Safety Test Form
GE HEALTHCAREDRAFT DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5
Appendix A Acoustic Output & Index Determination Tables
A-1
GE HEALTHCARERAFT DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5
Section A-1 Overview

This chapter provides Acoustic Output Reporting Tables for IEC60601-2-37 (according to Table 101) and a Summary of measured Quantities for Index Determination (according to IEC60601-2-37 DD.7, Table DD.2) for all applicable Transducers at different Operating Modes.
Table A-1
Transducer
Tables for Transducers at different Operating Modes

Section / Transducer at Operating Mode
A-1-1 Table for AB 2-7 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) A-1-2 Table for AB 2-7 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode)
Page Number
A-6 A-7 A-8 A-8 A-10 A-11 A-12 A-13 A-14 A-15 A-16 A-17 A-18 A-19 A-20 A-21 A-22 A-23 A-24 A-25 A-26 A-27 A-28 A-29 A-30 A-31
AB2-7
A-1-3 Table for AB 2-7 at Motion Mode (M-Mode) A-1-4 Table for AB 2-7 at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode) A-1-5 Table for AB 2-7 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) A-1-6 Table for AC2-5 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) A-1-7 Table for AC2-5 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode))
AC2-5
A-1-8 Table for AC2-5 at Motion Mode (M-Mode) A-1-9 Table for AC2-5 at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode) A-1-10 Table for AC2-5 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) A-1-11 Table for 4C-A at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) A-1-12 Table for 4C-A at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode) A-1-13 Table for 4C-A at Continuous Wave Doppler (CW-Mode)
4C-A A-1-14 Table for 4C-A at Motion Mode (M-Mode) A-1-15 Table for 4C-A at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode) A-1-16 Table for 4C-A at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) A-1-17 Table for IC5-9 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) A-1-18 Table for IC5-9 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode) IC5-9 A-1-19 Table for IC5-9 at Motion Mode (M-Mode) A-1-20 Table for IC5-9 at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode) A-1-21 Table for IC5-9 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) A-1-22 Table for IC5-9H at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) A-1-23 Table for IC5-9H at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode) IC5-9H A-1-24 Table for IC5-9H at Motion Mode (M-Mode) A-1-25 Table for IC5-9H at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode)) A-1-26 Table for IC5-9H at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode)
A-2
GE HEALTHCAREDRAFT DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 Table A-1

Transducer

A-1-27 Table for SP4-10 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) A-1-28 Table for SP4-10 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode)
Page Number
A-32 A-33 A-34 A-35 A-36 A-37 A-38 A-39 A-40 A-41 A-42 A-43 A-44 A-45 A-46 A-47 A-48 A-49 A-50 A-51 A-52 A-53 A-54 A-55 A-56 A-57 A-58 A-59 A-60 A-61 A-62 A-63 A-64 A-65 A-66
SP4-10 A-1-29 Table for SP4-10 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) A-1-30 Table for SP4-10 at Motion Mode (M-Mode) A-1-31 Tables for SP6-12 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) A-1-32 Tables for SP6-12 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode) SP6-12 A-1-33 Tables for SP6-12 at Motion Mode (M-Mode) A-1-34 Tables for SP6-12 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) A-1-35 Tables for SP10-16 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) A-1-36 Tables for SP10-16 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode) SP10-16 A-1-37 Tables for SP10-16 at Motion Mode (M-Mode) A-1-38 Tables for SP10-16 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) A-1-39 Table for PA2-5P at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) A-1-40 Table for PA2-5P at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode) PA2-5P A-1-41 Table for PA2-5P at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode) A-1-42 Table for PA2-5P at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) A-1-43 Table for PA2-5P at Motion Mode (M-Mode)) A-1-44 Table for PA6-8 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) A-1-45 Table for PA6-8 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode) A-1-46 Table for PA6-8 at Continuous Wave Doppler (CW-Mode) PA6-8 A-1-47 Table for PA6-8 at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode) A-1-48 Table for PA6-8 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) A-1-49 Table for PA6-8 at Motion Mode (M-Mode) PCW4.0 SCW2.0 A-1-50 Table for PCW4.0 at Continuous Wave Doppler (CW-Mode) A-1-51 Table for SCW2.0 at Continuous Wave Doppler (CW-Mode) A-1-52 Table for RAB2-5L at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) A-1-53 Table for RAB2-5L at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode) RAB2-5L A-1-54 Table for RAB2-5L at Motion Mode (M-Mode) A-1-55 Table for RAB2-5L at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode) A-1-56 Table for RAB2-5L at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) A-1-57 Table for RAB4-8L at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) A-1-58 Table for RAB4-8L at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode) RAB4-8L A-1-59 Table for RAB4-8L at Motion Mode (M-Mode) A-1-60 Table for RAB4-8L at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode) A-1-61 Table for RAB4-8L at Power Wave Doppler (PW-Mode)
A-3
GE HEALTHCARERAFT DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 Table A-1

Transducer

A-1-62 Table for RAB2-5 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) A-1-63 Table for RAB2-5 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode)
Page Number
A-67 A-68 A-69 A-70 A-71 A-72 A-73 A-74 A-75 A-76 A-77 A-78 A-79 A-80 A-81 A-82 A-83 A-84 A-85 A-86 A-87 A-88 A-89 A-90 A-91 A-92 A-93 A-94 A-95 A-96 A-97 A-98 A-99
RAB2-5
A-1-64 Table for RAB2-5 at Motion Mode (M-Mode) A-1-65 Table for RAB2-5 at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode) A-1-66 Table for RAB2-5 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) A-1-67 Table for RAB4-8P at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) A-1-68 Table for RAB4-8P at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode)
RAB4-8P
A-1-69 Table for RAB4-8P at Motion Mode (M-Mode) A-1-70 Table for RAB4-8P at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode) A-1-71 Table for RAB4-8P at Pulsed Wave Mode (PW-Mode) A-1-72 Table for RIC5-9 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) A-1-73 Table for RIC5-9 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode)
RIC5-9
A-1-74 Table for RIC5-9 at Motion Mode (M-Mode) A-1-75 Table for RIC5-9 at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode) A-1-76 Table for RIC5-9 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) A-1-77 Table for RIC5-9H at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) A-1-78 Table for RIC5-9H at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode)
RIC5-9H
A-1-79 Table for RIC5-9H at Motion Mode (M-Mode) A-1-80 Table for RIC5-9H at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode) A-1-81 Table for RIC5-9H at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) A-1-82 Tables for RIC5-9W at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) A-1-83 Tables for RIC5-9W at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode)
RIC5-9W
A-1-84 Tables for RIC5-9W at Motion Mode (M-Mode) A-1-85 Tables for RIC5-9W at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode) A-1-86 Tables for RIC5-9W at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) A-1-87 Table for RSP5-12 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) A-1-88 Table for RSP5-12 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode)
RSP5-12 A-1-89 Table for RSP5-12 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode) A-1-90 Table for RSP5-12 at Motion Mode (M-Mode) A-1-91 Table for RSP6-16 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) A-1-92 Table for RSP6-16 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode) RSP6-16 A-1-93 Table for RSP6-16 at Motion Mode (M-Mode) A-1-94 Table for RSP6-16 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode)
A-4
GE HEALTHCAREDRAFT DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 Table A-1

Transducer

A-1-95 Table for RNA5-9 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode) A-1-96 Table for RNA5-9 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode) A-1-97 Table for RNA5-9 at Continuous Wave Doppler (CW-Mode)
Page Number
A-100 A-101 A-102 A-103 A-104 A-105
RNA5-9 A-1-98 Table for RNA5-9 at Motion Mode (M-Mode) A-1-99 Table for RNA5-9 at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode) A-1-100 Table for RNA5-9 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode)
A-5
A-6
A-1-1
Acoustic Output Reporting Table for Track 3

(provide data where global maximum displayed index exceeds 1.0)
Transducer Model: AB2-7

MI TIS scan Aaprt>1 non-scan Aaprt1 TIB nonscan
Operating Mode: B-Mode

TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value IEC pra (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X Y td PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@PIImax prr pr at max. Ipi Other Information Focal Length deq at max. Ipi (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) Ipa,a at max. MI IPA.3 @MImax (W/cm) 202 # # 0,6 3470 2,5 (cm) 2,5 # # # 1,8 # 2,1 P min of [Pa(zs), Ita,a(zs)]
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
1,3
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
(a)
(a)
Assoc. Acoustic zbp zbp zsp zsp deq(zsp) fc Parameter zb z at max. Ipi,a deq(zb) fawf Dim of Aaprt
zs z1
# # #
Table for AB 2-7 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode)
# #
B-Imagesector start B-Imagesector end B-Imagesector angle Quality Operating Zoom Control Foc. Zones
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 24,0 20,0 low 1,0 1 Mid
Conditions Frequency Setting SENS PRI Power ZoomBox start ZoomBox end ZoomBox angle Mode Type Focal Depth (cm) (%) (cm) (cm) (Degree)
100 8,8 13,6 20,0 B(Harm) 3,0
A-1-2


MI TIS scan non-scan Aaprt 1 Aaprt>1
Operating Mode: Color Flow

TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value IEC pra (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X Y td PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@PIImax prr pr at max. I pi Other Information Focal Length deq at max. I pi (cm) (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) Ipa,a at max. MI IPA.3 @MImax (W/cm) # 5 8 # # # # 3,3 1,0 1,3 # 86 # P min of [Pa(zs), Ita,a(zs)]
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
1,3
2,0
256
Assoc. Acoustic Parameter zb zsp zsp deq(zsp) fc z at max. I pi,a deq(zb) fawf Dim of Aaprt zbp zbp
zs z1
2,8 6,2 1,3
5 8
B-Imagesector start B-Imagesector end B-Imagesector angle B-Quality Zoom Foc. Zones Operating Frequency Setting Control SENS PRI
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 24,0 20,0 low 1,0 1 penet (%) 1
0,0 24,0 80,0 low 1,0 1 penet 1
Table for AB 2-7 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode)
Conditions B Tx Power CFM Box start CFM Box end CFM Box angle CFM Tx power Ensemble Line Density Flow Res Velocity Range CFM Quality CFM Frequency
(cm) (cm) (Degree) (%)
2,55 6,15 7,33 100 9 2 high (kHz) 7,5 high high
2,55 6,15 80,0 100 9 9 low 7,5 high mid
A-7
A-8
A-1-3


Operating Mode: M-Mode (Simultaneous B-Mode incl.)

TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value IEC pra (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X Y td PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@PIImax prr pr at max. Ipi Other Information Focal Length deq at max. Ipi (cm) (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) Ipa,a at max. MI IPA.3 @MImax (W/cm) # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # P min of [Pa(zs), Ita,a(zs)]
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
<1
1,0
77
Assoc. Acoustic zbp Parameter zb z at max. Ipi,a deq(zb) fawf fc Dim of Aaprt deq(zsp) zsp zsp zbp
zs
z1
# # # # 2,8 2,5 1,3
Table for AB 2-7 at Motion Mode (M-Mode)
# 15 8
B-Imagesector start B-Imagesector end B-Imagesector angle Quality Operating Zoom Control Foc. Zones Conditions Frequency Setting SENS PRI Power Mode Type Focal Depth
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 24,0 80,0 low 1,0 1 High (%) 100 M(Harm) (cm) 15,0
A-1-4


MI TIS scan non-scan Aaprt1 Aaprt>1
Operating Mode: Mc-Mode

TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value IEC pra (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X Y td PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@PIImax prr pr at max. Ipi Other Information Focal Length deq at max. Ipi (cm) (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) Ipa,a at max. MI IPA.3 @MImax (W/cm) # 7 8 # # # # 3,2 0,7 1,3 # # 63 P min of [Pa(zs), Ita,a(zs)]
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
1,0
1,4
2,0
137
137
zs z1
0,3
2,1 3,1 1,9 1,3 3,1 1,9 1,3
1,3 15 8
B-Imagesector start B-Imagesector end B-Imagesector angle B-Quality Zoom Foc. Zones Operating Frequency Setting Control SENS PRI Conditions B Tx Power Mc Tx Power Ensemble Flow Res Velocity Range Speed Mc Frequency
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 24,0 80 low 1,0 1 penet (%) (%) 1 100 12 high (kHz) 1,8 5 High
0,0 24,0 80 low 1,0 1 penet 1 100 16 high 1,8 5 High
Table for AB 2-7 at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode)
A-9
A-10
A-1-5


MI TIS scan non-scan Aaprt1 Aaprt>1 TIB nonscan
Operating Mode: Pulsed Doppler

TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value IEC pra (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X (cm) Y (cm) td PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@PIImax prr pr at max. Ipi Other deq at max. Ipi (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) Ipa,a at max. MI IPA.3 @MImax (W/cm) # 7 8 # # # # 3,3 0,7 1,3 # # 88 P min of [Pa(zs), Ita,a(zs)]
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
1,4
2,0
2,0
91
140
zs
z1
4,8
0,5 2,3 1,4 1,3 2,7 1,9 1,3
0,5 15 8
Table for AB 2-7 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode)
Information Focal Length
Gate width Operating Gate pos Control B-Imagesector angle Conditions Power
0,2 2,48 4,4 100
0,9 7,38 2,2 100
0,9 9,69 1,3 100
A-1-6

Transducer Model: AC2-5


TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value IEC pra (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X Y td PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@PIImax prr pr at max. Ipi Other Information Focal Length deq at max. Ipi (cm) (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) Ipa,a at max. MI IPA.3 @MImax (W/cm) 155 # # 0,5 3150 2,8 2,3 # # # 4,7 # 2,0 P min of [Pa(zs), Ita,a(zs)]
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
1,3
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
(a)
(a)
zs z1
# # #
Table for AC2-5 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode)
# #
B-Imagesector start B-Imagesector end B-Imagesector angle Quality Operating Zoom Control Foc. Zones Conditions Frequency Setting SENS PRI Power ZoomBox start ZoomBox end ZoomBox angle Mode Type Focal Depth
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 30,0 68,0 low 1,0 1 norm (%) (cm) (cm) (Degree) 100 13,0 19,0 68,0 B (cm) 15,0
A-11
A-12
A-1-7


MI TIS scan Aaprt>1 non-scan Aaprt 1 nonscan TIB

TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value IEC pra (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X Y td PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@PIImax (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) Ipa,a at max. MI IPA.3 @MImax (W/cm) # 5 6,55 (sec) prr pr at max. I pi Other Information Focal Length deq at max. I pi (cm) # # # (cm) # 3,7 1,3 1,3 # 115 # P min of [Pa(zs), Ita,a(zs)]
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
1,6
2,0
170
zs z1
3,7 2,7 1,3
15 6,55
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 30,0 20,0 low 1,0 1 penet (%) 1
0,0 30,0 20,0 low 1,0 1 penet 1
Table for AC2-5 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode))
2,1 6,6 7,6 100 31 1 high (kHz) 7,5 norm high
18,1 22,6 7,6 100 22 10 high 0,1 low high
A-1-8



TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
1,4
1,0
88
88
zs
z1
3,9
0,8 2,1 3,1 1,3 2,1 3,1 1,3
Table for AC2-5 at Motion Mode (M-Mode)
0,8 15 6,55
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 30,0 68,0 low 1,0 1 High (%) 100
0,0 30,0 68,0 low 1,0 1 High 100 M(Harm) M(Harm) (cm) 15,0 15,0
A-13
A-14
A-1-9



TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value IEC pra (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X Y td PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@PIImax prr pr at max. Ipi Other Information Focal Length deq at max. Ipi (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) Ipa,a at max. MI IPA.3 @MImax (W/cm) # 5 6,55 # # # (cm) # 3,7 0,7 1,3 # 68 # P min of [Pa(zs), Ita,a(zs)]
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
1,2
1,6
2,0
137
137
zs
z1
1,7
1,4 2,6 2,2 1,3 3,6 1,8 1,3
1,0 12 6,55
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 30,0 68 low 1,0 1 penet 1 100 8 high 1,3 5 Mid
Table for AC2-5 at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode)
A-1-10



TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value IEC pra (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X (cm) Y (cm) td prr pr at max. Ipi Other deq at max. Ipi PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@PIImax (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) Ipa,a at max. MI IPA.3 @MImax (W/cm) # 5 6,55 # # # # 3,7 0,7 1,3 # # 88 P min of [Pa(zs), Ita,a(zs)]
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
1,5
2,0
2,0
103 3,3
137
zs
z1
0,7 2,0 1,8 1,3 3,6 1,8 1,3
0,6 12 6,55
Table for AC2-5 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode)
0,5 0,3 1,3 100
1,5 6,5 1,3 100
0,1 6,0 1,3 100
A-15
A-16
A-1-11

Transducer Model: 4C-A


TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
1,3
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
(a)
(a)
zs
z1
# # #
Table for 4C-A at 2 D Mode (B-Mode)
# #
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 30,0 20,0 low 1,0 1 CHA
1,0 100 6,0 12,0 15,0 Contrast 7,0
A-1-12



TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value IEC pra (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X Y td PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@PIImax prr pr at max. I pi Other Information Focal Length deq at max. I pi (cm) (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) Ipa,a at max. MI IPA.3 @MImax (W/cm) # # # # # # # # # # # # # P min of [Pa(zs), Ita,a(zs)]
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
1,7
204
zs z1
3,3 5,2 1,3
18 6
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 30,0 20,0 low 1,0 1 norm (%) 1
Table for 4C-A at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode)
14,9 19,4 7,1 100 22 10 low (kHz) 0,1 low high
A-17
A-18
A-1-13


Operating Mode: Continues Wave

TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value IEC pra (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X (cm) Y (cm) td PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@PIImax prr pr at max. Ipi Other deq at max. Ipi (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) Ipa,a at max. MI IPA.3 @MImax (W/cm) # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # P min of [Pa(zs), Ita,a(zs)]
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
1,0
1,3
59
59
zs
z1
4,0
0,7 2,0 0,8 1,3 2,0 0,8 1,3
0,7 5 6
Table for 4C-A at Continuous Wave Doppler (CW-Mode)
Velocity Range Operating Power Control Conditions
(kHz) (%)
12,0 100
12,0 100
A-1-14



TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
1,2
<1
93
zs
z1
4,5
0,9 2,1 4,6 1,3 # # #
Table for 4C-A at Motion Mode (M-Mode)
0,8 # #
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 30,0 57,6 low 1,0 1
(%) 85 M (cm) 18,0
A-19
A-20
A-1-15



TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value IEC pra (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X Y td PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@PIImax prr pr at max. Ipi Other Information Focal Length deq at max. Ipi (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) Ipa,a at max. MI IPA.3 @MImax (W/cm) # # # # # # (cm) # # # # # # # # # P min of [Pa(zs), Ita,a(zs)]
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
1,7
1,7
100
168
zs z1
3,7
0,8 2,0 4,4 1,3 3,3 3,6 1,3
0,7 15 6
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 30,0 20 low 1,0 1 norm (%) (%) 1 100 16 high (kHz) 0,9 5 Low
0,0 30,0 58 low 1,0 1 norm 1 100 8 high 1,3 5 High
Table for 4C-A at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode)
A-1-16



TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value IEC pra (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X (cm) Y (cm) td prr pr at max. Ipi Other deq at max. Ipi PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@PIImax (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) Ipa,a at max. MI IPA.3 @MImax (W/cm) # # # # # # # P min of [Pa(zs), Ita,a(zs)]
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
1,7
1,7
90 # # # 4,7
169
zs z1
0,5 # # # 2,4 1,6 1,3 3,2 3,6 1,3
Table for 4C-A at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode)
0,5 # # 15 6
0,1 3,0 2,2 100
0,1 9,0 1,3 100
A-21
A-22
A-1-17

Transducer Model: IC5-9


TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
1,1
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
(a)
(a)
Assoc. Acoustic zbp Parameter zb z at max. Ipi,a deq(zb) deq(zsp) fc fawf Dim of Aaprt zsp zsp zbp
zs z1
# # #
Table for IC5-9 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode)
# #
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 16,0 146,31 high 1,0 1 norm
100 0,0 3,2 146,31 B 1,0
A-1-18



TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
1,5
109
zs z1
5,8 4,1 0,6
8 3
B-Imagesector start B-Imagesector end B-Imagesector angle B-Quality Zoom Foc. Zones Operating Frequency Setting Control SENS PRI Conditions B Tx Power CFM Box start CFM Box end CFM Box angle CFM Tx power Ensemble Line Density Flow Res Velocity Range CFM Quality
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 16,0 146,31 low 1,0 1 norm (%) (cm) (cm) (Degree) (%) 1 10,77 13,17 146,31 100 9 2 high (kHz) 4,0 high
Table for IC5-9 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode)
A-23
A-24
A-1-19


MI TIS scan Aaprt>1 non-scan Aaprt1 nonscan TIB

TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value IEC pra (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X Y td PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@PIImax prr pr at max. Ipi Other nformation Focal Length deq at max. Ipi (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) Ipa,a at max. MI IPA.3 @MImax (W/cm) # # # # # # (cm) # # # # # # # P min of [Pa(zs), Ita,a(zs)]
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
<1
<1
zs z1
# # # # # # #
Table for IC5-9 at Motion Mode (M-Mode)
# # #
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
(%)
(cm)
A-1-20



TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value IEC pra (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X Y td PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@PIImax prr pr at max. Ipi Other Information Focal Length deq at max. Ipi (cm) (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) Ipa,a at max. MI IPA.3 @MImax (W/cm) # 8 3 # # # # 5,8 1,4 0,6 # # 43 P min of [Pa(zs), Ita,a(zs)]
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
1,2
1,0
1,1
13
43
zs z1
0,8
0,2 5,9 0,4 0,6 5,8 1,4 0,6
0,2 8 3
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 16,0 146,31 low 1,0 1 norm (%) (%) 1 100 12 high (kHz) 3,2 5 Mid
0,0 16,0 146,31 low 1,0 1 norm 1 100 8 high 2,4 5 Mid
0,0 16,0 146,31 low 1,0 1 norm 1 100 12 high 3,2 5 Mid
Table for IC5-9 at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode)
A-25
A-26
A-1-21



TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value IEC pra (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X (cm) Y (cm) td prr pr at max. Ipi Other deq at max. Ipi PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@PIImax (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) Ipa,a at max. MI IPA.3 @MImax (W/cm) # 8 3 # # # # 7,1 1,4 0,6 # # 45 P min of [Pa(zs), Ita,a(zs)]
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
1,5
1,5
1,5
55
56
zs
z1
0,7
0,6 5,0 1,4 0,6 5,8 1,2 0,6
0,5 6 3
Table for IC5-9 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode)
1,0 3,5 1,3 100
1,5 8,0 5,5 100
0,4 1,76 1,3 100
A-1-22

Transducer Model: IC5-9H


TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
1,3
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
(a)
(a)
Assoc. Acoustic zbp Parameter zb zsp zsp deq(zsp) fc z at max. Ipi,a deq(zb) fawf Dim of Aaprt zbp
zs z1
# # #
Table for IC5-9H at 2 D Mode (B-Mode)
# #
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 16,0 20,0 low 1,0 1 norm (%) (cm) (cm) (Degree) 100 12,3 15,5 15,0 B (cm) 4,0
A-27
A-28
A-1-23



TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value IEC pra (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X Y td PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@PIImax prr pr at max. I pi Other Information Focal Length deq at max. I pi (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) Ipa,a at max. MI IPA.3 @MImax (W/cm) # 1 3,5 (cm) # # # (cm) # 7,2 3,2 0,6 # 105 # P min of [Pa(zs), Ita,a(zs)]
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
1,1
1,7
116
zs z1
4,9 3,6 0,6
4 3,5
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 16,0 146,3 low 1,0 1 norm (%) 1
0,0 16,0 146,3 low 1,0 1 norm 1
Table for IC5-9H at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode)
0,0 2,4 146,3 100 31 2 low (kHz) 0,1 high high
2,3 4,7 146,3 100 7 9 low 0,1 low low
A-1-24


MI TIS scan non-scan Aaprt1 Aaprt>1 TIB

TIC nonscan
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value IEC pra (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X Y td PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@PIImax prr pr at max. Ipi Other Information Focal Length deq at max. Ipi (cm) (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) Ipa,a at max. MI IPA.3 @MImax (W/cm) # # # # # # # # # # # # # P min of [Pa(zs), Ita,a(zs)]
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
<1
<1
zs
z1
# # # # # # #
Table for IC5-9H at Motion Mode (M-Mode)
# # #
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
(%)
(cm)
A-29
A-30
A-1-25



TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
1,5
1,3
1,2
14
50
zs
z1
0,7
0,2 5,9 0,4 0,6 5,0 1,4 0,6
0,2 8 3,5
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 16,0 20 low 1,0 1 norm (%) (%) 1 100 12 high (kHz) 2,4 4 High
0,0 3,0 20 low 1,0 1 norm 1 100 16 high 0,9 4 Mid
0,0 16,0 20 low 1,0 1 norm 1 100 8 high 2,4 4 Low
Table for IC5-9H at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode))
A-1-26



TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
1,7
1,7
1,7
70 0,2
70
zs
z1
0,9 5,0 1,4 0,6 5,0 1,4 0,6
0,6 8 3,5
Table for IC5-9H at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode)
0,1 3,2 7 100
1,5 3,7 3,3 100
1,5 3,7 3,3 100
A-31
A-32
A-1-27
Transducer Model: SP4-10


TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X Y PD PRF pr@PIImax Other Information Focal Length IPA.3 @MImax deq@PIImax (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm) 200 # # (cm) 0,5 11420 2,4 (cm) 3,3 # # # 0,8 # 2,4 Wo
min of [W.3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
1,3
(a)
(a)
#
Assoc. Acoustic zbp Parameter zsp deq(zsp) fc Dim of Aaprt
z1
# # #
Table for SP4-10 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode)
# #
Tx frequency
(MHz) (cm)
3,3 1 1
Operating Tx focus Control Tx power Conditions Quality Box start Box end Box width B-Imagesector width Frequency Setting
high 0,0 2,8 (cm) (cm) 2,75 4,58 B(Harm)
A-1-28


TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X Y PD PRF pr@PIImax Other Information Focal Length IPA.3 @MImax deq@PIImax (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) # 1 3,25 # # # (cm) # 4,9 1,2 0,7 # 74 # Wo
(a)
1,6
2,0
93
Assoc. Acoustic Parameter zsp deq(zsp) fc Dim of A aprt zbp
z1
4,8 1,5 0,7
2 3,25
Table for SP4-10 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode)
Tx frequency Tx focus Tx power Ensemble Line Density Operating Velocity Range Control Quality Conditions CFM Box start CFM Box end CFM Box witdh B Image width
(MHz) (cm)
5,0 1 -6 26 10 (kHz) 15,5 norm (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) 0,0 2,1 0,69 0,92
5,0 2 -8 9 10 13,0 high 0,9 1,4 0,92 0,92
A-33
A-34
A-1-29


TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X (cm) Y (cm) PD PRF pr@PIImax Other Information Focal Length IPA.3 @MImax deq@PIImax (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) # 1 3,25 6,5 3,25 # # # # 4,8 0,3 0,7 4,9 2,1 0,7 # 82 52 2,1 2,0 # Wo
(a)
1,5
1,2
2,0
105
1,9
105
Assoc. Acoustic zbp Parameter zsp deq(zsp) fc Dim of A aprt
z1
0,4 1,1 4,9 2,1 0,7 4,9 2,1 0,7
0,6 6,5 3,25
Table for SP4-10 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode)
Tx frequency Operating Tx focus Control Tx power Gate pos Conditions prf Sample Volume (Gate)
(MHz) (cm)
5,0 1 6 (cm) (kHz) (mm)
5,0 6,5 -18 2 10,0 3
5,0 6,5 -18 1,9 10,0 3
5,0 6,5 -18 1,9 10,0 3
A-1-30


TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X (cm) Y (cm) PD PRF pr@PIImax Other deq@PIImax (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) Length IPA.3 @MImax FLy (cm) # 1 3,25 # # # # # # 4,8 0,3 0,7 # # # # 82 # # Wo
min of [W .3(z1), I TA.3(z1)]
(a)
1,5
<1
<1
# # # # # #
<1
#
z1
# # #
Table for SP4-10 at Motion Mode (M-Mode)
# # #
Information Focal
Tx frequency Operating Tx focus Control Tx power Frequency Setting
(MHz)
5,0 1 6 resol
A-35
A-36
A-1-31
Acoustic Output Reporting Table for IEC60601-2-37
Summary of measured quantities for index determination

(according 60601-2-37 DD.7, Table DD.2 )
(acc. to Table 101)

MI scan Aaprt>1 non-scan Aaprt1 nonscan TIS TIB TIC

MI Scanning TIS TIS TIS TIB TIB NonScanning TIC
Index Label
Index
1,8
Global Maximum Index Value
1,3
1,4
IEC 3,7
FDA
Units
NonScanning Scanning Aaprt1 Units (MHz) (mW) (mW) (mW) 33 (mW/cm) (mW/cm) (mWs/cm) (mWs/cm) (MPa) (MPa) (cm) (cm) (cm) 0,11 0,09 3,2 3,7 8,5 8,8 33 8,8
NonScanning Aaprt>1
pr 79 0,5 8,5 2,4 0,4 0,2 8660 3,2 6,0 2,0 415 2,0 6,0 0,4 5,3 8,8 6,9 118
pr.3
(MPa)
Wo
(mW)
min of [P(zs), Ita,(zs)]
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(mW)
Assoc.
zs
z1
(cm)
notation acc. Test notation acc. Report (DD2) Standard (DD.7) Acoustic working fawf requency Output Power P1 P P
118
Acoustic zbp
zbp
(cm)
Parameter zb
zsp
(cm)
z at max. Ipi,
zsp
(cm)
deq(zb)
deq(zsp)
(cm)
Bounded output Power Attenuated output power Spatial-peak tempora Izpta average intensity
fawf
fc
(MHz)
Dim of Aaprt
X (cm)
Y (cm)
Tables for SP6-12 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode)
td
PD
(sec)
prr
PRF
(Hz)
pr at max. Ipi
pr@PIImax
(MPa)
Other
deq at max. Ipi
deq@PIImax
(cm)
FLx (cm)
FLy (cm)
Ipa, at max. MI
IPA.3 @MImax
(W/cm)
B-Imagesector start 8,0 3,7 high 1,0 1 resol 100 0,0 1,6 0,8 B 0,9 6,0 B 0,8 4,2 2,7 100 resol 1 1 norm 100 5,3 6,9 3,7 B 6,0 1,0 1,0 high low 3,7 3,7 8,0 8,0
(cm)
0,0
0,0
0,0
B-Imagesector end
(cm)
B-Imagesector width
(cm)
2,1 1,6
Quality
Operating Zoom
Control
Foc. Zones
Attenuated spatialIzpta, peak temporalaverage intensity pulse intensity Ipi ntegral Attenuated pulse Ipi, ntensity integral Peak-rarefactional pr acoustic pressure Attenuated peakarefactional acoustic pr, pressure 12 dB output beam Aaprt area Equivalent aperture Deq diameter zs Depth for TIS zb Depth for TIB Depth at max. attenuated pulsentensity integral z at max. Ipi, (cm) (cm)
Conditions Frequency Setting
0,5
SENS PRI
Power
(%)
ZoomBox start
(cm)
ZoomBox end
(cm)
ZoomBox width
(cm)
Mode Type
Focal Depth
(cm)
A-1-32
(acc. to Table 101)


MI scan Aaprt>1 non-scan Aaprt 1 nonscan TIS TIB TIC
Transducer Model: SP6-12 Index

MI TIS TIS TIS TIB Scanning

TIB NonScanning TIC
Index Label 1,3 1,2 1,8
IEC 2,9 54 105
FDA
Units
pr
pr.3
(MPa)
NonScanning Scanning Aaprt1 Units (MHz) (mW) (mW) (mW) 35 (mW/cm) (mW/cm) (mWs/cm) (mWs/cm) (MPa) (MPa) (cm) (cm) 0,39 0,29 3,2 2,9 5,0 7,3 -
NonScanning Aaprt>1
Wo
(mW)
min of [P(zs), I ta,(zs)]
[W .3(z1), I TA.3(z1)]
(mW)
Assoc.
zs
z1
(cm)
Acoustic
zbp
zbp
(cm)
notation acc. Test notation acc. Report (DD2) Standard (DD.7) Acoustic working fawf frequency Output Power P1 P P
7,3
35 105
Parameter zb 0,8 5,0 1,5 0,4 1,0 3730 3,2 4,5 2,0 303 2,0 2,0 0,4 4,2 7,3 6,0
zsp
(cm)
z at max. I pi,
zsp
(cm)
deq (zb)
deq (zsp )
(cm)
fawf
fc
(MHz)
Dim of Aaprt
(cm)
(cm)
td
PD
(sec)
prr
PRF
(Hz)
pr at max. Ipi
pr@PIImax
(MPa)
Other
deq at max. Ipi
deq @PIImax
(cm)
FLx (cm)
FLy (cm)
Ipa, at max. MI
IPA.3 @MImax
(W/cm)
B-Imagesector start 8,0 3,7 low 1,0 2 norm 1 4,8 6,0 3,7 100 22,0 1 low 0,1 low low high high 0,1 low 2 9,0 100 0,6 4,6 3,4 1 1 1,4 2,6 3,7 100 7,0 8 low 13,0 low mid norm norm 2 2 1,0 1,0 low low 3,7 3,7 8,0 8,0
(cm)
0,0
0,0
0,0
Tables for SP6-12 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode)
B-Imagesector end
(cm)
B-Imagesector width
(cm)
B-Quality
Zoom
Foc. Zones
Operating Frequency Setting
1,6 1,4 (cm) zb z at max. Ipi, (cm) (cm) 0,8 -
Control
SENS PRI
Conditions B Tx Power
(%)
CFM Box start
(cm)
Attenuated spatialIzpta, peak temporalaverage intensity pulse intensity Ipi integral Attenuated pulse Ipi, intensity integral Peak-rarefactional pr acoustic pressure Attenuated peakrarefactional acoustic pr, pressure -12 dB output beam Aaprt area Equivalent aperture Deq diameter zs Depth for TIS
CFM Box end
(cm)
CFM Box width
(cm)
CFM Tx power
(%)
Ensemble
Depth for TIB Depth at max. attenuated pulseintensity integral
Line Density
Flow Res
Velocity Range
(kHz)
CFM Quality
A-37
CFM Frequency
A-38
A-1-33
(acc. to Table 101)

Operating Mode: B+M-Mode


MI NonScanning Scanning Aaprt1 Scanning Units (MHz) (mW) (mW) (mW) 30 (mW/cm) (mW/cm) (mWs/cm) (mWs/cm) (MPa) (MPa) (cm) (cm) (cm) 0,11 0,09 3,2 3,7 0,5 0,8 8,5 8,8 16 8,8 87 NonScanning Aaprt>1 TIS TIS TIS TIB TIB NonScanning TIC
Index Label
Index
1,7
1,3
1,3
IEC 3,7 88 87
FDA
Units
pr
pr.3
(MPa)
Wo
(mW)
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(mW)
notation acc. Test notation acc. Report (DD2) Standard (DD.7) Acoustic working fawf frequency Output Power P P1 P
Assoc. 0,5 8,5 1,6 0,4 0,2 900 3,2 6,0 2,0 415 2,0 4,5 0,4 1,2 8,8 6,8
zs
z1
(cm)
Acoustic zbp
zbp
(cm)
Parameter zb
zsp
(cm)
z at max. Ipi,
zsp
(cm)
deq(zb)
deq(zsp)
(cm)
fawf
fc
(MHz)
Dim of Aaprt
X (cm)
Y (cm)
td
PD
(sec)
prr
PRF
(Hz)
Tables for SP6-12 at Motion Mode (M-Mode)
pr at max. Ipi
pr@PIImax
(MPa)
Other
deq at max. Ipi
deq@PIImax
(cm)
FLx (cm)
FLy (cm)
Ipa, at max. MI
IPA.3 @MImax
(W/cm)
B-Imagesector start 8,0 3,7 low 1,0 4 resol 100 M 0,9 6,0 M 100 resol 1 1,0 1,0 1 norm 100 M 4,5 low low 3,7 3,7 8,0 8,0
(cm)
0,0
0,0
0,0
B-Imagesector end
(cm)
B-Imagesector width
(cm)
Quality
Operating Zoom
Attenuated spatialIzpta, peak temporalaverage intensity pulse intensity Ipi integral Attenuated pulse Ipi, intensity integral Peak-rarefactional pr acoustic pressure Attenuated peakrarefactional acoustic pr, pressure -12 dB output beam Aaprt area Equivalent aperture Deq diameter zs Depth for TIS zb Depth for TIB Depth at max. attenuated pulseintensity integral z at max. Ipi, (cm) (cm)
Control
Foc. Zones
0,5
SENS PRI
Power
(%)
Mode Type
Focal Depth
(cm)
A-1-34

(acc. to Table 101)

MI scan Aaprt>1 non-scan Aaprt1 nonscan
NonScanning Scanning Aaprt1 Units (MHz) (mW) (mW) (mW) (mW/cm) (mW/cm) (mWs/cm) (mWs/cm) (MPa) (MPa) (cm) (cm) (cm) zb (cm) 0,26 0,18 3,5 3,0 0,5 48 5,9 7,4 NonScanning Aaprt>1

TIS TIB TIC
Transducer Model: SP6-12 Index

MI TIS TIS TIS TIB Scanning

TIB NonScanning TIC
Index Label 1,2 1,7 1,8 1,6
IEC 3,0 Output Power P1 P P
FDA
Units
pr 48 0,8 0,9 0,3 5,9 0,4 1300 3,5 0,3 405 2,0 2,0 6,0 6,0 0,4 0,4 0,4 1,2 1,2 1,2 7,4 5,0 7,4
Spatial-peak tempora Izpta average intensity
pr.3 34 48
(MPa)
notation acc. Test notation acc. Report (DD2) Standard (DD.7) Acoustic working fawf frequency
5,0 34 48
Wo
(mW)
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(mW)
Assoc. zs
z1
(cm)
Acoustic zbp
zbp
(cm)
Bounded output Power Attenuated output power
25,6 413
Parameter zb
zsp
(cm)
z at max. Ipi,
zsp
(cm)
deq(zb)
deq(zsp)
(cm)
310 0,09 0,07
fawf
fc
(MHz)
Dim of Aaprt
X (cm)
Y (cm)
td
PD
(sec)
prr
PRF
(Hz)
Tables for SP6-12 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode)
pr at max. Ipi
pr@PIImax
(MPa)
Other
deq at max. Ipi
deq@PIImax
(cm)
FLx (cm)
0,5 0,8
FLy (cm)
Ipa, at max. MI
IPA.3 @MImax
(W/cm)
0,8
Gate width 0,0 1,3 100 100 1,3 3,2
(cm)
0,1
0,2
1,0 2,6 4,4 100
0,2 3,2 1,3 100
Operating Gate pos
(cm)
Control Velocity Range
(kHz)
z at max. Ipi,
(cm)
0,9
Conditions Power
(%)
A-39
A-40
A-1-35
(acc. to Table 101)

Transducer Model: SP 10-16


Index Label
Index
0,5
1,1
0,2
IEC 2,6 13 28
FDA
Units
NonScanning Aaprt>1
pr
pr.3
(MPa)
Wo
(mW)
min of [P(zs), Ita,(zs)] -
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(mW)
Assoc.
zs
z1
(cm)
28
Acoustic zbp
zbp
(cm)
Parameter zb 0,8 5,6 2,5 0,3 0,2 10720 2,8 3,2 1,5 172 1,5 6,0 0,3 5,1 8,9 5,3
zsp
(cm)
z at max. Ipi,
zsp
(cm)
deq(zb)
deq(zsp)
(cm)
fawf
fc
(MHz)
Dim of Aaprt
X (cm)
Y (cm)
td
PD
(sec)
Tables for SP10-16 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode)
prr
PRF
(Hz)
pr at max. Ipi
pr@PIImax
(MPa)
Other
deq at max. Ipi
deq@PIImax
(cm)
FLx (cm)
FLy (cm)
Ipa, at max. MI
IPA.3 @MImax
(W/cm)
B-Imagesector start 4,5 3,4 high 1,0 1 penet 100 0,0 1,0 2,1 B 3,2 3,2 B 0,8 4,2 3,2 100 norm 1 1 High 100 2,6 3,6 3,4 B(Harm) 6,0 1,0 1,0 low high 3,4 3,4 4,5 4,5
(cm)
0,0
0,0
0,0
B-Imagesector end
(cm)
B-Imagesector width
(cm)
1,5 1,4
Quality
Operating Zoom
Control
Foc. Zones
0,8
SENS PRI
Power
(%)
ZoomBox start
(cm)
ZoomBox end
(cm)
ZoomBox width
(cm)
Mode Type
Focal Depth
(cm)
A-1-36
(acc. to Table 101)


Transducer Model: SP 10-16 Index

MI NonScanning Scanning Aaprt1 Units (MHz) (mW) (mW) (mW) 10 (mW/cm) (mW/cm) (mWs/cm) (mWs/cm) (MPa) (MPa) (cm) (cm) 0,36 0,27 4,0 3,4 9,7 9,7 10 9,7 NonScanning Aaprt>1 TIS TIS TIS TIB Scanning

TIB NonScanning TIC
IEC 3,4 48 0,4 9,7 4,8 0,3 0,5 8520 4,0 3,2 1,5 446 1,5 3,2 0,3 4,8 9,7 9,7 48
FDA
Units
pr
pr.3
(MPa)
Wo
(mW)
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(mW)
Assoc.
zs
z1
(cm)
Acoustic
zbp
zbp
(cm)
48
Parameter zb
zsp
(cm)
z at max. I pi,
zsp
(cm)
deq(zb)
deq(zsp)
(cm)
fawf
fc
(MHz)
Dim of Aaprt
(cm)
(cm)
td
PD
(sec)
prr
PRF
(Hz)
pr at max. Ipi
pr@PIImax
(MPa)
Other
deq at max. Ipi
deq@PIImax
(cm)
FLx (cm)
FLy (cm)
Ipa, at max. MI
IPA.3 @MImax
(W/cm)
B-Imagesector start 4,5 3,4 low 1,0 2 resol 1 0,0 0,7 3,4 100 7,0 1 high 20,5 low high high norm 13,0 high 1 31,0 100 3,4 3,1 2,4 1 1 2,4 3,1 3,4 100 31,0 1 high 13,0 norm high resol resol 2 2 1,0 1,0 low low 3,4 3,4 4,5 4,5
(cm)
0,0
0,0
0,0
B-Imagesector end
(cm)
Tables for SP10-16 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode)
B-Imagesector width
(cm)
B-Quality
Zoom
Foc. Zones
1,4 1,4 (cm) zb z at max. Ipi, (cm) (cm) 0,4 -
Control
SENS PRI
(%)
CFM Box start
(cm)
CFM Box end
(cm)
CFM Box width
(cm)
CFM Tx power
(%)
Ensemble
Line Density
Flow Res
Velocity Range
(kHz)
CFM Quality
A-41
CFM Frequency
A-42
A-1-37

(acc. to Table 101)
Transducer Model: SP 10-16

TIB TIC nonscan

MI NonScanning Scanning Aaprt1 Scanning Units (MHz) (mW) (mW) (mW) 6 (mW/cm) (mW/cm) (mWs/cm) (mWs/cm) (MPa) (MPa) (cm) (cm) (cm) 0,05 0,03 2,7 2,6 0,5 0,8 5,6 8,9 4 8,6 21 NonScanning Aaprt>1 TIS TIS TIS TIB TIB NonScanning TIC
MI scan Aaprt>1 non-scan Aaprt1
TIS
Index
IEC 2,6 19 21
FDA
Units
pr
pr.3
(MPa)
Wo
(mW)
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(mW)
Assoc. 0,8 5,6 1,7 0,3 0,2 900 2,7 3,2 1,5 172 1,5 6,0 0,3 1,7 8,9 5,3
zs
z1
(cm)
Acoustic zbp
zbp
(cm)
Parameter zb
zsp
(cm)
z at max. Ipi,
zsp
(cm)
deq(zb)
deq(zsp)
(cm)
fawf
fc
(MHz)
Dim of Aaprt
X (cm)
Y (cm)
td
PD
(sec)
prr
PRF
(Hz)
Tables for SP10-16 at Motion Mode (M-Mode)
pr at max. Ipi
pr@PIImax
(MPa)
Other
deq at max. Ipi
deq@PIImax
(cm)
FLx (cm)
FLy (cm)
Ipa, at max. MI
IPA.3 @MImax
(W/cm)
B-Imagesector start 4,5 3,4 low 1,0 3 penet 100 M 3,2 3,2 M 100 norm 1 1,0 1,0 1 Low 100 M(Harm) 6,0 low low 3,4 3,4 4,5 4,5
(cm)
0,0
0,0
0,0
B-Imagesector end
(cm)
B-Imagesector width
(cm)
Quality
Operating Zoom
Control
Foc. Zones
0,8
SENS PRI
Power
(%)
Mode Type
Focal Depth
(cm)
A-1-38

(acc. to Table 101)

Transducer Model: SP 10-16 Index

MI NonScanning Scanning Aaprt1 NonScanning Aaprt>1 TIS TIS TIS TIB Scanning

TIB NonScanning TIC
Index Label 1,1

Units (MHz) (mW) (mW) (mW) (mW/cm) (mW/cm) (mWs/cm) (mWs/cm) (MPa) (MPa) (cm) (cm) (cm)
0,1 1,4 4,4 100 0,1 1,4 4,4 100
8,3 25 9,7
1,1
1,1
0,8
IEC 3,1 25 25 25
FDA
Units
pr
pr.3
(MPa)
9,7 25 16,1 341 25
Wo
(mW)
min of [P(zs), Ita,(zs)] 0,6 0,8 0,3 8,3 0,3 1300 4,1 0,3 283 1,5 1,5 3,2 3,2 0,3 0,3 0,3 1,4 1,4 1,4 9,7 9,7 9,7
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(mW)
Assoc.
zs
z1
(cm)
Acoustic zbp
zbp
(cm)
Parameter zb
zsp
(cm)
z at max. Ipi,
zsp
(cm)
deq(zb)
deq(zsp)
(cm)
208 0,16 0,08 4,1 3,1 0,4 0,4 0,7 0,08 0,05
fawf
fc
(MHz)
Dim of Aaprt
X (cm)
Y (cm)
td
PD
(sec)
prr
PRF
(Hz)
pr at max. Ipi
pr@PIImax
(MPa)
Tables for SP10-16 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode)
Other
deq at max. Ipi
deq@PIImax
(cm)
FLx (cm)
FLy (cm)
Ipa, at max. MI
IPA.3 @MImax
(W/cm)
Attenuated spatialIzpta, peak temporalaverage intensity pulse intensity Ipi integral Attenuated pulse Ipi, intensity integral Peak-rarefactional pr acoustic pressure Attenuated peakrarefactional acoustic pr, pressure -12 dB output beam Aaprt area Equivalent aperture Deq diameter zs Depth for TIS zb Depth for TIB Depth at max. attenuated pulseintensity integral z at max. Ipi,
Gate width 0,0 1,3 100 100 4,4 1,4
(cm)
0,1
0,1
(cm) (cm) 0,8
0,6
Operating Gate pos
(cm)
(kHz)
Conditions Power
(%)
A-43
A-44
A-1-39

Transducer Model: PA2-5P


TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
1,2
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
(a)
(a)
zs z1
# # #
Table for PA2-5P at 2 D Mode (B-Mode)
# #
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 23,7 20,0 low 1,0 1 High
100 7,9 12,6 15,0 B(Harm) 5,0
A-1-40



TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value IEC pra (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X Y td PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@PIImax prr pr at max. I pi Other Information Focal Length deq at max. I pi (cm) (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) Ipa,a at max. MI IPA.3 @MImax (W/cm) # 5 5,8 # # # # 2,9 0,9 1,15 # 72 # P min of [Pa(zs), Ita,a(zs)]
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
1,0
1,5
84
zs z1
2,8 1,3 1,15
8 5,8
B-Imagesector start B-Imagesector end B-Imagesector angle B-Quality Zoom Foc. Zones Operating Frequency Setting Control SENS PRI Conditions B Tx Power CFM Box start CFM Box end CFM Box angle CFM Tx power Ensemble Line Density Flow Res Velocity Range CFM Quality CFM Frequency
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 23,7 90,0 low 1,0 1 norm (%) (cm) (cm) (Degree) (%) 1 4,2 7,8 90,0 100 22 1 low (kHz) 6,0 low high
0,0 23,7 20,0 low 1,0 1 norm 1 5,0 8,6 12,0 100 31 10 high 6,0 norm high
Table for PA2-5P at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode)
A-45
A-46
A-1-41



TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
1,5
1,5
56
95
zs z1
4,0
0,5 2,2 1,3 1,15 2,8 1,6 1,15
0,4 11 5,8
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 23,7 20 low 1,0 1 norm (%) (%) 1 100 8 high (kHz) 1,8 5 Mid
0,0 23,7 20 low 1,0 1 norm 1 100 8 high 0,6 5 High
Table for PA2-5P at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode)
A-1-42



TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
1,5
1,5
93 # # # 3,5
95
zs
z1
0,8 # # # 2,3 1,9 1,15 2,8 1,6 1,15
0,8 # # 11 5,8
Table for PA2-5P at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode)
0,4 7,2 2,2 100
1,0 0,5 1,3 100
A-47
A-48
A-1-43



TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
<1
<1
zs
z1
# # # # # # #
# # #
Table for PA2-5P at Motion Mode (M-Mode))
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
(%)
(cm)
A-1-44

Transducer Model: PA6-8


TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
1,3
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
(a)
(a)
zs
z1
# # #
Table for PA6-8 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode)
# #
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 24,0 80,0 low 1,0 1 16,0 (%) (cm) (cm) (Degree) 100 12,0 16,8 80,0 BFlow (cm) 5,0
A-49
A-50
A-1-45



TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value IEC pra (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X Y td PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@PIImax prr pr at max. I pi Other Information Focal Length deq at max. I pi (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) Ipa,a at max. MI IPA.3 @MImax (W/cm) # 7 3,65 (cm) # # # (cm) # 5,9 1,2 0,6 # 66 # P min of [Pa(zs), Ita,a(zs)]
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
1,6
1,9
79
zs z1
5,9 1,4 0,6
10 3,65
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 13,7 90,0 low 1,0 1 penet (%) 1
0,0 13,7 90,0 low 1,0 1 penet 1
Table for PA6-8 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode)
4,9 6,9 90,0 100 9 10 low (kHz) 7,5 high high
7,3 9,3 90,0 100 9 10 low 6,0 high high
A-1-46



TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value IEC pra (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X (cm) Y (cm) td prr pr at max. Ipi Other deq at max. Ipi PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@PIImax (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) Ipa,a at max. MI IPA.3 @MImax (W/cm) # # # # # # # # # # # # # P min of [Pa(zs), Ita,a(zs)]
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
<1
<1
# #
zs
z1
# # # # # # #
# # #
Table for PA6-8 at Continuous Wave Doppler (CW-Mode)
(kHz) (%)
A-51
A-52
A-1-47



TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
2,0
1,9
1,7
69
71
zs z1
0,3
0,7 5,0 1,4 0,6 5,9 1,4 0,6
0,5 10 3,65
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 13,7 20 low 1,0 1 penet 1 100 8 high 3,2 5 Mid
Table for PA6-8 at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode)
A-1-48



TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
2,0
1,9
1,9
68 0,3
71
zs
z1
0,7 5,0 1,4 0,6 5,9 1,2 0,6
0,5 7 3,65
Table for PA6-8 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode)
0,2 1,5 3,3 100
0,7 4,3 2,2 100
0,2 1,5 3,3 100
A-53
A-54
A-1-49



TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
<1
<1
zs
z1
# # # # # # #
Table for PA6-8 at Motion Mode (M-Mode)
# # #
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
(%)
(cm)
A-1-50
Transducer Model: PCW4.0


TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X (cm) Y (cm) PD PRF pr@PIImax Other deq@PIImax (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) Length IPA.3 @MImax FLy (cm) # # # # # # # # # # # # # Wo
(a)
<1
1,0
16 1,1 0,3 3,9 0,5 0,50
<1
#
z1
# # #
0,3 # #
Information Focal
Table for PCW4.0 at Continuous Wave Doppler (CW-Mode)
Tx frequency Operating Tx focus Control Conditions Tx power
(MHz) (cm)
3,9 5 3
A-55
A-56
A-1-51
Transducer Model: SCW2.0


TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X (cm) Y (cm) PD PRF pr@PIImax Other Information Focal Length IPA.3 @MImax deq@PIImax (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) # # # # # # # # # # # # # Wo
(a)
<1
1,2
28
<1
#
z1
0,4 0,5 2,0 0,9 0,92 # # #
0,5 # #
Table for SCW2.0 at Continuous Wave Doppler (CW-Mode)
Tx frequency Operating Tx focus Control Conditions Tx power
(MHz) (cm)
1,9 5 -1
A-1-52

Transducer Model: RAB2-5L


TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
1,3
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
(a)
(a)
zs z1
# # #
Table for RAB2-5L at 2 D Mode (B-Mode)
# #
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 24,0 80,0 low 1,0 1 Mid (%) (cm) (cm) (Degree) 100 6,4 11,2 80,0 B(Harm) (cm) 5,0
A-57
A-58
A-1-53



TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value IEC pra (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X Y td PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@PIImax prr pr at max. I pi Other Information Focal Length deq at max. I pi (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) Ipa,a at max. MI IPA.3 @MImax (W/cm) # # # (cm) # # # (cm) # # # # # # # P min of [Pa(zs), Ita,a(zs)]
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
1,4
201
zs z1
3,6 8,1 1,3
15 7
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 24,0 80,0 low 1,0 1 penet (%) 1
Table for RAB2-5L at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode)
13,6 17,2 80,0 100 31 1 low (kHz) 3,2 norm high
A-1-54



TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value IEC pra (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X Y td PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@PIImax prr pr at max. Ipi Other Information Focal Length deq at max. Ipi (cm) (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) Ipa,a at max. MI IPA.3 @MImax (W/cm) # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # P min of [Pa(zs), Ita,a(zs)]
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
<1
<1
<1
zs
z1
# # # # # # #
# # #
Table for RAB2-5L at Motion Mode (M-Mode)
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
(%)
(cm)
A-59
A-60
A-1-55



TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value IEC pra (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X Y td PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@PIImax prr pr at max. Ipi Other Information Focal Length deq at max. Ipi (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) Ipa,a at max. MI IPA.3 @MImax (W/cm) # # # # # # # # (cm) # # # # # # # # # # # # # P min of [Pa(zs), Ita,a(zs)]
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
<1
1,0
<1
33
zs
z1
4,6
0,4 2,1 1,6 1,3 # # #
0,4 # #
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 24,0 80 low 1,0 1 penet (%) (%) 1 100 8 high (kHz) 0,6 5 Low
Table for RAB2-5L at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode)
A-1-56



TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
<1
1,7
1,3
99 # # # 4,2
106
zs
z1
0,7 # # # 2,0 2,5 1,3 3,6 2,5 1,3
0,7 # # 15 7
Table for RAB2-5L at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode)
0,1 9,61 1,3 100
0,5 9,65 2,2 100
A-61
A-62
A-1-57



TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
1,3
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
(a)
(a)
zs z1
# # #
Table for RAB4-8L at 2 D Mode (B-Mode)
# #
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 22,0 20,0 low 1,0 1 High (%) (cm) (cm) (Degree) 100 8,8 13,2 20,0 B(Harm) (cm) 3,0
A-1-58



TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
<1
zs z1
# # #
# #
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
Table for RAB4-8L at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode)
(%) (cm) (cm) (Degree) (%)
(kHz)
A-63
A-64
A-1-59



TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
<1
<1
zs z1
# # # # # # #
# # #
Table for RAB4-8L at Motion Mode (M-Mode)
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
(%)
(cm)
A-1-60



TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
<1
<1
zs
z1
# # # # # # #
# # #
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
Table for RAB4-8L at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode)
(%) (%)
(kHz)
A-65
A-66
A-1-61



TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value IEC pra (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X (cm) Y (cm) td prr pr at max. Ipi Other deq at max. Ipi PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@PIImax (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) Ipa,a at max. MI IPA.3 @MImax (W/cm) # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # P min of [Pa(zs), Ita,a(zs)]
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
1,4
1,0
63
63
zs
z1
3,7
0,5 3,0 1,9 1,1 3,0 1,9 1,1
0,5 11 6
Table for RAB4-8L at Power Wave Doppler (PW-Mode)
0,3 6,66 2,2 100
0,3 6,66 2,2 100
A-1-62

Transducer Model: RAB2-5


TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
1,2
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
(a)
(a)
zs
z1
# # #
Table for RAB2-5 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode)
# #
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 22,0 70,0 high 1,0 1 16,0 (%) (cm) (cm) (Degree) 100 6,6 11,0 70,0 BFlow (cm) 6,0
A-67
A-68
A-1-63



TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
1,3
203
zs z1
3,7 8,4 1,4
15 6
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 24,0 80,0 low 1,0 1 penet (%) 1
Table for RAB2-5 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode)
11,9 15,5 80,0 100 22 1 low (kHz) 0,1 low high
A-1-64



TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
<1
<1
zs
z1
# # # # # # #
# # #
Table for RAB2-5 at Motion Mode (M-Mode)
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
(%)
(cm)
A-69
A-70
A-1-65



TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
<1
<1
zs z1
# # # # # # #
# # #
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
Table for RAB2-5 at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode)
(%) (%)
(kHz)
A-1-66



TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
1,4
1,1
47 # # # 4,0
94
zs
z1
0,3 # # # 2,7 1,2 1,4 2,7 2,4 1,4
0,3 # # 15 6
Table for RAB2-5 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode)
0,9 2,76 2,2 100
0,6 16,68 3,3 100
A-71
A-72
A-1-67

Transducer Model: RAB4-8P


TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
1,2
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
(a)
(a)
zs z1
# # #
Table for RAB4-8P at 2 D Mode (B-Mode)
# #
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 22,0 70,0 high 1,0 1 High
100 13,2 17,6 70,0 B(Harm) 6,0
A-1-68



TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
<1
zs z1
# # #
# #
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
Table for RAB4-8P at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode)
(%) (cm) (cm) (Degree) (%)
(kHz)
A-73
A-74
A-1-69



TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
<1
<1
zs z1
# # # # # # #
# # #
Table for RAB4-8P at Motion Mode (M-Mode)
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
(%)
(cm)
A-1-70



TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
<1
<1
zs
z1
# # # # # # #
# # #
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
Table for RAB4-8P at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode)
(%) (%)
(kHz)
A-75
A-76
A-1-71



TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value IEC pra (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X (cm) Y (cm) td PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@PIImax prr pr at max. Ipi Other deq at max. Ipi (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) Ipa,a at max. MI IPA.3 @MImax (W/cm) # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # P min of [Pa(zs), Ita,a(zs)]
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
1,4
<1
33
zs
z1
3,4
0,3 3,0 1,1 1,1 # # #
0,3 # #
Table for RAB4-8P at Pulsed Wave Mode (PW-Mode)
1,5 2,8 1,3 100
A-1-72

Transducer Model: RIC5-9


TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
1,2
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
(a)
(a)
zs
z1
# # #
Table for RIC5-9 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode)
# #
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 16,0 20,0 low 1,0 1 High (%) (cm) (cm) (Degree) 100 11,2 14,4 20,0 B(Harm) (cm) 2,5
A-77
A-78
A-1-73



TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
<1
zs z1
# # #
# #
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
Table for RIC5-9 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode)
(%) (cm) (cm) (Degree) (%)
(kHz)
A-1-74



TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
<1
<1
zs z1
# # # # # # #
# # #
Table for RIC5-9 at Motion Mode (M-Mode)
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
(%)
(cm)
A-79
A-80
A-1-75



TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value IEC pra (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X Y td PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@PIImax prr pr at max. Ipi Other Information Focal Length deq at max. Ipi (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) Ipa,a at max. MI IPA.3 @MImax (W/cm) # # # # # # (cm) # # # # # # # P min of [Pa(zs), Ita,a(zs)]
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
<1
<1
zs
z1
# # # # # # #
# # #
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
Table for RIC5-9 at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode)
(%) (%)
(kHz)
A-1-76



TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
<1
<1
# #
zs
z1
# # # # # # #
# # #
Table for RIC5-9 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode)
A-81
A-82
A-1-77

Transducer Model: RIC5-9H


TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
1,3
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
(a)
(a)
zs
z1
# # #
Table for RIC5-9H at 2 D Mode (B-Mode)
# #
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 16,0 146,3 high 1,0 1 High
100 6,4 9,6 146,3 B(Harm) 4,0
A-1-78



TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
1,2
86
zs z1
5,0 4,4 0,6
8 3,5
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 16,0 146,3 low 1,0 1 norm (%) 1
Table for RIC5-9H at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode)
10,8 13,2 146,3 100 31 1 high (kHz) 4,0 norm low
A-83
A-84
A-1-79



TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
<1
<1
zs z1
# # # # # # #
# # #
Table for RIC5-9H at Motion Mode (M-Mode)
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
(%)
(cm)
A-1-80



TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
1,2
<1
14
zs
z1
1,6
0,2 5,0 0,7 0,6 # # #
0,2 # #
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 16,0 20 low 1,0 1 norm (%) (%) 1 100 12 high (kHz) 2,4 4 Low
Table for RIC5-9H at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode)
A-85
A-86
A-1-81



TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
1,3
1,3
1,3
56
56
zs z1
1,6
0,6 5,0 1,5 0,6 5,0 1,5 0,6
0,5 8 3,5
Table for RIC5-9H at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode)
0,9 3,5 7 100
0,9 3,5 7 100
0,9 3,5 7 100
A-1-82

(acc. to Table 101)
Transducer Model: RIC5-9W


MI TIS TIS TIS TIB Scanning TIB NonScanning TIC
Index Label
Index
0,4
1,2
0,3
IEC 2,5
FDA
Units
NonScanning Scanning Aaprt1 Units (MHz) (mW) (mW) (mW) 7 (mW/cm) (mW/cm) (mWs/cm) (mWs/cm) (MPa) (MPa) (cm) (cm) 0,12 0,07 3,1 2,5 4,2 8,6 -
NonScanning Aaprt>1
pr 8 1,7 4,2 1,2 0,6 0,3 2960 3,1 4,0 3,5 227 3,5 8,0 0,6 4,5 8,6 3,8 31
pr.3
(MPa)
Wo
(mW)
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(mW)
Assoc.
zs
z1
(cm)
8,6
7 31
Acoustic zbp
zbp
(cm)
Parameter zb
zsp
(cm)
z at max. Ipi,
zsp
(cm)
deq(zb)
deq(zsp)
(cm)
fawf
fc
(MHz)
Dim of Aaprt
(cm)
(cm)
td
PD
(sec)
Tables for RIC5-9W at 2 D Mode (B-Mode)
prr
PRF
(Hz)
pr at max. Ipi
pr@PIImax
(MPa)
Other
deq at max. Ipi
deq@PIImax
(cm)
FLx (cm)
FLy (cm)
Ipa, at max. MI
IPA.3 @MImax
(W/cm)
B-Imagesector start 16,0 146,3 high 1,0 1 High 100 0,0 3,2 146,3 B(Harm) 2,5 4,0 BFlow 17,5 5,3 2,1 100 1,0 1 1,0 high high 1,0 1 Low 100 4,3 7,5 146,3 B(Harm) 8,0 20,0 146,3 16,0 16,0
(cm)
0,0
0,0
0,0
B-Imagesector end
(cm)
B-Imagesector angle
(Degree)
2,7 1,9 (cm) zb Depth for TIB Depth at max. attenuated pulseintensity integral z at max. Ipi, (cm) (cm) 1,7 -
Quality
Operating Zoom
Control
Foc. Zones
SENS PRI
Power
(%)
ZoomBox start
(cm)
ZoomBox end
(cm)
ZoomBox angle
(Degree)
Mode Type
A-87
Focal Depth
(cm)
A-88
A-1-83
(acc. to Table 101)


Transducer Model: RIC5-9W Index

MI NonScanning Scanning Aaprt1 Scanning Units (MHz) (mW) (mW) (mW) 9 (mW/cm) (mW/cm) (mWs/cm) (mWs/cm) (MPa) (MPa) (cm) (cm) (cm) 0,35 0,29 3,0 2,7 5,0 5,0 9 5,0 NonScanning Aaprt>1 TIS TIS TIS TIB TIB NonScanning

TIC
IEC 2,7 33 0,6 5,0 3,5 0,6 0,8 1420 3,0 1,0 3,5 354 3,5 8,0 0,6 4,4 5,0 5,0 41
FDA
Units
pr
pr.3
(MPa)
Wo
(mW)
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(mW)
Assoc.
zs
z1
(cm)
Acoustic
zbp
zbp
(cm)
Parameter zb
zsp
(cm)
41
z at max. I pi,
zsp
(cm)
deq(zb)
deq(zsp)
(cm)
fawf
fc
(MHz)
Dim of Aaprt
(cm)
(cm)
td
PD
(sec)
prr
PRF
(Hz)
pr at max. Ipi
pr@PIImax
(MPa)
Other
deq at max. Ipi
deq@PIImax
(cm)
FLx (cm)
FLy (cm)
Ipa, at max. MI
IPA.3 @MImax
(W/cm)
B-Imagesector start 16,0 146,3 low 1,0 1 resol 1 0,0 2,4 146,3 100 7,0 1 high 0,1 low low low high 0,1 low 2 9,0 100 146,3 2,4 0,0 7,9 10,3 146,3 100 31,0 1 low 5,0 norm low 1 1 resol resol 1 1 1,0 1,0 low low 146,3 146,3 16,0 16,0
(cm)
0,0
0,0
0,0
B-Imagesector end
(cm)
Tables for RIC5-9W at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode)
B-Imagesector angle
(Degree)
B-Quality
Zoom
Foc. Zones
2,7 1,8
Control
SENS PRI
(%)
CFM Box start
(cm)
Attenuated spatialIzpta, peak temporalaverage intensity pulse intensity Ipi integral Attenuated pulse Ipi, intensity integral Peak-rarefactional pr acoustic pressure Attenuated peakrarefactional acoustic pr, pressure -12 dB output beam Aaprt area Equivalent aperture Deq diameter zs Depth for TIS zb z at max. Ipi, (cm) (cm)
CFM Box end
(cm)
0,6
CFM Box angle
(Degree)
CFM Tx power
(%)
Ensemble
Line Density
Flow Res
Velocity Range
(kHz)
CFM Quality
CFM Frequency
A-1-84

(acc. to Table 101)

TIB TIC nonscan

MI NonScanning Scanning Aaprt1 Units (MHz) (mW) (mW) (mW) 10 (mW/cm) (mW/cm) (mWs/cm) (mWs/cm) (MPa) (MPa) (cm) (cm) 0,17 0,11 2,6 2,2 0,8 1,0 3,9 3,7 20 3,9 22 NonScanning Aaprt>1 TIS TIS TIS TIB Scanning TIB NonScanning TIC
MI scan Aaprt>1 non-scan Aaprt1
TIS
Index
IEC 2,2 22 22
FDA
Units
pr
pr.3
(MPa)
Wo
(mW)
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(mW)
Assoc. 1,6 3,9 1,4 0,6 0,6 450 2,6 6,0 3,5 201 3,5 6,0 0,6 1,4 3,7 3,7
zs
z1
(cm)
Acoustic zbp
zbp
(cm)
Parameter zb
zsp
(cm)
z at max. Ipi,
zsp
(cm)
deq(zb)
deq(zsp)
(cm)
fawf
fc
(MHz)
Dim of Aaprt
X (cm)
Y (cm)
td
PD
(sec)
prr
PRF
(Hz)
pr at max. Ipi
pr@PIImax
(MPa)
Tables for RIC5-9W at Motion Mode (M-Mode)
Other
deq at max. Ipi
deq@PIImax
(cm)
FLx (cm)
FLy (cm)
Ipa, at max. MI
IPA.3 @MImax
(W/cm)
B-Imagesector start 16,0 146,3 low 1,0 2 Low 100 M(Harm) 2,5 6,0 M(Harm) 100 Low 1 1,0 low 146,3 146,3 low 1,0 1 Low 100 M(Harm) 6,0 16,0 16,0
(cm)
0,0
0,0
0,0
B-Imagesector end
(cm)
B-Imagesector angle
(Degree)
Quality
Operating Zoom
Attenuated spatialIzpta, peak temporalaverage intensity pulse intensity Ipi integral Attenuated pulse Ipi, intensity integral Peak-rarefactional pr acoustic pressure Attenuated peakrarefactional acoustic pr, pressure -12 dB output beam Aaprt area Equivalent aperture Deq diameter zs Depth for TIS zb Depth for TIB Depth at max. attenuated pulseintensity integral z at max. Ipi,
(cm) (cm) (cm) 1,6
Control
Foc. Zones
SENS PRI
Power
(%)
Mode Type
Focal Depth
(cm)
A-89
A-90
A-1-85
(acc. to Table 101)

Operating Mode: cM-Mode

Operating Mode: cM-Mode

Index Label
Index
0,8
1,3
0,8
IEC 3,0 35 35
FDA
Units
NonScanning Aaprt>1
pr
pr.3
(MPa)
Wo
(mW)
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(mW)
Assoc.
zs
z1
(cm)
35
Acoustic zbp 1,7 5,8 1,5 0,6 0,8 150 3,9 8,0 3,5 416 3,5 8,0 0,6 1,5 5,0 5,0
zbp
(cm)
Parameter zb
zsp
(cm)
z at max. Ipi,
zsp
(cm)
deq(zb)
deq(zsp)
(cm)
fawf
fc
(MHz)
Dim of Aaprt
(cm)
(cm)
td
PD
(sec)
prr
PRF
(Hz)
pr at max. Ipi
pr@PIImax
(MPa)
Other
deq at max. Ipi
deq@PIImax
(cm)
FLx (cm)
FLy (cm)
Ipa, at max. MI
IPA.3 @MImax
(W/cm)
B-Imagesector start 16,0 20 low 1,0 1 resol 1 100 16 high 0,1 5,0 Mid Low 5,0 0,9 high 16 100 1 1 100 16 high 0,9 5,0 Low resol resol 1 1 1,0 1,0 low low 20 20 16,0 16,0
(cm)
0,0
0,0
0,0
Tables for RIC5-9W at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode)
B-Imagesector end
(cm)
B-Imagesector angle
(Degree)
B-Quality
0,9 1,1
Zoom
Foc. Zones
Control
SENS PRI
Attenuated spatialIzpta, peak temporalaverage intensity pulse intensity Ipi integral Attenuated pulse Ipi, intensity integral Peak-rarefactional pr acoustic pressure Attenuated peakrarefactional acoustic pr, pressure -12 dB output beam Aaprt area Equivalent aperture Deq diameter zs Depth for TIS zb z at max. Ipi, (cm) (cm)
(%)
1,7
Mc Tx Power
(%)
Ensemble
Flow Res
Velocity Range
(kHz)
Speed
Mc Frequency
A-1-86

(acc. to Table 101)

Transducer Model: RIC5-9W Index

MI NonScanning Scanning Aaprt1 NonScanning Aaprt>1 Units (MHz) (mW) (mW) (mW) (mW/cm) (mW/cm) (mWs/cm) (mWs/cm) (MPa) (MPa) (cm) (cm) (cm) 0,28 0,14 3,4 2,5 0,9 35 4,5 5,0 TIS TIS TIS TIB Scanning

TIB NonScanning TIC
Index Label 1,2 0,8 0,8 0,8
IEC 2,5 35 24 35
FDA
Units
pr
pr.3
(MPa)
4,5 24 35
P 2,1 2,2 0,3 4,5 0,5 1300 3,4 0,3 257 3,5 3,5 8,0 8,0 0,6 0,6 0,6 1,5 1,0 1,5 5,0 4,5 5,0
Wo
(mW)
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(mW)
Assoc.
zs
z1
(cm)
Acoustic zbp
zbp
(cm)
12,1 359
Parameter zb
zsp
(cm)
z at max. Ipi,
zsp
(cm)
deq(zb)
deq(zsp)
(cm)
179 0,28 0,14
fawf
fc
(MHz)
Dim of Aaprt
X (cm)
Y (cm)
td
PD
(sec)
prr
PRF
(Hz)
pr at max. Ipi
pr@PIImax
(MPa)
Tables for RIC5-9W at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode)
Other
deq at max. Ipi
deq@PIImax
(cm)
FLx (cm)
0,9 1,1
FLy (cm)
Ipa, at max. MI
IPA.3 @MImax
(W/cm)
0,1 0,0 1,3 100 0,2 3,3 7,0 100
Gate width 0,0 1,3 100 100 7,0 3,3
(cm)
0,1
0,2
zb Depth for TIB Depth at max. attenuated pulseintensity integral z at max. Ipi,
(cm) (cm) 2,2
2,1
Operating Gate pos
(cm)
(kHz)
Conditions Power
(%)
A-91
A-92
A-1-87
Transducer Model: RSP5-12


TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X Y PD PRF pr@PIImax Other Information Focal Length IPA.3 @MImax deq@PIImax (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm) 542 # # (cm) 0,2 11270 4,0 (cm) 6,3 # # # 1,1 # 3,3 Wo
1,3
(a)
(a)
#
Assoc. Acoustic zbp Parameter zsp deq(zsp) fc Dim of Aaprt
z1
# # #
Table for RSP5-12 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode)
# #
Tx frequency
(MHz) (cm)
7,5 1,6 4
Operating Tx focus Control Tx power Conditions Quality Box start Box end Box width B-Imagesector width Frequency Setting
high 0,0 1,6 (cm) (cm) 3,74 3,74 penet
A-1-88


TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X Y PD PRF pr@PIImax Other Information Focal Length IPA.3 @MImax deq@PIImax (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) # # # # # # (cm) # # # # # # # Wo
(a)
<1
<1
#
Assoc. Acoustic Parameter zsp deq(zsp) fc Dim of A aprt zbp
z1
# # #
# #
Table for RSP5-12 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode)
Tx frequency Tx focus Tx power Ensemble Line Density Operating Velocity Range Control Quality Conditions CFM Box start CFM Box end CFM Box witdh B Image width
(MHz) (cm)
(kHz)
(cm) (cm) (cm) (cm)
A-93
A-94
A-1-89


TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X (cm) Y (cm) PD PRF pr@PIImax Other Information Focal Length IPA.3 @MImax deq@PIImax (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # Wo
(a)
<1
<1
1,8
29
1,1
30
z1
0,9 0,3 5,0 1,0 0,4 5,9 1,0 0,4
0,3 4,5 1,7
Table for RSP5-12 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode)
Tx frequency Operating Tx focus Control Tx power Gate pos Conditions prf Sample Volume (Gate)
(MHz) (cm)
5,0 4,5 -2 (cm) (kHz) (mm) 0,9 2,2 0,7
6,0 4,5 -2 0,9 2,2 0,7
A-1-90


TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X (cm) Y (cm) PD PRF pr@PIImax Other deq@PIImax (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) Length IPA.3 @MImax FLy (cm) # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # Wo
min of [W .3(z1), I TA.3(z1)]
(a)
<1
<1
<1
# # # # # #
<1
#
z1
# # #
Table for RSP5-12 at Motion Mode (M-Mode)
# # #
Information Focal
Tx frequency Operating Tx focus Control Tx power Frequency Setting
(MHz)
A-95
A-96
A-1-91



TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
1,2
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
(a)
(a)
zs
z1
# # #
Table for RSP6-16 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode)
# #
B-Imagesector start B-Imagesector end B-Imagesector width Quality Operating Zoom Control Foc. Zones
(cm) (cm) (cm)
0,0 7,9 3,7 high 1,0 1 Low
Conditions Frequency Setting SENS PRI Power ZoomBox start ZoomBox end ZoomBox width Mode Type Focal Depth (cm) (%) (cm) (cm) (cm)
100 0,0 1,6 2,2 B(Harm) 1,6
A-1-92



TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
1,0
64
zs z1
7,4 4,9 0,4
6 1,5
B-Imagesector start B-Imagesector end B-Imagesector width B-Quality Zoom Foc. Zones Operating Frequency Setting Control SENS PRI Conditions B Tx Power CFM Box start CFM Box end CFM Box width CFM Tx power Ensemble Line Density Flow Res Velocity Range CFM Quality CFM Frequency
(cm) (cm) (cm)
0,0 7,9 3,7 low 1,0 1 norm (%) (cm) (cm) (cm) (%) 1 4,8 5,9 3,7 100 31 1 high (kHz) 9,0 norm high
Table for RSP6-16 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode)
A-97
A-98
A-1-93



TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
<1
<1
zs z1
# # # # # # #
# # #
Table for RSP6-16 at Motion Mode (M-Mode)
B-Imagesector start B-Imagesector end B-Imagesector width Quality Operating Zoom Control Foc. Zones Conditions Frequency Setting SENS PRI Power Mode Type Focal Depth
(cm) (cm) (cm)
(%)
(cm)
A-1-94



TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
1,0
1,4
<1
26 0,7
zs
z1
0,3 6,0 1,2 0,4 # # #
0,3 # #
Table for RSP6-16 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode)
0,1 3,2 1,3 100
0,1 3,2 3,3 100
A-99
A-100
A-1-95

Transducer Model: RNA5-9


TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
1,3
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
(a)
(a)
zs z1
# # #
Table for RNA5-9 at 2 D Mode (B-Mode)
# #
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
0,0 18,0 117,2 high 1,0 1 Low
100 4,2 7,8 117,2 B(Harm) 3,5
A-1-96



TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
<1
zs z1
# # #
# #
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
Table for RNA5-9 at Color Flow Mode (CFM-Mode)
(%) (cm) (cm) (Degree) (%)
(kHz)
A-101
A-102
A-1-97



TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
<1
<1
zs z1
# # # # # # #
# # #
Table for RNA5-9 at Continuous Wave Doppler (CW-Mode)
(kHz) (%)
A-1-98



TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
<1
<1
zs
z1
# # # # # # #
# # #
Table for RNA5-9 at Motion Mode (M-Mode)
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
(%)
(cm)
A-103
A-104
A-1-99



TIC
Index Label
Global Maximum Index Value IEC pra (MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X Y td PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@PIImax prr pr at max. Ipi Other Information Focal Length deq at max. Ipi (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) Ipa,a at max. MI IPA.3 @MImax (W/cm) # # # # # # (cm) # # # # # # # P min of [Pa(zs), Ita,a(zs)]
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
<1
<1
zs z1
# # # # # # #
# # #
(cm) (cm) (Degree)
Table for RNA5-9 at Color Motion Mode (Mc-Mode)
(%) (%)
(kHz)
A-1-100



TIB nonscan TIC
Index Label
[W .3(z1), ITA.3(z1)]
(a)
FDA pr.3 Wo Units
<1
1,5
<1
42 1,2
zs
z1
0,4 4,3 1,7 0,86 # # #
0,4 # #
Table for RNA5-9 at Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW-Mode)
0,8 5,6 2,2 100
A-105
A-106
GE HEALTHCARE DIREKTION KTI105991, REVISION 5
INDEX
Numerics
2D Mode Checks Functional Checks, 4-8
C
Calculation Measurements Functional Checks, 4-26 General remarks to perform, 4-26 Calibration Monitor, 6-2 Cine Functional Checks, 4-22 Color Flow Modes Functional Checks, 4-15 Compliance, 1-14 Connection External USB-Devices, 3-32 Connection Scheme Auxiliary Devices, 3-9 B/W Video Printer, 3-19 Bluetooth Printer, 3-23 Digital Color Printer, 3-22 DVD Recorder (DVR), 3-15 ECG, 3-11 Foot Switch, 3-11 Global Modem, 3-12 Line Printer, 3-21 S-VHS Video Recorder, 3-13 Connectivity Worksheet, 3-71 Contact Information, 1-15 Control Console Rotation, 5-52 Transport Lock, 6-5 Control Panel, 4-4 CPN - Main Power Module Theory, 5-49 Customer Assistance, 1-15
A,B
Acoustic Noise Output, 2-4 Activation of Options, 8-17 Adjustment DVD Recorder Settings, 3-16 Keyboard Layout, 6-7 Monitor, 6-2 Printer Settings, 3-52 Trackball, 6-6 Write Speed of DVD/CD Recorder, 4-31 Administration of Full Backup data, 4-37 Air Flow Control, 5-54 Archiving Images, 4-41 Auxiliary Devices Connection Scheme, 3-9 B/W Video Printer Connection Scheme, 3-19 BackEnd ADD2-DVI (Add-On) Card, 5-30 Board Description, 5-30 CKV - DMA-Controller/Video-Card, 5-30 CPE - Back Panel I/O-Card, 5-30 CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board, 5-31 Hard Disk Drive, 5-30 SBC - Single Board Computer, 5-30 BackEnd Processor Theory, 5-28 Backup Patient Database and Images, 4-32 Block diagram BackEnd Processor, 5-28 CKV - Video Converter Board, 5-29 CPD - Beamformer Sub-board, 5-24 CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board, 5-27 CPV + Beamformer (CPR), 5-23 FrontEnd Processor, 5-22 Top Level Architecture, 5-9 Voluson 730Expert, 5-10 Voluson 730Expert Basic, 5-4 Bluetooth Printer Connection Scheme, 3-23 Board Description BackEnd, 5-30 FrontEnd, 5-23 Boot Up, 3-34, , 4-2
D
Dangerous Procedure Warnings, 1-13 Data Flow Control Description, 5-11 Daylight Saving Time (DST), 6-9 Delete Full Backup (Presets, Config. & Appl. Settings), 4-40 DICOM Worksheet for DICOM Network Information, 3-72 Digital Black & White Printer Installation UP-D897, 3-43 Digital Color Printer Connection Scheme, 3-22 Installation UP-D21MD, 3-41 Index I
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 Installation UP-D23MD, 3-41 Disconnection External USB-Devices, 3-32 Doppler Mode Checks Functional Checks, 4-13 DVD Recorder (DVR) Connection Scheme, 3-15 DVD Recorder Settings Adjustment, 3-16 DVD+(R)W Drive Theory, 5-48
E
ECG Connection Scheme, 3-11 Functional Checks, 4-43 Theory, 5-48 Electrical Requirements, 2-2 Electrical Safety, 1-10 Electronic User Manual (EUM) Loading Procedure, 8-13 Electrostatic Discharge Warning, 1-14 EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility, 1-14 EMI Protection, 3-8 Error Messages, 7-21 External I/O Theory, 5-47 External USB-Devices Connection, 3-32 Disconnection, 3-32
F
Foot Switch Connection, 5-19 Connection Scheme, 3-11 Formatting Media, 4-30 FrontEnd Board Description, 5-23 CPK - Motherboard of the GEZ-Module, 5-25 CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board, 5-27 CPR - Beamformer Board, 5-23 CPV - Probe Connector Board, 5-23 CPZ - Cover Board, 5-25 CRS - Signal Processor Board, 5-26 CRW - CW Doppler Board, 5-25 Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Appl. Settings) Delete, 4-40 Load, 4-38 Loading Procedure, 8-10 Save, 4-36 II -
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 Functional Checks, 4-1 2D Mode, 4-8 Brakes, 4-44 Calculation Measurements, 4-26 Cine Mode, 4-22 Color Flow Modes, 4-15 Control Panel, 4-4 Doppler Modes, 4-13 ECG Checkout, 4-43 Generic Measurements, 4-23 M Mode, 4-11 Mechanical, 4-44 MO-Drive, 4-29 Monitor Display, 4-6 Peripherals, 4-43 Probes/Connector Usage, 4-27 Required Equipment, 4-1 Volume Modes, 4-17 Fuses inside Primary Power Module (CPN), 5-50 Fuses on CPE-Board for Disk Drive Module (GEM), 5-50 Fuses on Rear Panel (CPN), 5-50
G
General Cleaning, 10-9 Generic Measurements Functional Checks, 4-23 GEZ Module Main board Chassis, 5-21 Global Modem Connection Scheme, 3-12 LEDs, 5-20 Location in the Unit, 5-20
H
Hard Disk Drive, 5-30 Hardware Options, 5-19 Hazard Icons, 1-5 How to check power, 7-3 How to check status of the Diagnostic LEDs, 7-3 How to use the Auto Tester, 7-7 http //libraries.ge.com/foldersIndex.do?entity_id=15869258101&sid=101&SF=1, 3-46 Human Safety, 1-9
I
iLinq Interactive Platform, 5-56 Image Management Functional Checks, 4-28 Inrush Current, 2-2 Installation Digital Black & White Printer UP-D897, 3-43 III
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 Digital Color Printer UP-D21MD, 3-41 Digital Color Printer UP-D23MD, 3-41 Line Printer HP 990cxi, 3-39 Line Printer HP 995c, 3-39 Internal I/O Theory, 5-32 Theory ("Kontron" SBC installed), 5-33 Theory ("Tyan" SBC installed), 5-35
K
Key Caps Replacement Procedure, 8-26 Keyboard Layout Adjustment, 6-7
L
Label Locations, 1-12 Line Printer Connection Scheme, 3-21 Installation HP 990cxi, 3-39 Installation HP 995c, 3-39 List of Abbreviations, 9-2 Load Full Backup (Presets, Config. & Appl. Settings), 4-38 User Settings Only (Application Settings), 4-34 Loading Procedure Electronic User Manual (EUM), 8-13 Full Backup (Presets, Config. & Appl. Settings), 8-10 Ultrasound Application Software (UIS), 8-3 User Settings Only (Application Settings), 8-10
M
M Mode Functional Checks, 4-11 Main board Chassis GEZ Module, 5-21 Map Network Drive, 3-70 Mechanical Checks Control Console, 4-44 Mechanical Safety, 1-9 Media Formatting, 4-30 Minimum Configuration to scan, 7-10 Models Covered, 1-2 MO-Drive Functional Checks, 4-29 Theory, 5-48 Monitor Adjustment, 6-2 Calibration, 6-2 Theory, 5-46 Monitor Display IV -
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 Functional Checks, 4-6
N
Network IP Address Configuration, 3-69
O
Options Activation, 8-17 Replacement Procedure, 8-17
P
Peripherals Disk Drive Module (GEM), 5-48 Functional Checks, 4-43 Physical Dimensions, 2-4 Power Distribution, 5-49 CPN - Primary Power Supply, 5-49 Disk Drive Module (GEM), 5-50 Power Off / Shutdown, 3-36, , 4-3 Power On, 3-34, , 4-2 Power Requirements electrical, 2-2 Power Stability Requirements, 2-2 Preparing the Unit for Installation, 3-7 Printer Installation, 3-38 Printer Installation manually, 3-47 Printer Remote Control Selection, 3-59 Printer Settings Adjustment, 3-52 Probe Connector Cleaning, 10-10 Probe Holder Replacement Procedure, 8-25 Probes, 3-68 Disconnecting, 4-43 Probes/Connector Usage Functional Checks, 4-27 Product Icons, 1-6
R
Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment, 3-5 Regulatory, 6-1 Replacement Procedures Digipots and TGC Slider controls, 8-25 Key Caps (by special native language keys), 8-26 Monitor Task Lamp, 8-24 Options, 8-17 Probe Holder, 8-25 Trackball top fixation ring, 8-25 Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts, 1-13, , 8-3 V
S
Safety Considerations, 1-9 Save Full Backup (Presets, Config. & Appl. Settings), 4-36 User Settings Only (Application Settings), 4-33 Screen Captures, 7-4 Service Adjustments, 6-1 Service Platform Access/Security, 5-55 Service Page, 5-57 Service Platform (SSW) Upgrade Procedure, 8-11 Sharing patient data and images between systems within the same network, 8-20 Shutdown Procedure, 3-36, , 4-3 Software Options, 5-15 S-VHS Video Recorder Connection Scheme, 3-13 System Components, 5-3 System Configuration How to activate Screen Lock, 3-62 How to change Keyboard Layout, 3-63 How to change Language, 3-61 How to change the EUM Language, 3-61 How to change Video Norm, 3-63 How to enter Date and Time, 3-61 How to enter Hospital Name, 3-61 System History Hardware and Software Versions, 1-3 System Maintenance, 10-6 System Manufacturer, 1-15 System Voltage Settings, 3-8
T
Task Lamp Replacement Procedure, 8-24 Theory General, 5-2 Top Console Theory, 5-41 Trackball Adjustment, 6-6 Transfer of Patient Database and Images via Sonoview, 8-20 Troubleshooting DVD/CD+(R)W, 7-20 Error Messages, 7-21 MO-Drive, 7-20 Monitor, 7-16 Network, 7-20 Screen Captures, 7-4 Voltage Points, 7-3 Troubleshooting Trees Noise disturbs the Image, 7-13 VI -
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5 Printer, 7-18 System does not Power OFF/Shutdown, 7-15 System does not Power ON/Boot Up, 7-12 Trackball, 7-14 Unable to Record to VCR, 7-17
U
Ultrasound Application Software (UIS) Loading Procedure, 8-3 Unpacking the Equipment, 3-5 Upgrade Procedure Service Platform (SSW), 8-11 User Settings Only (Application Settings) Loading Procedure, 8-10
V
Video Specifications, 3-67 Voltage Settings, 3-8 Volume Modes Functional Checks, 4-17
W
Warnings and Cautions, 1-9 Weight without Monitor and Peripherals, 2-4 What is EMC?, 1-14 Worksheet for DICOM Network Information, 3-72
VII
VIII
2004 and 2012, General Electric Company.
GE Medical Systems, a General Electric Company, going to market as GE Healthcare. GE Healthcare Austria GmbH & Co OG Tiefenbach 15 A-4871 Zipf Austria www.gehealthcare.com

Manual Us

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Us

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Us

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

P R E L I M I N A R Y

(OCTOBER 3, 2012) PROV730_COVER.FM

Voluson 730Pro/ProV (BT05, BT08)

Part Number: KTI105991

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5

VOLUSON 730PRO/PROV (BT05, BT08) SERVICE MANUAL

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5

VOLUSON 730PRO/PROV (BT05, BT08) SERVICE MANUAL

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5

VOLUSON 730PRO/PROV (BT05, BT08) SERVICE MANUAL

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5

VOLUSON 730PRO/PROV (BT05, BT08) SERVICE MANUAL

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5

VOLUSON 730PRO/PROV (BT05, BT08) SERVICE MANUAL

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5

VOLUSON 730PRO/PROV (BT05, BT08) SERVICE MANUAL

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5

VOLUSON 730PRO/PROV (BT05, BT08) SERVICE MANUAL

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5

VOLUSON 730PRO/PROV (BT05, BT08) SERVICE MANUAL

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5

VOLUSON 730PRO/PROV (BT05, BT08) SERVICE MANUAL

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5

VOLUSON 730PRO/PROV (BT05, BT08) SERVICE MANUAL

DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION - FOR USA ONLY

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT - FOR USA ONLY

OMISSIONS & ERRORS

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5

VOLUSON 730PRO/PROV (BT05, BT08) SERVICE MANUAL

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5

VOLUSON 730PRO/PROV (BT05, BT08) SERVICE MANUAL

Reason for change

List of Effected Pages

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5

VOLUSON I / VOLUSON E (BT05, BT08) SERVICE MANUAL

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5

VOLUSON 730PRO/PROV SERVICE MANUAL

CHAPTER 2 Site Preparation

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5

VOLUSON 730PRO/PROV SERVICE MANUAL

CHAPTER 3 Setup Instructions

3-7 3-7 3-8 3-8 3-9 3-9 3 - 11 3 - 11 3 - 11 3 - 12 3 - 13 3 - 13 3 - 14 3 - 15 3 - 16 3 - 16 3 - 18 3 - 19 3 - 20 3 - 21 3 - 22 3 - 23 3 - 23 3 - 24 3 - 25 3 - 25 3 - 26

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5

VOLUSON 730PRO/PROV SERVICE MANUAL

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5

VOLUSON 730PRO/PROV SERVICE MANUAL

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5

VOLUSON 730PRO/PROV SERVICE MANUAL

CHAPTER 4 Functional Checks

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5

VOLUSON 730PRO/PROV SERVICE MANUAL

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5

VOLUSON 730PRO/PROV SERVICE MANUAL

CHAPTER 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5

VOLUSON 730PRO/PROV SERVICE MANUAL

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5

VOLUSON 730PRO/PROV SERVICE MANUAL

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION KTI105991, REVISION 5